Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

New Theory of Relativity for Corporate India

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis
Compliance for Related Party Transactions has been given a new dimension by the Companies Act, 2013 and the Listing Agreement. The Governance model has been turned inside out. This article examines the requirements under these two key statutes and also highlights the other compliances which companies need to bear in mind for related party transactions. Recent relaxations under both these Laws have also been covered.

Introduction
One of the definitions of relativity is the quality or state of being relative. Albert Einstein has made relativity famous by his Theory of Relativity (E= mc2)which is now a fundamental principle of Physics.

However, Corporate India is now grappling with a new Theory of Relativity – the one propounded by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (via the Companies Act, 2013)and the SEBI (via the Listing Agreement), i.e., the Related Party conundrum!

A host of new regulations have revolutionised the concept of related party transactions. While the intention of these new regulations is very clear, i.e., safeguarding minority interest, some of the original provisions were rather harsh and may have lead to stifling the normal business operations. Accordingly, the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 were diluted to some extent. Recently (on 15th September, 2014), SEBI also amended the original provisions of Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement. Let us, through this Article, look at these new provisions under the Companies Act as well as the Listing Agreement.

New Theory
We may rephrase Einstein’s famous theory as follows for Corporate India’s related party transactions:

R = S.2(76) + S.188 + Cl. 49 + S.40A(2)(a) + AS 18

Where the Variables of this Equation are:

R = Related Party Transactions;

Section 2(76) and S.188 of the Companies Act, 2013, both of which are effective from 1st April, 2014 for all companies;

Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement, which is effective from 1st October, 2014 for listed companies;

Section 40A(2)(a) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 and

AS 18 = Accounting Standard 18 issued by the ICAI

Let us look at these variables in detail.

Who is a Related Party?

The compliances for related party transactions (“RPTs”) are to be done under two laws – section 188 of the Companies Act, 2013 and Cl. 49 of the Listing Agreement. In effect, for listed companies, the higher (stricter) of the two laws would apply. The definition of a related party in relation to a listed company u/s. 2(76) of the Companies Act, 2013 and Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement is given in Table-1.

* U nder the Companies Act, a relative for an individual means his HUF, spouse, parents, children, siblings and spouses of children. Stepfather, step-mother, step-son, step-brother and step-sister are also relatives. However, a stepdaughter is not a relative. Further, unlike the earlier list u/s. 6 of the Companies Act, 1956, several relatives have been omitted from the definition, these include, grandparents, grand children, spouse of grand children, spouses of siblings.

Under the earlier provisions of Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement (prior to the amendment carried out on 15th September, 2014), several other entities were considered to be a related party. However, all those entities have now been replaced with one single statement – Related Parties under an Accounting Standard. A person who is not a related party under the Companies Act but is covered under an Accounting Standard would now be so even under Clause 49. Thus, listed companies have to consider the definition under the Companies Act and also the definition under the applicable Accounting Standards.

What is a RPT?
Now that we have considered who is a related party, let us also understand what constitutes a Related Party Transaction (RPT) for a listed company. Clause 49 defines the same in a very wide manner to mean a transfer of resources, services or obligations between a company and a related party, regardless of whether a price is charged. Hence, even a free service would be a related party transaction. Further, a RPT includes a single transaction or a group of transactions in a contract.

Section 188 on the other hand gives a specified list of contracts or arrangements with a related party which constitute a related party transaction. Hence, the scope of section 188 is much narrower and would only apply to the transactions specified therein. While what constitutes a contract is easy to understand, what constitutes an arrangement could be a moot point? Further, the Rules treat certain RPTs as prescribed RPTs for which a special resolution of the shareholders is required. Both these lists are given in Table-2.

Turnover. Using a consolidated turnover is a good move for Holding Companies which have little or no operations of their own.

What compliances are required?
The compliances required for RPTs under both the laws are illustrated below.

(A) If the RPT is in the Ordinary Course of Business and on an arms’ length pricing, the compliances are given in Table-3.

ALP = Arms’ Length Pricing basis, i.e., an RPT conducted as if it were between unrelated parties so that there is no conflict of interest. To demonstrate that the RPT is on an ALP, the Company may consider comparable uncontrolled prices or such other available illustrations which would demonstrate that the transaction has been carried out on an arms’ length price. The concept of ALP is relevant only qua the Companies Act since Cl. 49 makes no distinction between an RPT at ALP or otherwise.

* What is an ordinary course of business has not been defined and would have to be ascertained on a case-by-case basis. The Memorandum of Association, Financial Statements, Board Minutes, history of past transactions, etc., could be some of the indicators of what is ordinary for a company. For instance, purchase of shares of the promoter’s private company would not be in the ordinary course of business even though it may be on an arms’ length pricing.

* The twin conditions or ALP and ordinary course of business need to be satisfied for a company to get out of the provisions of section 188(1) of the Act. Compliance with any one is not enough.

(B) If the RPT is not in the Ordinary Course of Business and/or not on an arms’ length pricing, the compliances are given in Table-4.


The  rules  earlier  prescribed  that  a  company  having  a paid-up capital of rs. 10 crore or more shall not enter into any RPT which is not on an ALP and not in the ordinary course of business without a special resolution. thus, for such companies the requirement of checking whether the RPT was a prescribed RPT was not relevant. However, by virtue of an amendment dated 14th august 2014, the MCA has removed this clause. Hence, as the law stands currently, the threshold requirement of Rs.10 crore of capital stands removed to determine whether an RPT requires a special resolution.

Thus,  the  standards  prescribed  under  Clause  49  are more stringent than those u/s. 188. While section188 provides a gateway in the form of ordinary course of business which is at an arms’ length price, there is no such gateway under Clause 49.

How is the Voting for RPTS to be carried out?

We have seen that shareholders’ approval is required either  under  the  Companies  act  or  under  the  listing agreement  or  both.  This  gives  rise  to  several  issues, some of which are enumerated below.

All for One and One for All?

Section188 provides that no member of the company shall vote on any special resolution, to approve any RPT which may be entered into by the company, if such member is a related party.

A question which arises is that in a transaction between two related parties would all other related parties also be disentitled from voting or would only the ones affected by the transaction be disentitled? for instance, would a director who is a shareholder be disentitled merely because he is a director even though he has no special interest in a transaction? Thus, does the Three Musketeers’ slogan apply – all related parties would be clubbed together even if they have no interest in the transaction?

The MCA issued a clarification in this respect that related party has to be construed with reference to/in the context of the contract or arrangement for which the special resolution  is  being  passed.  this  is  a  very  important clarification that was eagerly awaited. The impact of the same may be illustrated as follows:

Illustration 1
a holding company is entering into a transaction with its substantially owned subsidiary, which is now treated as a related party. the managing director and other directors of the holding company are also treated as related parties u/s. 2(76) of the act. however, if they are shareholders they can vote on this transaction since they are not related parties in the context of the contract being considered.

Illustration 2
A company proposes to enter into a contract with the MD’s wife. here, the md would have to abstain from voting as a shareholder since he is a related party in the context of the contract being considered. however, other directors of the holding company can vote on this transaction if they are shareholders.

To add more spice to the flavour, SEBI has come out with an interesting amendment. It states that for RPTs all entities falling under the definition of related parties shall abstain from voting, irrespective of whether the entity is a party to the   particular transaction or not. this sets at naught the exemption given by the mCa! a classic case of “What the Left Hand Giveth, the Right Hand Taketh  Away.”  thus,  under  the  illustration-1  explained above, the directors of the holding company would have to abstain from voting even though they are not related to the transaction in question. A very strange and harsh requirement.

Father-Son Transactions

In the case of an RPT with a wholly owned subsidiary, the MCA has clarified that special resolution passed by the holding company would suffice under the Act for entering into transactions between the wholly owned subsidiary and the holding company.

Taking a cue from the MCA, the SEBI has also issued a relaxation. neither prior approval of the audit Committee nor shareholders’ special resolution is required for a transaction between a holding company and its wholly owned subsidiary whose accounts are consolidated with such holding company and placed before the shareholders at the general meeting for approval. however, this exemption is only for a 100% subsidiary.

Past Life Benefit?
The MCA has also clarified that related party contracts entered into by companies, after making necessary compliances u/s. 297 of the Companies act, 1956, which contracts came into effect before the commencement of section 188 of the Act, will not require fresh approval u/s. 188 of the act till the expiry of the term of original contract. However, if a modification in such contract is made on or after 1st April 2014, then the requirements u/s. 188 will have to be complied with.

Blanket Exemption?
Further, section 188 does not apply to transactions arising out of compromises, amalgamations, arrangements, etc., dealt with under specific provisions of the Companies Act, 1956 or Companies act, 2013. Clause 49 does not carry a similar exemption.

Before or After?
Should the consent of the Board be obtained prior to     or after entering into the RPT? For prescribed RPTs, shareholders’ resolution is required to be passed prior  to the transaction but in other cases, no such express provision is made. Further, the section 188 provides that in case of a contract or arrangement entered into by a director or any employee without approval of the Board/Company, such contract may be ratified by post-facto consent within 3 months.

The   provisions   of   Clause   49   are   applicable   to   all prospective RPTs entered into after 1st October 2014. All existing material related party contracts or arrangements as on the date of this circular which are likely to continue beyond 31st march, 2015 must be placed for approval of the shareholders in the first General Meeting subsequent to 1st october, 2014. However, a company may choose to get such contracts approved by the shareholders even before 1st october, 2014. In case of a listed company, the shareholders’ resolution would also require an e-voting facility.   The   amended   Clause   49   permits   the  audit Committee to grant an omnibus approval for RPTs subject to certain conditions.

Consequences     of Non-Compliance The Act provides that any RPT which is not in compliance with section 188 may be  voidable  at  the  option  of  the Board.  The  director  or the employee concerned who authorised such contract or arrangement with the related party will be liable to indemnify the company for any loss incurred by it. Further, the company can proceed against such  director or employee for recovery of any loss it sustains due to such RPT.

The   punishment   for   non-compliance   of   section   188 on a director/employee in case of a listed company is imprisonment for a term of up to 1 year and/or fine of Rs. 25,000 to rs. 5 lakh. in case of an unlisted company the punishment is a fine of Rs. 25,000 to Rs. 5 lakh. Further, a person who has been convicted of an offence u/s.   188 at any time during the last 5 years is not eligible for appointment as a director of a company. the  punishment  for  non-compliance  with  the  listing Agreement has been laid down under the Securities Contract (regulation) act, 1956 and can extend up to a term of a maximum of 10 years and/or a fine of up to a maximum of Rs. 25 crore.

Reporting and Accounting requirements
Disclosures about RPTs are to be given under 3 Regulations – Section 188, Clause 49 and AS 18:

Section 188
of the Companies Act

clause 49 of
the listing agreement

Accounting
Standard 18 on Related

Party disclosures

Every
RPT (other than one at ALP and in the ordinary course of business) must be
referred to in the Board of Directors’ Report along with justifications.

Details
of all materials RPTs shall be disclosed quarterly along with the compliance
report on corporate governance

Accounting
for transactions with those related parties as defined in AS 18 are to be
given in the Financial Statements.

The Explanatory Statement to the Notice
calling a General Meeting (if any)
for passing a Special Resolution must mention the prescribed particulars.

The
Related Party Policy should be disclosed on the company’s website and also in
its Annual Report. The url to the web page should also be provided in the
Annual Report.

The
manner and nature of accounting is also given under AS 18.

A
Register of Contracts or Arrangements in which Directors are interested must
be maintained in the prescribed form.

The  Standard  on  Auditing  (SA)  550  Revised-  related Parties lays down the auditor’s responsibilities with respect to related party relationships and transactions while auditing financial statements.

Specified Domestic Transactions
How can there be any major development in india without the income-tax act having its share of the pie? the last piece of this jigsaw puzzle is s. 40a(2)(a)of the income-tax act which has introduced the concept of Specified Domestic Transactions. Any payments made by an assessee to related parties as specified under the income-tax act which are excessive or unreasonable may be disallowed to the extent of such excess. Further, certain related party transactions need to comply with the prescribed documentation, reporting and audit requirements in a manner similar to international transactions under the Transfer Pricing Regime. A  recent  delhi  tribunal  decision  in  the  case  of  Jai Surgicals Ltd vs. ACIT, reported at 534(2014) 46-A, BCAJ has held that payments made to a related party without obtaining approval under the erstwhile section 297 of the Companies act, 1956 cannot be treated as an offence or being prohibited by law. hence, such payment would not be disallowed u/s. 37(1) of the income-tax act.

Conclusion
SEBI has clearly thrown down the gauntlet to listed companies to carry out related party transactions both in letter and in spirit of the law. A plethora of regulations would force companies to have a relook at such transactions and ensure better minority protection. However, while we welcome better governance, let us not lose sight of the difference  between  governance  and  regulation.  these regulations  should  not  end  up  leading  to  more  law, but no order!!

IS PRIVACY SACRED?

fiogf49gjkf0d
“Gentlemen do not read other gentlemen’s mail” –
this sentence of the then Secretary of State of US, Henry Stimson
(1929-1933), is the most famous sentence uttered about codes and
ciphers.

Secretary Stimson disbanded the “Black Chamber” which
was founded in 1919 following World War I. The mission of this Chamber
was to break into the communication of other nations, with the
overarching objective of breaking into diplomatic communication.

Circa
2013. Edward Snowden, a US citizen, who worked as a National Security
Agency (NSA) contractor through Booz Allen Hamilton, leaked the details
of top-secret U.S. and British government mass surveillance programmes,
including the interception of US and European telephone metadata and the
PRISM and Tempora Internet surveillance programmes. With his US
passport being revoked, he travelled from Hong Kong to Russia, where he
was given asylum.

It’s been a year since his exile in Moscow and
he continues to be an enigma for many people across the world. In fact,
the celebrated Hollywood director, Oliver Stone, is working on a film
about Snowden.

There are many others who believe in individual privacy.


Aaron Swartz was a computer programmer, writer, political organiser and
Internet activist. In January, 2011, Swartz was arrested by police on
state breaking-andentering charges, after downloading academic journal
articles from JSTOR . Charged with violations of the Computer Fraud and
Abuse Act, Aaron was found dead on 11th January, 2013 in his Brooklyn
apartment, where he had hanged himself. He was quoted as having said,
“there is no justice in following unjust laws.”

• Bradley
Manning, a US Army soldier, was arrested in May 2010 in Iraq on
suspicion of having passed classified material to the website,
WikiLeaks, which was the largest set of restricted documents ever leaked
to the public. He has been recently sentenced to 35 years in prison.
Manning has famously said, “I want people to see the truth, because
without information, you cannot make informed decisions as a public.”


Julian Assange is an Australian editor, activist, publisher and
journalist. He is known as the editor-in-chief and founder of WikiLeaks,
which publishes secret information, news leaks and classified media
from anonymous news sources and whistleblowers. Since November 2010,
subject to a European arrest warrant in response to a Swedish police
request for questioning in relation to a sexual assault investigation.

In
June 2012, following the final dismissal by the Supreme Court of the
United Kingdom, Assange failed to surrender to his bail and sought
refuge in the Ecuadorian embassy in London, where he has since been
granted diplomatic asylum. Assange has made a telling statement. “I give
private information on corporations to you for free and I’m a villain.
Zuckerberg gives your private information to corporations for money and
he’s Man of the Year.”

This new breed of “hacktivist” (hackers
who are activists) fundamentally believe that surveillance means tyranny
and they revolt against such tyranny. The rise of these hacktivists
across the world has raised an important question on data privacy —
should governments be allowed to snoop on all private data?

As
recent disclosures by Snowden have revealed, every email and
communication was being monitored and it did not spare even heads of
State.

In fact, the Brazilian President, Dilma Rousseff,
launched a blistering attack on the US in a speech at the UN general
assembly on 24th September, 2013.

She protested against the
indiscriminate interception of a private citizen by the US, stating that
it is a breach of international law. In a telling comment, she said:

“A
sovereign nation can never establish itself to the detriment of another
sovereign nation. The right to safety of citizens of one country can
never be guaranteed by violating fundamental human rights of citizens of
another country.”

There has been a chorus of protests from the
European heads of State protesting spying on emails and communication.
Finland’s Prime Minister, Jyrki Katainen has said, “According to our
fundamental rights, all the citizens, including politicians, have
similar rights and illegal monitoring of cellphones isn’t acceptable.”

Governments
justify surveillance of data based on their need for intelligence
gathering, data mining and prevention of security threats. Hacktivists
believe that personal privacy is a fundamental right.

Governments
argue that collecting haystacks of data is essential to look for
potential security and other threats to the State. Hacktivists argue
that the records of all intimate moments of individuals are captured by
the Governments from private communication network and sites, without
specific authorisation and need and hence, it is a violation of the
citizen’s rights. Security agencies seize digital material from
citizens, who store it on their computers or send it to their
acquaintances by emails or social networking sites. These agencies could
not have possibly entered their houses and walked off with diaries and
other physical material, without proper authorisation. If such stuff
cannot be captured from the analogue or physical world, how is it right
that it is captured from the digital world? Such broad information
capture and interception of communication is justified on the grounds of
“national security.” But, as revealed by Snowden, it is done routinely
without any suspicion, warrant or probable cause. Hacktivists argue that
this is violation of human rights and such private and intimate
information should not be in the government database.

So, is privacy sacred?
The debate has just begun…

levitra

“Fraud” Implications under Companies Act 2013

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction
Deceiving any person by fraudulent or dishonest inducement to deliver any property amounts to offence of cheating punishable u/s. 415 to 424 of the Indian Penal Code. Apart from the IPC other laws dealing with taxation and commercial activities also deal with fraudulent acts and their consequences.

Section 447 of the Companies Act, 2013 prescribes a separate punishment for fraud, in relation to affairs of any company which is, imprisonment for a term which shall not be less than six months but which may extend to 10 years and shall also be liable to fine which shall not be less than the amount involved in the fraud but which may extend to three times the amount involved in fraud. The explanation to section 447 defines ‘fraud’ as under:

“Explanation.- For the purposes of this section-

(i) “fraud” in relation to affairs of a company or any body corporate, includes any act, omission, concealment of any fact or abuse of position committed by any person or any other person with the connivance in any manner, with intent to deceive, to gain undue advantage from, or to injure the interests of, the company or its shareholders or its creditors or any other person, whether or not there is any wrongful gain or wrongful loss;

(ii) “wrongful gain” means the gain by unlawful means of property to which the person gaining is not legally entitled.

(iii) “wrongful loss” means the loss by unlawful means of property to which the person losing is legally entitled.”

It is clear from the above provisions that any act or omission, concealment of any fact or abuse of position committed by any person with intent to deceive, to gain undue advantage from or injure the interest of any company or its shareholders or its creditors or any other person, is guilty of fraud. Various provisions of the Companies Act, 2013, list out different acts, omissions or other conduct which shall amount to fraud punishable u/s. 447 of the Act and the same are as under:

U/s. 212(6) all the above offences are cognisable offences and no person accused of any offence under above sections can be released on bail without giving opportunity to be heard to the Public Prosecutor.

The Companies Act 2013, provides for establishment of Special Courts to try the offences under the Act and pending such establishment the offences are to be tried by a Court of Session exercising jurisdiction over the area (section 440 of the Companies Act, 2013).

Serious Fraud Investigation Office
The Act also provides for establishment of Serious Fraud Investigation Office (SFIO) and till it is established u/s. 211(1), the present SFIO established under administrative orders, referred to in the Proviso to section 211(1) shall be deemed to be SFIO for the purpose of section 211. The Central Government can assign investigation into affairs of any company to SFIO and if there is any offence under investigation by SFIO no other investigation authority including the State Police, can continue or commence investigation under the Companies Act, 2013. Under the provision of the new law the SFIO has been given a statutory status and powers of investigation under the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 have been vested in SFIO. S/s. (17) of section 212 makes a specific provision for sharing of any information or documents available with any other investigating authority or income-tax authorities with SFIO and likewise SFIO can share information or documents available with it with any other investigating authority or income-tax authorities.

It is seen from the definition of fraud contained in the explanation to section 447 that a person will be guilty of offence of fraud under the Act if committed with intent to deceive or gain undue advantage from or injure the interests of –

• the company;
• its shareholders;
• its creditors; or
• any other person

Since offence of fraud under the Companies Act, 2013 is in relation to affairs of a company, fraudulent acts committed by “any other person” amount to fraud under the Act if such acts are in relation to the affairs of the company.

Fraud as a civil wrong
Fraud is defined in the Indian Contract Act, 1872. Section 14 of the Contract Act defines free consent inter alia as consent not caused by fraud as defined in section 17 of the Contract Act. Section 17 provides that:

“17. “Fraud” means and includes any of the following acts committed by a party to a contract, or with his connivance, or by his agent, with intent to deceive another party thereto or his agent, or to induce him to enter into the contract:-

(1) the suggestion, as a fact, of that which is not true, by one who does not believe it to be true;
(2) the concealment of a fact by one having knowledge or belief of the fact;
(3) a promise made without any intention of performing it;
(4) any other fact fitted to deceive;
(5) any such actor omission as the law specially declares to be fraudulent.

Explanation.- Mere silence as to facts likely to affect the willingness of a person to enter into a contract is not fraud, unless the circumstances of the case are such that, regard being had to them, it is the duty of the person keeping silence to speak, or unless his silence is, in itself, equivalent to speech.”

Section 19 further provides that when consent to an agreement is caused by coercion, fraud or misrepresentation, the agreement is avoidable at the option of the party whose consent was so caused. The Indian Contract Act therefore provides that a victim of fraud can avoid the agreement entered into acting on fraudulent acts but there are no provisions making fraud an offence punishable with imprisonment or fine.

CHEATING IS CRIME UDNER IPC:
The Indian Penal Code, 1860 is the law of crimes applicable in India and section 415 of the said Code defines the offence of cheating, as under:

“415. Cheating.- Whoever, by deceiving any person, fraudulently or dishonestly induces the person so deceived to deliver any property to any person, or to consent that any person shall retain any property, or intentionally induces the person so deceived to do or omit to do anything which he would not do if he were not so deceived, and which act or omission causes or is likely to cause damage or harm to that person in body, mind, reputation or property, is said to “cheat”.

Explanation.- A dishonest concealment of facts is a deception within the meaning of this section.”

Fraud is not an offence under the law of crimes.

Offence of cheating under the IPC requires:
“(1) deception of any person; (2)(a) fraudulently or dishonestly inducing that person; (i) to deliver any property to any person; or (ii) to consent that any person shall retain any property; or (b) intentionally inducing that person to do or omit to do anything which he would not do or do or omit if he were not so deceived, and which act or omission causes or is likely to cause damage or harm to that person in body, mind, reputation or property (Hridaya Ranjan Prasad Verma vs. State of Bihar AIR 2000 SC 2341: (2000) 4 SCC 168: 2000 SCC (Cri) 786: 2000 Cr LJ 298).”

Fraud is a deception deliberately practiced in order to secure unfair or unlawful gain and is a civil wrong. fraud in criminal form is cheating or theft by false pretence, intentional deception of victim by  false  representation or pretense. it needs to be noted that abuse of position with intent to deceive or gain undue advantage does not amount to cheating u/s. 415 iPC. if one compares the words of section 447 of the Companies act, 2013 with the provisions in section 17 of the Contract act and section 415 of iPC, it is clear that offence of fraud under   the Companies act is based on the Contract act, which treats fraud as a civil wrong. it is therefore possible that a person guilty of fraud under the Company Law may not necessarily be guilty of cheating under the indian Penal Code. new provisions contained the Companies act, 2013 defining fraud and establishing the Serious Fraud Investigation Office conferring powers of investigation under the Code of Criminal Procedure are intended to ensure that the directors and other persons managing the affairs of a Company act honestly and diligently to protect the interest of the company they represent and the interests of shareholders and creditors of the Company. any act or omission or concealment or abuse of position to gain advantage for themselves or other persons, on the part of persons managing the company will amount to a fraud punishable u/s. 447. it is an accepted fact that there are successful businessmen in the corporate world who possess positive qualities and survive and prosper by doing business honestly in accordance with the rules and regulations and do not derive any benefits for themselves or others except those which are legitimately due to them. But there are many who achieve success and appear to be playing according to rules but are experts in adopting various tactics to deceive and gain undue advantage for themselves and others. it is for dealing with such unscrupulous persons that the law has been amended and the new provisions are intended to ensure compliance and observance of principles of corporate governance by all companies.

Fraud Under The Companies act, 2013 and English law
new provisions in the Companies act, 2013, are comparable to the definition of fraud under English law. In Eng- land, the provisions contained in the theft act, 1968 were replaced by the fraud act, 2006 which provides that any person by making a false representation or failing to disclose information or by abuse of his position makes any gain for himself or anyone else or inflicting a loss on another shall be guilty of fraud. Provisions in english law are more comprehensive defining false representations, concealment or non-disclosure of information and abuse of position. the other major difference between section 447  of the Companies act 2013 and the fraud act, 2006 in england is that the english law is criminal law applicable to any victim of fraud unlike indian law which restrict the law to the victims who are companies or their shareholders or creditors or other persons like investors who are victims of fraudulent acts. Considering the wide ramifications of frauds in the capital market, insurance & banking sector, non-banking entities like chit funds, ponzi schemes for marketing goods and other money circulation schemes, there is a need to amend our criminal law on the lines of the fraud act, 2006 enacted in england. in other words the provisions relating to fraud in the Com- panies act, 2013 need to be converted into general law having universal application like the indian Penal Code.

Widening The Ambit of Fraud
One other significant provision in the definition of fraud is treatment of abuse of position with intent to gain undue advantage from any person as fraud. such a provision in effect amounts to providing punishment for bribery and corruption in the private sector. to illustrate, if a Purchase Officer of a company takes a kickback from a supplier of raw-material to the company, or a director sells his personal property to the Company at inflated price, such persons will be guilty of abusing their position as Purchase Officer or Director for undue advantage for themselves. The general law of Prevention of Corruption act, 1988, is applicable to Public Servants as defined in the said Act which is not applicable to Directors and Officers of Companies in the private sector because they are not public servants. now with enactment of section 447 in the Companies Act, 2013, Directors and Officers of private sector companies abusing their position for personal gain or to give advantage to any other person can be prosecuted and punished for fraud.

The efficacy of the new provisions creating offence of fraud  ultimately  depends  on  establishment  of  special Courts as contemplated under chapter XXViii of the new act for the purpose of trial of offence under the Companies act, 2013, and expeditious trial and punishment of persons guilty of fraud. speedy trial of fraudsters is the key for improved levels of protection of interests of investors and other stakeholders of corporates, as well as observance of principles of corporate governance by the corporates.

Considering the wide spread incidence of frauds in all sectors of the economy there is a need to examine whether indian Penal Code needs to be amended on the lines of the fraud act, 2006 enacted in england.

Fraud and the Auditor
In terms of section 143(12), an obligation has been cast on the auditor of a company to report to the Central government of fraud which has been committed, or is being committed against the company by officers or employees of the company. the manner of reporting has been prescribed in the rule 13, of the Companies (audit and auditors ) rules 2014 .

The responsibility cast on the auditor, is onerous. To what extent auditors are able to discharge this onus remains to be seen.

Conclusion
the  enactment  of  section  447  in  the  Companies  act 2013, is an indicator of the thinking of the authorities. economic frauds have increased a great deal of the recent past. on account of a lacuna in the law and the lengthy legal process, persons committing such frauds have been able to avoid punishment. one hopes that the provisions in the Companies act 2013, will help to bring to book such fraudsters.

Corporate Social Responsibility – Companies Act, 2013:

fiogf49gjkf0d

A Paradigm Shift in Corporate Moral Responsibility (or Inner Transformation for Corporates)

Since the time provisions relating to Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) have been announced, it is the most heated topics under discussion in the corporate world. It is, however not a totally new concept in India as the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) had ordered 100 largest companies listed on BSE and NSE to disclose their CSR activities and the amount spent on CSR. It is also to be noted that in parliament also, CSR was one of the most debated issues. The reasons for this may be political, but the fact that the issue caught the attention of our elected members indicates its significance.

Despite the problems that will be discussed in the following paragraphs the, initiative taken by the government is to be appreciated and we hope that the proper implementation of the same benefits the public at large. As the name suggests, CSR is a corporate’s responsibility and initiative towards upliftment of society and social welfare. In India, we look to the government and public authorities when it comes to spending towards social welfare. Internationally it is an accepted practice, but India is the first country to introduce statutory provisions with respect to CSR.

The Ministry of Corporate Affairs through the Companies Act 2013 (‘the Act’) has prescribed the provisions of CSR. Section 135 of the Act prescribes the basic provisions for the applicability and other requirements. CSR Rules 2014 contain the procedural part. Schedule VII to the Act prescribes list of activities on which amount can be spent to comply with the provisions of CSR. :

• Effective date

On 27th February 2014, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) has notified section 135, Schedule VII of the Act and Companies (Corporate Social Responsibility Policy) Rules, 2014 (‘Rules’). As per the notification, CSR provisions will be effective from 1st April 2014.

• Applicability

Every company including its holding or subsidiary, and a foreign company having branch/project office in India, which fulfills any of the following criteria in any of the financial years will have to comply with the provisions of CSR.

Further, every company which does not meet the criteria for three consecutive financial years is not required to (a) constitute a CSR Committee and (b) comply with the CSR provisions till such time it meets the below criteria. Criteria are as under:

1. Net worth of Rs. 500 crore or more, or
2. Turnover of Rs. 1,000 crore or more, or
3. Net profit of Rs. 5 crore or more

‘Net profit’ is defined in the CSR Rules as tabulated below

B – For a Foreign company

‘Net profit’ for a foreign company means the net profit as per profit and loss account prepared in terms of Clause (a) of s/s. (1) of section 381 read with section 198 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Issues which may have to be clarified by MCA

• For the purpose of deciding the applicability of CSR provision, the net profit after tax would be considered. Net profit as per financials would normally be understood as profit after tax.

• Since only profit of overseas branch is mentioned, in our view, loss of overseas branch will not be added for determining net profit criteria.

• According to Section 135, the criteria for applicability of CSR are to be applied to each company. However, as per CSR Rules, it could be interpreted that if CSR is applicable to parent company then it would automatically apply to its subsidiary or vice versa even though those entities do not meet the criteria.

• For reducing the dividend received from Indian companies from Net profit, practical difficulty will arise in determining whether such companies are complying with the provisions of section 135 or not.

• CSR Contribution

Company covered under the CSR provisions will have to spend, in every financial year, at least 2% of ‘average net profits’ of last 3 financial years on CSR activities. In the event such a company fails to spend such amounts in pursuance to its CSR Policy, the Board is required to provide reasons for not spending the specified amounts in the Board’s annual report. The ‘average net profit’ shall be calculated in accordance with section 198 [i.e., calculation of net profit prescribed for the purpose of determining the maximum managerial remuneration]

Issue which may have to be clarified by MCA

Since ‘average net profit’ is to be computed as per section 198, the definition of ‘net profit’ as given in the CSR rules will not apply i.e., profit of overseas branch and dividend from other companies in India complying with CSR provisions will not be reduced for calculation of ‘average net profit’.

• Schedule VII of the Companies Act, 2013

CSR policy relates to activities to be undertaken by the Company as specified in Schedule VII to the Act and the expenditure thereon, excluding activities undertaken in pursuance of normal course of business of the Company. Following CSR activities are specified in Schedule VII.

1. Eradicating hunger, poverty and malnutrition, promoting preventive health care and sanitation and making available safe drinking water;

2. Promotion of education, including special education and employment enhancing vocational skills especially among children, women, elderly, and the differently abled and livelihood enhancement projects;

3. Promoting gender equality, empowering women, setting up homes and hostels for women and orphans; setting up old age homes, day care centres and such other facilities for senior citizens and measures for reducing inequalities faced by socially and economically backward groups;

4. Ensuring environmental sustainability, ecological balance, protection of flora and fauna, animal welfare, agroforestry, conservation of natural resources & maintaining quality of soil, air & water;

5. Protection of national heritage, art and culture including restoration of buildings and sites of historical importance and works of art; setting up public libraries; promotion and development of traditional arts and handicrafts;

6. Measures for the benefit of armed forces veterans, war widows and their dependents;

7. Training to promote sports [rural, nationally recognised sports, Paralympic & Olympic sports];

8. Contribution to the Prime Minister’s National Relief Fund or any other fund set up by the Central Government for socio-economic development and relief and welfare of the Schedule Castes, the Schedule Tribes, other backward classes, minorities and women;

9. Contribution or funds provided to technology incubators located within academic institutions which are approved by the Central Government;

10. Rural development projects.

• CSR Committee and the Board of Directors

1. The companies shall constitute a CSR Committee consisting of 3 or more directors including at least 1 independent director. However, unlisted public company or a private company or foreign company shall have its CSR Committee without independent director. A private company having only two directors on its Board shall constitute its CSR Committee with two such directors.

2. The key role of the CSR Committee is to formulate and recommend CSR policy to the Board of Directors, recommend the amount of expenditure to be incurred on the CSR and monitor the Corporate Social Responsibility Policy of the company.

3.    The Board of Directors shall approve the CSR policy after considering recommendations from CSR Committee and disclose contents in Directors Report forming part of the annual report and also place it on the company’s website. Further, the Board shall ensure that the activities as are included in CSR Policy of the company are under- taken by the company.

4.    The Company shall give preference to the local area and areas around it where it operates for spending the amount earmarked for CSR.

5.    The format for the annual report on CSR activi- ties to be included in the Board’s report is also given. This has to be certified by the Director and Chairman of CSR Committee. In case of foreign company, the authorised representative resident in India shall also certify.

•    Other key points as per the CSR Rules

1.    CSR expenditure includes all expenditure including contribution to corpus, or on projects or programs relating to CSR activities approved by the Board on the recommendation of its CSR Committee, but does not include any expenditure on an item not in conformity with Schedule VII of the Act.

2.    A company may carry out CSR activities, through registered trust or society or a company estab- lished by the company or its holding or subsidiary or associate company. The following 2 CONditions are prescribed

a.    If trust, society, or company is not established by the company, etc., it shall have an established track record of 3 years in undertaking CSR activities.

b.    Company has specified the project or programmes to be undertaken through these entities, the mo- dalities of utilisation of funds on such projects and programmes and the monitoring and reporting mechanism.

3.    A company may also collaborate with other companies for undertaking CSR activities in such a manner that the CSR Committees of respective companies are in a position to report separately on such activities.

4.    The CSR expenditure has to be only on projects/ programmes undertaken in India only.

5.    CSR projects or programmes that benefit only employees of the company or their families is not considered as CSR activities.

6.    Companies may build CSR capacities of their own personnel as well as those of their Implementing agencies through Institutions with established track records of at least 3 financial years but such expenditure shall not exceed five percent of total CSR expenditure of the company in one financial year.

7.    Contribution to any political parties directly or indirectly is not considered as CSR activity.

8.    The CSR policy of the company shall specify that the surplus arising out of the CSR activities shall not form part of the business profit of the com- pany.

•    Substantial changes compared to draft rules:

Significant changes in final rules/schedule has been made as compared to the draft CSR rules and Schedule VII. Notably amongst them are as under:

(i)    removal of 3 year block period concept,

(ii)    hitherto programs integrating business models with social and environmental priorities and processes in order to create shared value was covered,

(iii)    restricting expenses on personnel engaged in CSR to not more than 5% of CSR spend,

(iv)    removing contribution to fund set up by State Government for socio economic development and relief and welfare of the SC/ST/BC, minorities and women,

(v)    restricting the health care initiative to prevention

(vi)    expanding the applicability of Section 135 to Foreign Companies having branch/project office in India (though section 135 only refers to Companies (which as per definition will include companies incorporated in India only),

(vii)    removing the enabling clause in Schedule VII for notifying any other activities as part of CSR and substituting business social projects with rural social project.

•    Conclusion

There is no clarity on tax treatment of amount spent on CSR. In the draft CSR rules it was specified that tax treatment will be in accordance with the Income Tax Act as may be notified by CBDT. However in the Rules notified, this para is removed. Clarity is also required in respect of accounting treatment for the unspent amount on CSR especially in view of expert advisory  opinion  issued  by  ICAI  in  June  2013  which opined  that  provision  may  not  be  required  where there is no present obligation.

Key challenges for corporates would be where they are already spending money on the general welfare of the employees per se like housing, education, medical facilities etc. and now they will also have to spend on CSR as spending on employee welfare is not covered. So for such corporates this will be an additional financial outflow. To conclude, in India CSR would be successful only if it is implemented   in its true spirit. It should be noted that there are  no penal consequences for not spending on CSR in a particular year, however there is an indirect pressure on corporates to spend on CSR. We hope that CSR results in overall development of the society and general public at large and CSR becomes the game changer in terms of transforming India from  a developing country to a developed nation.

ACCEPTANCE OF DEPOSITS BY COMPANIES

fiogf49gjkf0d
1. Companies Act, 2013

The Companies Act, 2013 (Act) has been in vogue since August, 2013. Out of 470 sections, 98 sections have been notified since 12th September, 2013. Recently, vide notification dated 26th March,2014, 183 sections have been notified and they are in force from April 01,2014. Thus in all today 281 sections are in operation. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs have notified the Rules in matters covered by the sections which are in force and these Rules have come into force on 01-04-2014. This Act and Rules replace the Companies Act, 1956 (old Act) and the Rules made there under.

2. Acceptance of Deposits:
Chapter V of the Act, deals with Acceptance of Deposits by companies. It contains four sections viz. sections 73 to 76. Of which, section 73, 74(1) and 76 are operative from1st April,2014. The Companies (Acceptance of Deposits) Rules, 2014 (Rules) have also been notified and they have come into force on 01-04-2014. These Rules are framed in consultation with RBI. It may be noted that these sections and the Rules apply to Public and Private Companies.

3. Deposit:
Section 2(31) of the Act, defines “deposit” which includes any receipt of money by way of deposit or loan or in any other form by a company, but does not include such categories of amount received as provided in Rule 2(1)(c).

4. Exempted Deposits:
As per Rule 2(1)(c) the following amounts received by a company are not to be considered as Deposits under the above provisions.

(i) Receipt from the Central Government, or a State Government, (including from any other source whose repayment is guaranteed by the Central Government or a State Government), from a local authority , or from a statutory authority constituted under an Act of Parliament or a State Legislature;

(ii) Receipt from foreign Governments, foreign or international banks, multilateral financial institutions, foreign Governments owned development financial institutions, foreign export credit agencies, foreign collaborators, foreign bodies corporate and foreign citizens, foreign authorities or persons resident outside India subject to the provisions of FEMA Act and rules and regulations made there under;

(iii) Any loan or facility from any banking company, from a banking institution notified by the Central Government u/s. 51 of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949, or a notified Co-operative Bank.

(iv) Any loan or financial assistance from any Public Financial Institutions notified by the Central Government;

(v) Any amount received against issue of commercial paper or any other instruments issued in accordance with the guidelines or notification issued by RBI;

(vi) Intercorporate Deposits;

(vii) Any amount received and held pursuant to an offer made in accordance with the provisions of the Act towards subscription to any securities, including share application money or advance towards allotment of securities pending allotment, so long as such amount is appropriated only against the amount due on allotment of the securities applied for. It is also provided that such allotment should be made within 60 days of receipt or refunded within 15 days on the expiry of 60 days. Adjustment for any other purpose shall not be considered as refund. It may be noted that there was no such time limit for allotment of securities under the old Companies Act or Rules. The above time limit will apply to amounts received before 01-04-2014 and outstanding as on that date;

(viii) Receipt from a person who, at the time of the receipt of the amount, was a director of the company. He should give a declaration that he has deposited the amount out of his own funds. It may be noted that under the Old Act in the case of Private Companies, exemption was given to relative of a Director and to a Member of the Company. This exemption is now withdrawn;

(ix) Any amount raised by issue of secured bonds or debentures or bonds or debentures compulsorily convertible into shares of the company within five years. It may be noted that under the Old Act there was no such time limit for conversion of debentures within 5 years;

(x) Any amount received from an employee of the company not exceeding his annual salary under a contract of employment with the company in the nature of non-interest bearing security deposits. Under the Old Act there was no limit about the amount of Security Deposit;

(xi) Any non-interest bearing amount received or held in trust;

(xii) Any amount received in the course of, or for the purposes of, the business of the company,-

(a) as an advance for the supply of goods or provision of services accounted for in any manner whatsoever provided that such advance is appropriated against supply of goods or provision of services within a period of 365 five days. There was no such limit of 365 days under the Old Act.

(b) as advance, against consideration for sale of any property;

(c) as security deposit for the performance of the contract for supply of goods or provision of services;

(d) as advance received under long term projects for supply of capital goods.

(xiii) Any amount brought in by the promoters of the company by way of unsecured loan in pursuance of the stipulation of any lending financial institution or a bank subject to specified conditions.

5. Prohibition on Acceptance of Deposits from Public

(i) Section 73(1) provides that no company shall invite, accept or renew any deposit under this Act from the public except in the manner provided under this chapter.

(ii) Section 73(2) provides that a company may accept deposits from its members, subject to passing of a resolution in General Meeting, on such terms and conditions including the provision of security, if any, or the repayment of such deposits with interest as may be agreed upon between the company and its members on fulfillment of the following conditions:

(a) Issuance of a circular to its members including therein a statement showing the financial position of the company, the credit rating obtained, the total number of depositors and the amount due towards deposits in respect of any previous deposits accepted by the company and such other particulars in form DPT-1 pursuant to Rule 4.

(b) Filing a copy of the circular alongwith such statement with the ROC within 30 days before the date of issue of the circular.

(c) Depositing such sum which shall not be less than 15% of the amount of its deposits maturing during a financial year and the financial year next following and kept in a scheduled bank in a separate bank account to be called as “Deposit Repayment Reserve Account”. This reserve can be used for repayment of deposits only u/s. 73(5).

(d) providing such Deposit Insurance in such manner and to such extent as stated in Rule 5.

(e) Certifying that the company has not committed any default in the repayment of deposits accepted either before or after the commencement of this Act or payment of interest on such deposits ; and

(f) In the case of secured Deposits, the company should provide for the due repayment of the amount of deposit or the interest thereon including the creation of such charge on the property or assets of the company. The manner in which the security is to be created is stated in Rule 6. In the case of secured deposits, the company will have to appoint Trustees for Depositors as provided in Rule 7.

If in any case a company does not secure the deposits or secures such deposits partially, then, the deposits shall be termed as “unsecured deposits” and shall be so quoted in every circular, form, advertisement or in any document related in invitation or acceptance of deposits.

(iii)    Section 73(3) provides that every deposit ac- cepted by a company shall be repaid with interest in accordance with the terms and conditions of the agreement with the depositors.

(iv)    Section 73 (4) provides that if a  company fails to repay the deposit or part thereof or any interest thereon, the depositor concerned may apply to the Tribunal as provided in that section.

6.    Acceptance of Deposit from public by certain companies (eligible companies)

(i)    Section 76(1) provides that, a public company, having networth of Rs. 100/- crore or more or turn over of Rs. 500/- crore or more may accept deposits from public on the condition that the prior consent of the company in general meeting by a special resolution has been obtained and the said resolution has been filed with the ROC before making any invitation to the public for acceptance of deposit. Such company is defined as an ‘eligible company’ as per Rule 2 (1)(e) of  the  Rules. The said rule provides that an ‘eligible company’ which is accepting deposits u/s. 180 (1)( (c ) may accept deposits by means of an ordinary resolution, if the amount to be borrowed together with amount already borrowed does not exceed aggregate of paid up capital plus free reserve.

(ii)    Every such company accepting deposit shall be required to obtain rating (including its networth, liquidity and ability to pay its deposits on due date) from a recognised credit rating agency and the company should inform the public, the rating given to the company at the time of invitation of deposits from the public which ensures adequate safety and the rating shall be obtained for every year during the tenure of deposits;

(iii)    Further, in the case of a company accepting secured deposits from the public it shall, within thirty days of such acceptance, create a charge on its assets of an amount not less than the amount of deposits accepted in favour of the deposit holders in accordance with the Rule 6 of the Rules.

(iv)    Such eligible Company has also to comply with procedure listed in Para 5(II) above.

7.    Repayment of deposits, accepted before com- mencement of 2013 Act

(i)    Section 74(1) provides that in the case of any deposit accepted by a company before 01-04-2014, if the amount of such deposit or part thereof or any interest due thereon remains unpaid on the above date or becomes due at any time thereafter the company shall

(a)    file, within a period of 3 months from 01- 04-2014 or from the date on which such pay- ments are due, with the ROC a statement of all the deposits accepted by the company and sums remaining unpaid on the above date with the interest payable thereon alongwith the arrangement made for such repayment in form DPT-4, pursuant to Rule 20 of the Rules.

(b)    repay within 1 year i.e., by 31-03-2015 or from the date on which such repayments are due, whichever is earlier.

8.    Manner and extent of deposit insurance:

As stated above, Rule 5(1) provides that every com- pany  referred  to  in  Para  5  and  6  above  shall  enter into  a  contract  for  providing  deposit  insurance  at least  thirty  days  before  the  issue  of  circular  or  advertisement or   at least thirty days before the date of renewal, as the case may be. Further, it clarifies that  amount  as  specified  in  the  deposit  insurance contract  shall  be  deemed  to  be  amount  in  respect of both principal amount and interest due thereon.

Rule  5(2)  provides  that  the  deposit  insurance  contract shall specifically  provide that in case the company defaults  in repayment of  principal amount  and interest thereon,   the depositor shall be entitled to the repayment of principal amount of deposits and interest thereon by the insurer upto the aggregate monetary  ceiling  as  specified  in  the  contract.  In case of   any deposit and interest not exceeding Rs. 20,000, the deposit insurance contract shall provide for payment of   the full amount of the deposit and in case  of any deposit and interest thereon in excess of  Rs.  20,000,  the  deposit  insurance  contract  shall provide  for payment of an amount not less than Rs. 20,000  for  each  depositor.  Rule  5(3)  provides  that the insurance premium for such deposit insurance shall be paid by the company.

9.    Limit & Terms and  Conditions of acceptance of deposits by companies:

Rule 3 of the Rules provides for limits and other terms of deposits as under:

(i)    No company referred to in section 73(2) and eligible company shall accept or renew any deposit, whether secured or unsecured, which is repayable on demand or upon receiving a notice within a period of less than 6 months or more than 36 months from the date of acceptance or renewal of such deposit:

However, that company may, for the purpose of meeting any of its short term requirements of funds, accept or renew such deposits for repayment earlier than 6 months from the date of deposit or renewal subject to the conditions that-

(a)    such deposit shall not exceed 10% of the aggregate of the paid up share capital and free reserves of the company, and

(b)    such deposits are repayable not earlier than  3 months from the date of such deposits or renewal thereof.

(ii)    No company referred to in section 73(2) shall accept or  renew any deposit from its members, if the amount of such deposits together with the amount of other deposits outstanding as on the date of acceptance or renewal of such deposits exceeds 25% of the aggregate of the paid up share capital and free reserves of the company. For this purpose paid up share capital shall include preference share capital also.

(iii)    No eligible company shall accept or renew-

(a)    any deposit from its members, if the amount of such deposit together with the amount of deposits outstanding as on the date of acceptance or renewal of such deposits from members exceeds 10% of the aggregate of the paid-up share capital  and free reserves  of the company;

(b)    In the case of deposits from others, if the amount of such deposit together with the amount  of  such  other  deposits,   other  than the  deposit referred to Clause (a),  outstanding  on  the  date  of  acceptance   or  renewal exceed 25% of aggregate  of the paid-up share capital and  free  reserves  of  the  company.

(c)    In other words, an eligible company can accept deposits upto 35% of paid up share capital (including preference share capital) and free reserves subject to the sub-limit of 10% from members.

(iv)    No Government company eligible to accept deposit u/s. 76 shall accept or renew any deposit if the amount of such deposit together with the amount of other deposits outstanding as on the date of acceptance or renewal exceeds 35% of the aggregate of its paid-up share capital and free reserves of the company.

(v)    No company referred to in section 73(2) or any eligible company shall invite or accept or renew any deposit in any form carrying a rate of interest or pay brokerage thereon at the rate exceeding the maximum rate of interest or brokerage as prescribed by RBI for acceptance of deposits by NBFC.

For this purpose, it is provided that the person who is  authorised,  in  writing,  by  a   company  to  solicit deposits on its behalf and through whom deposits are  procured  shall only be entitled to the brokerage and payment of brokerage to any other person for procuring deposits shall be deemed to be in violation of this rule. It may be noted that Para 4 (7) of NBFC Acceptance of Public Deposits (Reserve Bank) Directions, 1998, that no NBFC shall pay more than 12.5%P.A. interest on public deposits.  Similarly,  Para 4(8) provides that the rate of Brokerage/Commission to brokers shall not exceed 2% of the deposit collected. Brokers  can  be  paid  actual  expenses  incurred  for this purpose but the same shall not exceed 0.5% of the  deposit so collected.

(vi)    The company shall not reserve to itself either directly or indirectly right to alter, to prejudice or disadvantage of the depositor any of the terms and conditions of the deposit, deposit trust deed and deposit insurance contract after circular or circular in the form of advertisement is issued and deposits are accepted.

(vii)    Deposits may be accepted in joint names, not exceeding 3, with or without any of the Clauses viz.“jointly”  “Either or Survivor” “Anyone or Survivor”.

10.    Application mandatory

As per Rule 10 of the Rules , no company shall accept, or renew any deposit, whether  secured or unsecured, unless an application, in such form   as specified by the company, is submitted by the intending depositor for the acceptance of such deposit. The form of application referred to above shall contain a declaration by the intending de- positor to the effect that the deposit is not being made out of any money borrowed by him from any other person.

11.    Furnishing of deposit receipts to depositors:

Rule  12  of  the  Rules  mandate  that  every  company shall,  on  the  acceptance  or  renewal  of  a  deposit, furnish  to  the  depositor  or  his  agent,  a  receipt for the amount received by the company, within a period of 21   days from the date of receipt of money or  realisation of  cheque or  date of  renewal.

The receipt referred to above shall be signed by  an officer of the company duly authorised by the Board in this behalf and shall state the date of deposit, the name and address of the depositor, the amount received by the company as deposit, the rate of interest payable thereon and the date on which the deposit is repayable.

12.    Maintenance of liquid assets and creation of deposit repayment reserve account:

As per Rule 13 of the Rules, every company referred to in section 73(2) and every eligible company shall, on  or  before  30th  April  of  each  year,  deposit  the sum  not  less  than  15%  as  specified  in  Para  5  (ii)  (c) above  with  any  scheduled  bank  and  the  amount so deposited shall not   be utilised for any purpose other  than   for  the  repayment of  deposits:

Further, it also mandates that the amount remaining deposited  shall  not  at  any  time  fall  below  15  %   of the  amount  of  deposits  maturing,  until  the  end  of the current financial year and the next financial year.

13.    Registers of deposits:

As per Rule 14 of the Rules, every company accepting deposits shall maintain at its registered office one or more separate registers for deposits accepted  or renewed, in which there shall be entered separately in the case of each depositor the particulars as listed in Rule 14.

The entries specified in this Rule shall be made within 7 days from the date of issuance of the receipt duly authenticated by a director or secretary of the company or by any other officer authorised by the Board for this purpose. The register referred to above shall be preserved in good order for a period of not less than eight years from the financial year in which the latest entry is made in the register.

14.    Premature repayment of deposits:

(i)    Rule 15 of the Rules provides that, if a company makes a repayment of deposits, on the request of the depositor, after the expiry of a period of six months from the date of such deposit but before the expiry of the period for which such deposit was accepted, the rate of interest payable on such deposit shall be reduced by 1 % from the rate which the company would have paid had the deposit been accepted for the period for which such deposit had actually run and the company shall not pay interest at any rate higher than the rate so reduced:

(ii)    However, nothing contained in this rule shall apply to the repayment of any deposit before the expiry of the period for which such deposit was accepted by the company, if such repayment is made solely for the purpose of (a) complying with the provisions of Rule 3; or (b) providing  war risk  or other related benefits to the personnel of the naval, military or air forces or to their families, on  an application made by the associations or societies formed by such personnel, during the period of emergency declared under Article 352 of the Constitution:

(iii)    If a company referred to in section 73(2) or any eligible company permits a depositor to renew his deposit, before the expiry of the period for which such deposit was accepted by the company, for availing of a higher rate of interest, the company shall pay interest to such depositor at the higher rate if such deposit is renewed in accordance with the other provisions of these rules and for a period longer than the unexpired period of the deposit.

(iv)    Further, the Rule provides, where the period for which the   deposit had run contains any part   of a year then, if such part is less than 6 months,     it shall be excluded and if such part is 6 months or more, it shall be reckoned as 1 year.

15.    Return of deposits to be filed with the Registrar:

Rule 16 of the Rules requires that the company shall on or before 30th June, every year, file with the ROC a return in Form DPT-3 along with the prescribed fee and furnish the information contained therein as on 31st March, of that year duly audited by the auditor of the company.

16.    Penal rate of interest:

Rule 17 of the Rules provides that every company shall pay a penal rate of interest of 18 % per annum for the overdue period in case of deposits, whether secured or unsecured, matured and claimed but remaining unpaid.

17.    Penalty of Default

Sections 74(2), 74(3) and 75 of the Act, which have not yet been brought into force, provide as under.

(i)    If the company fail to repay any existing deposit or interest due to depositors within the time allowed u/s. 74, the following penalties can be levied.

(a)    The company shall be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 1 crore which may be extend to Rs. 10 crore. This will be over and above the amount of Deposit and interest in respect which default is made for repayment.

(b)    Every defaulting Officer shall be punishable with imprisonment which may extent to 7 years or with minimum fine of Rs. 25 lakh which may extend to Rs. 2 Crore or with both.

(ii)    It may be noted that in both the above cases, the amount of minimum fine has no relationship with the amount in respect of which the  default  in repayment of deposit or interest is made. It may so happen that the default may be in respect of deposit of Rs. 25 lakh, against which minimum fine payable by the company is Rs. 1 crore. To this extent, the above provision is very harsh.

(iii)    If it is found that there is default in repayment of outstanding Deposit or  interest u/s. 74  and it  is proved that such Deposit was accepted by the Company with intent to defraud the depositors or that the same was accepted for fraudulent purpose, every defaulting officer shall be personally responsible for any loss or damage that is incurred by the depositor. It may be noted that this penal action is without prejudice to the penalty leviable u/s. 74(3) as stated in (i) above. Further, the defaulting Officer will also be punishable u/s. 447 which provides for the following penalties.

(a)    Imprisonment for minimum period of 6 months which may extend to 10 years.

(b)    If the fraud involves Public interest, the mini- mum imprisonment can be for 3 years.

(c)    Minimum fine will be of amount involved in the fraud which may extend to 3 times the amount involved in the fraud.

(iv)    Rule 21 of the Rules provides that if any com- pany referred to in section 73(2) or any eligible company inviting deposits or any other person contravenes any provision of these rules for which no punishment is provided in the Act, the company and every officer of the company who is in default shall be punishable with fine which may extend to Rs. 25,000 and where the contravention is a continuing one, with a further fine which may extend to Rs. 500 for every day after the first day during which the contravention continues.

18.    To Sum Up:

The above provisions for acceptance of deposits by Companies are very stringent as compared to the provisions under the Old Act. Considering these requirements, it will be difficult for some companies to comply with these provisions and will have to find alternate source of funds. In particular these provisions are very harsh for private companies as exemption for deposits or loans taken from members has now been withdrawn. The exemption is now given to deposits or loans from directors only. Under the Old Act exemption was given to deposits or loans from relatives of directors of private companies. This is not given under the New Act.

It is true that these provisions are made in the New Act in view of the fact that the Government has noticed in recent years that some Companies are defaulting in refunding the amount of deposits and interest on the due dates. Hence, such stringent provisions can be justified in the interest of persons who invest their hard earned monies in such public deposits. The provisions for Deposit Insurance, Credit Rating, Creation of Deposit Repayment Reserve Account, Creation of Security, appointment of Trustees for secured deposits etc. are provisions made to safeguard the interest of small depositors. However, it appears that there is no justification to rope in Private Companies which get deposit or loan from their members or their relatives.

Moreover, the penal provisions under which minimum fine can be levied for  default in  repayment of deposits or interest on due date are very harsh. The said fine can be levied on the Company and defaulting officer irrespective of the amount of the deposit and interest in respect of which default may occur.

Intercorporate Investments: Changes Galore

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis
The 2nd phase of the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 has been made operative w.e.f. 1st April, 2014. This includes provisions dealing with intercorporate investments. Substantial changes have been made in the law in this respect. It is time for Corporate India to unlearn and relearn all they know in this respect. This article examines the salient features of the new provisions on intercorporate investments.

Introduction
Part-II of the Companies Act, 2013 (“the Act”) has made about 183 further sections (after the initial 98) effective from 1st April, 2014 and a Part-III is pending. The Rules in respect of Part-II sections have also been notified. One of the sections notified in Part-II is section 186 which deals with “Loans and investments by a company”. Section 186 coupled with section 185 has caused maximum heartburn amongst corporate India. This section 186 is a modern day avatar of section 372A of the Companies Act, 1956 (which in itself was a modern day avatar of the erstwhile section 372 of the same Act), but it has undergone a transmutation as compared to the original section. As the heading of the section suggests, it deals with two legs ~ loans by a company and investments by a company. In addition, there are certain other sections of the Companies Act, 2013 which deal with intercorporate investments. Through this article, let us examine the provisions relating to investments by a company in another body corporate, i.e., intercorporate investments.

Applicability
One of the most distressing features of section 186 is that it even applies to private limited companies which are not subsidiaries of public limited companies. Section 372/372A had a blanket exemption for private limited companies. A similar exemption is not found u/s. 186. Thus, all private companies would now have to comply with the provisions of this section.

Limit on Investments
The overall limit for a company to invest in the securities of another body corporate u/s. 186(2) is the higher of the following two limits:
(a) 60% of paid-up share capital + free reserves + securities premium; or
(b) 100% of free reserves + securities premium

This limit applies to investment by way of fresh acquisition or purchase or otherwise of securities of another body corporate.

The term ‘Securities’ has been defined u/s. 2(81) of the Act to mean securities as defined u/s. 2(h) of the Securities Contract (Regulation) Act, 1956. Thus, they would include shares (equity, preference, convertible preference, non-voting rights shares), debentures, bonds, derivatives in securities, warrants, other marketable securities of a body corporate. The limit would apply to investment by a company in the securities of both listed as well as unlisted companies.

Next let us examine the definition of the term ‘body corporate’. Section 2(11) of the Act defines it as including a company incorporated outside India. However, it does not include a corporate sole, a co-operative society and any other body corporate so notified by the Government. The most important aspect of a body corporate is that it is an independent legal entity with a distinct identity which is separate from its partners/shareholders/members and has a perpetual succession. It can own property on its own accord and in its own name. Hence, investing in the securities of a foreign subsidiary/joint venture would also fall within the purview of these limits. However, a mutual fund structured as a trust is not a body corporate and hence, investment in the units issued by a mutual fund (structured as a trust) would not be within the purview of section 186.

Let us next look at the composition of the limits for considering the 100% or 60%:

(a) Section 2(64) of the Act defines the phrase ‘paid-up share capital’ to mean such aggregate amount of money credited as paid-up as is equivalent to the amount received as paid-up in respect of shares issued and also includes any amount credited as paidup in respect of shares of the company but does not include any other amount received in respect of such shares, by whatever name called.

(b) The phrase ‘free reserves’ is defined by section 2(43) to mean such reserves which are available for distribution as dividend. These reserves are to be reckoned as per the last audited balance sheet of a company. The following are however, not treated as free reserves:

(i) any amount representing unrealised gains, notional gains or revaluation reserve, or
(ii) any change in carrying amount of an asset or of a liability recognised in equity, including surplus in profit and loss account on measurement of the asset or the liability at fair value.

(c) T he last component of the limits is ‘securities premium’ which is governed by section 52 of the Act and it states that where shares are issued at a premium, the amount of the premium received on those shares shall be transferred to a “securities premium account”.

What if Limits are to be exceeded?


In case the investment in another body corporate is to be in excess of the limits specified above, then the investor company must obtain a prior special resolution of its shareholders passed at a general meeting. The Rules notified u/s. 186 provide that this would not be required where a holding company proposes to invest (by way of subscription or acquisition) in shares of its wholly owned subsidiary. However, the resolution would be required if the subsidiary is not a 100% subsidiary. Thus, if any, only if, the entire share capital is held by the investor and/or its nominees, would a special resolution not be required. The resolution must specify the total amount up to which the Board is authorised to make such acquisition. Section 110(1) of the Act and the Rules notified therein specify the items which must be transacted through postal ballot. While giving of loans/guarantees/security in excess of limits u/s. 186 have been specified, investment in excess of the limits u/s. 186 has not been specified. Hence, such a resolution is not mandatorily to be passed via a postal ballot.

In addition, the requirements of the Companies (Management and Administration) Rules, 2014 as well as the revised Clause 35B of the Listing Agreement should be complied with by all listed companies. This requires that for all resolutions to be passed at General Meetings, evoting facility must be provided by the listed company.

Layers of Investment Companies


S/s. (1) of section 186 introduces a novel concept, i.e., any company can make an investment through not more than two layers of investment companies. Companies in India are accustomed to having a web of investment companies. This has often been criticised on the grounds that it gives rise to opacity and proves difficult for regulators to ascertain the ultimate owner of an investee company. Thus, any company desiring to make an investment, after the coming into force of section 186, can do so either directly or through an investment company or through one investment company followed by a 2nd layer of investment company. However, it cannot have a 3rd layer of investment company under the 2nd layer of investment company. This s/s. prohibits making any investment, unlike the limits u/s. 186(2)(c) (which apply only for investment in a body corporate) and this does not restrict the scope to investment in a body corporate. Hence, any investment by a company through more than 2 layers of investment companies is not allowed. Thus, investment in a company, LLP, body corporate, partnership firm, etc., would all be covered. Considering the way the s/s. is worded, one wonders whether this prohibition would also apply to investment by a company in other asset classes, such as, land. However, a harmonious reading with the other sub-sections does not seem to indicate so.

The restriction is on routing any investment through more than 2 vertical layers of investment companies as illustrated by the following diagram (illustration-1) which violates section 186:

Thus,  since aBC  has  routed  its  investment  in  XYZ  via 3 layers of investment companies, the prohibition u/s.
186(1) would apply.

It may be noted that the prohibition is on having more than 2 layers of investment companies and hence, we need to ascertain what constitutes an investment company? the section defines an ‘investment company’ to mean a com- pany whose principal business is acquisition of shares, debentures or securities. at the outset, it is very clear that the definition only applies to a company and not to any other body corporate or entity. A company is defined to mean a company incorporated under the act or under any previous company law. Hence, if an LLP is used as an investment vehicle then this prohibition u/s. 186 would not apply. Whether you can incorporate an investment LLP is another story altogether.

Secondly, it must be a company whose principal business is acquisition of securities. What is principal business has not been defined. In this context, the principal business tests  laid  down  by  the  reserve  Bank  of  india  to  determine what constitutes an nBfC (non-banking financial Company) may be helpful. according to these tests, a company will be treated as an NBFC if it satisfies both the following conditions as per its audited accounts:

(i)    Its financial assets as per the last audited Balance Sheet should be more than 50% of its total assets (netted off by intangible assets) and

(ii)    Its income from financial assets as per the last audited Profit & Loss Account should be more than 50% of its gross income.

It should be noted that both these tests should be sat- isfied in order to treat a company as an NBFC. A company whose principal business is acquisition of securities may generally also qualify as an NBFC unless it can be treated as a Core investment Company or a CiC or if it is a company exempted from nBfC provisions, e.g., stock brokers. in this respect, the decision of the madras high Court u/s. 372 of the Companies Act,1956 in HC Kothari, 75 Comp. Cases 688 (mad) may be referred to. this decision held that it is clear that the income derived from the business is not the criteria. the test would rather be, as to what is the principal business of the company? a balance- sheet should show as to what is the principal business of the company.

The  department  of  Company  affairs’  views  (dated  1st July, 1963) under the erstwhile section 372 may also be considered:

“In the Department’s opinion whether a company is or is not an investment company and the business which it should or should not transact to fall within the provision of the definition of an “Investment company” within the meaning of section 372(10) is actually a question of fact. The words used in the section are “whose principal business is the acquisition of shares.  ” These words imply that the company concerned is expected to hold the shares, etc., acquired by it for a reasonable time.”

The Department’s views (dated 23rd February, 1961 and 4th October, 1961) under the erstwhile section 372, in relation to a share trading company, were as follows:

“The question as to whether a particular share trading company which deploys its funds for short-term transaction in buying and selling shares is an investment company or not, is one of fact which has to be determined in relation to the actual business transacted by it. The Department is inclined to the opinion that a company should be treated as an investment company if the whole or substantially the whole of its business relates to shares, securities, stock and debentures, etc. A share trading company may take advantage of these provisions of section 372 if it can be classed as an investment company.”

The act expressly provides that the restriction on two layers of investment companies even applies to an NBFC whose principal business is acquisition of securities. CiCs are a class of NBFCs which invest 90% of their net assets in group companies’ securities and at least 60% of 90% of their net assets in group companies’ equity shares. thus, even NBFCs and CiCs are restricted from having only two layers of investment companies.

The investor company could be an investment or an operating company but it cannot route its investment via more than 2 layers of investment companies. if the investment is routed through an operating company or one whose principal business is not acquisition of securities, then the restriction u/s. 186 on 2 layers would not apply. The following diagram (illustration-2) would amplify this statement:

Thus, since PQR has routed its investment in XYZ via a mix of 2 layers of operating companies and 2 layers of investment companies, the prohibition u/s. 186(1) does not apply. as explained the prohibition is only on more than 2 layers of ‘investment’ companies. one additional factor to be borne in mind in structuring an investment through an investment company is the NBFC directions. it is quite possible that the investment company, i.e., one whose principal business is acquisition of securities may constitute either an NBFC or a CIC. if it is an NBFC-ND-SI/Systemically Important Non-deposit taking NBFC, i.e., one which has total assets of rs. 100 cr. and above, then the NBFC directions impose a restriction that it cannot lend and invest more than 40% of its owned funds to a single group of parties and more than 25% of its owned funds to a single party. thus, in such a case, the twin restrictions of the act as well as of the directions would have to be borne in mind.

Exemption:
The  prohibition  on  making  investments  only  through   a maximum of two layers of investment companies will not affect the following two cases:
(i)    a company from acquiring any other company incorporated in a country outside india if such other company has investment subsidiaries beyond two layers as per the laws of such country; or
(ii)    a subsidiary company from having any investment subsidiary for the purposes of meeting the requirements under any law or under any rule or regulation framed under any law for the time being in force.

Further, section 186(1) gives power to the Government to prescribe such companies which can invest via more than 2 layers of investment companies.

Thus, exceptions presently available are if the indian in- vestor company has acquired a foreign company which, in turn, has more than two layers as per the laws of its country or if the subsidiary of an investor company, in turn, has any investment subsidiary for meeting the requirements of any law.

When indian companies make overseas investments, several times they consider routing such overseas investments through an intermediate holding Company (IHC), regional holding Company (RHC), etc. it is a moot point whether the prohibition u/s. 186 can apply to an investment made in a foreign company via more than 2 layers of IHCs/RHCs? This is because a company is defined under the act to mean a company incorporated under the act or under any previous company law and an ihC or a RHC incorporated abroad is a body corporate but not a company within the meaning of the act. interestingly, under the fema regulations, the RBI is also known to frown upon the use of multi-layered SPVs for making an overseas direct investment.

   Other compliances
in addition to the above substantive provisions, section 186 also lays down several compliances for the investor company, such as, holding investments in its own name, board resolution to be passed by unanimous consent of all directors present at the meeting, maintaining a register of investments, obtaining prior approval of financial institutions in certain cases, etc.

except the provisions relating to two layers of investment companies, none of the other provisions of section 186 are applicable to the following cases of investments:

(a)    to any acquisition made by a registered NBFC whose principal business is acquisition of securities in respect of its investment activities. it may be noted that the exemption is only available to an nBfC which is registered with the rBi. under the CIC directions, a CiC is also a class of nBfCs. hence, this exemption should be available even to registered CICs. however, only CIC-nd-Si, i.e., those which have an aggregate asset size in excess of rs.100 crore need to be registered with the rBi. other CiCs are exempted from  registration  both  as  a  CiC  and  as  an  nBfC. hence, will such exempted CiCs be eligible for the exemption u/s. 186 is a moot point?
(b)    to  any  acquisition  made  by  a  company  whose  principal business is the acquisition of securities. Such companies could be NBFCs, CICs, stock/subbroking companies, Venture Capital Companies, alternative investment funds structured as companies, etc.
(c)    to any acquisition of shares allotted in pursuance of clause (a) of s/s. (1) of section 62, i.e., allotment under a rights issue.

A related compliance is laid down u/s. 187 of the Act which requires all investments made or held by a company to be held in its own name. however, it may hold shares in its subsidiary company in the name of its nominees if it’s required to ensure minimum number of members. unlike the earlier section 49 of the 1956 act, section 187 even applies to a company whose principal business consists of buying and selling of securities.

An  additional  compliance  is  incorporated  in  the  report of the Board of directors. it requires to give particulars   of investments u/s. 186. Further, the Audit Committee’s terms of reference includes scrutiny of intercorporate investments.

Further, section 179(3) states that the power to invest the funds of the company can be exercised by the Board of directors only at a meeting of the Board. hence, a Circu- lar resolution is not possible.

    Exemptions u/s. 372a Dropped

Section 372A of the Companies Act, 1956 contained several exemptions which have been done away with by section 186 of the act. the differences in the exemptions are as follows:

details

Section 372a of the 1956 act

Section 186 of the 2013 act

Applicability
to Private Companies

Entire
Section did not apply to Private Limited Companies

Entire
Section applies to Private Limited Companies. This is a major change

Companies
whose

Entire
Section did not

Restriction
on invest-

principal business

apply to a company

ment through 2 layers

is acquiring securi-

whose principal busi-

of investment com-

ties

ness was acquisition

panies even applies

 

of securities

to a company whose

 

 

principal business is

 

 

acquisition of securi-

 

 

ties. The remaining

 

 

s/s.s of section 186

 

 

do not apply to such a

 

 

company.

NBFCs

No
exemptions for

Restriction
on invest-

 

NBFCs

ment through 2 layers

 

 

of investment com-

 

 

panies even applies

 

 

to an NBFC but the

 

 

remaining sub-sections

 

 

of section 186 do not

 

 

apply to an NBFC.

Acquisition
by

Entire
Section did

Now the
exemption is

Holding Company

not apply to subscrip-

only available qua the

 

tion or purchase of

passing of a special

 

securities by a Holding

resolution by the Hold-

 

Company in its wholly

ing Company if the

 

owned subsidiary

limits u/s. 186 would

 

 

be exceeded by virtue

 

 

of such acquisition.

 

 

However, the other

 

 

s/s.s of section 186

 

 

continue to apply.

    Penalty
Section 186 imposes a heavy penalty for the violation of the provisions of this section. if a company contravenes the provisions of this section, the company shall be pun- ishable with fine which ranging from Rs. 25,000 to Rs. 5 lakh. Every officer who is in default shall be punishable with a term which may extend to 2 years and with fine ranging from rs. 25,000 to rs. 1 lakh.

  Layers of Subsidiaries
in addition to the restriction on layers of investment companies u/s. 186, there is also a restriction u/s. 2(87) of the act on the number of layers of subsidiaries which certain prescribed class of holding companies can have. a subsidiary includes a company as well as a body corporate, such as an LLP. Thus, in respect of prescribed holding companies they cannot have more than certain number of layers of subsidiaries. it may be noted that unlike the restriction on layers of investment companies, this restriction applies both to operating as well as investment subsidiaries and to subsidiaries which are companies or body corporates. Currently, no class of holding companies or number of layers have been prescribed.

one may compare the restrictions contained in section 186 vs. section 2(87) as follows:

 Compilance for The Investee company
The  investee  company  needs  to  pay  special  attention as to whether the issue of fresh securities to the investor company would constitute a private placement u/s. 42 read with the Rules notified thereunder and/or a preferential issue u/s. 62(1)(c) read with the Rules notified thereunder? Several substantive and procedural conditions have been laid down in this respect for the investee company.

Conclusion
The  law  relating  to  intercorporate  investments  is  one area which has witnessed a sea change under the Companies Act, 2013 as compared to the Companies Act, 1956! Corporate india is going to have to grapple with several intended and unintended consequences of these new  provisions  but  then,  who  said  law  and  logic  go together?

Private Companies under the Companies Act, 2013

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis

The regime of the Companies Act, 1956 has come to an end, with the notification of a majority of the sections of the Companies Act, 2013 . Significant changes have been brought/new concepts have been introduced like withdrawal of several relaxations enjoyed by the private Companies with added compliance burden, introduction of new concepts like OPC (One Person Company), etc. The article discusses in detail the key changes notified/ proposed with respect to Private Limited Companies and will be of relevance to a large number of readers.

Background

The Companies Act, 2013 (‘New Act’) received the assent of the President on 29th August, 2013 and was notified in the Gazette on 30th August, 2013. Of the 470 sections in the New Act, 98 sections or part thereof have been brought into force from 12th September 2013. Further, the Government has clarified that the relevant provisions of the Companies Act, 1956 (‘existing Act’) which correspond to the provisions of those 98 sections of the New Act shall cease to have effect from the said date.

The New Act has made material changes to the provisions under the existing Act. In this article the various privileges and exemptions which are available to a private company under the existing Act and the status thereof, under the New Act are discussed. The said analysis is irrespective of the fact whether all the said provisions have been notified by the Central Government or not.

1. Definition of Private company:

Under the New Act a private company is defined u/s. 2(68) as under:

“private company” means a company having a minimum paid-up share capital of one lakh rupees or such higher paid-up share capital as may be prescribed, and which by its articles,-

(i) restricts the right to transfer its shares;

(ii) except in case of One Person Company, limits the number of its members to two hundred: (emphasis supplied)

Provided that where two or more persons hold one or more shares in a company jointly, they shall, for the purposes of this clause, be treated as a single member:

Provided further that:

(A) persons who are in the employment of the company; and
(B) persons who, having been formerly in the employment of the company, were members of the company while in that employment and have continued to be members after the employment ceased, shall not be included in the number of members; and

(iii) prohibits any invitation to the public to subscribe for any securities of the company; (emphasis supplied)

The following changes in the definition of a private company may be noted:

a) Except in the case of One Person Company: maximum number of members, which a private company can have, is increased to 200 from the existing limit of 50;

b) Under the existing Act, a private company by its Articles is prohibited from inviting the public for subscription of shares and debentures. Under the New Act the prohibition applies to securities as defined u/s. 2(h) of the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 which includes not only the shares and debentures but also other securities prescribed therein;

c) Under the existing Act, in order to form a private company it is essential that its Articles contain a Clause that prohibits a company from accepting deposits from persons other than its members, directors or their relatives. The New Act does not prescribe a similar condition and thus, under the New Act, a private company can be formed without inserting in its Articles, a Clause prohibiting invitation or acceptance of deposits from persons other than its members, directors or their relatives. This however does not imply that a private company can invite or accept deposits from any person since the said restrictions are contained in section 73 (and draft Rules thereon) which deal with the provisions for acceptance of deposits.

2. Restriction on commencement of business:

As per the New Act, a private company cannot commence business or exercise borrowing powers:

• till every subscriber to the memorandum has paid the value of shares taken by him and the directors of the company have filed declaration to that effect; and
• the Company has filed with the Registrar a verification of its registered office.

Under the existing Act, a private company could commence business or exercise borrowing powers immediately on being formed/incorporated.

3. Share Capital:

a) Under the existing Act, a company is prohibited from issuing classes of shares other than equity or preference shares. Further, the Act provides that the shareholder’s voting rights should be in the same proportion to his share of the paid up equity capital of the company. However, these provisions do not apply to a private company which is not a subsidiary of a public company [section 90(2) of the existing Act]. Thus, under the existing Act, a private company not being a subsidiary of a public company is permitted to issue types of shares other than the equity share or the preference share. It can also issue shares with disproportionate rights in regard to dividend, participation in any surplus on liquidation and with disproportionate voting rights.

However under the New Act, similar exemption is not given to a private company.

b) Under the existing Act, a private company can issue further share capital to any person or in any manner as it thinks best in its own interest. Its Articles may or may not provide for pre-emptive rights of the shareholders.

Under the New Act, however, all companies including a private company, are required to offer shares to persons who, on the date of the offer, are holders of equity shares of the Company in proportion, as nearly as circumstances admit, to the paid up share capital on those shares. Thus the current practice in private companies of freely issuing shares to any outsider will be restricted.

4. Providing financial assistance for purchase of its own/holding company’ s shares:

Under the existing Act, a public company or a private company which is a subsidiary of a public company is prohibited from giving a loan, a guarantee, a security or any other kind of financial assistance to any person for the purpose of purchase of shares in the company or in its holding company.

Under the New Act, such prohibition is restricted to public company only. Accordingly, private companies, including those which are subsidiaries of a public company would be able to offer financial assistance to any person for purchase of shares in the company or in its holding company.

5. Appointment of Directors:

a) Where a person other than a retiring director stands for directorship:

U/s. 160 of the New Act, a person who is not a retiring director and desires to stand for directorship is required to give 14 days’ notice in writing and a deposit of Rs. 1 lakh or such higher amount as may be prescribed. The deposit amount would be refunded provided he gets elected or gets at least 25% vote. A private company is not excluded from the applicability of the said provisions.

U/s. 257 of the existing Act, such person was required to deposit a sum of Rs. 500 only. However, it seems that the existing provision was complied more in breach – the same may become more difficult to comply in view of the increase in the amount of deposit to Rs. 1 lakh.

b) Number of directorships:

U/s. 275 of the existing Act, a person cannot become a director in more than 15 companies. For the purpose, a person holding directorship in a private company which is neither a subsidiary nor a holding company of a public company is not considered.


U/s. 165 of the New Act the said limit is increased
to 20 but it further provides that in the
said limit of 20, the number of public companies
cannot exceed 10. Further it is clarified that for
reckoning the limit of public companies, directorship
in a private company which is either a
holding or a subsidiary of a public company is
to be included. Thus under the New Act, since
directorships in private companies will also
need to be considered, it will require several
persons to reduce their number of directorships
in private companies.


c) Appointment of
directors to be voted on individually: 

U/s. 162 of the New Act where a company including
a private company, desires to appoint 2 or more persons
as directors by a single resolution, it is necessary
first to pass a resolution authorising their appointment
in that manner without even one dissentient
vote being cast against such resolution.

Under the existing Act, a private company which is
not a subsidiary of a public company is permitted to
appoint two or more persons as directors even by a
single resolution with no pre-conditions attached to it.


d)
Consent to act
as a director: 

U/s. 152 of the New Act where a person is proposed
to be appointed as a director by a company including
a private company, he is required to furnish a declaration
that he is not disqualified to become a director
under the Act. It is further provided that a person
appointed as a director shall not act as a director unless
he gives his consent to hold the office as director
and such consent has been filed with the Registrar.


Similar provisions under the existing Act were not
applicable to a private company (unless it is a subsidiary
of a public company).

6.
Appointment of Managerial Personnel:


a) As per section 269 of the existing Act, every
public company or a private company which
is a subsidiary of a public company, having a
paid up share capital of Rs. 5 crore, is required
to have a managing or whole time director or
manager.


As per section 203 of the New Act, every company
belonging to such class or classes of
companies, as may be prescribed by the Central
Government, is required to have the following
whole-time key managerial personnel:

• Managing director or Chief Executive Officer or
Manager or Whole-time director;


• Company secretary; and

• Chief financial officer.

Thus, if the specified class of companies includes
private companies above the specified threshold,
they will need to comply with the above.

b) Under the New Act, it is further specified that
a person who is the Managing director or Chief
Executive Officer cannot be appointed as the
Chairperson of the company unless Articles
of such company provide for the same or the
company carries on multiple businesses.

c) A whole-time key managerial personnel cannot
hold office in more than one company except
in its subsidiary company, though he can be a
director of any company with the permission
of the Board.

Under the existing Act a person can be appointed
as a managing director in two companies
and for the purpose, managing directorships in
a private company which is not a subsidiary of
public company is not considered;

d) As per section 196(3) of the New Act, which
applies to all types of companies, a person
cannot be appointed to the post of managerial
personnel who is below the age of 21 years or
has attained the age of 70 years.

Under the existing Act, no such age criteria
were prescribed in relation to a private company.
e) Under the existing Act, a private company (not
being a subsidiary of a public company) is not
prohibited from appointing a managing director
or a manager for a term which may exceed 5
years at a time.

Under the New Act, all types of companies, including
a private company, are prohibited from appointing
managing director or whole time director or manager
for a term exceeding 5 years at a time.

7.
Restrictions on Powers of Board: 

As per the New Act, the Board of a company, including
of a private company can exercise the following
powers only with the consent of the company by a
special resolution:


a) Sale, lease or otherwise disposal of the whole
or substantially the whole undertaking. The
term ‘substantial’ means where not less than
20% of the value of the undertaking is being
disposed off;

b) To invest, otherwise in trust securities, the
amount of compensation received by it as a
result of any merger/amalgamation;

c) To borrow money, where the money to be
borrowed, together with the money already
borrowed exceed the aggregate of its paid
up share capital and free reserves;

d) To remit, or give time for the re-payment of,
any debt due from a director;

Under the existing Act, there were no such requirements
or restrictions on a private company which is
not a subsidiary of a public company.

8. Loan to
directors:


As per section 185 of the New Act no company,
including a private company, can advance any loan
to any of its directors or to any other persons in
whom the director is interested or give guarantee
or provide any security in connection with any loan
taken by him or such other person.


The corresponding provisions of section 295 of the
existing Act were not applicable to a private company
(unless it is a subsidiary of a public company).

Section 185 has also become operative since 12th
September, 2013. Hence, in case of any fresh loans
given or renewal of loans after that date, the provisions
of the section would need to be complied with. 

9. Loans and investments by a company:


The New Act provides for the manner in which and
the limits up to which a company, including a private
company can give loan or give guarantee or provide
security in connection with a loan to any other body
corporate or person or acquire any securities of any
other body corporate. As per section 186 of the Act,
unless authorised by a special resolution passed at a
general meeting, such loans, investments,

etc.,
made
by any company cannot exceed 60% of its paid up
share capital, free reserves and securities premium account
or 100% of free reserves and securities premium
account, whichever is lower. It further provides that
the loan cannot be given at a rate of interest lower
than the prevailing yield of 1 year, 3 year, 5 year or
10 year Government security closest to the tenor of
the loan. It also empowers the Central government to
prescribe limits up to which the companies registered
u/s. 12 of the Securities and Exchange Board of India
Act, 1992 can take intercorporate loan or deposit.

Section 372A of the existing Act also restricts loans
and investments by the company. However, the
provisions under the New Act are more stringent and
restrictive. The material differences between the two
provisions are as under:

a) Section 372A is not applicable to a private
company not being a subsidiary of a public
company while section 186 applies to private
companies also;


b) New section not only covers inter-corporate
loans and investment but also to loans and
investment given to non-corporates;

c) As per section 372A, a loan cannot be made at
the rate of interest lower than the prevailing
bank rate made public u/s. 49 of the Reserve
Bank of India Act, 1934 – u/s. 186 of the New
Act, the rate of interest is linked to the prevailing
yield of Government securities;

d) Following transactions not covered (or exempted)
under the provisions of section 372A of the existing
Act gets covered u/s. 186 of the New Act:

• Investments in right issue of shares made in
pursuant of section 81(1)(a);

• Loan by a holding company to its wholly owned subsidiary;

• Guarantee given or security provided by a holding
company in respect of loan to its wholly
owned subsidiary;


• Acquisition of securities by a holding company
of its wholly owned subsidiary;

e) A new provision is inserted to prohibit investment
through more than 2 layers of investment
companies.

10. Interested director not to participate or vote in
Board’s proceedings:


As per section 184 of the New Act, every director
of a company, including of a private company, who
is concerned or interested in a contract or arrangement
entered into or proposed to be entered into
is required to disclose the nature of his concern or
interest at the meeting of the Board and he cannot
participate in proceedings of such meeting.
Similar provisions under the existing Act were not
applicable to a private company.


11. Administration related:

a) Time and Place of the Annual General Meeting:

Under the existing Act, a private company has the
option to fix the time for its annual general meeting
by its Articles or by a resolution passed in one
annual general meeting wherein time for holding
subsequent meeting is fixed/decided. In case of a
private company (unless it is a subsidiary of a public
company), it also has the option of fixing the place
of its annual general meeting in the like manner.

The New Act does not provide for similar options and
as provided in section 96(2), all companies, including
a private company, is required to hold its annual
general meeting between 9 a.m. and 6 p.m. on a day
that is not on a National holiday, at the registered
office of the company or at some other place within
the city, town or village in which the registered office
of the company is situated.


b) Meetings and Proceedings:


By virtue of the provisions of section 170 of the
existing Act, a private company by its Articles can
frame its own Rules as regards the length of notice
for calling meeting, contents and manner of service
of notice and person on whom it is to be served,
Explanatory statement to be annexed to notice,
Quorum for meeting, Chairman of meeting, Proxies
and manner of Voting on resolutions.

The New Act does not grant similar exemptions
hence, a private company is required to follow the
same rules and procedures as are applicable to a
public company.

c) Filing of the Financial Statements with the Registrar:

Proviso to section 220 of the existing Act permits a
private company to file copy of Statement of Profit
and Loss separately with the Registrar and the same
is not available to general public for inspection.

Under the New Act no such exemption is available
to a private company and all Financial Statements
filed u/s. 137 including the Statement of Profit and
Loss, would be available to the general public for
inspection.

d) Register of directors:

Under the existing Act, all companies, other than a
private company, which is not a subsidiary of a public
company are required to enter date of birth of a
director in the Register maintained. The exemption
granted to a private company has been withdrawn
under the New Act, and accordingly, the Register
maintained even by a private company shall contain
information about the date of birth of a director.

12. The following exemptions and privileges available
under the existing Act are also available under the
New Act:


(A) In the case of all types of private companies:

• Filing of statement in lieu of prospectus before
allotment of shares is not required;

• A private company need not have more than
2 directors;

(B) In the case of a private company not being
a subsidiary of a public company:


• The provisions relating to the managerial remuneration
like the extent and manner of
payment, fixing of overall maximum remuneration,
limit of minimum managerial remuneration
in the event of no profits or inadequate
profits, etc., are not applicable and such company
can remunerate its managerial personnel
by such higher percentage of profits or in any
manner as it may think fit;
• The provisions relating to the appointment,
retirement, reappointment, etc., of directors
who are to retire by rotation and the procedure
relating thereto, are not applicable and
the company can frame its own Rules for the
purpose in the Articles;
• The provisions relating to the manner of filling
up casual vacancy among the directors are not
applicable and the company can frame its own
Rules for the purpose in the Articles;
• The company can by its Articles, provide for any
disqualification for appointment as a director
in addition to those specified in the Act;
• The company may provide any other ground
for the vacation of the office of a director in
addition to those specified in the Act;

13. One Person Company (OPC):
The concept of One Person Company has been introduced
under the New Act. Section 2(62) of the Act
defines the OPC to mean a company which has only
one person as a member and as per section 3, a company
formed by one person would be a private limited
company. Thus, the OPC would enjoy all the exemptions
and privileges enjoyed by any private company. In addition,
OPC enjoys following exemptions and privileges:
a) It is not mandatory for the OPC to prepare
the cash flow statement;
b) In the absence of company secretary, the Annual
Return filed u/s. 92 can be signed by the
director;
c) The OPC is not required to hold an Annual
general meeting;
d) The provisions of section 100 to 111 which
provides for matter regarding extraordinary
general meeting, the length of notice for
calling general meeting, contents and manner
of service of notice and person on whom it
is to be served, Explanatory statement to be
annexed to notice, Quorum for the meeting,
Chairman of the meeting, Proxies and manner
of Voting on resolutions, etc., do not apply to
the OPC;
e) The financial statement need not be signed
amongst others, by the Chief Financial Officer
and the Company secretary. It is sufficient
compliance if the same is signed by one director;
f) It is sufficient compliance if the OPC has only 1
director instead of minimum 2 required in the
case of a private limited company;
g) In case of the OPC it is sufficient if at least 1 meeting of the Board of
Directors is held in each half of a calendar year.
14. Conclusion
As seen above,
the New Act has brought in many changes in the existing Act and various new
concepts have also been introduced. To some extent, the Clauses in the Articles
of the existing private companies may not be in sync with the provisions of the
New Act. The Articles of the existing private companies are based on Table A of
the existing Act which corresponds to Table F of the New Act. It will be
advisable for all private companies to compare the existing Clauses in its
Articles with Table F of the New Act and making the necessary changes as
required.
In conclusion, it may be said that the Private Limited Company is one
of the most widely used legal forms by many businessmen in India. In fact, many
of the successful business group had begun their first venture by forming a
private company, the reason being it was relatively easy to form and lesser
regulations applicable. As seen above, a number of privileges enjoyed by the
private company under the existing Act have been withdrawn under the New Act.
Due to this, a lot of companies (especially family owned) would need to
expeditiously explore whether they can really cope with the new requirements or
that they need to change to some other form of entity like Limited Liability
Partnership (LLP).

INDEPENDENT DIRECTORS UNDER THE COMPANIES BIL, 2012

“Freethinkers are those who are willing to use their minds without
prejudice and without fearing to understand things that clash with their
own customs, privileges or beliefs. This state of mind is not common,
but it is essential for right thinking…”

— Leo Tolstoy

Introduction

 Leo
Tolstoy captures the essence of independent thinking and maybe, it is
this essence which led companies across the globe to adopt and
incorporate the concept of appointment of independent directors on their
Boards. This concept was first introduced in the United States of
America and slowly spread across the globe, both in developed and
developing countries. The recent Companies Bill, 2012 (Bill) has made an
attempt to match the current global standard vis-à-vis appointment and
role of independent directors. This article makes an attempt to briefly
discuss the provisions relating to independent directors in the Bill and
provide a perspective on the laudatory efforts as well as the
shortcomings of the provisions.

Brief history of independent directors in India

The
importance and role of independent directors in the Indian scenario was
brought to the forefront by the Kumarmangalam Birla Committee (KBC) in
the year 1999. The recommendations of the KBC Report lead to the
introduction of Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement (which deals with
appointment and role of independent directors of listed companies) by
the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) in the year 2000.
Subsequently in 2003, another committee chaired by Mr. Narayan Murthy
suggested further changes to Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement and the
current clause is mostly based on the recommendations made by the
Narayan Murthy Committee (NMC). Another committee set up by the Ministry
of Corporate Affairs called the JJ Irani Committee in 2005 further
recommended certain changes contrary to those suggested by the NMC,
which were incorporated in the previous bills introduced in the
Parliament, in an attempt to replace the Companies Act, 1956 (Act).
Unfortunately, the Companies Bill, 2009 was not approved by the
Parliament and therefore, another attempt has been made to replace the
Act in 2012. In the meanwhile, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs had
also introduced some voluntary guidelines in 2009 relating to
independent directors, but since it did not have any binding effect,
many of these guidelines are not being followed by most of the
companies.

Companies Bill, 2012

Whilst a detailed
comprehensive analysis of all the provisions in the Bill relating to
independent directors is beyond the scope of this article, an effort has
been made to highlight some of the important provisions and discuss
their implications.

Qualifications and Neutrality

The
Bill has prescribed detailed qualification criteria for independent
directors, which were not set out in so much detail in the Listing
Agreement. It is evident from the provisions in the Bill regarding
independent directors that much emphasis has been placed on ensuring
complete independence of independent directors. The effect of these
provisions is to ensure that an independent director has neither any
relationship with or any interest in the company and/or its group
companies, nor is he incentivised by them in any manner, which may lead
to bias in favour of the company where he is so appointed. Certain
criteria which a person must satisfy in order to be eligible for
appointment as an independent director have been discussed below.

An
existing or past promoter, key managerial personnel, or employee of the
company or its holding/ subsidiary/ associate companies (Group
Companies) cannot be an independent director. Despite the wide
definition of associate companies, an argument may be made that this
restriction is reasonable, since promoters, key managerial personnel and
employees of these associate companies may have vested interests in the
company. However, the Bill also prohibits relatives of promoters and
directors of the company or it’s Group Companies from being independent
directors. Further, persons whose relatives are key managerial persons
or employees of the company or its Group Companies are also not
permitted to be independent directors. Considering the broad scope of
the definitions of the terms “relative” and “associate company”, the
list of people who are barred from being independent directors in listed
companies may become huge, especially if the group structure is
multilayered or complicated.

Another restriction in the Bill is
that the independent director, along with his relatives, may not hold
more than 2 % of the voting power of the company. It is not clear
whether indirect holdings (through companies controlled by the
director/relatives) would be aggregated or only direct holdings would be
considered for this purpose. In case of the former, identification of
all such entities/persons and verification of their shareholding in the
company would be an extremely tedious process and may lead to an
enormous work overload for the compliance/ secretarial teams.

An
independent director must not have had “any pecuniary relationship”
with the company, its Group Companies, or their promoters or directors
for a period of two years prior to appointment, or during his term. This
provision is significantly more restrictive than the requirements under
the Listing Agreement at present, which state that an independent
director must not have any material pecuniary relationship or
transaction, which could affect his independence. Therefore, minor
transactions and pecuniary relationships between the company and an
independent director currently do not disqualify him. The proposed ban
on any pecuniary relationship for independent directors in the Bill may
be unreasonably restrictive, as there are situations where a transaction
or relationship of the director may safely be considered to be of a
nature which cannot affect the director’s independence. For example, a
proposed director may have a standard fixed deposit with a banking
company, on the rates applicable to the general public, which may be
ordinarily considered to be a perfectly mundane and ordinary transaction
which cannot possibly lead to any bias. However, this would be
considered to be a pecuniary relationship with the banking company and
would prevent the person from being appointed as an independent
director. Also, the broad definition of the term “associate company”
further exacerbates the restrictive nature of the provision, which
prohibits pecuniary relationships with such companies as well as their
promoters and directors. A proposed independent director may have some
on-going transactions with a director of an associate company, which may
not contribute significantly to the director’s income, and even
otherwise, may not be very significant for him. However, due to the
provisions of the Bill, which prohibit “any pecuniary relationship”,
such a person is disqualified from being appointed as an independent
director.

Several other restrictions have been built into the
Bill to ensure that there is no financial nexus between the independent
director and the company. For example, the Bill prohibits independent
directors from receiving stock options of the company. This is also a
change from the provisions of Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement, read
with relevant SEBI regulations, under which independent directors are
presently allowed to hold stock options in the company. Apart from the
restriction on stock options, the remuneration of independent directors
has also been limited to sitting fees, reimbursement of expenses for
participation in the Board and other meetings and profit related
commission as may be approved by the shareholders. Independent directors
also cannot be the chief executive or director or hold any other
similar position in any nonprofit organisation that receives twenty-five
percent or more of its receipts from the company, its promoters,
directors, Group Company or that holds two percent or more of the voting
rights of the company.

The fact that nominee directors are
excluded from being independent directors is another example of the
emphasis placed by the Bill on ensuring absolute neutrality of the
independent director. Under the Listing Agreement, nominee directors of
lenders/investors are deemed to be independent directors. However, the
Bill also expands the scope of the term ‘nominee director’ to mean any
director nominated by “any financial institution in pursuance of the
provisions of any law for the time being in force, or of any agreement,
or appointed by any Government, or any other person to represent its
interests”, and states that all such nominee directors may not be
classified as independent directors. It is true that a nominee director
may only be concerned about the decisions of the company which may
affect the interests of the entity/person who has nominated him.
Considering that, it may not be proper to deem such a director to be an
independent director, since the very nature of his position indicates
that he would put the interests of the nominating entity above the
interests of the company. Therefore, in this regard, the changes
introduced by the Bill may be considered necessary and appropriate.

Process of appointment and due diligence
The
Bill mandates that prospective independent directors may be selected
from databanks maintained by institutions to be notified by the ?entral
Government. It is not clear on what basis would people be permitted to
register themselves in this database, although the Bill states that
rules would be prescribed for maintenance of such databases. Further,
the Bill provides that the terms of appointment of an independent
director must be approved by a resolution of the shareholders.

The
Code for Independent Directors in Schedule IV of the Bill (Code) also
prescribes that the terms of appointment of the director must be
formalised through a letter of appointment that inter alia sets out the
fiduciary duties that come with such an appointment along with
accompanying liabilities. The concept of “fiduciary duty” being a broad
and subjective one, it is not clear what duties and liabilities would
have to be set out in the appointment letter. Further, it is also not
clear whether these fiduciary duties are in addition to the duties of
directors already prescribed under Clause 166 of the Bill, which are by
themselves quite burdensome and broad in scope. The fact that several
subjectively worded fiduciary duties have to be reduced to writing in
their appointment letter would not be a very appealing prospect for
independent directors.

The Bill further states that the company
is responsible for conducting due diligence on the candidate to ensure
that such person is not disqualified from being an independent director,
thus putting the onus for selection of a fit and proper person on the
company. There are two aspects to this due diligence exercise that
companies will have to conduct. Firstly, they would have to check
internally and with Group Companies regarding matters such as the
candidate’s shareholding, employment or association with them. This
aspect of the due diligence may be relatively simpler. However, to do a
complete diligence on the candidate, the provisions of the Bill require
the company to source information from several external entities and
sources. Listed companies must identify each auditing, consulting and
legal firm in which the proposed independent director is or was an
employee, or partner or proprietor of, and then ensure that such firms
have had no relationship with the company or its Group Companies.
Further, a comprehensive list of the relatives of the independent
directors, and all companies and other entities controlled by them would
have to be prepared and it must be verified that none of them hold more
than 2% of the share capital of the company, or its Group Companies or
have pecuniary relationships with such companies which go beyond the
prescribed thresholds in the Bill.

It is obvious that these
background checking and verification procedures would be extremely
onerous, resource-intensive and time-consuming for any company to carry
out.

The provisions of the Bill are unclear on whether listed
companies are required to constantly verify on an ongoing basis that the
independent director does not fall afoul of the prescribed criteria.
The Bill merely states that company must conduct the due diligence on a
proposed independent director “before appointment” of such director.
However, the provisions of Clause 149 (8), which state that the company
and independent director must comply with the Code, read with the terms
of the Code itself, may be interpreted to mean that the company and the
director are jointly and severally responsible for ensuring that the
independent director is not disqualified. This view may lead to several
absurd situations, where the company may be held responsible and
penalised for events entirely beyond its control. For instance, an
associate company, over whose decisions or actions a company may not
have control, may appoint a firm of auditors where an independent
director of the concerned company is a partner, thus disqualifying him
from being an independent director. In the ordinary course today, a
company may not even be aware of the auditors of its associate
companies, but the provisions of the Bill may require it to constantly
monitor such matters completely irrelevant to its business for the
purposes of ensuring compliance.

Participation

Certain
provisions of the Bill are aimed at preventing situations existing
presently, where independent directors are often appointed by companies
merely to be a rubber stamp for decisions taken by the Board. One such
provision is the mandatory presence of independent director on a number
of committees of listed companies. One third of the audit committee,
half of the nomination and remuneration committee, and at least one
member of the newly conceptualised corporate social responsibility
committee, must be independent directors.

The Code prescribes
that independent directors are required to hold at least one meeting
each year, without the attendance of non-independent directors and
members of management. In such meetings the independent directors shall
review the performance of the other directors, the Chairman and the
Board as a whole and asses the information flow between the management
and the Board. While there is no obligation on the Board to accept any
recommendations which may emerge from such a meeting, this provision is
welcome as it encourages discussion among the independent directors and
greater awareness of and participation in the functioning of the Board.
Another example of provisions encouraging participation by independent
directors is relating to Board meeting notices. The Bill provides that
Board meetings may be called by notice shorter than seven days only if
at least one independent director (if any) on the Board is present at
such meeting.

With regard to the composition of the Board, the
Bill mandates that one third of the Board of listed companies is
required to be independent directors. It may be pertinent to note that
this obligation is actually less strict than the one currently imposed
by the Listing Agreement, where if the Chairman of a listed company is
an executive director, half of the Board is required to be independent
directors. Finally, the re-appointment of independent directors is
required to be made on the basis of a report of performance evaluation
by the Board. However, the manner and criteria for such evaluation has
not been prescribed in detail.

The aggregate effect of the above
mentioned provisions would hopefully put a stop to the phenomenon of
token independent directors who are appointed by companies merely for
compliance with the Listing Agreement provisions, and who are
essentially proxies for the promoters.

Rotation

As
per the Bill, independent directors are not subject to the annual
rotation procedure applicable to other directors on the Board. They are
permitted to have a term of five years, with a limit of two consecutive
terms. After two such terms, a mandatory break of three years is
prescribed, during which the director again must not have any
association with the concerned company. It appears that the five year
term and exclusion from annual rotation is intended to protect
independent directors and prevent promoters and major shareholders from
forcing retirement onto directors who do not toe the line. Nevertheless,
it does not mean that a non-performing and non-cooperative independent
director can be complacent about his position, as his re-appointment by
the members is subject to the results of a performance evaluation, as
mentioned above. However, on Boards where the majority of directors are
independent, provisions relating to compulsory rotation and fixed term
may prove to be an issue, as the executive directors may need to retire
to meet the quota of directors required to retire by rotation.

Analysis

Upon a reading of the above, it is evident that:

•    There is an expectation that there will be an increased level of active participation by independent directors;

•   
The duties of independent directors are quite onerous, and in certain
cases, rather ill-defined and vague, such as the wide and subjective
nature of the Code;

•    The terms of appointment and penal
consequences for non-compliance with fiduciary duties are reduced to
writing in the terms of appointment of the independent director;

•   
Independent directors are required to constantly monitor their
relationships and transactions, including those of their relatives and
related entities in order to ensure that they don’t fall afoul of the
prescribed qualifications; and

•    There are several
restrictions on the remuneration allowed to be provided to independent
directors, including a prohibition on stock options.

Apart from
the fact that companies are required to test persons against all the
criteria laid down in the Bill to ensure that they qualify as
‘independent directors’, it will be difficult to convince people to
become independent directors on the Boards of companies in light of the
stringent and onerous responsibilities, duties and penalties listed
above. These harsh and inflexible provisions will deter people from
becoming independent directors, creating a scarcity of persons
interested in being appointed on Boards as independent directors.

Conclusion

While
the provisions of the Bill regarding independent directors may have
been drafted with noble and laudable intentions, it is evident that
compliance with such a restrictive regime would prove to be a nightmare
for companies. Indeed, as set out above, in certain situations
compliance may be impossible. The move towards a corporate governance
environment where independent directors are neutral and ‘independent’ in
the true sense of the term, is an effort which needs to be appreciated.
However, the provisions require a fair amount of tweaking in order to
ensure that they are effective without being unduly onerous or in some
cases impossible to achieve.

DAUGHTER’S RIGHT IN COPARCENARY

fiogf49gjkf0d
Editor’s Note
Two articles by the learned author on the same subject were published in the Journal, (BCAJ — January 2009 and BCAJ — May 2010). This article explains the subject further.

Hindu Law is quite complex and it has become more complex in spite of (or possibly as a result of) its codification. As has been seen in case of other laws enacted by the Parliament, imprecise language has often resulted in spate of litigation for the exact interpretation of the law.

However, one cannot blame only the Legislature. One additional reason for the problem is that while some part of Hindu Law has been codified (e.g., succession, adoption, marriage), the rest of customary Hindu Law still remains uncodified. Subjects like joint family, coparcenary, etc. have not yet been codified. Moreover, rules under the old Hindu Law differ in respect of different schools of Hindu Law like Mitakshara, Dayabhaga, etc.

In my two articles on ‘Daughter’s Right in Coparcenary’ (BCAJ — January 2009 Page 509 and BCAJ — May, 2010 Page 15) I attempted to answer some of the questions affecting a daughter’s right in coparcenary and attempted to analyse some decided case law on the subject.

The Hindu Succession Act, 1956 (‘the Act’) was amended by the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005 (‘the Amendment Act’) with effect from 9th September, 2005. Section 6 of the Act, which was substituted by the Amendment Act to the extent it is relevant to this Article reads as under:

“6. Devolution of interest in coparcenary property. — (1) On and from the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005, in a joint Hindu family governed by the Mitakshara law, the daughter of a coparcener shall, —

(a) by birth become a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son;

(b) have the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son;

(c) be subject to the same liabilities in respect of the said coparcenary property as that of a son,

and any reference to a Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to include a reference to a daughter of a coparcener:

Provided x x x

(2) to (5) x x x

Section 6 of the Act (as amended by the Amendment Act) inter alia provides that on and from the commencement of the Amendment Act, in a joint Hindu family governed by Mitakshara law, the daughter of a coparcener by birth becomes a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son. The section further provides that any property to which a female Hindu becomes entitled by virtue of the provision shall be held by her with the incidents of coparcenary ownership and shall be regarded as property capable of being disposed of by her by testamentary disposition.

In customary Hindu Law, according to Mitakshara School, the female heirs were not members of the coparcenary. With a view to remove gender discrimination in our laws and to give equal status to a female, various States in the country made State amendments in the Act conferring right on a daughter in the coparcenary property. However, such amendments were not done uniformly by all the States resulting in different provisions applicable in different States. Moreover, while certain rights were conferred on unmarried daughters, there were restrictions as to the rights of a married daughter. Therefore, the Amendment Act was supposed to bring about the uniformity in the country so as to give benefit to a daughter, irrespective of her being married or otherwise.

It is unfortunate that the amendments brought about by the Amendment Act have resulted in a large number of court cases spread over the country.

In my last article I have dealt with a question whether a daughter would get benefit of the Amendment Act if her father was not alive at the time of coming into force of the Amendment Act. In the present article I propose to deal with another controversy on interpretation of the amended section.

Section 6(1) of the Act starts with words ‘on and from’ and goes on to deal with ‘on and from’ the commencement of . . . . . . the daughter of a coparcener shall by birth become a coparcener’. The questions which have arisen before courts in this behalf are (i) what do the words ‘on and from’ signify and (ii) whether the words ‘by birth become a coparcener’ make the Amendment Act retrospective.

In the case of Sugalabai v. Gundappa & Ors., ILR 2007 Kar. 4790 [also 2008(2) Kar LJ 406], the Karnataka High Court had occasion to consider the effect of the words ‘on and from’. It has observed that the words ‘on and from’ mean ‘immediately and after’ the commencement of the Act. It is observed that in other words as soon as the Amendment Act came into force, the daughter of a coparcener becomes by birth a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son. The Court also observed that there was nothing in the Act which showed that only those born on and after the commencement of the Act would become coparceners and it was held that even a daughter who was born prior to the Amendment Act became a coparcener immediately on and after the Amendment Act.

It has been held in the case of Pravat Chandra Pattnaik & Ors. v. Sarat Chandra Pattnaik & Anr., AIR 2008 Orissa 133 that the aforesaid amendment was enacted for removing the gender discrimination that prevailed leading to oppression and negation of the fundamental right of equality to women and to render social justice by giving them equal status in society. The Act came into force from 9th September 2005 and the statutory provisions u/s.6 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956 thereof created a new right. The provisions are not expressly made retrospective by the Legislature. The Act is clear and there is no ambiguity. Therefore, words cannot be interpolated. They do not bear more than one meaning. The Act is therefore, prospective. It creates a substantive right in favour of the daughter. The daughter gets a right of a coparcener from the date when the Amended Act came into force. Consequently, the contention that only the daughters who were born after 2005 would be treated as coparceners was not accepted. It specifically clarifies that the daughter gets a right as a coparcener from the year 2005, whenever she may have been born.

In a very recent unreported judgment, the Bombay High Court has referred to the above cases with approval and taken similar view (see Sadashiv Sakharam Patil v. Chandrakant Gopal Desale — Appeal from Order No. 265 of 2011 etc. decided on 6th September, 2011). Accordingly, these decisions close (at least for the time being) that for the purpose of getting benefit of the amended provision it is not necessary that the birth of the daughter should also be after commencement of the Amendment Act.

Therefore, as per the Law laid down by Courts in above cases, on coming into force of the Amendment Act i.e., 9th September, 2005, the daughter of a coparcener becomes by birth a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son even if she was born before the Amendment Act coming into force.

The Karnataka High Court had an occasion to consider one new angle on the same subject. The question which arose before the Court was that while the daughter gets a right to be a coparcener from birth when can the right be said to start. In the case of Pushpalatha N. V. v. Padma V. reported in AIR 2010 Karnataka 124, the Court has inter alia held as follows:

“The Act when it was enacted, the Legislature had no intention of conferring rights which are conferred for the first time on a female relative of a coparcener including a daughter prior to the commencement of the Act. Therefore, while enacting this substituted provision of section 6 also it cannot be made retrospective in the sense applicable to the daughters born before the Act came into force. In the Act before amendment the daughter of a coparcener was not conferred the status of a coparcener. Such a status is conferred only by the Amendment Act in 2005. After conferring such status, right to coparcenary property is given from the date of her birth. Therefore, it should necessarily follow such a date of birth should be after the act came into force, i.e., 17th June, 1956. There was no intention either under the unamended Act or the Act after amendment to confer any such right on a daughter of a coparcener, who was born prior to 17th June, 1956. Therefore, in this context also the opening words of the amending section assume importance. The status of a coparcener is conferred on a daughter of a coparcener on and from the commencement of the Amendment Act, 2005. The right to property is conferred from the date of birth. But, both these rights are conferred under the Act and, therefore, it necessarily follows the daughter of a coparcener who is born after the Act came into force alone will be entitled to a right in the coparcenary property and not a daughter who was born prior to 17th June, 1956.”

Therefore, sum total of the principles laid down by the case law discussed above, is that while on coming into force of the Amendment Act dated 9th September, 2005, the daughter of a coparcener becomes by birth a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son even if she was born before the Amendment Act, such a right is subject to the condition that she is born after 17th June, 1956 i.e., coming into force of the Act. The daughter born before the Act came into force does not get any such right.

Single-Window Registration — a new approach

fiogf49gjkf0d
Presently, most of the Indians think that corruption is a problem bigger than pollution, poverty, poor infrastructure, delayed judgments, etc. It seems true to a great extent because we would have been in a better condition, had there not been corruption.
It is a known truth that bureaucrats or politicians work only when they have some personal interest. Likewise it is also well known that we the public make bureaucrats or politicians corrupt for our personal benefits. The result is that the two parties involved are benefited, but India suffers.
The public becomes a part of corruption willingly or unwillingly due to unnecessary legal requirements and tedious procedures at government departments, which lead to the need of a mediator, hence corruption.
If we take a look at working in our field i.e., chartered accountancy, we will find that to set up a business a client needs to get various permissions from government departments in the form of registrations, licences, NOCs, etc.

 To be more specific, to start a business as a private limited company, a client has to apply for the following registrations, licences and numbers:

  •  Registration — Company registration, Industry registration, Service tax registration, VAT & CST, Gumashta or Nagar Nigam, STPI registration, etc.

  •  Numbers —Director Identification Number, Permanent Account Number and Tax Account Number.

  •  Codes and Certificates — Import export code, Digital signature certificate. The main problems in getting the above are:

  •  All these are government agencies, but act as independent to each other.

  •  Most of the documents needed by the various government departments are the same and the businessman has to resubmit them again and again to these departments/agencies. A businessman collects registration from one department and submits it to another department for further registration or licensing.

  •  The businessman also has to fill registration forms in various formats and deposit the registration fees in various challan forms with typical challan number system at pre-nominated deposit centres or banks.

  •  This is a tedious process and leads to birth of agents or mediators, which in turn leads to bribery or corruption.
It will be a repetition to say that technology can control or stop corruption in the government departments. The government has already taken successful steps by making Income tax, service tax, and registration of company work (MCA) online. A solution can come if a centralised system can be designed:

  •  where documents once submitted or generated by one government agency can be used again and again by various departments.

  •  where available information can be automatically used to fill various registration forms and challans.

  •  where a businessman can amend his details and they are automatically intimated to various authorities.

  •  where a businessman can himself apply for registration and pay the required fee online through credit card or online bank account.

In my view all the above are possible through a single-window (SW) registration website. This Single Window Registration website will be an attempt to expedite and simplify information flows between trade and the government and bring meaningful gains to all parties.

In practical terms, an SW environment will provide one entrance (either physical or electronic) for the submission and handling of all data and documents related to the release and clearance of a transaction. This entry point is managed by one agency (may be like NSDL) which informs the appropriate agencies and/or performs combined controls. Centralised registration server may work in the following way :
It is important to mention here that many state governments have worked and are already working through single-window registration. So, the new website will be an attempt to link all departmental websites with single-window registration website. In turn the new website will provide all necessary details directly to the concerned government department.
Public key and private key concept may also be implemented. Public key will be given to various departments to view business details and private key will be given to business for alterations or modifications in its details.

 (Paper formalities for registrations, licensing, etc. in the proposed system is illustrated in Annexure.)

Conclusion:
If this suggestion is implemented, then in my opinion this would be a great relief to businessmen and will lead to lesser dependency on mediators, resulting in less corruption.
levitra

A Journey from a Family-owned to a Professionally Managed Listed Company

fiogf49gjkf0d
From a small-sized family-owned company to becoming a large professionally managed public listed company in the pharmaceutical industry, the journey was not an easy one for us. The Company leadership had to confront many challenges from time to time for the transition from an entrepreneur-driven company to a professionally managed company. The leadership had to undergo significant changes in terms of roles, orientation, business strategy, organisational culture, governance, systems, decisionmaking, structures and overall way of working.

The Company incorporated in 1999. It started as a trading company with the seed capital raised from within the family. At that time, it was entirely family-owned and run. Within a few months, stepping on the dream of being a global company since beginning, the first international office was inaugurated. Also parallely, the first manufacturing facility with three production lines was set up in India. In a short span of two years the sterile manufacturing facility received an important certification and the Company also touched an important revenue landmark. This brought immense confidence to us and gave us a direction towards the upward journey. Integrity, implementation, excellence, innovation and patient satisfaction became our values.

In 2003, the Company received approvals from regulatory authorities from various other developing countries. The global growth strategy also permitted the Company to apply in various developed markets. Still, the organisation’s size was small and structure was not very much in order, hence most of the functions were directly managed by the family members. Managing an international set-up for a family-run company was obviously placing a great deal of pressure on the top management. The time had come for us to transit to the next orbit. Today we have market a presence in 76 countries and this has been achieved by decentralising the organisation and creating various presidents, business heads, division heads, and managers.

When I stepped into the MD’s role, I first focussed on new product development and streamlining of manufacturing and operations of the Company. We brought advanced technology equipments and automated machines to add up to manufacturing capacity and to enhance productivity. We established management systems and processes and review mechanisms across organisation which were to become base for advanced transition later.

In 2006, one of the largest international private equity funds invested in our Company. The introduction of this private equity fund in the Company was a crucial point in the transition of our Company towards professional management. We inducted independent directors to improve our corporate governance and to attain the highest standards of corporate governance. Improving the corporate governance helped us in maximising the long-term value for all stakeholders of the Company, including shareholders, employees, customers, society, etc. Our corporate governance philosophy and practice consists of the following facets:

To make timely disclosures and adopt transparent policies
To show greater responsibility and fairness in dealings with all
To demonstrate the highest level of accountability towards employees
To conduct our business in an ethical manner.

We introduced more robust systems like SAP and centralised inventory system. On one hand, where the business was flourishing in terms of back-end, on the other, the front-end needed further focus to match with the market demands and be at the edge with the competition. Hence, as MD I took charge of Businesses (Sales and Marketing) and focussed more on visiting countries, meeting people, getting market insights and devising international marketing strategies. We established a great market presence across various regulated markets as well as emerging markets. USFDA approval for sterile injectable manufacturing facility was one of the greatest milestones which opened a new scope for expansion of the business. The Company also focussed on enhancing visibility in the market in terms of participation in conferences and competing in awards and came out with flying colours. We received several awards. We also ramped up effective management of back-end and front-end as per demand of time-witnessed manifold growth in business, presence across countries, thousand-plus registrations across.

Looking at the volume and growth of the company, it became quintessential to streamline and professionalise the organisation structure. We developed the second-level and third-level management cadre and assigned functional accountability to non-family members who needed to independently handle their teams. Delegation of responsibility and giving authority to the second level helped improve the organisation and also develop a better workforce. We maintained inherent cultural values, focussed on people policies and practices which later helped the Company achieve recognition as one of ‘the Best Places to Work for in India’ and #1 Healthcare Company to work for.

The Company started to work on its dream of going public, following a culture of continuously upgrading best practices in corporate governance and management quality. The Company shifted gears and prepared itself in all aspects to take this big move. In 2010, the Company became a listed company. This was the next big thing for us and has put us in a completely different bracket. Through the IPO, the Company raised proceeds which it has already started investing in augmentation of manufacturing capabilities. Listing brings with it greater responsibility and greater external scrutiny but also puts your company on a higher pedestal.

Throughout, the journey, the Company made sure that its growth does not get hampered in bringing about a professional management approach. We always believed in ourselves and will continue to do so, thereby removing every hurdle that comes on the way. The underlying mantra behind the success story is ‘dream big and work hard’. As we look back on these 12 years, we have transitioned from a family-run and owned company to a professionally-run company to a PE-funded company and finally to a family-owned listed company. The road has been long and arduous but very satisfying and fulfilling. We have miles to go before we sleep but we believe in one motto which has been our mantra through the years:

“The world changes view, if you change yourself”.

levitra

Family managed companies in a globalising economy

fiogf49gjkf0d
The role of the family managed companies in a globalising economy that the Editorial Board of the BCA Journal has chosen for discussion is timely and opportune. It is timely because we are now living in a world that is getting increasingly interdependent. The natural barriers like mountains and oceans have ceased to be barriers for preventing the interdependence of nations. Now our currencies are linked, commerce is one and our fortunes are interdependent. What happens somewhere, matters everywhere. India and Pakistan acquiring capabilities to produce nuclear weapons are not only a matter of regional concern but are matters of concern across the globe.

The topic is opportune because the ‘family managed companies’, are now a powerful force and play a dominant role in an economy. Family business has graduated long ago from ‘mom-and-pop stores’ to giant companies like Cargil having headquarters in the United States. Cargil1 the family controlled company2 is the rule in most of the world. Statistics indicate that family controlled company businesses account for 99% of Italian businesses, 70% of Portuguese, 75% of British, 80% Spanish, between 85% and 90% of Swiss, 90% of Swedish and 80% of Canadian. Even in the United States between 80% and 95% of the companies are family controlled.

As of 20093, the private sector represented 95% of all companies in China, the vast majority are family controlled firms and most of the remaining firms are state owned enterprises. The rural areas are heavily populated by small farms.

In India,4 family businesses account for as much as 95% of all Indian businesses. Nearly 80% of family companies dominate Indian economy. About 461 of the 500 most valuable companies are under family control. In addition, the family controlled businesses also comprise large groups like the Tata group and the Aditya Birla group to mention a few. “IT giant TCS and financial services major HDFC (once a family managed company) have been named as India’s two best managed companies in an annual poll conducted by Finance Asia magazine. TCS and HDFC are followed by IT major Infosys, telecom giant, Bharti Airtel and PSU behemoth ONGC in the list of the top-five best managed companies in the country”, says a report in The Times of India on 18th May 2011. The best managed companies are thus a mixed bag.

“The Aditya Birla Group5 is also a hard-charging multinational corporation emerging from that country. (India). The Birla Group produces and sells such products as fibre, chemicals, cement, metals, yarns and textiles, apparel, fertiliser, and carbon black (a petroleum-based material used in the manufacture of rubber and plastic). It is a US $ 30 billion conglomerate operating in about 25 countries, with 60% of its revenues now coming from outside India.”

Competition that firms face now, as we pointed out earlier, is no longer local. Competition cannot remain confined within the borders of a nation. In many industries, competition has now become global. Textile and clothing, automobile, IT, and ITES are just a few examples of industries which now face global competition. Firms compete globally with global strategies in mind. Firms compete globally by participating in global trade and through direct foreign investments. The family managed companies must therefore face global competition.

What are family controlled companies? Do they have the vitality and the dynamism to compete globally? The purpose of this article is to discuss these questions.

A family business6 is a business in which one or more members of one or more families have a significant ownership interest and significant commitments toward the business’ overall well-being.

“Family firms7 were often able to take a longerterm, more strategic approach and kept stronger relations with their customers, says Harvard Business School professor Belén Villalonga, who has just completed a study comparing the performance of 4,000 family and public firms in the U.S. and Europe. Between 2006 and 2009, she says, family controlled firms both gained market share — increasing sales 2% faster than non-family firms — and outperformed their public peers by 6% on company market value. Another report, by the German consultancy Roland Berger, looked at family owned firms in Europe’s biggest economy and found they navigated the crisis with better liquidity and less debt. This all builds on what has become a decade-long trend of family firms outperforming the market, says Villalonga.”

The Indian experience seems to support this view. Indian companies like Wipro, TCS, Reliance Industries have achieved impressive growth in their sales revenues, exports, profits and market capitalisation. The development of all these organisations in a short period is truly astounding.

Our discussion so far should not lead us to the conclusion that all is well with family managed companies. The carcases of the closed textile mills in Ahmedabad show the utter failure of the family management of the textile industry, the oldest Indian industry. These seasoned captains of the industry could not anticipate the changing competition in the Indian textile industry and therefore could not forge a new competitive strategy to survive in the changed environment.

“From8 behemoths such as Ford to mom-andpop shops, they (family businesses) share a set of common challenges in today’s business climate.” This quotation from Stacy Perman’ article ‘Taking pulse of family business’ aptly describes the situation in India. The small and medium enterprises in India face similar challenges as the large family businesses face. Similarly, the small and medium family businesses have the same dynamism as the large family businesses have. We illustrate our reasoning with the help of an example from the textile and clothing industry. In Appendix I, we present the data about the export of textiles and clothing. The Indian exporters of textiles are mostly medium and large textile mills that are large family controlled [Except the textile mills owned by the National Textile Corporation (NTC) that are not family controlled textile mills. However, the contribution of the NTC mills to export is not substantial and we can safely ignore it]. This data shows the Chinese exports of textiles are about 2.42 times the Indian exports of textiles.

On the other hand, the Indian exporters of clothing are small to medium family owned firms. Here again we notice that the Chinese exports of clothing are 2.79 times the Indian exports of clothing (The firms in the clothing industry are small and medium family owned businesses). These examples support our point that small and medium family businesses have the same dynamism as the large family businesses have.

It may not be out of place to cite another example of a medium-sized family owned pharmaceutical company to reinforce our point about the dynamism in the medium-sized family owned companies. The name of this company is Shiva Pharmachem Pvt. Ltd. whose annual sales in the year 2009-10 were about one billion rupees (Rupees one hundred crore). However, before we discuss the example of Shiva Pharmachem Pvt. Ltd., we explain below some terms that we have used in discussing the example of Shiva Pharmachem Pvt. Ltd.

Value added. Following Paul Samuelson9, we will define the term value added as the sales an organisation achieves minus the items that it buys form outside to achieve the sales that it makes. Some scholars define value added as:

Total income – items bought from outside

– depreciation.

(1.1)

 

 

Value
added

Value added per employee

 

 

=
(1.2)

 

 

Total no. of employees

Capital employed. We will define capital
employed as net worth plus long-term loans or as net fixed assets plus
working capital.

 

Return on Capital employed

We will define return on Capital employed as

Return on

Profit before tax –Financial

charges

Capital employed =

 

 

 

(1.3)

Capital employed

 

 

 

 

 

Margin on sales

 

 

 

 

Profit
after tax – Financial charges

Margin on sales =

 

 

 

 

(1.4)

Net income

 

 

 

 

Capital turnover

 

 

 

Net income

 

 

Capital turnover

=

 

 

(1.5)

 

 

 

Capital employed

 

 

From these definitions, it is easy to see
that

 

 

Capital turnover x Margin on sales

 

 

= Return on capital employed.

(1.6)



Why must we consider both the measures, valued added per employee and the return on capital employed? Will it not suffice if we focus our attention only on the return on capital employed? The answer to this question is no. It is important that an organisation must achieve high value added per employee and a high return on capital employed10. The reason for this is that the value added per employee judges the organisation’s effectiveness in using its human resources. Similarly, the return on capital employed judges the organisation’s effectiveness in using the capital at its disposal. An organisation will not prosper in the long run if it does not effectively use its human capital and monetary resources. Is it possible for an organisation to earn a high return on capital employed but earn very low value added per employee? Unfortunately, the answer is yes. The dabbawalas of Mumbai provide an excellent example of an organisation that earns a high return on capital employed but earns very low value addition per employee. In Appendix I, we provide the details.

We now return to the example of Shiva Pharmachem Pvt. Ltd. that we want to cite in support of our point. In Table 1 below, we show the salient features of the company’s financial statements for the years ending 31st March 2010 and 2009, respectively.

                    Salient features of
Shiva Pharmachem Pvt. Ltd.’s financial statements

 

Units

Year ending

Year ending

Percentage

 

 

31-3-2010

31-3-2009

change 2010

 

 

 

 

over 2009

 

 

 

 

 

Total income

Rs.

1,098,460,704

829,779,826

24.46%

 

 

 

 

 

Capital employed

Rs.

317,443,961

193,143,180

39.16%

 

 

 

 

 

Value added

Rs.

995,495,000

731,879,761

26.48%

 

 

 

 

 

Value added per employee

Rs.

2,488,738

1,829,699

26.48%

 

per employee

 

 

 

 

per year

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Profit before tax

Rs.

202,661,937

125,113,584

38.26%

 

 

 

 

 

Margin (profit before tax +

 

 

 

 

financial
charges)/Total income

%

20.22%

20.20%

0.05%

 

 

 

 

 

Return on capital employed

%

69.95%

86.8%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital turnover

Number

3.46

4.30

 

 

 

 

 

 

How effectively has Shiva Pharmachem Pvt. Ltd. used its human and monetary resources? Do the financial results of the company show the management’s dynamism? We now turn to a discussion of these questions.

From Table 1 we can glean the three important conclusions that we list below.

(1)    The firm’s return on capital employed declined in the financial year ending 31 March 2010. However, even the lower return on capital employed is sufficiently high to give the firm’s owners a good return on their capital.

(2)    The value addition the firm achieved in the year 2009-10 was higher than the value addition the firm achieved in the year 2008-09.

Further, the value added per employee in 2010 is much higher than the minimum a company should achieve. We believe that the minimum value addition that a company must achieve is about Rs.1,200,000. Now it is quite common to see that the average wage bill for a company per employee per year is about Rs.100,000.

(3)    Therefore, the results the company achieved comprise a mixed bag. It has used its human capital better than what it has used in the previous year. However, it has not used its monetary capital as well as it used in the previous year.

The reason for the decline in the return on capital employed is easy to see. From the last two rows of Table I, we see that in the year 2010, the margin the company achieved on sales was almost equal to the margin on sales the company achieved in the previous year. However, the turnover of capital the company achieved was much lower in the year 2010 than what the company achieved in the previous year. Now, we have from (1.6) Return on capital = margin on sales x turn over.

From Table 1 we can see that the margin on sales is almost the same as the margin on sales in 2009. However, the capital turnover in 2010 is much lower than the capital turnover in 2009. Therefore, the return on capital will be lower in 2010. Does the decline in the return on capital in the year ending on 31st March 2010 show the lack of the management’s dynamism in using the capital effectively? The answer is not conclusive. We must wait for at least two years before we come to that conclusion. The decline in the return on capital employed shows the management’s enthusiasm to grow and develop rapidly by making substantial investment in the business. From Table 1 we can see that the capital employed in the company has increased by 39.16% in the year ending on 31st March 2010. Obviously, the management would not make such a large capital investment unless it has a strong desire to develop rapidly, and has the confidence in its abilities to earn a good return on the capital it invests. Here is another example of a family managed company that has the vitality to participate actively in a globalising business. Having achieved high levels of productivity that we measure by its value addition per employee and return on capital employed, Shiva Pharmachem Pvt. Ltd., we have no hesitation in saying that the company is ready to prosper and develop in a globalising economy.

However, all is not well with the family managed businesses. Stacy Perman in his report ‘Taking the Pulse of Family Business’11 observes

“Generally speaking, the failure rate for all private businesses is high. According to the Small Business Administration’s Office of Advocacy, 580,900 new businesses were launched in 2004, the most recent date available for data, while 576,200 closed. Given that only one in three family businesses succeeds in making it from the first to the second generation, it’s clear they have their own inherent risks.

Each succeeding generation has its own ideas about taking the company forward — or if, indeed, it wants to join the family business at all. Successful transition has always been crucial to the continued success of family businesses —and in the next ten years will see a major increase in the number of companies facing that hurdle, as more baby boomers begin to retire.”

Accordingly, the question arises as to whether and how boomers will pass the baton along to their children. The issue is fast becoming a critical one. The challenges to longevity are substantial.

For starters, many of the concepts that have been traditionally associated with family businesses have eroded and new sources of potential conflicts have arisen, as have new opportunities and challenges. Compared with 10 or 20 years ago, the sense of duty and obligation to join the family business has weak-ened, while the sense of entitlement has grown.

In the same vein Michael J. Conway12, JD and Ste-phen J. Baumgartner, MSc (Econ) observe “While there is entertainment value to the drama and intrigue which surround the Earnhardt, Wrigley, Murdoch, and Walton family owned businesses, their highly publicised trials and tribulations can also provide real-life lessons for family owned businesses that operate well out of the limelight. Family owned businesses face unique issues — succession planning, marriages and divorces, complicated relationships — as well as routine issues that emerge around turf battles, shareholder control, compensation structures, and processes for strategic decision-making. Without proper documentation in place to help address these and other issues when they arise, the family owned business is at risk from an operational, management and financial perspective.”

Closer at home, Professor D. Tripathi13 observes “Behind the glare of momentous changes wrought by liberalisation, a very significant development went almost unnoticed. This was the declining importance of business families in the nation’s life. A well-regarded observer of contemporary business scene has gone to the extent of suggesting that the joint family is dead for all practical purposes.” Professor Tripathi concludes by saying “These prognoses may or may not turn out to be correct, but the mounting crisis in family business is bound to greatly influence the course of private enterprise and its management in the future.”

This article would be incomplete without a discussion about the dichotomy between family managed companies and professionally managed companies. Rahul Bajaj is directionally correct in his comments on the dichotomy between family managed companies and professionally managed companies. According to Bajaj14 , “if a professionally managed firm means one that is managed by those who hold no equity in the enterprise, there is ‘no reason to believe that a non-owner is more competent than an owner. In fact, a lot of studies done recently in the U.S. show that family owned businesses are doing better than non-family managed companies.’ What is relevant in a competitive economy is that the company has to be efficiently managed.” To resolve the apparent dichotomy we must understand the significance of the word ‘profession.’ In the contemporary world management, practitioners and thinkers use two yardsticks to judge whether a business is profession. Below we list the yardsticks.

(1)    Are the practices in the business based on a body of knowledge that can stand a rigorous logical scrutiny as in medicine and engineering?

(2)    Is there a code of conduct in the business that puts service before self?

The last verse of the Bhagvadgita15 sums up the code of conduct extremely well. The last verse asks us “to unite vision (yoga) and energy (dhanuh) and not allow the former to degenerate into madness and the latter into savagery. High thought and just action must ever be the aim of man”.

When we use the word profession to mean that its practices are based on rigorous logic and the profession demands a high code of conduct, then the dichotomy between professionally managed companies and the family managed companies disappears.

Unfortunately, the recent spate of ‘scams’ that we are witnessing leads us to ask “does the Indian business have a code of conduct? In India, businesses, both the professionally managed and the family managed, fail to measure up to the second yardstick.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Appendix I

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Appendix II?: India’s share of Textile and Clothing
Export in World T&C Export

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Textile Export

 

 

 

Clothing Export

 

Total T&C Export

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year

 

 

World

India

India

China

World

 

India

India

China

India

China

 

 

 

(US$ bn)

(%Share)

(US bn)

(%Share)

(US$ bn)

 

(%Share)

(US bn)

(%Share)

(US$ bn)

(US$ bn)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1994

 

133

2.91

3.87

8.98

141

 

2.63

3.71

16.86

7.53

35.55

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1995

 

152

2.86

4.35

9.14

158

 

2.60

4.11

15.19

8.47

37.97

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1996

 

153

3.23

4.94

7.93

166

 

2.54

4.22

15.07

9.15

37.15

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1997

 

156

3.37

5.26

8.88

178

 

2.45

4.36

17.91

9.59

45.63

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1998

 

150

3.04

4.56

8.55

186

 

2.57

4.78

16.16

9.34

42.87

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1999

 

146

3.48

5.08

8.92

185

 

2.79

5.16

16.29

10.24

43.12

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2000

 

159

3.78

6.01

10.17

198

 

3.12

6.18

18.21

12.18

52.21

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2001

 

149

3.6

5.36

11.27

194

 

2.83

5.49

18.91

10.86

53.48

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2002

 

156

3.87

6.04

13.19

206

 

2.93

6.04

20.03

12.07

61.86

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2003

 

175

3.92

6.86

15.41

234

 

2.83

6.62

22.24

13.47

78.96

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

196

3.58

7.02

17.1

261

 

2.55

6.66

23.74

13.64

95.28

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2005

 

205

4.13

8.47

20.01

278

 

3.31

9.20

26.68

17.67

115.21

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2006

 

219

4.27

9.35

22.27

311

 

3.27

10.17

30.63

19.52

144.07

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CAGR

 

4.24%

3.25%

7.63%

7.86%

6.81%

 

1.83%

8.77%

5.10%

8.26%

12.37%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

China/

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

India

 

 

 

 

2.42

 

 

 

 

2.79

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                                                                      (Source: http://stat.wto.org)
Appendix II
Pages reproduced from www.mydabbawala.com
ABOUT DABBAWALAS

A dabbawala (one who carries lunch box), some-times spelled dabbawalla, tiffinwalla, tiffinwallah or dabbawallah, is a person in the Indian city of Mumbai whose job is to carry and deliver freshly home-made food in lunch boxes to office workers. Tiffin is an old-fashioned English word for a light lunch, and sometimes for the box it is carried in. Dabbawalas are sometimes called tiffin-wallas.

Though the work sounds simple, it is actually a highly specialised trade that is over a century old and which has become integral to Mumbai’s culture.

The dabbawala originated when a person named Mahadeo Havaji Bachche started the lunch delivery service with about 100 men. Nowadays, Indian businessmen are the main customers for the dabbawalas, and the service often includes cooking as well as delivery.

Economic analysis

Everyone who works within this system is treated as an equal. Regardless of a dabbawala’s function, everyone gets paid about two to four thousand rupees per month (around 25-50 British pounds or 40-80 US dollars).

More than 175,000 or 200,000 lunches get moved every day by an estimated 4,500 to 5,000 dabbawalas, all with an extremely small nominal fee and with utmost punctuality. According to a recent survey, there is only one mistake in every 6,000,000 deliveries.

The BBC has produced a documentary on dabbawalas, and Prince Charles, during his visit to India, visited them (he had to fit in with their schedule, since their timing was too precise to permit any flexibility). Owing to the tremendous publicity, some of the dabbawalas were invited to give guest lectures in top business schools of India, which is very unusual. Most remarkably in the eyes of many Westerners, the success of the dabbawala trade has involved no western modern high technology. The main reason for their popularity could be the Indian people’s aversion to western style fast food outlets and their love of home-made food.

The New York Times reported in 2007 that the 125-year-old dabbawala industry continues to grow at a rate of 5-10% per year.

Low-tech and lean

Dabbawala in action: Although the service remains essentially low-tech, with the barefoot delivery men as the prime movers, the dabbawalas have started to embrace modern information technology, and now allow booking for delivery through SMS. A website, mydabbawala.com, has also been added to allow for online booking, in order to keep up with the times. An online poll on the website ensures that customer feedback is given pride of place. The success of the system depends on teamwork and time management that would be the envy of a modern manager. Such is the dedication and commitment of the barely literate and barefoot delivery men (there are only a few delivery women) who form links in the extensive delivery chain, that there is no system of documentation at all. A simple colour coding system doubles as an ID system for the destination and recipient. There are no multiple elaborate layers of management either — just three layers. Each dabbawala is also required to contribute a minimum capital in kind, in the shape of two bicycles, a wooden crate for the tiffins, white cotton kurta-pyjamas, and the white trademark Gandhi topi (cap). The return on capital is ensured by monthly division of the earnings of each unit.

Uninterrupted services

The service is uninterrupted even on the days of extreme weather, such as Mumbai’s characteristic monsoons. The local dabbawalas at the receiving and the sending ends are known to the customers personally, so that there is no question of lack of trust. Also, they are well accustomed to the local areas they cater to, which allows them to access any destination with ease. Occasionally, people communicate between home and work by putting messages inside the boxes. However, this was usually before the accessibility of instant telecommunications.

In literature

One of the two protagonists in Salman Rushdie’s controversial novel The Satanic Verses, Gibreel Farishta, was born as Ismail Najmuddin to a dabbawallah. In the novel, Farishta joins his father, delivering lunches all over Bombay (Mumbai) at the age of ten, until he is taken off the streets and becomes a movie star.

Dabbawalas feature as an alibi in the Inspector Ghote novel Dead on Time.

Etymology

The word ‘Dabbawala’ can be translated as ‘box-carrier’ or ‘lunch pail-man’. In Marathi and Hindi, ‘dabba’ means a box (usually a cylindrical aluminium container), while ‘wala’ means someone in a trade involving the object mentioned in the preceding term, e.g., punkhawala with ‘pankha’ which means a fan and ‘wala’ mean the person who owns the pankha (The one with the fan).

1.       Cally Jordan ‘The family
controlled company in Asia’ (Melbourne Law School: The University of Melbourne,
Legal Studies Research paper 334 P. 5).

 2 .      Ibid P. 4

 3 .    The author has downloaded this information from
the Internet.

 4.       Ibid

 5.      Vikas Sehgal, Ganesh
Panneer, and Ann Graham ‘A Family-owned Business Goes Global’ downloaded from
the Internet.

6.       The author has downloaded this definition from
the Internet.

7.      Sandy Huffaker/Corbis ‘In
Hard Times, Family Firms Do Better’ Newsweek P. 2. The author has downloaded
this article form the Internet. Consequently, the author did not have the
complete details about the date of publication of the article and the Volume
number of the Newsweek’s issue in which this article was published.

 

8. Stacy Perman ‘Taking pulse
of family business’ (Bloomberg Businessweek special report, 13 February 2006)


9. Paul A. Samuelson, Economics International, Student
Edition (Tenth Edition) P. 185.


10. “Productivity is the
prime determinant in the long run of a nation’s standard of living, for it is
the root cause of national per capita income. The productivity of human
resources determines their wages while the productivity with which capital is
deployed determines the return it earns for its holders.” Michael Porter, The
competitive advantages of nations (London and Basingstoke, 1990, The Macmillan
Press Ltd.) P. 6.

11.     Stacy Perman ‘Taking pulse
of family business’ (Bloomberg Businessweek special report 13 February 2006) P.
1

12.     Michael J. Conway, JD and
Stephen J. Baumgartner, MSc (Econ) ‘The Family-Owned Business’ (2007 Volume 10
Issue 2)P.1


 13.     D. Tripathi ‘Crisis in
family businesses’ (Chapter VIII from a forthcoming book) P. 1


 14.     Rahul Bajaj ‘on
Family-Owned Enterprises, the U.S. Auto Industry and Global Pollution’ (India
Knowledge@Wharton 16 November 2006) P. 1


 15.     S. Radhakrishnan ‘The
Bhagavadita’ (Bombay: Blackie & Son Publishers Pvt. Ltd. 1982) P. 383.

In defence of Family Companies

fiogf49gjkf0d
The Credit Suisse Family Index, a composite index based on an universe of 172 large US and European family companies, has regularly outperformed other major global indices like MSCI, S & P 500, etc. There are, in fact, various surveys conducted from time to time which generally conclude that family managed companies perform better than non-family managed companies. In the Indian context, an Economic Times analysis published in their issue dated September 22, 2006, avers that there is no clear difference in the performance of family and non-family companies. Yet, public debates in the recent years have mostly depicted the former in a very poor light. This article attempts to examine whether family companies are indeed the villains of the corporate world.

All data, analysis and arguments put forth in this article are in the context of listed companies alone for obvious reasons. Secondly, non-family company’s universe would include Government-owned companies which face certain challenges unique to them, but are not discussed in this article.

We now look deeply into the many pros and cons of family companies versus non-family companies normally tendered in any discussion on this subject. These can be grouped broadly under five categories and then objectively assessed. These five categories are as follows.

A. Family wealth versus Company wealth

By far the largest number of arguments against family companies is that they have poor standards of corporate governance. Many lay persons carry the impression that owner families tend to treat family wealth and company wealth as fungible. Memories are fresh of robber barons who in the past have expropriated a disproportionate wealth from public companies under their control.

Good governance is, without any doubt, a fundamental attribute of a ‘good company’. However, on the other hand, one cannot just assume that a non-family company would have passed the governance test automatically. The latter, if controlled by self-serving professionals, could be as bad. There is enough evidence to bear this fact.

Hence, at the end of the day, a robust regulatory environment and an active set of independent board members can alone ensure similar standards of governance in either class of companies.

B. Control versus Ownership

The second issue is that families exert control over their companies far in excess of their economic interests. Though it appears serious on the face of it, we think it is a non-issue for three reasons.

(i) At the end of the day, whether professionals or families, there has to be a single point of control over the affairs of the company. Without this, the company will not pull in one direction. As long as the governance issues are reasonably addressed, it does not matter the percentage holding of the controlling entity.

(ii) In India, in fact, there is a tendency of the family to keep its holding as high as possible. Data shows that during the last decade many of India’s top families have increased their stake in their leading companies. (ET dated 20th June, 2011).

(iii) And, finally, the market now has a takeover code that would dissuade families to mismanage their companies whilst having a small stake.

The above two categories cover most of the issues that are listed as negatives of family companies. These were, in fact, very significant negatives of such companies in the past. It is our case that in the current environment they are not necessarily applicable to only one class of companies. On the other hand, the next three categories of arguments definitely favour family companies.

C. Entrepreneurship versus Professionalism

Even the strongest critic of family companies cannot deny that (i) entrepreneurship is the sine quo non of a commercial venture, and (ii) this quality is to be generally found with families who risk their wealth. Yes, professionals are likely to be better qualified on the average (though lately the gap is narrowing) and bring more scientific rigour to the decision-making process. But they sometimes fall prey to what is crudely termed ‘paralysis from analysis’ syndrome.

Finally, key decisions, are driven by a combination of intuition and entrepreneurial dreams. Family companies will certainly score better on this front.

Another point that finds mention is that non-family companies have elaborate systems and processes unlike in family companies. Well this is not entirely true. Family companies also have systems but they are more informal and centred around the promoter. (This issue becomes serious when more members of newer generations come on board and each wants his/her own informal system.)

D. Long-term versus Short-term Families, especially in Asia, tend to create and build for their progeny. Therefore, they tend to take a very long-term view of all value-creating propositions. On the other hand, professionals do not have any incentive to look beyond their own tenure. In addition, it is felt that performance-based remuneration militates against taking a long-term view. Interestingly there are reports that the tenure of a professional CEO is becoming shorter and shorter. In short, the family companies are more likely to work towards long-term goals.

E. Personal reputation versus Company reputation

And, lastly, the family equates its own reputation with that of the companies it manages. Nonperformance of one impacts adversely the family’s ability to tap the capital markets for fresh funds. So much so, one very often comes across a family placing its private wealth and personal guarantee as collateral to help out a listed company during financial difficulties. It is very unlikely that a professional director would pledge his personal reputation, let alone his wealth, to bail out the company which he manages.

Based on the above discussions we now face a conundrum. Empirical studies indicate that family companies perform as well as non-family ones, if not better. The dissertation of the anatomy of both these classes of companies lead to a conclusion that family companies are more likely to create long-term value for all stakeholders. Yet, popular opinion is almost against the former as a preferred model for managing companies. What is the reason for the disconnect between facts and perception ?

The reasons lie partly in history and partly in definitions.

Historically, as stated earlier, because of a weak regulatory framework, there have been many instances of corporate misdeeds. But more important, different sectors/companies in an economy do become uncompetitive and slowly decay or disappear. This is economics at work. Sometimes changes in government policy, labour laws, etc. have adverse consequences. Unfortunately, failures arising out of such developments tended to be family companies as there were hardly any professionally managed Indian companies in the early days of Indian corporate history. Therefore, public memory tends to associate corporate failures with family managements.

A more rational reason may be found in the way people, subconsciously, define ‘family’ and ‘professional’. Let us take, as an example, a venture started by a bright IIT engineer with no history of business behind him. After nurturing the business successfully for, say, five years he floats the company through a listing. Even as a listed company, he will continue to hold a stake and will control the company for many more years. But, in popular perception, this company will be bracketed as a professional company and will command relatively higher valuation. On the other hand, the perception of a similar venture started by an old-economy family company would be quite different even if that venture were to employ equally bright IIT engineers as employees.

This leads us to believe that the markets are not averse to ‘family’ per se. What it is saying is that so long as the Board/Management team exhibits entrepreneurial energy, sound domain knowledge and unitary control, it is does not matter if the promoter/family runs it. In the second example we gave above, whilst the promoting family may still be good entrepreneurs, the board would typically have members of the extended family with little domain knowledge. Hence the poor treatment by the market.

To put it differently the markets are, perhaps, saying that they prefer a family company as long as the founding family member is still firmly in control. But with the passage of time the family members grow in number, control gets diffused and domain knowledge diluted. Therefore, as the company moves from generation to generation, the role of professionals in the decision-making process should increase exponentially for this company to enjoy higher valuation.

Long ago, a popular topic for school debates used to be: Which is more important — Art or Science. Whilst all argued their respective cases vociferously, the moderator always used to sum it up by saying that both are important for the well-being of the human race. In the similar vein, both family and non-family companies have important roles to play depending at what stage of the evolution the company is in.

Are Options an Option?

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction

Private Equity Investments and Foreign Direct Investments in nine out of 10 cases, contain an exit option. This may be in the form of a put option whereby the investor has a right/option but not an obligation to sell the shares to the promoter of the investee company in case the company does not give an exit in the form of an IPO or an Offer for Sale or Buyback of the investor’s shares. In some cases, the promoters also have a call option under which, they can buy out the investor at their option. In addition, the investment carries certain pre-emption rights for the investor in the form of Right of First Refusal, Tag Along Rights, Drag Along Rights, etc. This is a standard practice internationally and is something which is not unique to the Indian scenario. Even in India, this has been in vogue for the last several years and the ship was sailing quite smoothly. However, recent change in stance by the SEBI, the RBI and the DIPP and the High Courts have created a very stormy and turbulent climate for private equity/ foreign investment/joint ventures in India. If the issues thrown up by these changes are not resolved urgently, then we may see a severe hit to India’s growth story since most international investors would be wary of investing in such a climate. Let us look at the murky environment which has been created due to these changed regulatory positions.

 FDI Policy

Exit options have been a norm in foreign direct investments. However, since the last couple of years the RBI has been taking a view that exit options, such as put and call options, attached to Compulsorily Convertible Debentures/Preference Shares for foreign direct investment are not valid. The view being taken was that a fixed exit option makes the equity instrument equivalent to a debt instrument. Another view advanced by the RBI was that only exchangetraded derivatives are permissible and these option agreements are not exchange-traded. Gradually the RBI extended this view even to options attached to equity shares.

A counter-argument to this view of the RBI was that as long as the pricing guidelines are met on the exercise of the option and there is no fixed rate of Internal Rate of Return/fixed price, the option agreements are valid. If there is no guaranteed exit price and the ultimate price is subject to the prevailing FEMA pricing guidelines, a put or a call option was considered to be valid. Another argument was that if these were debt instruments, then who was the borrower? The foreign investment was in the Company, but the exit option was provided by the promoter. In such an event how can the options be classified as debt?

While this debate was raging, the Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion (DIPP), Ministry of Commerce issued the Consolidated FDI Policy vide Circular 2/2011 on 30th September 2011, which acted like the final straw which (temporarily) broke the camel’s back. This Policy contained a Clause 3.3.2.1, which stated that only equity shares, fully, compulsorily and mandatorily convertible debentures and fully, compulsorily and mandatorily convertible preference shares, with no in-built options of any type, would qualify as eligible instruments for FDI. Equity instruments issued/transferred to non-residents having in-built options or supported by options sold by third parties would lose their equity character and such instruments would have to comply with the ECB guidelines. This bolt from the blue left the industry reeling.

Subsequently, taking heed to the adverse industry reaction, on 31st October 2011, a Corrigendum was issued by the DIPP deleting the above Clause 3.3.2.1. Hence, now according to the FDI Policy, even equity instruments/CCDs/CCPS issued/transferred to nonresidents having in-built options, would qualify as eligible instruments for FDI. Accordingly, they would not have to comply with the ECB Guidelines.

Earlier, there was a question mark over the validity of such options under the FEMA Regulations. However, it is now submitted that in view of the express provision in the FDI Policy banning exit options and its subsequent deletion, the Government’s position on this issue has become clear. For instance, the Supreme Court in the case of V. M. Salgaocar, 243 ITR 383 (SC) held that the fact a provision was introduced in the Income-tax Act in 1984 and subsequently repealed in 1985 showed the legislative intent. Now to take a view that put and call options are not permissible under the FDI Policy/FEMA Regulations is not tenable in the author’s view. One hopes that this is the last see-saw in the FDI Policy/FEMA Regulations and this stand is endorsed by all concerned.

SEBI’s view for listed companies

In addition to the flip-flop in the FDI policy, lately the SEBI has also sought removal of option clauses from Agreements. This stand was taken by the SEBI in the context of listed companies. The SEBI first took this view in the case of Cairn India Ltd.-Vedanta Resources Plc. When Vedanta filed a letter of offer to acquire the shares of Cairn India, the SEBI noticed that there was a put and call arrangement and preemptive rights. The SEBI asked the parties to drop these clauses.

Again, in the Informal Guidance issued by the SEBI to Vulcan Rubber Ltd., the SEBI held that an option arrangement in the case of a listed company is not valid. Option agreements have been around since several years. It is only now that the SEBI has woken up to them and is raising objections. However, these option agreements in the case of listed companies have had a very chequered past which also merits attention. Given below is a brief account of their history in chronological order:

(a) The Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act (‘SCRA’) regulates transactions in securities. This Act prohibits certain type of contracts and permits spot-delivery contracts or contracts through brokers. Spot-delivery contracts have been defined to mean contracts in securities which provide for the delivery and payment either on the day of the contract or on the next day.

(b) As far back as in 1955, the Division Bench of the Bombay High Court in the case of Jethalal C. Thakkar v. R. N. Kapur, (1955) 57 Bom. LR 1051 had upheld the validity of an option agreement in the context of the erstwhile Bombay Securities Contracts Control Act, 1925 (the Act in force prior to the SCRA). The Court held that an option agreement is a contingent contract and not a contract at all till such time as the contingency occurs. Hence, it is a valid contract and enforceable in law.

(c) By a 50-year old Notification (SO 1490), issued in 1961, the Central Government had specified that contracts for pre-emption or similar rights contained in the promotion or collaboration agreements or in Articles of Association of limited companies would not be covered within the purview of the Act. Thus, as far back as in 1961, the validity of pre-emptive and other rights were upheld.

(d) Subsequently, in June 1969, the Government issued another Notification u/s.16 of the SCRA stating that all contracts for sale and purchase of securities other than spot-delivery contracts were prohibited. The 1969 Notification did not rescind the 1961 Notification.

(e) The 1969 Notification was superseded by a Notification dated 1st March 2000, which divided the power to regulate various contracts in the securities between the SEBI and the RBI. The sum and substance of the 2000 Notification was on the lines of the 1969 Notification.

(f) Section 20 of the SCRA, which specifically prohibited options in securities was deleted w.e.f. 25-1-1995. Even the preamble prohibiting options was deleted. It is submitted that these deletions specifically show that the legislative intention was to permit options after 1995.

(g)    In 2005, in a Summons for Judgment No. 766 of 2004 (in Summary Suit No. 2550 of 2004) a Single Judge of the Bombay High Court held in the case of Nishkalp Investments & Trading v. Hinduja TMT Ltd., that an agreement for buying back the shares of a company in the event of certain defaults was hit by the definition of spot-delivery contract under the SCRA and hence, unenforceable. It distinguished the Division Bench’s judgment in the case of Jethalal Thakkar (supra) on the grounds that it was rendered in the context of an earlier Act.

(h)    As recent as in 2009, the validity of the 1961 Notification, relaxing pre-emptive and other rights from the purview of the SCRA, was upheld by the Punjab & Haryana High Court in the case of M/s. Rama Petrochemicals Ltd. v. Punjab State Industrial Development Corp. Ltd., CWP No. 12861/2006 (Order dated 27th Nov., 2009).

Thus, it is evident that this is a matter which is not free from a judicial controversy. Under the Indian Contract Act, 1872, an offeror makes a proposal to an offeree. Only when such an offer/proposal is accepted by the offeree and there is a valid consideration for the same, an agreement is said to have been executed. An agreement enforceable by law is a contract. Thus, a contract is completed only when there is an offer and an acceptance. In the case of an option agreement, there is only an offer, but no acceptance. Acceptance only takes place when the offeree exercises its option and at that point of time a contract is concluded. Till such time it is a contingent contract. Further, if the option agreement provides that once the option is exercised, it would be executed on a spot-delivery basis, i.e., the payment and delivery would take place either on the same day or by the next day, then the spot-delivery condition would also be complied on exercise of the contract.

Section 2 of the SCRA defines three terms – contract, derivatives and option in securities. Sections 13 and 16 of the SCRA deal with contracts. Section 18A deals with derivatives. Erstwhile section 20 dealt with options. Even section 20 which deals with penalties, provides separate penalties for contracts and derivatives. With the deletion of section 20 even the penalty provision relating to options was deleted from section 23. Thus, there are three separate sections dealing with three different types of instruments. Hence, it is submitted that the 2000 Notification u/s.16 of SCRA applies only to a contract in securities and not to an option in securities. Options in securities is not covered by section 16 and the erstwhile section 20 has been specifically deleted.

Hence, it is submitted that an option agreement is not an executed contract but only a contingent contract and that such an agreement is valid and not hit by the prohibitions under the SCRA.

One can still find some merit in the SEBI’s argument in cases where both the put and call options are at the same price (As was the case in the Vedanta deal). This is because in such cases it is a no-brainer that one of the parties would definitely exercise its option under the Agreement and this could make it the equivalent of a definite/binding forward contract. However, where there is a price differential between the two, then, in the author’s view, an option agreement is valid and enforceable. An option agreement is a contract between two shareholders of a company. How can there be any fetters on the right of a shareholder to sell his shares, to grant an option on these shares, etc.? Can the SEBI’s jurisdiction extend over such private treaties also? Several Government disinvestments, such as, Balco, contained put and call options. Were all of these also be invalid and that too ab initio? One hopes the Regulator takes a relook at these factors and does a rethink on its stance.

Validity of Pre-emptive Rights

Even while we are jostling with the issue of validity of option agreements, comes a much larger issue — are pre -emptive and other rights valid at all in the case of listed and unlisted public companies? These would include pre-emptive rights, such as right of first refusal, tag along rights, drag along rights, etc.

Various Supreme Court decisions, such as V. B. Rangaraj v. V. B. Gopalkrishnan, 73 Comp. Cases 201 (SC), have held that a Shareholders’ Agreement executed between members of a company is binding on the company only if it is contained in the Articles of Association of the company.

A Single Judge of the Bombay High Court in the case of Western Maharashtra Development Corporation v. Bajaj Auto Ltd., (2010) 154 Comp. Cases 593 (Bom.), had ruled that a Shareholders’ Agreement containing restrictive clauses was invalid since the Articles of a public company could not contain clauses restricting the transfer of shares and it was contrary to section 108 of the Companies Act, 1956.

Subsequently, a two-Member Bench of the Bombay High Court, in the case of Messer Holdings Ltd. v. Shyam Ruia and Others, (2010) 159 Comp. Cases 29 (Bom.) has overruled this decision of the Single Judge of the Bombay High Court. The Court here was concerned with the validity of a Right of First Refusal Clause. The Court held that the intent of section 111A of the Companies Act dealing with free transferability of shares does not in any manner hamper the right of its shareholders to enter into private treaties so long as it is in accordance with the Companies Act and the company’s Articles. Had the Act wanted to prevent such private contracts it would have expressly done so. The Court relied on the Supreme Court’s decision in the case of M. S. Madhusoodhanan v. Kerala Kaumudi Pvt. Ltd., (2004) 117 Comp. Cases 19 (SC) which has held that consensual agreements between shareholders relating to their shares do not impose restriction on transferability of shares and they can be enforced like any other agreement.

Hence, as the position now stands, restrictive clauses and pre-emptive rights in a public limited company would be valid under the Companies Act. It may be specifically noted that the judgment in Messer Holdings (supra) was in the case of a listed company which is contrary to SEBI’s stance taken in the case of Cairns as regards validity of pre-emptive rights. The High Court’s judgment is binding even on the SEBI.

A later decision of a Single Judge of the Bombay High Court in the case of Jer Rutton Kavasmanek v. Gharda Chemicals Ltd., (2011) 166 Comp. Cases 377 (Bom.) has held that there are only two types of companies under the Companies Act — private and public. The concept of a deemed public company has been done away with and hence, pre-emptive rights which are contained in the Articles of a public company must not be recognised. Shares of a public company are freely transferrable and this would override anything contained in the Articles to the contrary. It may be noted that the Court did not go into whether a Shareholders’ Agreement executed by members which contained a pre-emptive clause was valid or not. It only dealt with a situation where the Articles of Association contained pre-emptive clauses. The conclusion arrived at seems to be that where the shareholders have not executed any agreement, but the Articles themselves provide for a restriction, the same would be invalid.

Conclusion

One fails to understand when the position has been so well settled since the last several years, why take such steps which upset the investment climate? Even Courts respect the doctrine of stare decisis, i.e., to stand by the decided and not to unsettle the settled law which has been practiced for several years — ALA Firm, 189 ITR 285 (SC). At a time when the international economy is reeling with recession, India is one of the few countries which are looked upon favourably by foreign investors. A monkey wrench in the works would only scare away PE/FDI funds and seriously curtail the Indian growth story. One can only hope that this fog of uncertainty is cleared and sunshine returns soon. The current puzzled regulatory scenario reminds one of William Shakespeare’s famous quote:

“Confusion Now Hath Made his Masterpiece!”

SHARES WITH DIFFERENTIAL VOTING RIGHTS — A USER’S PERSPECTIVE

fiogf49gjkf0d
Concept:
Shares with differential voting rights (DVR shares) are like ordinary equity shares but with differential voting rights. They are listed and traded in the same manner as ordinary equity shares. However, they mostly trade at a discount as they provide fewer voting rights compared to ordinary equity shares. Companies generally compensate DVR investors with a higher dividend.

Background:
In India since 2001, issue of DVR shares has been allowed. These can be used to thwart hostile takeovers, as for all practical purposes, they decouple economic interest and voting rights. Shares with DVR are mainly targeted at passive investors. In most cases, small or retail investors hardly exercise their voting rights, nor do they have an understanding of corporate affairs to an extent that they can influence corporate actions. They invest in shares only for economic returns. Therefore, they give away their voting rights in favour of those investors who run the company and have management control. Thus, this mode offers investors an avenue to acquire shares at lower prices with prospects of higher dividends in return for surrendering their voting rights.

Importance:
DVR shares offer investors an opportunity to earn better returns in lieu of surrendering their voting rights and also allow a company to dilute its equity without matching dilution in the promoters’ stake. At times companies issue DVR shares to fund new large projects. This also helps strategic investors who do not want control but are looking at a reasonably big investment in a company.

Legal requirement:
Section 86 of the Companies Act permits the issue of equity shares with DVRs, subject to conditions prescribed under the Companies (Issue of Share Capital with Differential Voting Rights) Rules, 2002.

Conditions:
Rule 3 provides that every company limited by shares may issue shares with differential rights as to dividend, voting or otherwise, if apart from specified procedural compliances, it conforms to the following:

  • It has distributable profits in terms of section 205 of the Companies Act, 1956 for three financial years preceding the year in which it was decided to issue such shares.
  • It has not defaulted in filing annual accounts and annual returns for three financial years immediately preceding the financial year in which it was decided to issue such shares.
  • The issue of such shares cannot exceed 25% of the total issued share capital of the company.

Global perspective:
A large number of global giants have raised funds through DVR issues, prominent among them are Google, NewsCorp and Berkshire Hathaway.

Indian scenario:
While DVR is a well-accepted instrument used by blue-chip companies in international markets to raise funds, even after a decade of the government’s Notification, the concept is yet to gain wide currency in India.

Pantaloons Retail India Ltd. Bonus Issue:
In July 2008, PRIL, India’s leading retailer, was the first to issue bonus shares with a DVR option. The company made a bonus issue of 1: 10 shares with differential voting rights and 5% additional dividends as well. Although there is no fund-raising involved in a bonus issue of shares, the idea was to get the markets familiar with such instruments and create another alternative to raise funds in the future. “Differential voting rights (DVR) has become a widely used innovative instrument in global markets and by coupling a bonus issue with a DVR, we believe in enhancing alternatives for our shareholders,” Kishore Biyani, MD of PRIL had stated in a press release.

Gujarat NRE Coke Ltd. DVR:
In September 2009, the company issued B Equity Shares of the Company with Differential Voting Rights (DVR Shares) with lower voting rights (1/100th of the voting right of ordinary equity share). The same were issued as bonus shares in the ratio of 1 B equity shares for every 10 equity shares held.

The above illustrates the past one year relative performance of the ordinary equity share (512579) vis-à-vis the DVR share (GUJNREDVR) and the broader markets (BSE Sensex). We find that while both the ordinary as well as the DVR share have moved in a direction opposite to the BSE and have witnessed reduced share prices; the magnitude of the fall for DVR (29%) is less than that of the ordinary share (39%).

(Source: Google Finance)

Tata Motors DVR:

In October 2008, Tata Motors became the first Indian company to make a rights issue of shares carrying differential voting rights (DVR) (issue size: Rs.1960.42 crores). DVR shares have 1/10th of voting rights of ordinary shares and offer a 5% higher rate of dividend over the normal shares. It issued these shares at Rs.305 i.e., about 10% lower than the issue of normal rights at Rs.340.

The diagram shown alongside illustrates the past one year relative performance of the ordinary equity share (500570) vis-à-vis the DVR share (TATAMTRDVR) and the broader markets (BSE Sensex). We find that while both the ordinary as well as the DVR

share have outperformed the BSE; the magnitude of the gain for DVR (39%) is less than that of the ordinary share (48%).

(Source: Google Finance)

Conclusion:
For an investor, who believes in being a part of the company’s decision processes, DVR shares are not attractive due to limited voting rights.

However, if one is a minority investor and isn’t concerned much with voting rights per se, then investing in the DVR would certainly be an attractive proposition. DVRs mostly trade at a discount, largely due to the fewer voting rights they enjoy. However, at times, the gap between DVR and ordinary shares is large, providing good opportunity to investors. (Globally, the discount between shares with DVRs and ordinary shares is about 10%.) Not only does an investor stand to gain from capital appreciation in a scenario where the price difference between the ordinary and the DVR share reduces over a period as a result of rising awareness about the product, he will also be entitled to higher dividends. Furthermore, he can always invest back in ordinary shares by exiting DVRs once the differential narrows. Thus, the riskreward ratio of investing in DVRs looks somewhat skewed towards the latter. The only caveat is that before investing in a DVR, investors need comfort about the company’s fundamentals and prospects, and more importantly, its management.

levitra

Governance

fiogf49gjkf0d
I have often wondered as to what do we mean by ‘governance’. In my view, Governance is facing facts with an open and unbiased mind and taking swift and balanced decisions. In other words, face truth — nay — brutal truth and act. Governance is not limited to compliance with law — though this is essential — because governance is more than ‘boxticking’. It is all encompassing. It takes care of not only the shareholders but also of other stakeholders and the environment. Governance demands facing facts — truth and taking decisions before issues get out of hand.

  • There is a lot of controversy on ‘governance’ in public sector companies. The Children’s Investment Fund of the U.K. — TCI — is an investor in Coal India and has raised issues regarding the role of government and independent directors on the Board of Coal India. TCI has threatened legal action against independent directors and if I am not wrong has retained a leading legal firm of Delhi to question the decisions and directives of the Government of India and the decisions of the Board. The controversy is regarding pricing of coal and long-term supply agreements with power plants. The issue was resolved by the Government by issuing a ‘Presidential Directive’ to the Board of Coal India Limited to sign the supply agreements. However, since the controversy has arisen it appears from newspaper reports that the independent directors of Coal India have been active and have been adding safety clauses in the supply agreements. View defending the action of the Government is based on that: President holds the shares on behalf of the people of India.
  •  Government represents the people of India.
  • Presidential directive is in the interest of the people of India.
  • TCI was aware of the risk of government control on Coal India’s policy at the time of investing.

Hence, there exists no reason for TCI to object to the decisions and directions of the Government. This controversy raises three issues:

  • Firstly, can this concept be extended to the decisions of the majority shareholder in a non-public sector company? The answer is an emphatic: no. This is so because the promoters once having accepted outside shareholders are accountable to the minority shareholders. The whole concept of ‘independent directors’ is to protect the interest of minority shareholders. Even otherwise the promoters or majority shareholders and the Board are accountable to stakeholders other than shareholders. Further the argument of decision in the interest of ‘people of India’ does not apply.
  • Secondly, should there be different guidelines for governance of public sector units? The answer is: yes. This would avoid confusion and clearly define the role and responsibilities of the socalled independent directors who are in effect nominated directors.
  • Thirdly, should foreign institutions and individuals be barred from investing in public sector units and only Indian nationals, Indian institutions and persons of Indian origin should be allowed to invest in public sector units? The answer is again: yes. Because this would avoid all controversy as whether through the President of India or directly or indirectly it is ‘People of India’ who are shareholders. In conclusion I would repeat: Governance — nay — good governance is a difficult issue and it can and must be resolved. Besides the solutions suggested I am sure there would be other alternatives. These need to be explored — explained and implemented to bring in clarity both in the interest of governance and the investors.

The second limb of governance is being ‘fair’. This is based on the commandment ‘Do unto others as you wish them do unto you’. Let us test the retrospective amendment by the Finance Bill, 2012 of taxing gain arising on transfer of Indian assets held indirectly by a non-resident individual or a legal entity through a corporation in a tax haven. Newspapers report Vodafone has already sent a notice to the Government of India seeking a legal solution. The Finance Minister of the U.K., though not apparently, has met the Indian Prime Minister and the Finance Minister on this issue. The newspapers report that there exists an assurance of our Prime Minister that ‘law will prevail’. This retrospective amendment has also been criticised by many leading foreign investors.

The issues of ‘governance’ are: Is retrospective amendment fair? Does it represent ‘good governance’?

Let me at the outset mention that the Parliament is supreme and laws can be amended retrospectively. Retrospective amendments are welcome where they are made to clarify and/or implement ‘legislative intent’ — but retrospective amendment should not be used to fasten a liability which did not exist or the issue has been the subject-matter of public knowledge and debate and judicial interpretation. The use of ‘tax havens’ to legally avoid or reduce tax liability is public knowledge. The Government of India for the last many years has been unsuccessfully negotiating with the Government of Mauritius for amending the tax treaty for taxing capital gains without success. I repeat the issue is: To achieve the objective of taxing gain on transfer of Indian assets indirectly held through an legal entity in a tax haven — does retrospective amendment represent ‘good governance’ and is it fair? The answer is: No. Amend it but amend it prospectively. Those in-charge of governance have to realise the import of the age-old command of:

‘Yatha raja tatha praja’.

The tax gatherer has to realise that so far as business is concerned, ‘tax’ is a ‘cost’ and it is duty of every business man to reduce ‘cost’ and thereby increase profit. However, the reduction in cost has to be achieved within the framework of law. This right has been recognised by judicial pronouncements and is known as the ‘Westminster Principle’. As a matter of fact, many multinational and large corporations have a dedicated department — personnel — for seeking and devising means of legally reducing tax liability under national and international tax laws. Treaty shopping — a means of reducing tax liability in international operations has been practised for decades. Further, sometime back, business newspapers had reported that a public sector company — desiring to invest abroad or acquire assets abroad was exploring the possibility of making the investment through a subsidiary in a tax haven. This is certainly against the principle of fairness ‘Do unto others as you wish them do unto you’. It is judicially recognised that there is a difference between ‘tax evasion’ and ‘tax avoidance’. Tax evasion is a crime, whereas tax avoidance is a right and negating this right by a retrospective amendment is neither fair, nor does it represent ‘good governance’.

The second issue under ‘fairness’ which is disturbing is cancellation of telecom licences because of corruption. Cancellation is justified where both the giver and taker are involved in the act. Even where the investor is indirectly involved in corruption, cancellation is justified.

The issue is: Is it fair to cancel the licence where an investor has acquired interest in the licence holder after he had obtained the licence and was not involved in the act of bribing. The author is of the view that under such circumstances the licence holder should be punished — the gain the licence holder made be confiscated and the government should acquire the licence holder’s interest in the joint venture without any compensation. An investor who was not involved in corruption should not be penalised. The principle should be and is: ‘Penalise the guilty’.

Above all there is no logic in penalising an investor who is not part of the management group. Let the Government nationalise the corporation without compensation to the promoter, but not penalise you and me who are just investors.

The third limb of governance is ‘transparency’. The issue I would like to discuss is: Life Insurance Corporation acquiring 84% of shares of ONGC offered by the Government in auction. The issue failed as investors perceived that the share of ONGC was probably over -priced. The Government directed LIC to acquire the shares. It is reported that the investment by LIC in ONGC probably exceeded the limit prescribed by the Regulator. I am aware that LIC carries a ‘sovereign guarantee’. Did the Government at the time of announcing the auction declare that if the auction failed or the issue is not fully subscribed, LIC would acquire the unsubscribed shares? The issues are: can — should the ‘sovereign guarantor’ dictate investment policy of LIC and does LIC’s action or gov-ernments’ directive meet the test of transparency.

Let us not forget the old instance of LIC investing in Mundra companies. Chagla Committee was appointed to investigate the investment. The fall out of the findings of the committee was that both the Finance Minister and the Finance Secretary resigned.

The difference between two instances is that in Mundra’s case a private sector entity was involved and in ONGC’s case a public sector entity is involved. It can be argued that in both LIC and ONGC the people of India are involved. The argument in the author’s opinion is fallacious. In case of LIC — it is only the policy-holders who are involved and invest-ments have to be — no must be in the interest of the policy-holders, a class distinct from the rest of people of India. Related issue is: Is this investment in line with the mission statement of LIC which reads as under:

‘Enhancing the quality of life of people through financial security by providing products and services of aspired attributes with competitive returns and by rendering resources for economic development’.

‘Swami Saran Sharma in Outlook Money of 2 May 2012 commented: ‘LIC’s investment in several PSUs is like deliberately chasing bad money.’

The Times of India of 15 May 2012 reports that Mody’s have downgraded LIC. The comment reads as under:

‘LIC’s downgrade comes in the wake of the government dipping into LIC’s resources to recapitalise banks and to bail out the government in its divestment programme.’

The standing Committee on Finance has questioned the Government — regarding LIC’s acquisition of ONGC shares and asked the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority (IRDA) to inquire if the company had breached investment norms while buying the shares during the Government stake auction. It is reported in Business Standard dated 25-4-2012:

“The committee cannot but conclude that the objec-tive of disinvestments has been reduced to merely deficit-bridging,” goes its rap on one state-run firm’s equity being bought by the other. The report says it regrets the government using central public sector enterprises (CPSEs) as a ‘milching cow’.”

The directive of the Government, on the touchstone of ‘governance’, is not a transparent act. It does not meet both the criterion of ‘fairness’ and ‘transparency’.

Powers of the Tribunal to stay demand proceedings beyond 365 days

fiogf49gjkf0d
Section 254 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’) provides for the powers to the Income-tax Appellate Tribunal (‘the Tribunal’) to pass any orders including orders for stay of demands. The said power to grant stay was given explicit recognition on insertion of section 253(7) and a proviso to section 254(2A). The Memorandum to the Finance Bill, 2001 and Circular No. 14 of 2001 dated 12th December 2001 [252 ITR 65(St.)] explaining the intention of insertion of aforesaid proviso to section 245(2A) vide the Finance Act, 2001 observed as under:

“….it has been observed that many assessees file appeals to the Tribunal only to obtain stay of demand and avoid payment of justified taxes. In order to discourage this practice, and ensure speedier collection of outstanding tax, the Act has amended Section 254…”

However, the language used by the legislature to introduce the proviso to section 254(2A) was subject to various interpretations by the judicial forums in the following decisions:

• Subhadra (B) vs. ITO (2005)(272 ITR 100)(Hyd.)(AT);
• Centre for Women’s Development Studies vs. DDIT (257 ITR 60)(Del)(AT);
• Anuradha Timber Estates vs. DCIT (282 ITR 59)(Hyd) (AT), etc

While the language of the proviso to section 254(2A) achieved its object, it created hardships for those assessees who had genuine reasons for stay of demand. They were subjected to unjustified and unreasonable recovery proceedings.

The said insertion of proviso to section 254(2A), however, did not limit the powers of the Tribunal to pass fresh orders of stay on expiry of 180 days. In order to address the said anomaly, the Legislature substituted the aforesaid proviso vide Finance Act, 2007 with the following three new provisos to section 254(2A):

• First Proviso—After considering the merits of application of stay arising in the appeal, the Tribunal shall pass orders of stay and dispose the appeal within a period of 180 days;

• Second Proviso—If the appeal is not disposed of within a period of 180 days, then the Tribunal may extend the period of stay or pass an order of stay for further period or periods as it thinks fit, provided the Tribunal is satisfied that delay in disposing of the appeal is not attributable to the assessee, pursuant to the application so moved before the Tribunal by the assessee on expiry of aforesaid 180 days of stay; and

• Third Proviso—The period of stay originally allowed and/or extended as above shall not exceed 365 days and the Tribunal shall dispose of the appeal within the said original and/or extended period, which if not disposed would vacate stay of demand on expiry of the said period.

However, the Bombay High Court in the case of Narang Overseas (P) Ltd vs. ITAT and Ors (295 ITR 22), relying upon the decision of the apex court in the case of CCE vs. Kumar Cotton Mills (P) Ltd. (180 ELT 434) [judgment delivered while considering similar provisions on powers of Tribunal to stay demand under the Indirect Tax Laws] held that the third proviso to section 254(2A) so inserted vide the Finance Act, 2007 cannot be construed as limitation on the powers of the Tribunal to grant interim relief even if the delay in disposal of appeal is not attributable to acts of the assessee.

Pursuant to the aforesaid observations, the third proviso to section 254(2A) was again amended vide the Finance Act, 2008 to address the said interpretation, by specifically clarifying that the order of stay by the Tribunal shall stand vacated after 365 days from the date of initial stay, even if the delay in disposing the appeal is not attributable to the assessee.

The impugned proviso of section 254(2A) as amended vide the Finance Act, 2008 has since then been subject to different interpretations by judicial forums on the powers of Tribunal to stay demand beyond a period of 365 days from the date of initial stay. One finds that the issue of whether the Tribunal has powers to stay demand beyond 365 days can be divided into three parts:

1. Determination of powers of the Tribunal under the Act;
2. Constitutional validity of third proviso to section 254(2A) of the Act; and
3. Whether third proviso to section 254(2A) is mandatory or directory

1. Determination of powers of the Tribunal under the Act:

At the outset, reliance is placed on the decision of the apex court in the case of ITO vs. M.K.Mohammed Kunhi (71 ITR 815), wherein the court made the following specific observations w.r.t. powers of the Tribunal under the Act:

“….The right of appeal is a substantive right and questions of fact or law are at large and are open to review by the Tribunal. …The powers which have been conferred by section 254 on the Tribunal with widest possible amplitude must carry with them by necessary implication all powers and duties incidental and necessary to make the exercise of those powers fully effective… It is well known that the Tribunal is not [a] Court but it exercises judicial powers. The Tribunal’s powers in dealing with appeals are of the widest amplitude and have in some cases been held similar to and identical with the powers of an appellate Court under the CPC…”

The above decision holds that while the Tribunal is not a Court, it has judicial independence and in certain cases even has powers similar and identical to an appellate Court as provided in the Civil Procedure Code. The question which then arises is can the legislature impose conditions and/or limit the said powers of the Tribunal to provide stay on demand proceedings?

On study of relevant decisions which are set out later, the following characteristics of the right of appeal emerge:

• The right of appeal is not a natural or inherent right and cannot be assumed unless expressly given by the statute;

• Right of appeal is neither an absolute right nor an ingredient of natural justice;

• The appeal is a creation of a statute and therefore subject to the conditions imposed by the statute;

However, the aforesaid plenary powers of the legislature to impose conditions in regard to the right to appeal are subject to certain limitations, which are as under:

• The conditions imposed and/or specified have to be in relation to the assessee as something which is required to be complied with by the assessee. But where the assessee has no control or say, then the said provisions cannot be sustained;

• An appeal is the right of entering a superior court and invoking its aid and interpretation to redress the error of the court below; anything which pares down this very right, carving the kernel out, it violates the provision creating the right;

• Appeal is a remedial right and if remedy is reduced to a husk of procedural excess, and

• The law does not compel a man to do that which he cannot possibly perform (lex non cogit ad impossibilia) and an Act of the Court shall prejudice no man (actus curiae neminem gravabit).

The aforesaid relevant legal propositions were observed in the following decisions while opining on the powers of the legislature to impose subjective conditions of prepayment of deposit of disputed tax and/ or penalty and/or its waiver thereof for entertaining the appeals before the Tribunal under the respective statutory acts, which are as under:

• Vijay Prakash D. Mehta and Jawahar D. Mehta vs. Collector of Customs, Bombay (AIR 1988 SC 2010);
• Seth Nand Lal & Anr. vs. State of Haryana & Ors. (AIR 1980 SC 2097);
• Emerald International Ltd. vs. State of Punjab and Ors. (122 STC 382)(P&H)(FB);
• Anant Mills Co. Ltd vs. State of Gujarat & Ors. (AIR 1975 SC 1234);
• Sita Ram and Others vs. State of UP (AIR 1979 SC 745);
• Raj Kumar Dey and Others vs. Tarpada Dey and Others (1987)(4 SCC 398);
•    PML Industries Ltd vs. Commissioner of Central Excise (2013)(30 STR 113) (P&H); etc.

So, while the legislature has plenary powers to impose conditions on the Tribunal in regard to the right of appeal, it is equally true that conditions so imposed cannot be so unreasonable or onerous that they violate the exercise of said right of appeal itself. On application of aforesaid principles to the issue under consideration:

•    Firstly, the assessee’s right for grant of stay is subjected to functioning of the Tribunal to pass final orders on appeal within the period of stay, over which the assessee has no control;

•    The assessee shall not have right for grant of stay beyond a prescribed period, if the Tribunal cannot pass final orders within period of stay, for no fault of the assessee;

•    The cause and effect relationship are prejudicial to the assessee; and

•    The assessee will not be granted stay of demand beyond the prescribed period, even though on merits he deserves and has a genuine case of stay.

Therefore, one may conclude that the conditions imposed by the legislature vide the provisos to section 254(2A) seriously affect right of appeal of the Tribunal which includes right to stay demand beyond the prescribed period.

2.    Constitutional validity of the third proviso to section 254(2A) of the Act

The constitutional validity of the third proviso to section 254(2A) of the Act was under challenge in the case of Jethmal Faujimal Soni vs. ITAT & Ors. (333 ITR 96)(Bom); however, it was not adjudicated upon on account of request by the department to instead give directions for expeditiously disposing the appeal, which was accepted by the court.

However, in the case of Narang Overseas (supra), the court, while considering the powers of the Tribunal to grant stay of demand, made the following relevant observations w.r.t. constitutional validity of the provisos to section 254(2A) of the Act, which is as under:

“…..The mischief if and at all was the long delay in disposing of proceedings where interim relief had been obtained by the assessee. The second proviso as it earlier stood could really have not stood the test of non-arbitrariness as it would result in an appeal being defeated even if the assessee was not at fault, as in the meantime the Revenue could proceed against the assets of the assessee. The proviso as introduced by the Finance Act, 2007 was to an extent to avoid the mischief of it being rendered unconstitutional. Once an appeal is provided, it cannot be regarded nugatory in cases where the assessee was not at fault.”

[Emphasis supplied]

So, the High Court in very clear terms held that any arbitrary conditions imposed to defeat the right of appeal for no fault of the assessee would regard it as unconstitutional.

Recently, CBEC issued Circular No. 967/01/2013 dated 1st January 2013, with similar conditions as present under consideration. The said Circular provides for initiating recovery proceedings against the assessee if no stay was provided by the relevant appellate authority within the prescribed period of filing an appeal. The said conditions in the Circular on being challenged before various courts, was decided in favour of the assessee by either reading down the said onerous conditions of the Circular; or setting aside the said provisions of the Circular with specific observations that no recovery proceedings shall be initiated in cases where there is no fault of the assessee; or providing interim stay of demand:

•    Larsen & Toubro Ltd. vs. Union of India and Others (2013)(29 STR 449)(Bom.);

•    Manglam Cement Ltd. vs. Superintendent, Central Excise and Ors. (86 DTR 215)(Raj);

•    Gujarat State Fertilizers Co. Ltd. vs. UOI through Secretary and Others (86 DTR 176)(Guj.);

•    PML Industries Ltd. vs. CEC (supra); and

•    Ultratech Cement Ltd. vs. Union of India and Others (W.P. No. 736 of 2013) dated 9th January, 2013

In light of the above discussions, it is possible that the third proviso to section 254(2A) may fail to pass the test of constitutional validity and the courts may decide to read down the provisions to mean that the Tribunal has powers to order stay of demand even beyond 365 days from the date of initial stay, provided there is no fault of the assessee in the disposal of appeal.

3.    Whether the third proviso to section 254(2A) is mandatory or directory:

Alternatively, without going into the constitutional validity of the impugned provisos, one may urge that the said provision is directory in nature. It is a well-settled position that if a provision is mandatory then an act done in breach thereof will be invalid, but if it is directory then the act will be valid although the non-compliance may give rise to some other conse-quences. Even a complete non-compliance of a directory provisions has been held in many cases as not affecting the validity of act done in breach thereof.

On perusal of the relevant decisions on the subject, the following tests, (which are by no means exhaustive) have been applied by the courts to determine as to whether a provision is mandatory or directory:

•    Generally, the intent of the legislature is of paramount importance and not the language of the provision in which the intent is clothed;

•    The meaning and intention of the legislature are to be ascertained by considering its nature, its design, and the consequences which would follow from construing it one way or the other;

•    The phraseology of the provisions is not by itself a determinative factor. The use of the word “shall” or “may” respectively, would ordinarily indicate imperative (mandatory) or directory character, but not always;

•    Whether non-compliance with the provision would render the entire proceedings invalid or not;

•    When consequences of nullification on failure to comply in a particular manner is provided by the statute itself, then such statutory requirement must be interpreted as mandatory;

•    If the object of the enactment will be defeated by holding the provision directory, it will be construed as mandatory, whereas if by holding it mandatory serious inconvenience will be caused to innocent persons without furthering the object of enactment, the same will be construed as directory;
 

•    The provision enacted is generally regarded as mandatory, if the language of the provision is clothed in a negative form. Negative words are clearly prohibitory and are ordinarily used as a legislative device to make a statute imperative;

•    When the provisions of statute relate to performance of a public duty and the case is such that to hold null and void acts done in neglect of this duty would cause serious inconvenience or injustice to persons who have no control over those entrusted with the duty and at the same time would not promote the main object of the legislature, it has been the practice of the courts to hold such provisions to be directory;

•    When a public authority is required to do a certain thing, within a specified period, the same is ordinarily directory; however, it is equally provided that when consequences for inaction on part of the statutory authority within the specified time is expressly provided, it must be held imperative; and

•    When mandatory and directory requirements are lumped together in a provision, then in such a case, if mandatory requirements are complied with, it will be proper to say that the enactment has been substantially complied with notwithstanding the non-compliance of directory requirements;

The relevant decisions which were considered in order to list down the aforesaid legal propositions are as under:

•    M/s. Delhi Airtech Services Pvt Ltd. and Anr vs. State of UP and Anr. (2011)(9 SCC 354);
•    May George vs. Special Tahsildar & Ors. (2010)(13 SCC 98);
•    Bhavnagar University vs. Palitana Sugar Mills Pvt Ltd. (2003)(2 SCC 111);
•    Balwant Singh vs. Anand Kumar Sharma (2003)(3 SCC 433); etc.

On the touchstone of the aforesaid principles, if the provisions of section 254(2A) are to be determined as to whether they are a mandatory or directory provision, one may infer as under:

•    Legislative history suggests that the main intention of the provision was to discourage practice of those assessees who used to defer the payment of justified taxes for months or years under the garb of stay of demand till disposal of appeal by the Tribunal and to ensure speedier collection of said taxes;

•    A Tribunal being a public functionary takes a decision on the final appeal and interim application for stay of demand and it is not within the powers and control of the assessee. The provisions of section 245(2A) relate to performance of public duty. So, on failure of the Tribunal to dispose of the appeal within the period of stay would cause serious general inconvenience or injustice to assessees who have no control over those entrusted with the duty;

•    The third proviso to section 254(2A) has caused serious inconvenience to the public (assesses), since the provisions provide for automatic vacation of stay of demand and thereby initiation of recovery proceedings, for even those who have genuine case and/or at no fault for delay in disposal of appeals; and

•    Section 254(2A) alongwith provisos thereof are not clothed in a negative form, barring use of negative words w.r.t. expiry of period for disposing of orders.

In light of the above, it may be urged that section 254(2A) read with provisos, are lumped together with both mandatory and directory conditions. The mandatory condition being the Tribunal has to decide on merits the assessee’s application for stay of demand, thereby reflecting substantial compliance with the provisions. The condition of disposing stay granted appeal within a prescribed period as being a directory condition.

Therefore, in view of the above, one can conclude that the Tribunal has powers to pass order for stay on merits even on expiry of prescribed period, provided the delay in disposal of appeal in not on account of the assessee.

For the sake of completeness, it would be necessary to mention that in the case of CIT vs. Ecom Gill Trading Pvt Ltd. (2012)(74 DTR 241)(Kar), the Court considering the provisions of section 254(2A), has held that the Tribunal has no powers to grant stay of demand for a period exceeding 365 days from the date of initial stay. The High Court has based its conclusions on the following important findings:

•    The Tribunal which is the creature of the statute should abide by the statutory provisions in letter and spirit and the introduction of third proviso to the Finance Act, 2008 makes it abundantly clear that the purpose is to ensure that order of stay of demand has no effect after the period of 365 days from the date of initial stay; and

•    None of the decisions of the Bombay High Court viz., Narang Overseas (supra), CIT vs. Ronuk Industries (333 ITR 99), have any significance or an impact on the amendment brought about by the third proviso to section 254(2A) vide the Finance Act, 2008.

These findings of the High Court to hold otherwise have either been addressed in detail in the aforesaid paragraphs and/or can be distinguished. In addition to the above, the following are the decisions of various other judicial forums, wherein it has been held that the Tribunal has powers to stay demand beyond 365 days from the date of initial stay under section 254(2A):

•    CIT vs. Ronuk Industries (supra);

•    Tata Communications Ltd vs. ACIT (130 ITD 19) (Mum)(SB);

•    Vodafone West Ltd. vs. ACIT (S.A. No. 86,87/ Ahd/2012 arising out of ITA No. 386 and 387/ Ahd/ 2011) dated 11th January 2013; and

•    Qualcomm Incorporated vs. ADIT (S.A. No. 177 to 183/Del/2012 arising from ITA No. 3696 to 3702/
Del/2012) dated 28th September 2012

The aforesaid decisions are not discussed in detail, as they have either followed the decisions discussed in detail above and/or no new observations are made therein.

Based on the aforesaid averments, one may argue that Tribunals have powers to stay demand proceedings even beyond 365 days; however, it shall be equally necessary to remind oneself of the observations of the apex court in the case of ITO vs. M.K.Mohammed Kunhi (supra), which read as under:

“A certain apprehension may legitimately arise in the minds of the authorities administering the Act that, if the Tribunal proceeds to stay recovery of taxes or penalties payable by or imposed on the assesses as a matter of course, the Revenue will be put to great loss because of the inordinate delay in the disposal of appeals by the Tribunal. It is needless to point that the power of stay by the Tribunal is not likely to be exercised in a routine way or as a matter of course in view of the special nature of taxation and revenue laws. It will only be when a strong prima facie case is made out that the Tribunal will consider whether to stay the recovery proceedings and on what conditions, and the stay will be granted in most deserving and appropriate cases where the Tribunal is satisfied that the entire purpose of the appeal will be frustrated or rendered nugatory by allowing the recovery proceedings to continue during the pendency of the appeal.”

Revised Forms 15CA and 15CB—Changes and Impact

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background
The Finance Act, 2008 inserted s/s. (6) in section 195 requiring that every person, who was required to deduct tax from the payment made to a non-resident, not being a company, or to a foreign company, should furnish prescribed information to the Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT). Rule 37BB was then inserted by the Income Tax (Seventh Amendment) Rules, 2009, to lay down the procedures for the same.

Forms 15CA and 15CB, which were introduced in this regard, created contentious issues for practitioners and the Income-tax Department. The procedure was that for making a payment to a non-resident or a foreign company, the person making the remittance was required to obtain the certificate of a Chartered Accountant in Form 15CB, submit Form 15CA online based on the same, and finally submit both these documents to his bankers to complete the transaction. On 5th August 2013, CBDT issued Notification No. 58/2013 amending Rule 37BB and these forms with effect from 1st October, 2013. However, soon thereafter, on 2nd September 2013, CBDT amended Rule 37BB and the forms further by way of Notification No. 67/2013, again with effect from 1st October, 2013.

This article intends to highlight the changes in the reporting requirements and the impact of the same.

Changes in reporting
Hitherto, Forms 15CA and 15CB were required to be furnished by the person making the remittance to a non-resident, not being a company, or a foreign company, for every payment—irrespective of the quantum or the taxability of such payment. Rule 37BB, as amended by the two notifications referred above, provides certain relaxations in the reporting requirements based on the quantum and nature of payment. The changes are summarised in the table below:


Note 1: The specified list (as per Notification 67) covers remittances on account of –

•    Indian investment abroad in equity/debt/branches and wholly owned subsidiaries/subsidiaries and associates/ real estate
•    Loans to non-residents
•    Operating expenses of Indian shipping /airline companies operating abroad
•    Booking of passages abroad—airlines companies
•    Business travel, travel under basic travel quota, travel for pilgrimage, medical treatment, education
•    Postal services
•    Construction of projects abroad by Indian companies
•    Freight insurance relating to import and export of goods
•    Maintenance of offices/Indian embassies abroad
•    By foreign embassies in India
•    By non-residents towards family maintenance and savings
•    Personal gifts and donations, donations to religious and charitable institutions abroad, grants and donations to other Governments and charitable institutions established by the Governments, donations by Indian Government to international institutions
•    Payment or refund of taxes
•    Refunds or rebates on exports
•    By residents on international bidding

Note 2: The following items appeared in the specified list as per Notification No. 58, but are missing in the superseding Notification No. 67:

•    Payment for life insurance premium
•    Other general insurance premium
•    Payments on account of stevedoring, demurrage, port-handling charges etc.
•    Freight on imports—airline companies
•    Booking of passages abroad—shipping companies
•    Freight on exports—shipping companies
•    Freight on imports—shipping companies
•    Payments for surplus freight or passenger fare by foreign shipping companies operating in India.
•    Imports by diplomatic missions
•    Payment towards imports—settlement of invoice
•    Advance payment against imports

Impact and Issues

It is clear that the revised procedures for making remittances to non-residents seek to reduce the burden of compliance in several cases—where payments fall under the specified list, which are not liable to tax in India or where the remittances are very small in quantum. Furthermore, in cases where the proposed reporting is as extensive as the existing requirements, these amendments seek to capture much more information, thereby casting more onerous duty on the remitter as well as the Chartered Accountant issuing the certificate in Form 15CB. The revised Form 15CB and Part B of the revised Form 15CA attempt to capture nearly the entire process of determination of taxability of a cross-border payment. In doing so, however, the amendments leave several existing issues unanswered and also manage to raise new concerns. Some of these concerns are outlined below:

Persisting Issues:

i)    Personal Payments:

Section 195 places a burden on any person making payments to non-residents for personal expenses such as online purchases, paid downloads, etc. It is impractical for the payer either to obtain a Tax Deduction Account Number (TAN) or to undertake the procedures under Rule 37BB in order to comply with these provisions. While carving out several transactions from the reporting net, payments of personal nature other than gifts or donations have been left out of the specified list.

ii) Payments to non-residents operating in India:

The obligation to deduct tax at source or to furnish details in Form 15CA are in respect of payments made to non-residents irrespective of whether such payments involve any outward remittance or not. As a consequence, one faces difficulties in making payments in Indian rupees to non-residents who are operating in India. For instance, a person banking with the Indian branch of a foreign bank ends up paying a foreign company every time his bank charges him for services provided. This in turn implies that he must comply with Section 195 read with Rule 37BB while making such “payments”.

iii) Credit Card Payments:

Rule 37BB, as it stood before the amendment, as also the revised Rule 37BB require the details in Form 15CA to be furnished prior to making the remittance. However, in the age of e-commerce, electronic payments through credit cards and net transfers have become the order of the day. In such cases, it becomes difficult for the payer as well as the remitting bank to ensure compliance with the prescribed procedures.

iv) ECS/Auto debits:

Similar to credit card payments, it is near impossible to single out the payments made by way of system generated Auto Debits and ECS. Clarity is required on the issue of how details are required to be furnished in such cases and whether monthly compliance would be required.

Added Concerns:

i)  Sums not chargeable to tax:

The language of the revised Rule 37BB clearly spells out that it would apply in respect of remittances made for sums which are chargeable to tax under the Income-tax Act. This is a deviation from the language of Rule 37BB prior to Notification No. 58 and especially from the language used in Notification No. 58. This leads to an inference that the revised procedure is not applicable in cases where the payments are not liable to tax in India. However, the notification lists 28 specific types of payments for which no information is required to be furnished. This may lead to an interpretation that all payments not falling within that list but which are not chargeable to tax in India would call for furnishing some information, either limited or extensive.

ii) Small payments:

Small payments of upto Rs. 50,000 individually or aggregating to Rs. 2,50,000 in the financial year have limited reporting requirements in Part A of Form 15CA. Accordingly, if one were to make a lumpsum payment exceeding the individual limit of Rs. 50,000 to a non-resident or a foreign company without crossing the annual limit of Rs. 2,50,000, it would attract the reporting in Part B of the Form. This would result in unintended consequences, foiling the intent to reduce the compliance burden for small payments.

iii) Difference in opinion on taxability:

If the revised Rule 37BB is not to apply to payments, which are not liable to tax in India, the same would present practical difficulties in application of the revised procedure. There could be a difference of opinion between the remitter and the authorised dealer on the taxability of a particular remittance. In the absence of any consensus, the authorised dealer may end up insisting on Form 15CA from the remitter before making a payment, while in the view of the latter, the same is not required.

iv) Import payments:

While payments for imports are considered not taxable in India in a vast majority of cases, this issue in not dealt with in the revised Rule 37BB, which otherwise exempts several types of payments from reporting requirements. In fact, in the proposed Rule 37BB as per Notification No. 58, the specified list consisted of import payments, thereby casting lesser obligations on such remittances. Deletion of imports from the specified list now creates even further ambiguity.

v) Capital Gains:

Section 195(2) is very clear that in case where only a part of the payment made to the non-resident or foreign company is liable to tax, the payer must make an application to the Assessing Officer (AO) for determination of that portion of the remittance which is taxable. The Supreme Court in the case of GE India Technology Centre Private Limited has held that the payer cannot by himself determine the taxability of such amount. Typical instances where 195(2) would get triggered and hence, an application to the AO would be required, include business income taxable in India or capital gains.

However, the revised Form 15CB requires the sum of long term and short term capital gains to be reported along with the manner of determination of the capital gains. This would imply that a Chartered Accountant can certify quantum of tax to be deducted from capital gains. This runs counter to the current interpretation of 195(2). As a consequence, it appears that the revised Form 15CB casts the duty of computation of capital gains income on the Chartered Accountant and a remittance/payment can be made to the payee on the basis of his certificate without making an application to the AO.

vi) Instructions by the RBI:

Currently, Rule 37BB does not require the details to be furnished to the authorised dealer. In fact, the requirement to submit Form 15CA accompanied with Form 15CB prior to making remittance is a mandate given by the RBI to the authorised dealers. The revised Rule 37BB(3) puts the onus on the authorised dealers for gathering of the information as well as retaining it, since an income-tax authority is entitled to call upon the authorised dealers to furnish a signed printout. Since the obligation cast under the Income-tax Act supersedes the instructions of the RBI, the revised requirements would need to be notified by the RBI. In the absence of notification by the RBI, the authorised dealers would be confused as to whether the process prescribed by Rule 37BB, the RBI or both is to be followed.

vii)    Hasty implementation:

The amendments to the procedures are sought to be implemented at a very short notice. The original Notification was issued on 5th August, 2013 followed by the Notification No. 67 issued on 2nd September, 2013. Both these notifications seek to usher in the new requirements with effect from 1st October, 2013. Considering that this is a very short-time frame, the existing system may not be geared for the changes. Further, if the RBI does not issue corresponding directions by 1st October 2013, implementation of the amendments would go haywire.

viii)  AD to furnish details to income-tax authority:

Apart from specifically requiring the details to be furnished to the authorised dealers, the revised Rule 37BB also places a cumbersome burden on them to produce the documents submitted to them if required by any income-tax authority during the course of any proceedings under the Act. This would place the authorised dealers under the duty to maintain the documents for a very long period of time.

Conclusion

The recent amendments in Rule 37BB intend to reduce the compliance burden on the remitter and the authorised dealers and facilitate more information for the income-tax authorities. However, two hurried amendments, followed by super-rapid implementation without addressing the lacunae could end up negating the intended benefits of the amendments to all concerned.

ELECTION – What’s In it for ME?

fiogf49gjkf0d
As I pen this article, the Election process for the ICAI elections is well under way. The final list of candidates has been declared, the Code of Conduct for candidates is now effective. The candidates for the Central Council and the five Regional Councils are ramping up their campaigns, planning and emailing their manifestos, reaching out to voters and often traversing the length and breadth of their sizable constituencies. The SMS’s and emails have just begun. We are yet far from the frenzy, that will engulf the entire profession in a months’ time. And already the first murmurs of irritation are being heard.

  •  Why can’t the elections be done in a more dignified manner?
  •  Why must my privacy be invaded by umpteen messages?
  •  Can the ICAI not impose a ban on e-mails – in fact I have avoided giving my e-mail even to the Institute – the only thing I get from ICAI is this onslaught of e-mails.

Strikes a chord? Echoes your feelings? I am sure it does, for I believe 80% of our voters feel that way. Question is – are they right? Who is responsible for this, the Institute, the Council, the Candidates or the members themselves.

Admittedly, the aggressive manner of campaigning has invaded our homes, our work places, our e-mail inboxes and our mobile phones. It is equally true that a far more dignified approach is desirable, and really is expected in an election to a professional body. But we need to ponder – why has such a situation come about. I would believe that the need for such “carpet bombing” has arisen mainly because voters largely ignore the contents, the merits and demerits of information about candidates provided by the Institute. A belief, therefore, is created that since most messages are not read, if you send the message more often, the probability of it being read once improves. Hence, it is voter’s neglect that causes this response which, in fact, creates a widening of the chasm between candidates and voters.

“Whether it is ‘X’ or ‘Y’ – it really does not affect “me” or concern “me”. All I want is that the Institute should be managed well. Let those who are more aware or involved choose. [in any case I do not know most of these candidates).” That is the mindset of a large number (nearing 50%) of the voters – who do not vote. One can only remind them that “Bad Council members are elected by good, well intentioned members who do not vote1 ”.

Those who do vote realise that the way the Institute is managed has a more direct bearing on their livelihood and careers. Such voters (largely members in practice in professional firms) realise that the way the ICAI represents views of our members to the Government and regulatory authorities can make a difference to the future role of CA’s in audit. For e.g. can we have service tax audits, can CA’s be recognised abroad to facilitate better job opportunities etc. Hence, they recognise their self-interest in voting and this is not per se something negative or selfish.

Rather, it is a cornerstone of the democratic system which enables the will of the majority to prevail. The difficulty is that “self–interest”, can be viewed with a broader or narrower vision. Surely, it is in our collective interest to have a Council of persons who are capable of framing policies that will serve the interest of the profession in the long run. Last month’s editorial hit the nail on the head in saying that “I put the two – National interest and the professional interest together.” But that is a more statesman like view – unfortunately not the vision of the vast number of voters.

The “self-interest” is more often judged on more mundane criteria – which often come to the fore such as:

Whether candidate X or Y candidate

  •  Favours relaxation or less strict application of CPE norms;
  •  Is more likely to ensure that more bank audits are allotted and/or audit fees are hiked;
  •  Supports increase of articleship vacancies in big firms (my son/daughter is to do CA next year);
  •  Supports establishment of a branch in my town. I could then become office bearer – in my own town.

The list is long and subjective. Unfortunately, most of these issues are of personal interest and do not qualify as being in the “interest of the Profession”. But because they have a bearing on “what’s the benefit for me – if X rather than Y is elected”, such personal issues play a bigger role in deciding the voting preferences than interest of the profession.

But to the average member, even this poses a significant problem of choice. If one takes the trouble to go through the manifestos or brochures, most candidates seemingly have similar objectives and agendas. This happens, since most persons contesting an election do not really have a specific position on the most vexatious issues facing the profession such as rotation of auditors, authority of the council to call for data from members and take action against defaulters, a roadmap for implementation of Ind-AS, etc. Though none of the candidates really take a position on issues that matter, yet it is imperative to be seen as a person who has a stand on certain issues. It is best to address the more general and non-specific issues such as improvements in administration, governance matters, transparency and so on. This adequately serves the purpose of highlighting to the voters that the candidate has “some considered views.” While these issues steer clear of controversies, the approach identifies the candidate with the voter group from where he seeks maximum support. You will thus see that amongst the issues raised, some candidates would take pains to clearly identify themselves with the more populist issues that would appeal to the small and medium practitioners. Others, looking for more support from larger but traditional firms, would project the same issues with a slight shift in the emphasis to cater to their identified constituency, while those seeking endorsement from the largest firms would bring out the aspects that would further the interests of the highly organised and better remunerated segments of the profession – for example – the need to align with global best practices, ” raising” standards of professionalism and performance etc. While this may enable the candidate to cater to popular sentiment of his specific constituency, it leaves unresolved the problem for an informed voter of how to identify which candidate best meets his “personal interests”. At best, out of a list of say 20 candidates from whom he has to choose, the voter can negatively identify some candidates whom he clearly does not wish to go with – not because the candidate is not good – but that the positions taken by that candidate may not suit “his interest”. So the choice is usually narrowed from 20 to 15 which in real terms is not very helpful.

Assuming that we are dealing with an “informed and enlightened voter”, who has taken the trouble to read the broad positions taken by the candidates, he is still unable to make the real choice on the basis of what is truly in the interest of the profession or even his own interest. In the absence of any other criteria for selecting the right candidate, voters then turn to simpler criteria which can be identified without much effort. These are the criteria which are applied in practice. Some of which are given below by way of illustration.

a)    Whether the candidate belongs to my community:- While cultural affinity undoubtedly gives a certain comfort level; the fact that a particular candidate belongs to the same community, residential area, religion, etc. have no relevance to the manner he would perform as a Council Member and fails to recognise the candidate’s individual abilities or track record. The effort required on the part of the voter is minimal because, usually the name of the candidate gives a clear indication of the community to which he belongs. Success in a professional election can be determined largely by this factor.

b)    Has the candidate phoned or met me?
This criteria is simple to apply because not more than 8 to 10 candidates may be able to speak to the voter in person. It thus requires less mental effort to make a selection as the choices automatically narrow down. This approach is more prevalent amongst seniors and is a throwback to elections 30 years ago, when it was possible and often expected that the candidate would have some personal interaction with the voter. Given the increase in membership, this expectation is rendered impractical. However, such approach survives because it also embeds within it an element of ego on the part of the voter that “I and my vote are important – and the candidate must demonstrate this by making every effort to contact me.”

c)    Bosses directions – Often cited (to my amazement) is that “my boss has instructed everybody in office to vote for Candidate M”. One can understand if a member comes to a conclusion that the candidate M is best suited to represent the interest of the firm, or the class of firms or industry in which the voter is employed or engaged in. To a lesser extent, one could even appreciate that if a senior whose opinion you respect recommends a particular candidate very highly, the voter can be significantly influenced. But to vote in favour of a particular candidate M – merely on instructions throws all notions of “independent choice” for a toss. The voter does not know what the candidate stands for, his competence or abilities but is more concerned about the consequences “if my boss finds out – that I did not vote for candidate M.”

Numerous examples of such superficial, extraneous and inappropriate criteria can be given. All this is happening because, most of the members (or the silent majority) are well-intentioned persons who feel that this entire election process is extraneous to him, as he does not have an answer to the question that bothers him – “what’s in it for me?”

The members are not indifferent, not negative but are simply exercising what economic theory refers to as “Rational Ignorance”. The use of the word “ignorance” may sound harsh – but this is a phrase used in the economic and political theory. The phrase was coined by Mr. Anthony Downs in his seminal work “An Economic Theory of Democracy” where it is mentioned that – Rational ignorance occurs when the cost of educating oneself on an issue exceeds the potential benefit that the knowledge would provide2. In the context of ICAI elections, one can understand “rational ignorance” to mean that the perception of the voter is that going through the various e-mails, brochures or taking an active interest in the election process and ranking of candidates has very little outcome on the ultimate choice of who gets elected or on what policies are adopted for the ICAI. If this is understood by the member in an absolute context, that his choices make no difference whatsoever, the members show no commitment or inclination to even go and cast their votes. In economic terms, there is no “payback”, for the time likely to be spent in evalu-ation of candidates and in voting.

Since these members do not vote, and therefore do not affect the outcome of the election, one needs to see the factors that influence those members who do vote. Members who do vote, generally appreciate that at least in the narrow realm of their direct concerns (such as CPE, Bank Audit, SMP issues as mentioned earlier), electing a person who will further these interests is beneficial. However, they are also of the view that their own impact on the ultimate outcome is marginal and that the management of affairs of the Institute would most likely continue in the same direction so long as the few persons who are on the negative list are not elected. Therefore, such voters, generally, recognise their interest, but also exercise the logical choice of “rational ignorance”, in the belief that disruption of their personal/professional time, going through numerous brochures, manifestos, e-mails and SMS’s is not relevant, as it does not further the objective of making a rational choice amongst candidates. It is, therefore, much easier to adopt the very elementary criteria (community, firm, recommendation etc.) rather than exercising vigilance and due care in choice of specific candidates. That this approach is not driven by indifference but by “rational ignorance”, can be very easily established. Experienced candidates will confirm that persons going for voting, often go with a clear decision (based on the elementary criteria) about their Central Council preferences. But even when they reach the polling booth, they may be unaware of the candidates contesting the Regional Council. This will show that such voters are aware that although their overall impact on the election results may be minimal, getting a suitable person who will further their interests (such as bank audits and Big firm vs SMP issues) at the policy-making level i.e. Central Council is necessary and “is in his interest”. The Regional Council election will have virtually no direct impact on their personal issues ,and therefore the degree of “rational ignorance”, in regard to the regional Council elections is higher.

It would appear from the above, that the voter behaviour does not arise out of apathy or indifference, but is the logical preference for “rational ignorance”. If this is so, well-meaning professionals, professional organisations like the BCAS and the ICAI itself, would appear to be wrong in their attempt to create greater involvement and participation in the election process. But such a conclusion would be incorrect, because there is a fallacy in the above reasoning. The voters exercising “rational ignorance” do so in the mistaken belief that the impact on their own interest is marginal and that irrespective of who is elected, the affairs of the Institute would be guided by the best interests of the majority of members. But in reality, this is not so, as explained in another economic theory – the Public Choice Theory3 . A study of this well accepted political and economic theory would show (and I have learnt from experience) that the fundamental assumption that the Institute would continue to work in the interests of the majority of members is incorrect. If the large mass of voters opt for “rational ignorance”, or abstain from voting, then the policies adopted would be influenced by the lobby or group that is more organised, and therefore, more influential. Would the policies be more influenced by members in the SMP segment (who constitute more than 80% of the membership), or is it the larger firms which would wield greater influence. The public choice theory clearly lays down that, whichever group is able to exercise influence in an organised manner will drive the policy in the direction favoured by such a lobby or group. It is for us to test whether this theory is simply an academic issue or something that really works at the ground level. I would leave it for readers to judge by evaluating the policies of the ICAI in the recent past. By way of an example, I may only draw attention to the composition and policies of Professional Accountancy Councils in Europe and USA (which are broadly similar to the ICAI Council). You will probably recognise the public choice theory in application in those circumstances, if you consider the composition of those councils and the policies framed by them. In almost all these countries, their policy formulation is overwhelmingly dominated by large firms who have a disproportionately higher representation as compared to the SMPs in those countries. This is apparently because though the SMPs even in those countries are larger in number; they seem to be less organised in terms of electoral groupings. This would indicate that the public choice theory does apply even to professional bodies and I see no reason why ICAI can be an exception to the theory.

If members consider the above points, it would be clear to each one of them that exercising “rational ignorance”, in such circumstances, may not be the appropriate choice because there is a lot at stake for each member. This is even more so for the members in the 25 to 55 age group (who incidentally constitute a large chunk of the electorate). These members will be significantly impacted by these policy decisions – irrespective of whether they are in practice or in employment. Where this profession and its members will be two decades from now could well be decided by certain approaches and policies chosen today. These issues could have significant impact on the nature and size of practice, on the entry and training requirements of our students and the way Indian professionals will perform in the global economy. Issues such as the road map for adoption of Ind AS, role of ICAI as a regulator, requires an informed debate which is usually not possible in the din of elections. But, it will be our elected representatives who will lay down the milestones for policy in this regard.

If all these facts are considered, it will be apparent that there is a lot at stake for every member who is conscious of the larger picture. In order to effectively shape and influence ICAI policy in the medium and long-term, it is imperative for every voter to see what is in it for us rather than for me (as a selfish, narrower horizon). Further, when the voter considers us, he has to recognise that it is not merely a big firm vs SMP issue. The us can refer to various interest groups within the profession which may have certain common objectives or interests. For example, recently certain interest groups have very actively sought to use the Internet to activate a common platform in regard to allotment of bank branch audit and influence the approach of members across the country to voting for candidates based on their response to this issue. This is a pressure group or lobby that fits perfectly in the parameters of the public choice theory. I personally believe that this is not in the larger interests of the profession- i.e. it is not in the interest of the majority of members to approach matters in this manner. However, the public choice theory indicates, that such a group (or any other organised interest group) may be able to drive a policy away from the larger interests of the profession and in the direction preferred by such a group. If the common member feels that the actions of a certain organised group are not in his interest and/ or in the interest of the profession, his only response in the democratic process – is to make his view known – through his vote. So if the member has a view in regard to the ICAI, its affairs, its policies and its future – it is not enough to vote on the basis of simplistic and superficial criteria adopted, consequent to opting for ‘rational ignorance’ approach. If the members really want to influence the way the Institute deals with the future challenges (our future as professionals), you must realise and accept that pro-active, logical voting is in your and our own interest. There is everything at stake for us. You need to make your vote count if you are concerned with OUR future – that’s the “pay off” for each individual who votes – there is everything in it for you.

FDI Framework: Whither are we Bound?

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction
India received Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) worth US $ 176 billion during the 12-year period of April 2000 to July 2012. This highlights the importance of FDI to the Indian economy. FDI is a much preferred form of foreign investment as compared to other forms, such as, Portfolio Investment, Foreign Institutional Investment, etc. This is because, the FDI flows are considered to be relatively more long-term in nature. One peculiar nature of the FDI Framework in India is that it is governed by multiple laws/policies/regulations and it has more than one Ministry/ Regulator/ Agency to deal with. Often one finds that a stance taken by one Agency in relation to FDI, has not yet been endorsed by another or is exactly opposite to the stance of the other. Such a scenario, creates unnecessary confusion and pollutes the investment climate. The story of India’s FDI Framework is complex and compelling, and through this Article, I hope to highlight some of these qualities.

Regulations & Agencies
The FDI Framework in India stands on a threelegged tripod consisting of three Regulations ~ the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 along with its Regulations, the Consolidated FDI Policy, and the Circulars to Authorised Person issued from time to time by the Reserve Bank of India.

Interestingly, just as there are three Regulations, there are also three Agencies/Ministries/Regulators which are involved in the FDI Regime – the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), the Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion (DIPP), Ministry of Commerce & Industry and the Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB), Ministry of Finance. Each of these three agencies has an important role to play.

FEMA and RBI
The Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 (FEMA) is a Central Statute of the Parliament and is the supreme Act, when it comes to regulating all foreign transactions in India, including those pertaining to FDI. The FEMA also consists of Regulations issued by the RBI from time to time. The relevant Regulations for FDI are the Foreign Exchange Management (Transfer or Issue of Security by Persons Resident Outside India) Regulations, 2000 (Notification No. FEMA 20/2000-RB dated May 3, 2000). U/s. 46 of the FEMA, the RBI has power to make Rules to carry out the provisions of the Act. Further, u/s. 47, it has the powers to make Regulations to carry out the provisions of the Act and the Rules.

The RBI is the nodal regulatory authority for all matters connected with foreign exchange transactions in India. It is the authority which has powers to launch prosecution, levy penalties, allow compounding of offences, etc., as well as the agency which lays down rules for valuation, reporting requirements, etc.

One feature of the FEMA Regulations is the Directions issued by the RBI u/s. 10(4) and 11(1) of the FEMA to various Authorised Persons, popularly known as “A.P.(DIR Series) Circulars”. Authorised Persons are Authorised Dealers, Money Changers, Banks, etc., who are authorised by the RBI to deal in foreign exchange. Thus, these Circulars are operational instructions from the RBI to Banks, etc. The legal validity of these Circulars has been upheld by the Bombay High Court in the case of Prof. Krishnaraj Goswami v. the RBI, 2007 (6) Bom CR 565. The Court held as follows:

“………the Reserve Bank of India issued the impugned circular by way of directions as contemplated under Sections 10(4) and 11(1) of the Act. A bare reading of these provisions clearly show that the Reserve Bank of India has the power to issue directions to the authorised persons and this power is wide enough to cover any kind of directions so far it provide for the regulation of the Foreign Exchange management. We are unable to find any merit in the contention raised on behalf of the petitioner that the Reserve Bank of India has no jurisdiction to issue such circulars. Section 10(4) of the Act clearly stipulates that an authorised person shall, as contemplated under Section 10(1) of the Act, in all his dealings is bound by the directions, general or special, issued by the Reserve Bank of India. Similarly, Section 11(1) of the Act provides that the Reserve Bank of India may, for the purpose of securing compliance with the provisions of the Act and of any Rules, Regulations and directions made under the provisions of the Act, give to the authorised persons any direction in regard to making of payment or the doing or desist from doing of any act relating to foreign exchange or foreign security….”

Once a year on 1st July of every year and occasionally, on a half-yearly basis, the RBI issues a Master Circular which consolidates all the existing Circulars at one place. Master Circulars are issued with a sunset clause of one year. Master Circulars were introduced in accordance with the recommendations of the Tarapore Committee. This Committee recommended that every year, the RBI should consolidate all the instructions and Regulations on each subject into a Master Circular for use by the public. It also recommended that the Master Circulars should be prepared in an unambiguous language without using jargons.

Whilst the FEMA, the Rules and the Regulations have legal force, the Circulars and Master Circulars are only directions.

CFIP and DIPP
The DIPP frames the Foreign Direct Investment Policy in India which lays down the sectors in which FDI is allowed, the conditions attached and the sectoral caps. It also lays down the sectors in which FDI is Automatic and those in which it requires Approval of the Government of India. The FDI Policy is prepared in the form of the Consolidated FDI Policy (“CFDIP”). The Policy defines FDI to mean investment by non-resident entities in the capital of an Indian company under Schedule 1 of FEMA No. 20/2000-RB dated 3rd May, 2000.

Earlier, the DIPP used to issue Press Notes from time to time, which used to lay down the FDI Policy and changes made to the same. Since the past two years, it has started the practice of preparing a Consolidated FDI Policy which subsumes all Press Notes/Press Releases/ Circulars issued by DIPP till date. In the first two years, the DIPP came out with a Consolidated FDI Policy twice a year, i.e., on a half-yearly basis – in April and in October. However, it has now clarified that henceforth, it would be an annual event. Thus, the next CFDIP would be in April 2013.

The power of the Government to lay down economic policy has been the subject-matter of great judicial interest. In Balco Employees Union v UOI, (2002) 2 SCC 333, the Supreme Court laid down the prerogative of the Government to frame the economic policy:

“……The Courts have consistently refrained from interfering with economic decisions as it has been recognised that economic expediencies lack adjudicative disposition and unless the economic decision, based on economic expediencies, is demonstrated to be so violative of constitutional or legal limits on power or so abhorrent to reason, that the Courts would decline to interfere. In matters relating to economic issues, the Government has, while taking a decision, right to “trial and error” as long as both trial and error are bona fide and within limits of authority. ….”

Again in Federation of Railway Officers Association v. UOI (2003) 4 SCC 289, the Apex Court laid down the following principle:


“……In examining a question of this nature where a policy is evolved by the Government judicial review thereof is limited. When policy according to which or the purpose for which discretion is to be exercised is clearly expressed in the statute, it cannot be said to be an unrestricted discretion. On matters affecting policy and requiring technical expertise Court would leave the matter for decision of those who are qualified to address the issues. Unless the policy or action is inconsistent with the Constitution and the laws or arbitrary or irrational or abuse of the power, the Court will not interfere with such matters.”

The validity of the FDI Policy laid down by the Government, has come in for review by the Courts. In the decision of Radio House v UOI, 2008 (2) Kar. LJ 695 (Kar), the Karnataka High Court held while dealing with the definition of ‘wholesale trading’ laid down in an earlier version of the FDI Policy:

“………The task of defining the term ‘cash and carry wholesale trade’ is to be best left to the Government, which has formulated the policy of inviting the FDI. No directions can be given to the Government to accept a particular definition of the term ‘cash and carry wholesale trade’ in preference to or to the exclusion of its other definitions from other sources. Therefore the challenge to the approval order, dated 5th December, 2000 (Annexure-B) fails. …………..

………But it is for the Government to evolve a policy to safeguard the interest of the retailers. It is trite position in law that the Court should not substitute its wisdom for the wisdom of the Government in policy matters.”

The FDI Policy on Wholesale Trading was also the subject-matter of review in the case of Federation of Associations of Maharashtra v UOI, W.P. (C) Nos. 9568-70 of 2003 (Del) where the Court held as follows:

“…….The aforesaid is apparent from the fact that no one is disputing the right of the Government to lay down its policy……….. once it is recognised that the Government can amend its policy, nothing pre-cludes the Government from issuing a clarification even if it is read in the nature of an amendment of the policy. ……………The matter in issue is not even of any statutory interpretation, but of the policy. The policy-framer is the concerned Ministry which itself has issued the clarification / modification. The learned ASG is right in his submissions that the matter is one of policy decision and allocation of businesses and FIPB functions as part of the concerned Ministry. ………The relevant authority is the Government itself which had framed the policy. ……………..

59.    The interpretation of the Government is also not out of thin hair. It is trite to say that with the expansion of international commerce and trade, there are certain internationally understood concepts, which have come into play. Is the Court to look to the traditional definition of what may be wholesale or retail as may be considered in the dictionaries and in the country earlier or is the Court to accept the definition adopted by the Government on international practice? The Government’s view is based on the WTO definition of wholesale trade. The Government can hardly be faulted on this account and it is not for the Court to go into this question……….….This being the position, it is the stand of the Government, which has to be given the greatest weight in such matters. There cannot be any knit-picking on this issue of the definition when the stand of the Government has come clearly in its affidavit as enunciated by its clarification. The Government wants B2B sales to form a part of wholesale cash and carry business. So be it.”

A decision of the Delhi High Court in the case of Putzmeister India Private Limited and others vs. UOI, W.P.(C) 5633-35/2006 Order dated July 1, 2008 (Del) is also relevant. This case examined the validity of the erstwhile Press Note 1 of 2005 issued by the DIPP requiring the FIPB’s permission in cases where the foreign investor had a prior joint venture in the same / allied field:

“27. Issues pertaining to foreign investment and attendant modalities are largely a matter of executive policy; to some extent, these are also governed by provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act and the guidelines issued by the Reserve Bank of India. The three press notes fall in the domain of enunciation of executive policy………A large number of decisions have ruled that the wisdom of an executive policy does not fall within the domain of judicial review; nor does Article 226 permit High Courts to sit in appellate judgment over executive decisions, made in legitimate bounds of exercise of power……….When two views are reasonably possible about the interpretation of an executive order, the court is of the opinion that unless strong and compelling reasons exist, it should not supplant the views of the executive government.”

FIPB

The Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB) is a part of the Department of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance. As explained above, FDI could be Automatic or it may require the Approval of the Government of India. The FIPB is a nodal authority for approving all FDI proposals which require prior Government Approval. The FIPB provides a single-window mechanism for all such FDI proposals, which are not permissible under the automatic route. The FIPB has been a part of several Ministries. It initially started as a part of Prime Minister’s Office, later on it became a part of the DIPP and now is a part of the DEA, Ministry of Finance. All FDI proposals up to an investment amount of Rs. 1,200 crores are approved by the Finance Minister, while those in excess of Rs. 1,200 crores are approved by the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA). The FIPB consists of Secretaries from various Ministries, such as, Finance, DIPP, External Affairs, Department of Commerce, etc.

It may be noted that the FIPB is a body without any statutory backing nor can it make any law. In the case of Zippers Karamchari Union vs. UOI, 2000 (10) SCC 619, the Supreme Court while dealing with the grant of an approval by the FIPB to YKK, Japan to set up a subsidiary in India, held as follows:

“….It is a matter of government policy and in our opinion no sustainable ground was urged before us to hold that the approval granted to YKK was contrary to the government policy. The Court would not be justified in interfering in such matters when it is satisfied that a grant of approval to YKK was neither irrational, nor for any extraneous consideration….”

CFDIP or FEMA, Which One Prevails?

One question which has often been raised has been-which one is supreme – the FDI Policy or the FEMA Regulations? The answer to this is very simple. It is the FEMA and the Regulations issued thereunder which are superior to the FDI Policy. The Policy is notified by the RBI as amendments to the Foreign Exchange Management (Transfer or Issue of Security by Persons Resident Outside India) Regulations, 2000. Schedule 1 of these Regulations deals with “Foreign Direct Investment Scheme”. Para 2 of Schedule 1 gives recognition to the FDI Policy by providing that the Automatic Route for FDI is available to a company in accordance with Annex B to the Schedule and the provisions of the FDI Policy, as notified by the Ministry of Commerce, from time to time. Annex B contains the “Sectoral Specific Policy for Foreign Investment”. This Annex B is based on the FDI Policy issued by the DIPP.

The FDI Policy itself provides that in the case of any conflict with the FEMA Regulations, the FEMA Notifications would prevail.

Thus, the descending order of hierarchy amongst various pronouncements would be: FEMA -> Rules & Regulations ->  AP Dir Circulars ->  Master Circulars -> FDI Policy by DIPP -> Press Notes/Clarifications by DIPP.

PIL before SC

An interesting question recently arose before the Supreme Court in a Public Interest Litigation (PIL) – Manohar Lal Sharma v UOI, Writ Petition (Civil) 417 of 2012 (SC), Order dated 15th October, 2012. Before going into the facts of this case, a background to this case merits attention. The DIPP vide Press Note No. 5 of 2012 dated 20th September 2012, permitted FDI in Multi-brand Retail Trading under the Approval Route of the FIPB. Prior to this, FDI in this sector was altogether prohibited. Annex A to Schedule 1 of the Foreign Exchange Management (Transfer or Issue of Security by Persons Resident Outside India) Regulations, 2000 as well as the CFDIP both provided that FDI in “Retail Trading (except single brand product retailing)” is a “Sector prohibited for FDI”. Press Note 5/2012 modified the CFDIP by permitting 51% FDI in Multi-brand Retail Trading. Subsequently, the RBI issued Directions to Authorised Persons vide A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 32 dated 21st September 2012, specifying that the FDI Policy has been modified to permit 51% FDI in Multi-brand Retailing. It also mentioned that neces-sary amendments to the FEMA Regulations are being notified separately.

However, the FEMA Regulations No. 20-2000/RB have yet not been modified. They yet contain the old Annex B which provides that FDI is not permitted in Multi-brand Retailing. Thus, a PIL was filed which stated that in the absence of amendment to the FEMA Regulations, the FDI Policy could not prevail over it and hence, a petition was made to the Supreme Court asking for a stay on the Press Notes allowing FDI in Multi-brand Retailing.

In the above-mentioned PIL, the Supreme Court up-held the superiority of the FEMA Regulations over the FDI Policy. However, it also upheld the amendments to the FDI Policy on Retail Trading but asked the Government to bring the FEMA Notifications up to date with the FDI Policy. The Court held that amending the FEMA Regulations is a legal process which has to be taken to logical conclusion. It is a routine thing and it has to be done. It also held that not amending the FEMA Regulations was at best, an irregularity that is curable and as soon as amendment is brought, it would be cured.

The Bench added that there is no question of any stay on the FDI policy. It held that the FDI policy was prepared by the Central Government and it is not that RBI had been kept in the dark by the Centre. RBI had already issued a Circular amending the FDI limits but it had not formally amended the Regulations. Accordingly, the Court asked the Attorney General when RBI would do so. It gave RBI time to do so by noting as follows:

“….but you have to give the policy a legal shape by amending the regulation. These matters have huge impact….”

On the allegation in the PIL that the Centre’s notification was issued without the authority of law as approval of neither the President nor the Parliament was secured, the Supreme Court rejected the same by saying that the assumption that the policy has to be in the name of the President is flawed and unfounded. It further said that a policy is never required to be placed before the Parliament.

This decision clearly establishes the supremacy of the FEMA Regulations over the FDI Policy and that the Regulations must be amended to reflect the FDI Policy.


Contrasting Stands

The above was an instance where the RBI had not yet modified the FEMA Regulations to be in touch with the CFDIP. However, what about cases where the RBI’s view is exactly opposite to that of the CFDIP? A case in point is the issue of FDI instruments with Put and Call Options. Since the last 2-3 years, the RBI has been taking a view that exit options, such as put and call options, attached to Compulsorily Convertible Debentures/Preference Shares/Equity Shares for FDI are not valid. The view being taken was that, a fixed exit option makes the equity instrument equivalent to a debt instrument. The DIPP in its CFDIP issued vide Circular 2/2011, contained a Clause that only instruments with no in-built options of any type would qualify as eligible instruments for FDI. Instruments issued/transferred to non-residents with in-built options would lose their equity character and such instruments would have to comply with the ECB guidelines. Within a month of its issuance, the CFDIP was modified and a Corrigendum was issued by the DIPP deleting the above Clause. Thus, the DIPP’s stance on the issue is now very clear, i.e., FDI can have in-built options. However, the RBI’s stance on this issue has yet not mellowed. Such divergent views between the FDI Policy and the FEMA Regulations are best avoided, since they do nothing but add to the regulatory confusion and mayhem.

FDI v FII / PIS
While on the subject of FDI, it would not be out of place to highlight the distinction between FDI inflows on the one hand and inflows from Foreign Institutional Investment (FII) / Portfolio Investment Schemes (PIS) on the other hand. FDI is primary market investment by non-resident entities in the capital of an Indian company, i.e., money directly comes to the Indian company. FII and PIS on the other hand are secondary market investments, in which foreign investment is made by acquiring the shares of an Indian company from other resident/non-resident shareholders. It may be noted that FII investment is not subject to the sectoral caps and conditions laid down in the CFDIP. In cases where the RBI also wants to prevent, investment under the FII/PIS, it has expressly done so. For instance, earlier, FII/NRI investment was prohibited under the print media sector. No such restriction is now found.

Another analogy is in the real estate sector. Under the PIS, FIIs can also acquire shares of real estate company making an IPO. The conditions of lock-in, minimum capitalisation, minimum area, etc., which are associated with FDI in real estate are not applicable to a Portfolio Investment made by FIIs, including that made under the IPO of a real estate company. However, FII investments in any pre-IPO placement are treated on par with FDI and are subject to all conditions of the erstwhile Press Note 2 /2005.

Conclusion
India’s FDI Policy is multi-faceted and is often prone to pulls and tugs from within the system. Is it not strange that for a country which aims to be the cynosure of the global attention and which is constantly vying with China, Brazil, Russia, etc., for FDI, India continues to have contrasting stands from Ministries and Regulators on the FDI Policy. FDI loves certainty as explained by Justice Kapadia, in the celebrated decision of Vodafone International Holdings, 341 ITR 1 (SC):

“…FDI flows towards location with a strong governance infrastructure which includes enactment of laws and how well the legal system works. Certainty is integral to rule of law. Certainty and stability form the basic foundation of any fiscal system…”

Maybe it is time to disband multiple agencies, such as, the FIPB and the DIPP and replace them with one Super Regulator for all things connected with FDI in India. Should we not get over our hangover of the “Licence Raj” once and for all? It would be desirable if we have a clear FDI Policy devoid of confusion and ambiguity. One may sum up with a quote from Henry Miller, the noted American Author:

“Confusion is a word we have invented for an order which is yet not understood!”

Double Dip Recession

fiogf49gjkf0d
Recession is a dreaded phenomenon in the world. It connotes economic misery for the people during its onset as well as its existence. It can be described as a period when economic activity in a country or a region, measured in terms of its Gross Domestic Product (GDP), declines and such a decline persists for at least two quarters. A recession is a business cycle contraction resulting in a general slowdown in the economic activity. It is understood as a period in which an economy achieves negative growth of its GDP.

Economic growth is primarily measured in the value of GDP achieved by the economy over a particular period as compared to the earlier period of similar duration. When the economic expansion is positive, as compared to the previous period, the period is considered as that of a positive growth. However, if growth falters and enters in the negative territory in a period as compared to the immediately preceding period, that period is called as a recessionary period. Most countries in the world, majority of the times, achieve positive growth of GDP, which is generally measured on month-on-month, quarter-on-quarter or year-onyear basis. The recessionary periods, wherein a country is not able to achieve GDP equal to or more than its last comparable period of measurement, generally indicates that there is something seriously wrong in the state of affairs of the economy, as the GDP is not able to grow, which is expected to be its natural movement in today’s world. In a period of recession, as the economy slows down, there is a slowdown of demand due to reduction in disposable income in the hands of the consumers in the economy. This reduction in demand has a negative effect on business activities in the economy. The decrease in the economic activities may lead to increase in unemployment and consequentially, may reduce liquidity and purchasing power in the hands of consumers, which is very essential for sustenance of demand in an economy. A recession can lead to a vicious circle of negative growth and may cause substantial economic misery, on the back of sustained high unemployment, unless intervened by the Government directly. Such intervention can be done by easing liquidity, by increasing money supply, by increasing public spending or by a combination of monetary measures to boost the economy. In the under-developed and even the developing countries, it can be achieved by liberalising trade and promoting foreign investment. Everybody dreads the recession because it brings in dissatisfaction and unhappiness amongst the people affected by it. It generally results in increase in unemployment, liquidity drying off, fall in per capita income, reduction of new investment and clouding of the investment climate in the economy. It may result in an increase in the stress levels in the minds of the people and can cause harm to the morale of the subjects of a country. A prolonged recession may even destabilise the political equation in a country. Therefore, recession is considered as socially and even politically a dangerous phenomenon by one and all across the globe.

A double dip recession is a rare phenomenon, wherein after continuing in recession for a short period, an economy bounces back and there is positive growth for a while. But the economy is not able to sustain the positive tempo of growth. It again buckles under recession and it registers negative GDP growth. Generally, a double dip recession denotes negative growth of an economy for a while, a turn around after the phase with a positive growth for a short while and thereafter another period with negative growth before the economy decisively comes out of recession with positive growth numbers. Typically, the second dip of the recession creeps in suddenly when the economic numbers are looking on an upswing. There occurs a sudden slippage and it is realised only after passage of some time. The second dip of the recession is not as severe as the first one, but the upward movement from the former happens more gradually as compared to the first dip. Further, during the period of the second dip, the sentiment in the economy is more deteriorated as compared to the period during the first dip.

In the case of a double dip recession, movement of the GDP numbers are somewhat like shown in the diagram on the next page. Movement of GDP numbers: The graphical representation of a double dip recession on a chart is like the alphabet ‘W’ with an uneven bottom level, but it can take various shapes depending upon whether the recovery out of the second dip is ‘V’ shaped, ‘U’ shaped, ’J’ shaped or ‘L’ shaped. In the ‘V’ shape, the recovery is swift. In ‘U’ shape, it is slower than that of the ‘V’ shape but which catches momentum after some time. In ‘J’ shape the initial recovery is slow, and the improvement is gradual. In ‘L’ shape, the recovery after the dip is slow and painful. The rate of recovery flattens out at the bottom of recession and the upward movement does not start quickly enough.

History of double dip recession:
A double dip recession is rare. In the 150 years of economic history, it is said that double dip recession has happened three times. In the recent years since World War II, there was a double dip recession during the period 1980-1982 in the US. The economy was in recession in second and third quarter of 1980. It then recovered but fell back into recession in the fourth quarter of 1981 and remained in recession in the first quarter of 1982. Since then, there has not been any double dip recession in the developed world, but the fear of such a phenomenon lingers on even today.

Factors which contribute to a recession and a double dip recession:

1. Inflation:
High inflation can erode the investors’ confidence in an economy, which may result in the exodus of funds from the economy, especially those of the foreign investors. It may make even the local investors lose their faith in the economy. Though they may not have many good options for investment of their funds and may be restricted from taking their investible funds out of the country, they would like to reduce their risk. In such a situation, they may prefer to invest more money in debt or fixed income earning instruments as compared to equity or new businesses, though the post of tax returns on investments may be lower than the rate of inflation. High inflation causes uncertainty for investors and increases their risk aversion. Reduction in the rate of fresh investments can slow down an economy. If the economy is already growing at a low rate, a marginal change in the investment sentiment may push it in recessionary conditions.

2. Unemployment
: Unemployment can slow down consumption. High level of unemployment is not only politically troublesome, but it can even be economically disastrous. High unemployment reduces the earnings of the subjects of a state and also reduces the consumable money in the hands of the society. Availability of lesser money for consumption can reduce the demand for food and consumer goods. It can also reduce the demand for value added products and services. The reduction in demand may prove to be deterrent for the capital goods industry as well. Sustained high unemployment levels can reduce the consumption in an economy and cause a possibility of recession.

3.  Consumer confidence:
Consumer confidence is purely a psychological factor. An upbeat sentiment can influence an economy positively and a downbeat sentiment can have negative impact. A low consumer confidence can cause reduction of spending by the consumers as they would like to save their earnings or surplus for a future about which they are not certain. Level of the hold back of consumption is based on the perceived risk which is a matter of sentiment. The reduced level of consumption in an economy can cause economic slowdown due to inadequacy of demand and result in reduction of economic activities. Such a slowdown in an economy having already a low growth rate can push the economy into a recession.

  4.  Stock Market:


The stock market movements have a positive correlation with the consumption in an economy. A decline in stock markets can add fuel to the fire of slowing consumption. If the immediate future of the stock market is pointing towards a bear market, then it is likely that the consumers in the country may reduce their spending, not only of the essentials but on durables as well. Falling stock market may affect the sentiment in the housing sector as well, as buying of houses may get postponed. The reduction of spending can reduce the demand of capital goods which are used for capacity building to cater to expected consumption. Low demand means low turnover and low profits for the businesses, and even to the corporate sector in the economy. Lower corporate profits can further dampen the sentiments in the stock markets and further slowdown the economy. In fact, the stock market can be a lead indicator of a recessionary period as the professionals operating in the market are able to sense the economic future in a much better way than the common public and many a time even better than the Government and the policy-makers.

    5. Natural catastrophe:


If an economy gets subjected to a major national catastrophe, such a catastrophe can lead to a slow down and the economy may face a recession. This cause of a recession is generally out of the control of any individual or group of individuals or even the policy-makers. Not only major natural calamities such as flood, drought and tsunami can cause a recession; but even man-made cause such as a war can lead an economy to a recession. When an economy has just come out of a recession, a major natural calamity can push back its growth to a negative zone and the economy may face a double dip recession. In the early phase of recovery, an economy is fragile and does not have adequate strength to deal with adverse conditions. So the economy remains vulnerable to double dip.

   6. Misguided economic regulations:


Misguided economic regulations such as major embargoes on import-export, stringent exchange controls and curbs on foreign investment can cause economic pain and can lead the economy into a recession. Such regulations can hamper free trade in the country, deter the new domestic as well as foreign investments and spoil the sentiments. If damaging regulations are not reviewed and amended, they can cause serious detriment to the prospects of an economy over a short as well as long term. If the damaging regulations are introduced in the initial period of economic recovery, they may force the economy into a double dip recession.

    7. Failure of economic policies:

A country takes number of initiatives to improve its economy so that the best growth rate can be achieved. In recessionary days, policies are devised to curb the recession and to get out of it, as fast as possible. To stimulate growth in a sagging economy; rate of interest may be reduced, the rate of taxes may be pruned, the Government may increase spending, liquidity may be pumped into the economy or any other stimulant measures may be taken. These are described as the policy measures and they may be implemented and regulated by the Government directly or through designated authorities. These measures may have their negative side effects. As a direct result of these policy measures; the budgetary deficit in an economy can increase, there can be noticeable increase in inflation rate and the currency of the nation can be volatile or can weaken. To over-come the side effects of the policy measures, the Government may change the policies prematurely which can give a jerk to the slowly improving economy. Ill-conceived changes in policies can push the economy back in to recession. If these changes are made at an inappropriate time when the economy has just struggled out of recession, then it may even cause a double dip recession.

    8. Untimely withdrawal of stimulus or concessions:

Many weak economies and even some developing economies are habituated to various concessions given by their respective Governments and continued over a period. In today’s world, more and more countries are under pressure from the developed countries to create a fair play in their economies by reducing curbs and concessions so that the goods and services can flow easily across economies and give best deals to the consumers. Such changes, when initiated in an economy, can slow down the economy on a temporary basis and they can cause recessionary conditions. Similarly, when an economy which was in recession, is struggling to get out of the recession with the help of stimulus given by its Government, the untimely withdrawal of the stimulus due to inflationary pressure or any other political or socio-economic reasons may push the economy back into recession, thereby causing a double dip recession. When an economy is coming out of recession, the task of the policy-makers is extremely critical and any error of judgment in decision making may prove to be costly for the struggling economy.

The GDP numbers, which decide the growth rate, may fluctuate from period to period. An economy may post higher or lower GDP numbers from period on period as a normal phenomenon. The monthly or quarterly fluctuations are not given so much significance in ordinary situations. However, if the growth number goes into a negative territory or even goes to a low level and fails to bounce back, it is a serious matter of concern for the economy. A failure to hold on to the economic growth after a recession can lead to a double dip recession. A fluctuating chart pattern with double or triple dips much above the baseline of zero rate of growth does not cause any alarm bells in an economy, but its movement just below the par line is described as recession and becomes a major cause of concern. A double dip recession has always to be understood as unique phenomena and should not be confused with the fall in economic growth over a short to medium term.

Occurrence of double dip recessionary conditions in certain sectors of economy is not an uncommon phenomenon. While the economy may grow in totality, certain sectors of it may be in recessionary conditions at various times and for various reasons. Such conditions are usually not glaring as they are restricted to a limited segment of the overall economy and the country is not seriously affected by such situations as the negativity is more than balanced by the positive growth in other sectors. The factors causing such conditions and the remedies to the same are similar to those applicable to a double dip recession. Therefore understanding of the rare phenomenon of double dip recession is important for economists and the policy-makers of a country.

There was a great hue and cry about the impending double dip recession in various economies across the globe in the third quarter of 2010. After a painful recessionary period during 2008-2009, and a fragile recovery in early 2010 this was a dreaded phenomena. Fortunately, the current indicators are that the world has overcome the possibility and fear of a double dip recession for the time being and from here onwards most of the economies are likely to grow in positive territories for some years to come. Country-specific minor recessionary trends such as the one noticed in the UK in the last quarter of 2010, cannot be ruled out, but by and large it seems that the world will not face the phenomena of double dip in the near future. The concentrated efforts of the Governments of all the countries and their central banks have helped the world to surmount this major catastrophe and it is a great achievement.

SPREADING OUT: AIMING HIGHER OR . . . ?

fiogf49gjkf0d
For the past several months, our financial press as
also other print media have been excitedly raving about our nationals
and corporations spreading their wings beyond India. They write about an
Indian company buying an oil refinery outside India; about our telecom
giant acquiring large non-Indian companies at a price that, till about a
decade ago, appeared unthinkable. They also write about Indian sugar
manufacturing companies trying to acquire agricultural lands in less
developed African/Latin American countries to support their existing
Indian business. There are also write-ups telling us that large Indian
companies engaged in steel/cement business are looking at acquiring
mining interests elsewhere in the world to meet their ever-growing
demand for inputs for their manufacturing business in India. There are
now definite reports about a successful Indian pharmaceutical company
acquiring, in the teeth of bitter litigation, a substantial non-Indian
company engaged in manufacturing and marketing generic drugs for global
sale.

All these indicate a sea change from our earlier record as
cost-effective manufacturers of basic inputs being exported to feed
large global entities in their manufacture of products that require
further value addition — in the manufacturing as well as marketing
field.

So, I started musing over these reports and asked myself
the question: Is this something that should gladden our hearts or, aside
from our usual national pride, it should provoke deeper thinking about
where are we heading?

I think about Indo-Aryans migrating 3,000
to 4,000 years ago in search of a more hospitable climate, bringing
along with them their advanced techniques and erudition. But my mind
also goes back to what happened to the people of Zoroastrian faith who
were persecuted by the fanatic spread of Islam in their home country —
Persia as it then was. My mind goes back to some newspaper reports that
the largest number of people who illegally sneak into North America from
Mexican borders are people of Indian origin.

Clearly, migration
signifies a kind of restlessness of mankind to be better tomorrow than
what they were yesterday. But the universally acclaimed success of our
software personnel does suggest that, apart from greater economic
success, they have enriched India and they have not been any less
attached to their motherland.

I have heard that one of our most
outstanding intellectuals — alas, no more — was asked by some
interviewers as to what part of his decisions concerning his personal
self and career he would have handled differently, if he was in a
position to do so. The answer was full of melancholic despair when he
said that his earlier steadfast decision to live and work in India could
have been otherwise.

I, therefore, realised that migration is
wholesome when dictated by a desire for enrichment — material and
otherwise — for self without losing faith in and love for one’s own
country. But when it is triggered by disappointment or fear, it is not
necessarily a happy phenomenon.

Take the case of Indian steel
companies seeking mining rights outside India. Perhaps they do so
because of unenlightened local governments whose desire to enrich their
power-brokers overrides that for economic development. And this is
compounded by mindless activism of people lacking knowledge about
economic home-truths, their ignorance being amply compensated by their
foolhardy bravado.

Again, take the case of Indian sugar
companies seeking farm lands elsewhere. Why have they been working in
that direction? I guess, it is because of antiquated agricultural
policies worsened by rampant political opportunism and bribery. The
great enthusiasm of our present Prime Minister about India opening a new
chapter in economic liberalisation through SEZs is all but dead. There
are credible stories about some authority in charge of granting approval
for an applicant for a unit in SEZ asking for bribes and sitting over
the application frustrating the honest efforts of the applicant to
participate in this economic reform.

So, my mind is more
burdened by the thought that this trend of ‘spreading out’ is no less
triggered by the foolish way in which we govern our polity, marked by
sloth, delays, counter-tenor of ‘activism’ and, worst of all,
engulfingly corrupt administration partnering some in the political wing
that are no less venal.

It is, of course, true that Indians by
their upbringing are more venturesome when it comes to spreading out.
Why, Mahatma Gandhi started his legal profession by seeking to work in
South Africa. Our native wit and the spirit of enterprise of our trading
community were responsible for the economic progress in some parts of
South Africa. All this appears to me as matters of pride.

But,
the recent trends do unmistakably point to the Zoroastrian syndrome:
persecution leading to migration. As Mr. Palkhivala used to eloquently
thunder, “In economics there are no miracles: only consequences”.

That is why I am raising the issue that is captured in the title of this article.

levitra

“Fraud” Implications under Companies Act 2013

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction
Deceiving any person by fraudulent or dishonest inducement to deliver any property amounts to offence of cheating punishable u/s. 415 to 424 of the Indian Penal Code. Apart from the IPC other laws dealing with taxation and commercial activities also deal with fraudulent acts and their consequences.

Section 447 of the Companies Act, 2013 prescribes a separate punishment for fraud, in relation to affairs of any company which is, imprisonment for a term which shall not be less than six months but which may extend to 10 years and shall also be liable to fine which shall not be less than the amount involved in the fraud but which may extend to three times the amount involved in fraud. The explanation to section 447 defines ‘fraud’ as under:

“Explanation.- For the purposes of this section-

(i) “fraud” in relation to affairs of a company or any body corporate, includes any act, omission, concealment of any fact or abuse of position committed by any person or any other person with the connivance in any manner, with intent to deceive, to gain undue advantage from, or to injure the interests of, the company or its shareholders or its creditors or any other person, whether or not there is any wrongful gain or wrongful loss;

(ii) “wrongful gain” means the gain by unlawful means of property to which the person gaining is not legally entitled.

(iii) “wrongful loss” means the loss by unlawful means of property to which the person losing is legally entitled.”

It is clear from the above provisions that any act or omission, concealment of any fact or abuse of position committed by any person with intent to deceive, to gain undue advantage from or injure the interest of any company or its shareholders or its creditors or any other person, is guilty of fraud. Various provisions of the Companies Act, 2013, list out different acts, omissions or other conduct which shall amount to fraud punishable u/s. 447 of the Act and the same are as under:

U/s. 212(6) all the above offences are cognisable offences and no person accused of any offence under above sections can be released on bail without giving opportunity to be heard to the Public Prosecutor.

The Companies Act 2013, provides for establishment of Special Courts to try the offences under the Act and pending such establishment the offences are to be tried by a Court of Session exercising jurisdiction over the area (section 440 of the Companies Act, 2013).

Serious Fraud Investigation Office
The Act also provides for establishment of Serious Fraud Investigation Office (SFIO) and till it is established u/s. 211(1), the present SFIO established under administrative orders, referred to in the Proviso to section 211(1) shall be deemed to be SFIO for the purpose of section 211. The Central Government can assign investigation into affairs of any company to SFIO and if there is any offence under investigation by SFIO no other investigation authority including the State Police, can continue or commence investigation under the Companies Act, 2013. Under the provision of the new law the SFIO has been given a statutory status and powers of investigation under the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 have been vested in SFIO. S/s. (17) of section 212 makes a specific provision for sharing of any information or documents available with any other investigating authority or income-tax authorities with SFIO and likewise SFIO can share information or documents available with it with any other investigating authority or income-tax authorities.

It is seen from the definition of fraud contained in the explanation to section 447 that a person will be guilty of offence of fraud under the Act if committed with intent to deceive or gain undue advantage from or injure the interests of –

• the company;
• its shareholders;
• its creditors; or
• any other person

Since offence of fraud under the Companies Act, 2013 is in relation to affairs of a company, fraudulent acts committed by “any other person” amount to fraud under the Act if such acts are in relation to the affairs of the company.

Fraud as a civil wrong
Fraud is defined in the Indian Contract Act, 1872. Section 14 of the Contract Act defines free consent inter alia as consent not caused by fraud as defined in section 17 of the Contract Act. Section 17 provides that:

“17. “Fraud” means and includes any of the following acts committed by a party to a contract, or with his connivance, or by his agent, with intent to deceive another party thereto or his agent, or to induce him to enter into the contract:-

(1) the suggestion, as a fact, of that which is not true, by one who does not believe it to be true;
(2) the concealment of a fact by one having knowledge or belief of the fact;
(3) a promise made without any intention of performing it;
(4) any other fact fitted to deceive;
(5) any such actor omission as the law specially declares to be fraudulent.

Explanation.- Mere silence as to facts likely to affect the willingness of a person to enter into a contract is not fraud, unless the circumstances of the case are such that, regard being had to them, it is the duty of the person keeping silence to speak, or unless his silence is, in itself, equivalent to speech.”

Section 19 further provides that when consent to an agreement is caused by coercion, fraud or misrepresentation, the agreement is avoidable at the option of the party whose consent was so caused. The Indian Contract Act therefore provides that a victim of fraud can avoid the agreement entered into acting on fraudulent acts but there are no provisions making fraud an offence punishable with imprisonment or fine.

CHEATING IS CRIME UDNER IPC:
The Indian Penal Code, 1860 is the law of crimes applicable in India and section 415 of the said Code defines the offence of cheating, as under:

“415. Cheating.- Whoever, by deceiving any person, fraudulently or dishonestly induces the person so deceived to deliver any property to any person, or to consent that any person shall retain any property, or intentionally induces the person so deceived to do or omit to do anything which he would not do if he were not so deceived, and which act or omission causes or is likely to cause damage or harm to that person in body, mind, reputation or property, is said to “cheat”.

Explanation.- A dishonest concealment of facts is a deception within the meaning of this section.”

Fraud is not an offence under the law of crimes.

Offence of cheating under the IPC requires:
“(1) deception of any person; (2)(a) fraudulently or dishonestly inducing that person; (i) to deliver any property to any person; or (ii) to consent that any person shall retain any property; or (b) intentionally inducing that person to do or omit to do anything which he would not do or do or omit if he were not so deceived, and which act or omission causes or is likely to cause damage or harm to that person in body, mind, reputation or property (Hridaya Ranjan Prasad Verma vs. State of Bihar AIR 2000 SC 2341: (2000) 4 SCC 168: 2000 SCC (Cri) 786: 2000 Cr LJ 298).”

Fraud is a deception deliberately practiced in order to secure unfair or unlawful gain and is a civil wrong. fraud in criminal form is cheating or theft by false pretence, intentional deception of victim by  false  representation or pretense. it needs to be noted that abuse of position with intent to deceive or gain undue advantage does not amount to cheating u/s. 415 iPC. if one compares the words of section 447 of the Companies act, 2013 with the provisions in section 17 of the Contract act and section 415 of iPC, it is clear that offence of fraud under   the Companies act is based on the Contract act, which treats fraud as a civil wrong. it is therefore possible that a person guilty of fraud under the Company Law may not necessarily be guilty of cheating under the indian Penal Code. new provisions contained the Companies act, 2013 defining fraud and establishing the Serious Fraud Investigation Office conferring powers of investigation under the Code of Criminal Procedure are intended to ensure that the directors and other persons managing the affairs of a Company act honestly and diligently to protect the interest of the company they represent and the interests of shareholders and creditors of the Company. any act or omission or concealment or abuse of position to gain advantage for themselves or other persons, on the part of persons managing the company will amount to a fraud punishable u/s. 447. it is an accepted fact that there are successful businessmen in the corporate world who possess positive qualities and survive and prosper by doing business honestly in accordance with the rules and regulations and do not derive any benefits for themselves or others except those which are legitimately due to them. But there are many who achieve success and appear to be playing according to rules but are experts in adopting various tactics to deceive and gain undue advantage for themselves and others. it is for dealing with such unscrupulous persons that the law has been amended and the new provisions are intended to ensure compliance and observance of principles of corporate governance by all companies.

Fraud Under The Companies act, 2013 and English law
new provisions in the Companies act, 2013, are comparable to the definition of fraud under English law. In Eng- land, the provisions contained in the theft act, 1968 were replaced by the fraud act, 2006 which provides that any person by making a false representation or failing to disclose information or by abuse of his position makes any gain for himself or anyone else or inflicting a loss on another shall be guilty of fraud. Provisions in english law are more comprehensive defining false representations, concealment or non-disclosure of information and abuse of position. the other major difference between section 447  of the Companies act 2013 and the fraud act, 2006 in england is that the english law is criminal law applicable to any victim of fraud unlike indian law which restrict the law to the victims who are companies or their shareholders or creditors or other persons like investors who are victims of fraudulent acts. Considering the wide ramifications of frauds in the capital market, insurance & banking sector, non-banking entities like chit funds, ponzi schemes for marketing goods and other money circulation schemes, there is a need to amend our criminal law on the lines of the fraud act, 2006 enacted in england. in other words the provisions relating to fraud in the Com- panies act, 2013 need to be converted into general law having universal application like the indian Penal Code.

Widening The Ambit of Fraud
One other significant provision in the definition of fraud is treatment of abuse of position with intent to gain undue advantage from any person as fraud. such a provision in effect amounts to providing punishment for bribery and corruption in the private sector. to illustrate, if a Purchase Officer of a company takes a kickback from a supplier of raw-material to the company, or a director sells his personal property to the Company at inflated price, such persons will be guilty of abusing their position as Purchase Officer or Director for undue advantage for themselves. The general law of Prevention of Corruption act, 1988, is applicable to Public Servants as defined in the said Act which is not applicable to Directors and Officers of Companies in the private sector because they are not public servants. now with enactment of section 447 in the Companies Act, 2013, Directors and Officers of private sector companies abusing their position for personal gain or to give advantage to any other person can be prosecuted and punished for fraud.

The efficacy of the new provisions creating offence of fraud  ultimately  depends  on  establishment  of  special Courts as contemplated under chapter XXViii of the new act for the purpose of trial of offence under the Companies act, 2013, and expeditious trial and punishment of persons guilty of fraud. speedy trial of fraudsters is the key for improved levels of protection of interests of investors and other stakeholders of corporates, as well as observance of principles of corporate governance by the corporates.

Considering the wide spread incidence of frauds in all sectors of the economy there is a need to examine whether indian Penal Code needs to be amended on the lines of the fraud act, 2006 enacted in england.

Fraud and the Auditor
In terms of section 143(12), an obligation has been cast on the auditor of a company to report to the Central government of fraud which has been committed, or is being committed against the company by officers or employees of the company. the manner of reporting has been prescribed in the rule 13, of the Companies (audit and auditors ) rules 2014 .

The responsibility cast on the auditor, is onerous. To what extent auditors are able to discharge this onus remains to be seen.

Conclusion
the  enactment  of  section  447  in  the  Companies  act 2013, is an indicator of the thinking of the authorities. economic frauds have increased a great deal of the recent past. on account of a lacuna in the law and the lengthy legal process, persons committing such frauds have been able to avoid punishment. one hopes that the provisions in the Companies act 2013, will help to bring to book such fraudsters.

COMPANIES BIL, 2011 Provisions relating to Accounts and Audit

fiogf49gjkf0d
The Companies Bill, 2009, was introduced in the Lok Sabha on 3rd August, 2009. It was referred to the Standing Committee of Finance which submitted its report on 31st August, 2010. After consideration of the recommendations of the Standing Committee and suggestions of various chambers of commerce, professional bodies and others, the Government has made changes in the original bill and now introduced a revised Companies Bill, 2011, in the Lok Sabha on 14th December, 2011. This Bill will replace the 55-year-old Companies Act, 1956 (existing Act). The new Bill proposes to introduce far-reaching changes which will have impact on the registration of companies, management and administration of companies, shareholder’s rights, director’s responsibilities, maintenance of accounts and audit of companies and other provisions relating to mergers, acquisitions, winding up of companies, etc. The new Bill is divided into 29 Chapters and contains 470 sections and 7 Schedules. The new Bill is likely to be considered and adopted in the Budget session of the Parliament in March, 2012 and may come into force on the date to be notified by the Government. In this article, some important provisions in the new Bill relating to Accounts and Audit are discussed.

2. Accounts of companies

Sections 128 to 138 deal with accounts to be maintained by all companies. It is provided in section 128 that every company shall maintain books of accounts on mercantile system of accounting. These provisions are on the same lines as provisions in section 209 of the existing Act. At present, a company can adopt any accounting year for maintaining its accounts. It is now provided that all companies will have to follow uniform accounting year ending 31st March of every year. The existing companies which are following different accounting years will have to comply with the new provisions within a period of two years from the date when the Companies Act, 2011, comes into force. Exemption from this provision can be claimed by obtaining permission of the National Company Law Tribunal (Tribunal) in respect of foreign subsidiary companies which are required, by the laws of the foreign countries, to adopt different accounting year.

3. Financial statements

3.1 Section 129 provides that every company has to prepare financial statements for each accounting year and place them before the Annual General Meeting of the company. The term financial statements has been defined to include Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss A/c. or Income & Expenditure A/c., Cash Flow statement, A statement of changes in equity and notes to accounts. These financial statements have to comply with Accounting Standards prescribed by the Government as provided in section 133. If the company has one or more subsidiary companies, associate companies or joint ventures, the financial statements of these companies and joint ventures will have to be consolidated and these consolidated financial statements will also be required to be placed before the General Meeting. Further, such a company is also required to attach with the financial statements a statement of salient features of the subsidiaries including associates and joint ventures in the prescribed manner. The Government has power to notify any class of companies to which these provisions will not apply.

3.2 Every company will have to prepare financial statements every year in the Form given in Schedule III. This Schedule gives forms of Balance Sheet, Statement of Profit and Loss and General Instructions for preparation of Consolidated Financial Statements. This Form of Balance Sheet and Statement of Profit and Loss is similar to present Schedule VI as revised from 1-4-2011. The above financial statements have to be approved by the Board of Directors. The procedure for adoption of these statements is similar to section 215 of the existing Act.

4. Reopening of accounts


4.1 This is a new provision. At present, there is no provision to reopen the accounts of the company. Section 130 now provides that if any Court or Tribunal passes an order that accounts for any accounting year have been prepared in a fraudulent manner or the affairs of the company were mismanaged and there is a doubt about reliability of financial statements, the accounts of that year shall be reopened. Before passing such order the Court/Tribunal shall invite comments from the Government and the Income-tax Department. If the financial statements are revised by the company as per the above order, such statements shall be final.

4.2 Section 131 provides that it is also possible for the Board of Directors to revise the financial statements or the report of Board for any of the three previous financial years if they find that these statements and/or report are not in accordance with the requirements of sections 129 to 134. For this purpose, the Board will have to take the approval of the Tribunal. Before giving such approval the Tribunal has to give notice to the Government and the Income-tax Department and invite their comments. Such revision of accounts can be made only once in a financial year. The Board will have to give detailed reasons for such revision of financial statements in its report to the members. Copies of the revised financial statements or Board Report will have to be sent to the members of the company and the Registrar of Companies. The revised financial statements will have to be approved by the members in General Meeting.

4.3 The Government is authorised to make Rules about the form in which application is to be made to the Tribunal for this purpose. These rules will also provide about the role of the company’s Auditors about their report on the accounts audited by them. The Directors have also to take such steps as may be provided in these rules.

5. Accounting and auditing standards

5.1 At present, the accounting standards to be followed by companies are formulated by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI). The Government has appointed a National Advisory Committee on Accounting Standards. This Committee examines these standards and makes recommendations to the Government. Thereafter, the Government notifies the accounting standards to be adopted by companies in the preparation of financial statements. So far as auditing standards are concerned, they are issued by ICAI and auditors have to follow these standards for conducting the audit of companies.

5.2 New sections 132, 133 and 143 give very wide powers to the Government to notify the accounting and auditing standards and to take action against the auditors who do not comply with these requirements. These provisions are as under.

(i) Section 132 provides that the Government will appoint a National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA) for formulation of accounting and auditing standards and for enforcement of these standards. The NFRA will have a chairman and 15 members who will be appointed by the Government. For this purpose, the Government will notify the detailed rules and procedure.

(ii) The Government will notify the accounting standards as recommended by ICAI in consultation with NFRA u/s.133.

(iii) Similarly, the Government will notify the Auditing Standards as recommended by ICAI in consultation with NFRA u/s.143. This will mean that the present authority of ICAI to formulate auditing standards will now be taken over by the Government.

(iv) NFRA has been given powers to monitor and enforce compliance with the accounting and auditing standards, oversee the quality of professional services of auditors and suggest measures to make improvement in such services.

    v) NFRA can investigate about the professional or other misconduct of Chartered Accountants, Cost Accountants and Company Secretaries in practice while rendering professional services to any company and take disciplinary action against the members or firms rendering such services. Once NFRA starts disciplinary proceedings against any member or firm, the respective Institutes cannot take any action against such member or firm. This particular provision will mean that the powers of the three Institutes of Chartered Accountants, Cost Accountants and Companies Secretaries to take disciplinary action against their members in such matters will be transferred to this NFRA appointed by the Government.

    vi) NFRA has been given powers of a civil court for conducting this investigation. For the purpose of deciding whether there is professional or other misconduct on the part of the member or firm, it is provided that the items listed in section 22 of the Act governing the three Institutes will apply.

    vii) If a member or a firm is found guilty of professional or other misconduct, the NFRA has power to

    a) impose a minimum penalty of Rs. one lac on the Individual member and a minimum penalty of Rs.10 lacs on the firm, and

    b) debar the member or the firm from professional practice for a minimum period of six months or for such higher period up to 10 years.

    viii) Any member or firm aggrieved by the above order of the NFRA can file appeal before the Appellate Authority constituted u/s.22A the
Acts governing the three Institutes.

    ix) The detailed provisions are made in section 132 for day-to-day administration of the NFRA, its accounts, audit, etc.

    6. Report of the Board of Directors

Section 134 provides that the Board of Directors of a company shall adopt the financial statements for each financial year and get the auditors report on the accounts. The Board has to prepare its report to the members every year and submit to the members at the Annual General Meeting along with the financial statements and audit report. The report of the Board should contain the information as required under the existing Act as well as some additional items as under.

    i) Statement of declaration given by Independent Directors u/s.149(6).

    ii) In the case of a listed company or any other company as specified by the Rules as provided in section 178(1), the company’s policy on director’s appointment and remuneration, criteria for determining qualifications, positive attributes, independence of directors, etc.

    iii) Particulars of loans, guarantees or investments in subsidiaries as provided in section 186.

    iv) Particulars of contracts or arrangements with related parties as stated in section 188.

    v) A statement indicating development and implementation of risk management policy for the company which in the opinion of the Board may threaten the existence of the company.

    vi) Details about policy developed and implementation of corporate social responsibility policy.

    vii) In the case of listed and other specified companies a statement indicating formal annual evaluation made by the Board about its performance and of its committees and Independent Directors.

    viii) Such other matters as provided in the Rules notified by the Government.

6.2 The Board has to send the financial state-ments with Audit Report, Directors report, etc. to each member before the Annual General Meeting. The Meeting should be held within six months of close of financial year i.e., before 30th September every year. These provisions are more or less on the same lines as existing provisions. These statements and reports have to be filed with the Registrar of Companies in the same manner as at present.


    7. Internal audit

This is a new provision. At present, the Internal Audit can be conducted by the company’s staff. Now section 138 provides that such class or classes of companies as may be prescribed, the Board of Directors will have to appoint a Chartered Accountant, Cost Accountant or other professional for carrying out Internal Audit. For this purpose, the Government is authorised to make Rules as to how this audit should be conducted.
    

    8. Corporate social responsibilities

8.1 This is a new provision made in section 135. This section applies to every company having net worth of Rs.500 crore or more or turnover of Rs.1000 crore or more or a net profit of Rs.5 crore or more during any financial year. The Board of such a company has to constitute a corporate social responsibility committee consisting of 3 or more directors of which one should be an Independent Director. The Board Report to the members should disclose the details of composition of this committee.


8.2    The functions of this committee shall be as under:

    i) To formulate and recommend to the Board a Corporate Responsibility Policy giving details of activities in the fields listed in Schedule VII.

    ii) To recommend about the expenditure to be incurred for these activities.

    iii) To supervise the implementation of this policy.

8.3 The Board has to consider the recommendations of this committee and formulate the policy for such expenditure every year. The Board should make all efforts to spend at least 2% of the average profits of the preceding 3 years for this purpose. If the Board is not able to spend this amount it will have to give reasons for not spending the same.

8.4 The type of activities for which the company has to spend for its social responsibilities, as listed in Schedule VII, are as under:

    i) Eradicating extreme hunger and poverty.

    ii) Promotion of education, gender equity, empowerment of women, reducing child mortality and improving maternal health.

    iii) Combating HIV, AIDS, malaria and other diseases.

    iv) Ensuring environment sustainability.

    v) Enhancing vocational skills and social business projects.

    vi) Contribution to P.M. National Relief Fund or any other fund set up by Central or State Governments for social development and relief work, welfare of SC, ST and backward classes, minorities and women.


    9. Audit of accounts of companies

Sections 139 to 148 deal with provisions for audit of accounts of companies and auditors. Every company is required to get its accounts audited for each financial year from a Chartered Accountant or a Firm of Chartered Accountants. For this purpose, ‘Firm’ will include a Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) engaged in the profession as Chartered Accountants. U/s.139, the first auditor can be appointed by the Board of Directors. At present, auditors are appointed by the members at the Annual General Meeting every year. Now, at the annual general meeting the members have to appoint auditors for a term of 5 years. Thereafter, on expiry of every 5 years, the members have to appoint auditors for a further term of 5 years. It is also provided in section 139 that the members will have to follow the procedure for selecting the auditors as per the Rules which will be notified by the Government. The company has to file the notice of appointment of auditors within 15 days with the Registrar of Companies.


    10. Rotation of auditors

10.1 In the case of listed companies and such class or classes of companies as may be prescribed a new provision is made in section 139(2) for rotation of auditors. This provision is as under:

    i) An Individual auditor shall not be appointed for more than 5 consecutive years.

    ii) A firm of auditors shall not be appointed for more than 10 consecutive years.

    iii) The auditors who have completed the above term, cannot be reappointed as auditors of that company for a period of 5 years. This restriction for reappointment shall apply to the audit firm which is to be appointed after completion of the above term to any audit firm in which one or more partners are partners in the firm which has completed its term as stated above.

    iv) In respect an existing company to which this provision applies it is provided that such company shall comply with the above provision within 3 years from the date of commencement of the Companies Act, 2011.

    v) Members of the company can resolve that the firm of auditors appointed by them shall rotate the audit partner and his team every year or the members may decide to appoint two or more audit firms as auditors of the company.

    vi) The Government may frame rules about the manner in which the companies shall rotate the auditors.

10.2 As regards Government companies the procedure for appointment and removal of auditors by C & AG is the same as existing at present. The provisions relating to appointment of another auditor in the case of casual vacancy in the office of auditor due to resignation, death, etc. are more or less the same as existing at present.

  

 11. Removal of auditors

11.1 The auditor of a company once appointed can be removed before expiry of his term by passing a special resolution after obtaining previous approval of the Government as provided in the rules. If the auditor submits his resignation before the expiry of his term of office, he has to file within 30 days a statement in the prescribed form about the reasons and other facts relevant to whis resignation with the company and the ROC. If this statement is not filed by the auditor he can be penalised by levy of minimum fine of Rs.50,000 which may extend up to maximum of Rs.5 lac.

11.2 On the expiry of the term of the appointment of the auditor, the retiring auditor is to be appointed if he is eligible for this purpose. If the members desire to appoint another person as auditor in his place, special notice from a member is required for this purpose. The procedure to be followed by the company is similar to the existing provisions for appointment of another auditor in place of retiring auditor.

    12. Penal provisions

Section 140(5) gives very wide powers to the Tribunal to take action against the auditor or the audit firm. It is provided in this section that if the Tribunal is satisfied on its own, or on an application by the Government or any person that the auditor of a company has acted in a fraudulent manner or assisted in any fraud by the company, its directors or officers, it can order the company to change the auditor. Further, if the Government makes an application to the Tribunal, and it is satisfied, the Tribunal can pass an order within 15 days that the auditor of the company shall not function as auditor and the Government shall, thereafter, appoint another auditor in place of the auditor so removed. It is also provided that if any final order is passed by the Tribunal against the auditor u/s.140, such auditor will not be eligible for appointment as auditor of any company for 5 years. Further, section 447 provides that if found to be guilty of fraud he shall be punishable with imprisonment for a minimum period of six months which may extend up to 10 years. If the fraud involves public interest, the minimum period of imprisonment shall be 3 years. Apart from this punishment, such auditor shall also be liable to pay minimum fine equal to the amount of the fraud which may extend up to three times of the fraud amount.

    13. Qualifications of auditors

13.1 Section 141 provides that only Chartered Accountants can be appointed as auditors of a company. A firm of Chartered Accountants or LLP engaged in the practice as Chartered Accountants can also be appointed as auditors.

13.2 It is, however, provided that the following persons cannot be appointed as auditors of a company:

    i) A Body Corporate other than LLP.

    ii) An officer or an employee of the company or a person who is a partner or who is in employment of the officer or employee of the company.

    iii) A person (including his relative or his partner) who (a) holds any security or interest in the company, its subsidiary, its holding or its associate company, etc. It may be noted that if such security or interest is less than Rs.1,000 or such sum as may be prescribed by rules, this provision will not apply. (b) is indebted to or who has given guarantee for any debt in relation to the company, its subsidiary, its holding company or its associate company of such amount as may be prescribed.

    iv) A person or a firm has business relationship with the company, its subsidiary, its holding or its associate company directly or indirectly.

    v) A person who is relative of a director or is in the employment of the company as a director or key managerial personnel.

    vi) A person who is convicted by any Court of an offence involving fraud, and a period of 10 years has not elapsed from the date of such conviction.

    vii) Any person, firm or its associate is engaged on the date of appointment in consulting and specified services as provided in section
144.

13.3 A person who is an employee of any other organisation cannot be appointed as auditor of a company. Further, the auditor should not be auditor of more than the specified number of companies as provided by the rules to be framed by the Government.

    14. Remuneration of auditors and other functions

The remuneration of the auditors of a company shall be fixed in its General Meeting or shall be determined in such a manner as may be decided by General Meeting. As regards powers and duties of the auditors and the reporting requirements, the provisions are contained in section 143 which are more or less similar to section 227 of the existing Act. It is also provided that every auditor shall comply with the auditing standards as notified by the Government. The Government is also given authority to pass an order specifying the matters on which the auditors have to report. Such order can be passed in consultation with the NFRA appointed u/s.132. If the auditor of a company finds that an offence involving fraud has been committed against the company by officers or employees of the company he has to report to the Government within such time and in such manner as may be prescribed by rules. The above provisions apply even to a Cost Accountant in practice relating to cost audit of a company u/s.148 as well as to the Company Secretary in practice conducting secretarial audit u/s.204.

    15. Consultancy services

15.1 Section 144 is a new section in which it is provided that the auditors of a company can render such other services as are approved by the Board of Directors or the Audit Committee. It is, however, provided that such services shall not include:

    i. Accounting and book-keeping services.

    ii. Internal audit.

    iii. Design and implementation of any financial information system.

    iv. Actuarial services.

    v. Investment advisory, investment banking or any other financial services.

    vi. Management services.

    vii. Any other services as may be prescribed by rules.

15.2 It is clarified in this section that the above services cannot be rendered to the company either directly or indirectly by the auditors of the company. In the case of an individual auditor or an audit firm, such services cannot be rendered by any relative or any other partners or by any of the associate concerns in which the auditors have significant influence or control or whose name or trade mark or brand is used by the auditor or audit firm or any of the partners of the audit firm.

    16. Punishment for contravention

If the auditors of a company contravene the provisions of sections 143 to 145, the auditors shall be punishable with a minimum fine of Rs.25,000 which may extend up to Rs.5 lac. It is further provided that if the auditor has contravened these provisions with the intention to deceive the company or its shareholders or creditors or other persons interested in the company, he shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend up to one year or with a minimum fine of Rs.1 lac which may extend up to Rs.25 lac. Further, the auditor is also liable to refund the remuneration received by him and pay for damages to the company or other person for loss arising out of incorrect or misleading statement made in the audit report.

    17. Some suggestions

17.1 The above provisions relating to accounts and audit contained in the Companies Bill, 2011, will have far-reaching impact on the companies and auditors. It appears that these provisions are being made with a view to curb the present-day tendency on the part of some companies to manipulate accounts with a view to benefit those in management or with a view to reduce tax. Some of these provisions are harsh and they are likely to affect the development of the profession of Chartered Accountants.

17.2 At present, the National Advisory Committee of Accounting Standards (NACAS) is working satisfactorily. There is no need to replace this body by appointment of NFRA. Further, the provisions of sections 132 and 133 giving wide powers to this authority to regulate the auditing profession cut at the very root of autonomy conferred on ICAI which is set up by an Act of the Parliament. It is, therefore, suggested that the existing advisory body viz. NACAS should not be replaced by NFRA.

17.3 Further, ICAI is the only competent authority to issue auditing standards for members of C.A. profession. Therefore, provisions in section 143(10) giving power to the Government to notify the auditing standards will curtail the autonomy given to ICAI under the C.A. Act.

17.4 Section 139(2) provides for maximum limit of 10 years for an audit firm to continue as auditors of any listed or large specified companies. Thereafter, there is a cooling period of 5 years. When this provision is made there is no need of again providing in section 139(4) that the Government can notify the rules for rotation of auditors in cases of such companies.

17.5 The provisions of section 140 for removal of auditors and punishment of erring auditors as discussed in para 11 and 12 above are very harsh and apply to auditors of all companies. It is suggested that these provisions should be restricted to only auditors of listed and large specified companies.

17.6 Similarly, provisions of section 147 providing for punishment and fine as discussed in para 16 above also apply to auditors of all companies. These provisions should be made applicable to only auditors of listed and large specified companies.

17.7 The provisions of section 144 prohibiting auditors from rendering certain consultancy services apply to all companies. This will hamper the development of C.A. profession. It is, therefore, suggested that section 144 should be made applicable to listed and large specified companies only.

17.8 If the present Companies Bill is passed in its present form it will curtail the autonomy of ICAI in relation to issue of auditing standards and disciplinary matters. Further, considering the additional responsibilities being thrust on the auditors it appears that small and medium-size audit firms will find it difficult to continue in audit practice. This will affect the development and progress of auditing profession in India.

Whoever fights monsters should see to it that in the process he does not become a monster.
— Friedrich Nietzsche

Independent Directors in the New Landscape

Introduction

Recent corporate scams put to question the usefulness of independent directors (IDs). At one end there are IDs who play a minimalist role, on the other there are examples where the IDs had to take the reins of the company in their own hands and run the company. Take the case of Singapore listed Sino Environment Technology Group. The IDs initiated an investigation over suspicious transactions entered into by the management to buy materials and for investments. The investigation initiated by the ID’s revealed that no raw material or equipment was delivered and no significant work was done at the projects the group had invested in. This ultimately led to the resignation of the executive directors (EDs) leaving the running of the company in the hands of the IDs.

The behaviour of the Boards in India generally tends to be between the two extremes, one where ID’s play a ceremonial role and the other where they play a significant role. This article takes a look at various matters relating to IDs, alongside the requirements of clause 49 of the Listing Agreement, the Companies Bill and SEBI’s Consultative Paper on Review of Corporate Governance Norms in India. The annexure at the end of this article also contains a detailed comparison of the above three documents with regard to matters relating to IDs. At the time of writing this article, the rules have neither been notified nor available for public comment and hence the comments with respect to the requirements of the Companies Bill may not be complete.

Can Independence be defined?

Obviously, an ID has to be independent. The next question is independence from what. The independence is from affiliation of any kind which is likely to prejudice his decisions. As can be seen in the annexure, though the goal is to prevent affiliation of any kind, the three documents differ on the details. The Companies Bill goes farther than the SEBI Guidelines in imposing stricter norms for independence which may go a long way in establishing the role of the ID as an “outside guardian”, which investors currently perceive to be a ceremonial position. Nonetheless, it would be fair to say that independence is a state of mind, and can be legislated only up to a point. For example, whilst a relative of a promoter cannot be appointed an ID under the Bill, a friend of the promoter can be appointed as an ID. Appointing a friend instead of a relative, may be far worse from a point of view of independence. Ultimately, it is the ID’s personality and moral compass that will determine his independence. But that does not mean that legislation has no role to play in this matter. The Companies Bill definition provides a sound basis for ensuring that IDs are independent, and that conflict of interest is minimised. Ultimately it is not the law in itself, but a proper implementation of the law and suitable regulatory intervention from time to time, that may firmly establish independence on the Boards. Implementation cannot be replaced by more legislation.

Whose interest does the ID serve?

The normal expectation globally of the role of an ID is essentially two fold; advisory and monitoring. The ID is supposed to contribute his business expertise which could be a good value addition to a company. On the other hand, the IDs are also expected to serve as a watchdog and protect the interest of the minority shareholders. The role of a strategic advisor and a watchdog are not easy to balance and may run at odds with each other at times.

In India, most IDs view their role principally as that of strategic advisors to the promoters. Relatively, most IDs do not perceive their role to be that of a watchdog over the promoters and the management. An ID is not willing to put on the hat of a watchdog because either he or she does not have the necessary time or the skill sets or is not remunerated enough to specifically take on that responsibility. Very often IDs develop close bonding with the promoter group, which makes it difficult for them to ask uncomfortable questions to the Board. But things have changed in recent times due to high profile instances of fraud in India. IDs are taking a direct interest in reviewing the fraud risk management framework put in place by their organisations for mitigating the risk of fraud. For ID’s of global companies, the risk of non-compliance increases significantly due to certain onerous global legislations such as the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act and the UK Bribery Act.

In countries such as the US and UK, where shareholding in companies is largely public, the IDs can merely take into account shareholder interest as a common factor. However, in countries such as India, where shareholding is concentrated, there would be two factions; the controlling group and the minority shareholders. The controlling group could extract value from minority shareholders through dubious related party transactions or self dealing transactions, for example, through freeze-out mergers, where the controlled company is merged with another company in which the controlling group has a 100% stake. In the case of dispersely held companies, the challenges are different such as restrictions on control contests, shareholder voting procedures, executive compensation and director’s independence from the management. These differences cause the nature of frauds to be different. For example, frauds like Enron and WorldCom where management misrepresents financial performance to cover up poor performance or to influence compensation are more likely in dispersely held companies. Frauds like Satyam and Parmalat where the controlling group covers up expropriation of funds through financial misstatements are more likely in controlled companies.

In the case of controlled companies, even though the IDs may not have the voting power to stop wrongdoings of the controlling shareholder, he or she has the power to make public any wrongdoing. While the controlling shareholder can remove the ID, such actions are likely to cause unwanted public scrutiny. The press may pick up such resignations, but experience tells us that investor’s memory is too short, and other than in a serious fraud such as Satyam, it is unlikely to be an effective tool, though it may relieve the ID from an onerous engagement. Despite the general perception of the public that IDs should act as a watchdog, it appears that given the actual functioning of the Boards, the supremacy of the controlling group and the few Board/Audit committee meetings (assume average of 6 in a year), the watchdog function is not exhaustively performed. IDs argue that they should not be seen as a panacea for everything and a tool to fix all the wrongdoings.

Which of these two groups, the IDs should represent? Clause 166(2) of the Companies Bill requires directors of the company (which includes IDs90) to act in good faith for the benefit of the members as a whole, the company, its employees, the community and the environment. This requirement goes even beyond protecting the interest of the minority and extends to protecting the interest of the general public at large. This provision is far more onerous than it appears at first reading. For example, minority shareholders may argue that the promoters’ decision in favour of an acquisition, caused them huge losses, which the IDs should compensate them for, as they failed to protect the minority interest.

Schedule IV Code for Independent Directors of the Com-panies Bill requires an ID to safeguard the interest of all stakeholders; particularly the minority shareholders. It is a strange irony that IDs appointed by promoters have to protect the interest of the perceived adversaries of the promotersthe minority shareholders. The ID may not have the time, energy, power, gall or the inclination to set things right and in some cases, after exhausting all efforts to discipline the management, the only realistic option available would be to offer his or her resignation. Just because the Bill sets out the responsibilities of the IDs in greater details, does not necessarily mean that IDs will have adequate powers or remunerated commensurately to fulfill those responsibilities.

Liability of an ID

In the aftermath of Satyam, many IDs resigned from their position across India. Whilst some of the resignations may have been a knee-jerk reaction, it is also possible that the IDs were aware of wrong doings by the company which could not be corrected or they were not provided with enough information to make an appropriate judgment on how the company was being run. More importantly, after realising the onerous nature of his assignment he or she was not prepared to take on those responsibilities. The

position of an ID was no longer going to be an easy occupation for those seeking a comfortable retirement occupation.

There are various legislations that can be used against IDs, some of which are criminal violations and may trigger imprisonment. These include:

1.    Violation of clause 49 requirements could generate financial and criminal sanction for directors and IDs under the Securities Contract (Regulation) Act 1956; though this has been infrequently targeted against IDs.

2.    The Securities and Exchange Board of India (Prohibition of Fraudulent and Unfair Trade Practices Relating to Securities Market) Regulations, 2003, contains various prohibitions on manipulative, fraudulent and unfair trade practices in securities and a prohibition on dealing in securities in a fraudulent manner or using any manipulative or deceptive device in connection with the purchase or sale of securities.

3.    Section 12A and 15G of the SEBI Act prohibit insider trading.

4.    Section 62 and 63 of the Companies Act 1956, could hold directors liable for certain misstatements in a prospectus to raise capital. SEBI can also impose sanctions for similar violations under the Takeover Code.

5.    Under IPC for breach of trust (section 406), theft and cheating (section 420).

6.    Under clause 245 of the Companies Bill, a minority group of members or deposit holders can file a class action suit against the directors and claim damages or compensation for any fraudulent, unlawful or wrongful act or omission or conduct.

7.    Under clause 447 of the Companies Bill, a director can be imprisoned for a maximum period of 10 years for any fraudulent conduct.

Clause 149(12) of the Companies Bill clarifies that IDs and other non EDs shall be liable only in respect of such acts of omission or commission by a company that had occurred with his or her knowledge, attributable through Board processes, and with the consent or connivance or where he or she had not acted diligently. From this, it appears that the clause seeks to provide immunity to IDs from civil or criminal action in certain cases. However, clause 166(2) of the Bill seems to be a contradiction. It states that the whole Board is required to act in good faith, in order to promote the objects of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole and in the best interest of the company, its employees and shareholders, the community, and for the protection of the environment. This clause narrows the distinction between IDs and EDs, and so does the definition of an “officer in default” under clause 2(60) of the Bill. Whilst an ID is not key managerial personnel under the Bill, he could be an officer in default. An officer in default under clause 2(60) of the Bill is broadly defined, and includes (a) any person in accordance with whose advice, directions or instructions the Board of Directors of the company is accustomed to act, other than a person who gives advice to the Board in a professional capacity; (b) every director, in respect of a contravention of any of the provisions of this Act, who is aware of such contravention by virtue of the receipt by him of any proceedings of the Board or participation in such proceedings without objecting to the same, or where such contravention had taken place with his consent or connivance.

Whilst there is some kind of immunity, for example, in the case of a bounced cheque where the ID can plead that it was done without his knowledge, certain events have sent confusing signals. The Nimesh Kampani and the AMRI hospital fire event in Kolkata where IDs were imprisoned suggest that there may be no immunity to IDs, even when they were not the cause of or responsible for the problem.

IDs operate in an environment of high uncertainty and confusion over their role. They are not clear whether their action or inaction while serving on the Board could subject them to potential imprisonment for violations and frauds committed by the management or the auditors. Many IDs had probably been served arrest warrants arising out of frivolous claims or bouncing of a cheque. This discourages potentially talented candidates from joining as IDs. Clear principles that attempt to replicate some of the fiduciary duty concepts drawn from Delaware law may provide IDs with more comfort that their actions in good faith will not land them up in prison. Directors’ & Officers’ (D&O) insurance is one means to cover IDs for financial liability, but that does not save them from imprisonment.

IDs argue that when a promoter pays a bribe to win a contract, those matters are not escalated to the Board and there is no way an ID would have known about it. To make the ID responsible for such an act would be highly unacceptable. The MCA general circular no. 8/2011 dated 25th March 2011, probably exonerates the IDs in such situations. The circular requires the ROC to exercise due care while including a non ED as an “officer in default”. It specifically states that an ID of a listed entity would not be held liable for any act which occurred without his knowledge or where he acted diligently in the Board process. Whilst these provisions are also contained in the Companies Bill, the exoneration is based on judgment where there is always a scope for interpretation. Besides the Company law, there are several other legislations in India that may cause havoc in the lives of the IDs.

Remuneration of an ID

IDs generally feel that they are inadequately compensated, given the perceived or real risks post the Satyam and Nimesh Kampani episodes. The existing Companies Act requirement (Rule 10B of the Companies (Central Governments) General Rules and Forms, 1956) prescribes sitting fees for independent directors. For companies with a paid up share capital and free reserves of Rs. 10 crore or more or turnover of Rs. 50 crore and above, sitting fees should not exceed the sum of Rs 20,000 and in case of other companies sitting fees should not exceed Rs 10,000. At the time of writing this article, the rules have not yet been framed under the new Companies Bill. In addition to sitting fees, the IDs are also entitled to a profit related commission. The Bill prohibits an ID from receiving stock options. SEBI’s consultative paper has proposed to amend the listing agreement to also prohibit IDs from receiving stock option.

There is overall support to the provision prohibiting an ID from receiving stock options as that directly impeaches his independence. But most people do agree that for the risks that an ID takes, he or she is not commensurately compensated.

Selection of the ID

The appointment of IDs in a controlled company presents unique challenges. The controlling shareholder has majority voting power and can nominate or replace the ID at their discretion. Therefore, the process of hiring and retaining an ID appears to inherently create dependency of the ID on the promoter group. There has been considerable emphasis in India, on whether one should allow minority shareholders to appoint one or more IDs on the Board, though this could be contrary to basic company law principles of one share, one vote. Further, an overzealous ID could become a deterrent, and may end up causing more harm than good to the minority shareholders. An alternative to minority shareholders appointing IDs is to delegate the director nomination process to an independent nominating committee. This practice is already prevalent in many companies in India. The fact that nomination of IDs is directed solely by an independent committee may result in IDs being more independent, than if they were nominated directly by the promoter group.

In the Companies Bill, a listed company may have one director elected by small shareholders. Under clause 178, every listed company and other prescribed class shall constitute a nomination committee. The nomination committee shall identify persons who are qualified to become directors, and recommend them to the Board. Under clause 150, IDs may be selected from a data bank of eligible and willing persons, maintained by a body notified by the Central Government. Thus there are sufficient provisions in the Bill to ensure that the selection process creates greater independence on the Boards.

Rotation of IDs

Sometimes, familiarity breeds complacency. A long tenure may indicate that the IDs have got too friendly with the promoters and over the years have lost their ability to play the role of watchdogs. On the other hand, the longer the ID has been on the company’s Board, he becomes an expert on the company and that industry and his judgment gets better. An ID that is completely new to the company, has less experience, but comes with a fresh pair of eyes and fresh blood. As can be seen, there are pros and con of rotating IDs, and the arguments are not very different from rotating auditors of a company. The Companies Bill requires rotation of IDs, the requirements of which can be seen in the attached annexure. Overall, it appears to be a step in the right direction.

To sum up

The business of life cannot go on if people can’t trust those who are put in a position of trust. However, from the perspective of IDs, there are a number of questions dogging their minds. What are the stakeholders’ and regulators’ expectations from him? How can he fulfill those expectations in the absence of any effective powers? How does he redress the wrong doings? How much trust should be placed on the information presented to him? How much reliance should be placed on experts, such as lawyers, auditors or valuers? What is the extent of due diligence he should carry out? What is the time he should provide to each company where he is an ID? What should be his remuneration? What is he ultimately liable for? Lack of clarity in these areas will only scare away good talent from taking up the position of an ID, and becoming a scapegoat for the misdeeds of management. The Companies Bill with all its good intention to ensure good corporate governance, does not provide any concrete answers to all the above doubts of IDs.

The office of the ID should neither be a bed of roses, nor a bed of thorns. Everyone agrees with that, but there is no agreement on what is the right balance.

Independent Directors in the New Landscape Part -2

Related Party Transactions and Minority Rights – Part 1

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background

Related party transactions
(RPTs) that treat shareholders inequitably or oppress minority tend to
damage capital market integrity. Therefore, RPT’s covering both equity
and non-equity transactions, is an important corporate governance and
regulatory issue, dogging the mind of the government. Some inter-company
transactions with 100 per cent owned subsidiaries might present no
great threat of abuse but others where a company has controlling and
minority shareholders, RPT’s can cause significant concern. Around the
world, group structures and concentrated ownership are normal, the
exceptions being the United Kingdom, United States and Australia.
Executive compensation is a key concern in certain jurisdictions,
particularly the United States and this is accompanied by the threat of
financial statement manipulation done in order to retain the job or
maximise compensation.

Every jurisdiction has over a period of
time developed its own mechanism to minimise the abuse of RPT’s, though
there is wide variability in their respective approach. At times, RPT’s
can be economically beneficial and necessary. Therefore, with some
exceptions such as loans to directors, RPTs are rarely banned, in most
jurisdictions. But there is a clear concern globally that such
transactions can be abused by insiders such as executives and
controlling shareholders and hence need to be regulated or monitored.
Searching for the right balance is a difficult but ongoing process which
keeps changing as institutions and economies change.

There are a
number of empirical studies focusing on the relation between the
corporation valuation and cash-flow ownership or control-ownership
wedge. A controlling shareholder often has control of a listed company
but with very few claims on its cash flows. This creates an incentive to
use RPTs to transfer cash to companies in which their rights are
greater. The empirical studies conclude that in general cash-flow
ownership and control-ownership wedge is associated with lower firm
value. Another study shows that the cost of debt financing is
significantly higher for such companies.

Extent of RPT’s in India1

In
India, there has been a tradition of operating through several
companies. The genesis of a multigroup organisation could be traced to
the licensing requirements, labour laws, FDI regulations, financial
structuring, joint ventures, tax planning, etc. For example, because FDI
is prohibited in e-retailing, a local structured entity is set up to
operate at a break-even level on behalf of the investors; and the
profits are retained in the wholesale entity. Subsidiaries are quite
common in the case of real estate companies, as they are the means of
owning a land bank. Whilst there are multiple reasons for group
structures and transactions between them, some of which are absolutely
necessary for various reasons there is no denying that group structures
have also been used to create inequitable treatment of minority
shareholders by the controlling shareholders.

India is
characterised by concentrated ownership and by the widespread use of
company groups, often in the form of pyramids in many different
activities and companies and with a number of levels. One study of the
1470 companies listed on the NSE indicated that as of March 2010
controlling shareholders (i.e. promoters) held 57 per cent of all shares
and institutional shareholders about 20 per cent (Bhardwaj, 2011). One
study (Balasubramanian et al., 2009) of 300 companies indicated that 142
included a shareholder with an ownership stake higher than 50 per cent.
A further 100 included a shareholder holding 30-50 per cent of the
equity. The actual holdings are likely to be more since holdings are
often hidden in other corporate bodies in a pyramid structure or in
benami names.

Ownership of Indian listed companies

Largest shareholder ownership stake Number of firms Per cent
75% and more 19 7
50.01%-74.9% 123 43
40.01%-50% 61 21
30.01%-40% 42 15
20.01%-30% 26 9
Up to 20% 18 6

1The statistical information is sourced from the OECD report Related
Party Transactions and Minority Shareholder Rights Of the firms sampled
by Balasubramanian et al. (2009), 165 of them (a little over a half) are
part of an Indian business group which includes one or more other
public firms. Another study states that in 2006, 2922 companies were
affiliated with 560 Indian owned groups, a predominant majority of these
identified with specific families (Sarkar, 2010, p. 299).

Concentrated
ownership and group company structures are associated with a particular
structure of boards. One study found that 40 per cent of Indian
companies had a promoter on the board and in over 30 per cent of cases
they also served as an executive director (Chakrabarti et al., 2008, p.
17). Executives of one group company often serve on the boards of other
group companies as outside directors. Potentially concerning, Sarkar
reports that independent directors are also related to company groups,
with about 67 per cent of their directorships in group affiliates, and
notably 43 per cent of directorships concentrated within a single group.

RPT’s
are not only widespread in India but are also of significant value. An
analysis of company reports by the stock exchanges of 50 companies
indicates that loans, advances, and guarantees account for a high
percentage of net worth of the reporting companies, with subsidiaries
and associated companies accounting for the bulk (see Annexure 2). Key
management personnel, individuals and relatives accounted for an
insignificant share. One study of over 5000 firms for the period 2003-05
reported that most RPTs occurred between the firm and “parties with
control” as opposed to management personnel that is typically seen in
the United States (Chakrabarti et al., 2008).

Some studies
suggest that RPTs have been detriment to the interest of minority
shareholders and to valuations of those companies. Using a sample of 600
of the 1000 largest (by revenues) listed companies in 2004, one study
found that firm performance is negatively associated with the extent of
RPTs for group firms (Chakrabarti et al., 2008).

It is clear that
the structure and ownership of Indian listed companies creates
incentives that, is conducive to RPT’s. This could result in short
changing the minority and compromising their rights. Therefore, it has
to be balanced by corporate governance arrangements, company law,
financial regulations and regulatory environment.

An Expert
Committee (popularly known as JJ Irani Committee) to advise the
Government of India on the new Company Law was set up by the Ministry of
Company Affairs vide Order dated 2nd December, 2004. This eventually
culminated in the Companies Bill, which at the time of writing this
article has been passed by the Lok Sabha and is awaiting passing at the
Rajya Sabha and the final assent of the President of India. The
Companies Bill contains significant provisions to regulate RPT’s, many
of which are discussed in this article. Clause 49 of the listing
agreement contains SEBI’s corporate governance norms which includes
matters relating to RPT’s though they are not as comprehensive as the
Companies Bill.

Who is a related party?

One of
the biggest challenges in regulating RPT’s is defining a related party. A
related party obviously is someone with whom there is a special
relationship. Transactions are entered into with the related party which
may not be at arm’s length, and causes gain to the controlling
shareholders and loss to the minority shareholders. Whilst a spouse is a
related party, a close friend is not a related party under the
Companies Act. Marriage is a legal relationship and hence easy to prove,
friendship is not a legally solemnized relationship and hence difficult
to prove. Obviously such differences create challenges in defining a
related party. In India, there is a tradition of extended families
unlike in the West. Therefore typically in the western countries a
spouse and dependent children are relatives, but in India the regulators
have taken a more form based approach to define relatives and have
specified innumerable relationship. In the western countries, many would
not know who their daughters son’s wife is; but under Indian
legislation the law would treat them as relatives.

A comparison
of the related party definitions under Companies Bill, Companies Act and
Accounting Standards is provided in Annexure 1. The related parties
have been far more extensively defined under the Companies Bill. The
Companies Bill includes as related parties key managerial persons,
holding-subsidiary relationship, etc which were not hitherto covered
under the Companies Act. However, all three, i.e., the Companies Act,
Companies Bill and AS-18 Related Party Disclosures have deficiencies in
the way related parties are defined.

Example 1 & 2 explain
the deficiencies in the AS-18 definition of related parties, whereas
Example 3 explains the deficiencies in the Companies Bill definition.

The
Companies Bill requires RPT’s to be approved by a special resolution at
the general meeting, if the transaction is not in the ordinary course
or business or not at arm’s length. No member will be entitled to vote
on such resolution, if such member is a related party. However, it is
not clear which related parties will be considered for this purpose.
Consider Example 4. Subsidiary S intends to make royalty payment to
Parent P. It is clear that P is not entitled to vote on the special
resolution. However, it is not clear if investor A who owns 20% of S and
therefore S is a related party to A, entitled to vote or not. Further,
will it make any difference if A is also a related party to P? None of
these questions are clear under the Bill.

To
sum up, the definition of related party needs to be further tightened.
Further, both Companies Act and Companies Bill takes a form based
approach rather than a substance based approach in defining related
parties; particularly the way relatives are defined. The substance
approach would define relatives as financial dependants; whereas a form
based approach would actually spell out innumerable relations. This is
not particularly helpful, if one were to keep in mind, that crooks can
circumvent any law. They can use employees, friends, cooks, maids and
drivers to abuse the law. It is not possible for any legislation to
legislate beyond a point. Legislation cannot be a substitute for
stronger enforcement. Any attempt to substitute stronger enforcement
with legislation would only result in bad and cumbersome laws. Not to
forget there are unintended consequences of bad legislations, for
example, purchase of a share of a company by a distant relative with
whom one may have lost contact, could disqualify the person from being
an auditor or independent director of that company.


Which RPT’s are covered?

The
Companies Bill like the Companies Act contains restrictions over both
equity and non equity RPT’s. The non equity transactions covered under
the Companies Bill are far more comprehensive than the Companies Act and
practically covers almost all transactions (see Annexure 1). The BOD
has to consent to the RPT’s under both the Companies Act and the Bill.
The Companies Bill specifically casts a duty on independent directors to
ensure that adequate deliberations are held before approving RPT’s and
assure themselves that the same are in the interest of the company.

Materiality
thresholds are clearly necessary in establishing an efficient
management regime for RPTs. Care needs to be taken to ensure that a
material transaction does not escape regulation by breaking it into a
transaction of several small amounts. Under the Bill the requirements to
obtain a special resolution apply to a company whose paid up capital or
the RPT value is beyond a threshold amount. Those thresholds will be
prescribed by the rules, which are not yet exposed/published. U/s. 297
of the Companies Act, a company with a paid up share capital of not less
than Rs 1 crore, was required to take previous approval of the Central
Government.

The requirement of section 297 of the Companies Act
does not apply to purchase/sales which were made by cash at prevailing
market prices. Similarly, clause 188 of the Companies Bill does not
require a company to take a special resolution of non related parties on
a RPT, if that transaction was entered into in the ordinary course of
business and was at arm’s length. It is not clear when a transaction
would be not in the ordinary course of business. Given that the Bill was
heavily influenced by what happened in the case of Satyam, an example
of a transaction not in the ordinary course of business may probably be
the proposed transaction of acquisition of Maytas by Satyam, i.e.
acquisition of a real estate company by a software company.

Given
that a special resolution of disinterested parties is required only
when a transaction is not at arm’s length; there would be considerable
pressure on how the term arms length is interpreted. It is defined under
the Bill as “arm’s length transaction is a transaction between two
related parties that is conducted as if they were unrelated, so that
there is no conflict of interest.” The Indian Income-tax Act also
contains a somewhat similar definition. However, there are too many
questions around what is an arm’s length price. Who will judge what is
an arm’s length price? Can the arm’s length price determined under
Indian Income-tax Act be applied for Company Law purposes as well? What
if the income-tax assessing officer disallows the arm’s length price
determined by the company (for which it had not taken a special
resolution of disinterested parties) – would that mean that the company
has not complied with the requirements of the Bill? What if a continuing
royalty arrangement was approved by the Central Government u/s. 297 of
the Companies Act – would that need a special resolution of the AGM on
the Bill being enacted? The Ministry of Corporate Affairs will need to
provide guidance on these issues.

The Companies Bill also
imposes significant restriction on equity related RPT’s. These are
briefly described below and are set out in greater detail in Annexure 1:

•   
Loans/guarantees to directors and connected persons are prohibited both
under the Companies Act and the Bill. However, u/s. 295 of the
Companies Act, loans/guarantees can be extended to directors and
connected persons by obtaining Central Government approval. Under clause
185 of the Companies Bill, loans/guarantees can be extended to
directors/connected persons only in limited circumstances such as when
it is pursuant to a scheme applicable to employees or in the case of
companies whose business is to extend loans.

•    Loans and
investments under both the Companies Act and the Companies Bill are
subjected to overall limits of 60% of paid up share capital, free
reserves and securities premium or 100% of free reserves and securities
premium. Under the Companies Act any loan made by a holding company to
its wholly owned subsidiary is exempt. The Companies Bill does not
provide that exemption.

•    The Companies Bill contains
restrictions on non-cash transactions involving directors. The Companies
Act does not contain similar restrictions.

•    The Companies
Act and the Companies Bill contain several provisions protecting
minority rights, though there are slight differences in the two
legislations. The important provisions are on changing shareholder’s
rights, appointment of directors by small shareholders, the requirement
to have a nomination and remuneration committee and stakeholders
committee, restriction on managerial remuneration and prevention of
oppression and mismanagement.

•    The Companies Bill imposes more elaborate responsibilities and duties on audit committees and independent directors.

•   
The Companies Bill provides the acquirer with powers to acquire shares
of dissenting minority shareholders in a scheme of merger/amalgamation
at a price determined by a registered valuer. The Companies Act also
contains similar requirements, except that there is no specific
provision for price to be determined by a registered valuer.
Numerous
provisions of SEBI are also designed to protect the interest of
minority shareholders. One such example is the open offer requirement in
the takeover code to provide a reasonable exit option to minority
shareholders.

Related Party Disclosures

AS 18
requires significant disclosures to be made in the financial statements
with respect to RPT’s. AS 18, among other matters, requires disclosure
of “any other elements of the RPT’s necessary for an understanding of
the financial statements.” An example of such a disclosure is an
indication that the transfer of a major asset had taken place at an
amount materially different from that obtainable on normal commercial
terms. However, this disclosure is rarely made.

The Companies
Bill requires disclosure in the BOD’s report of contracts/arrangements
with related parties. The report will also disclose justification for
entering into such transactions. These disclosure requirements are not
contained in the existing Companies Act. It may be noted that the
disclosure requirements under AS-18 and the Companies Bill would be
overlapping, but there are some significant differences. Firstly, there
are differences in the definition of related parties between AS-18 and
the Companies Bill. Secondly, AS-18 does not require to disclose
justification for entering into RPT’s; the Companies Bill requires such a
disclosure. AS-18 disclosures are made in the financial statements,
whereas the Companies Bill disclosures are required in the BOD’s report.
Finally, AS-18 allows aggregation of disclosures, the Companies Bill
does not allow aggregation of disclosures.

The Companies Bill
requires disclosure to the members in the financial statements of the
full particulars of loans given, investments made or guarantee given or
security provided and the purpose for which the loan or guarantee or
security is proposed to be utilised by the recipient of the loan or
guarantee or security. No such requirement exists under the Companies
Act. The Companies Bill also requires every listed company to disclose
in the BOD’s report, the ratio of the remuneration of each director to
the median employee’s remuneration and such other details as may be
prescribed. These disclosure requirements did not exist under the
Companies Act.
 
Post the Satyam episode, SEBI reacted with, inter
alia, new rules in February 2009 requiring greater disclosure of the
promoter shareholdings and any pledging of shares to third parties.
Those disclosures were found to be very useful by investors and
analysts. SEBI also requires promoters to make disclosures of changes in
their shareholdings to the stock exchanges.

The Duty of the Controlling Shareholders

In
some jurisdictions a controlling shareholder has a fiduciary duty to
other shareholders and the company. An abusive RPT would be against the
interests of non-controlling shareholders and thus represent a breach of
duty. A key feature in many jurisdictions is the duty of controlling
shareholders to other shareholders not to infringe the minority rights.
Such a duty opens another legal way of disciplining RPTs. There is an
oppression remedy in India with 447 cases lodged in 2011/12. However,
the process appears to be quite long with 1170 cases pending as at 31st
March 2012.

The Role of Board of Director’s and Audit Committees

Many
jurisdictions require BOD’s, particularly an independent committee to
play a significant role in minimizing the abuse of RPT’s. An important
aspect of the Corporate Governance framework in India concerning RPT’s
is Clause 49 issued by SEBI. With respect to RPTs, it contains the
following requirements:

•    Audit committees shall review annual
financial statements (before submission to the board for approval) with
particular reference to several factors, one of which is disclosure of
RPTs.

•    Audit committees shall also review, on a more general
basis, any statements of “significant RPTs (as defined by the audit
committee) submitted by management”.

•    Listed companies must
periodically give their audit committees a summary statement of
“transactions with related parties in the ordinary course of business”
as well as details of “material individual (related) transactions that
are ‘not in the normal course of business’ or not done on an arm’s
length basis (‘together with management’s justification for the same’)”.

•   
For subsidiaries, a significant transactions report must be given to
the holding company’s board along with the board minutes of the
subsidiary.

•    A quarterly compliance report on corporate
governance is required to be submitted to stock exchanges. One element
of this disclosure is the basis of RPT’s. Companies must also include a
section on corporate governance in their annual reports and it is
suggested that they include “disclosures on materially significant RPT’s
that may have potential conflicts with the interests of the company at
large”.

In this regard, the Companies Bill is more stricter and
requires pre-approval by audit committee of RPT’s. The Companies Bill
requires the Audit Committee to approve or modify transactions with
related parties and scrutinize inter-corporate loans and investments.
Further, the Companies Bill gives Audit Committee the authority to
investigate into any matter falling under its domain and the power to
obtain professional advice from external sources and have full access to
information contained in the records of the company.

There are
some safeguards for independent directors in the form of numbers. Thus,
in India, 50 per cent will be independent directors if the chairman is
an executive director or a representative of the controlling
shareholder; otherwise it is a third. There is also at least one
independent director from any holding company on the board of a material
non-listed subsidiary. Another protection of independence is via the
nomination and election of board members.

Director liability is
often put forward as a means of ensuring that directors and especially
independents fulfil their duties. The case of Satyam in India indicates
that liability is, nevertheless still important. The scandal has been a
shock for independent directors, with many resignations in the following
year as they reassessed their liability and damage to reputations.
Indeed, liability is sometimes the least important sanction. In Belgium,
France and Israel, it is reported that independent directors are very
concerned about their reputations.

The Companies Bill contains
numerous penalties on directors, and is more onerous than the Companies
Act. For example, with respect to RPT’s, it will be open to the company
to proceed against a director or any other employee who had entered into
such contract or arrangement in contravention of the requirements for
recovery of any loss sustained by it as a result of such contract or
arrangement. This disgorgement provision was not contained in the
Companies Act. Violating the requirements of clause 188 of the Companies
Bill could also land the director in jail for a period of one year.
Similarly violating the requirements of clause 186 with regards to loan
and investment could land the director in prison for two years. However
with respect to independent director’s liability, the Bill is far from
clear.

Clause 149(12) of the Companies Bill clarifies that
independent directors and other non executive directors shall be liable
only in respect of such acts of omission or commission by a company that
had occurred with his or her knowledge, attributable through Board
processes, and with the consent or connivance or where he or she had not
acted diligently. From this it appears that the clause seeks to provide
immunity to independent director’s from civil or criminal action in
certain cases. However clause 166(2) of the Bill seems to be a
contradiction. It states that the whole Board is required to act in good
faith in order to promote the objects of the company for the benefit of
its members as a whole and in the best interest of the company, its
employees and shareholders, the community, and for the protection of the
environment. This clause narrows the distinction between independent
directors and executive directors and also extends the responsibility of
the directors to protecting the environment and taking care of the
community.

The importance of independent board members around the
world in approving RPTs does raise questions whether independent
directors are really independent. Whether an independent director is
likely to stand against policy determined on a group basis by the very
shareholders who have often elected them? Particularly in India
independent directors see themselves as advisors to controlling
shareholders rather than as watchdogs who will ensure equitable
treatment of all shareholders. If controlling shareholders cease to be
pleased with the efforts of an independent director, such a director can
be certain that his or her term will not be renewed. Most investors
would not regard independent directors as effective in India,
particularly in the case of family owned companies.

The ability
of small shareholders to appoint a director of their choice under the
Indian Companies Act (and the Companies Bill) has been ineffective in
dealing with the issue of providing adequate representation to small
shareholders. This is because small shareholders have not been able to
galvanise themselves to appoint the director. In any case, a single
director appointed by small shareholders on a large board is generally
rendered useless.

The role of Minority shareholders

Taking
shareholders approval is a universal practice with regard to equity
RPTs but less common for non-equity transactions. However, clearly in
the context of concentrated ownership voting per se is not enough. Thus
Italy and Israel and to some extent, on an ex post basis, France, call
for approval only by disinterested shareholders, i.e. the majority of
the minority. Israel has also had to recognise another necessary policy
trade-off. Where there is a small free float there is always a
possibility of hold-up by some minority shareholders who can abuse their
position.

Given that independent directors may not be successful
or only partially successful in minimizing the abuse of RPT’s, two
other options were considered by the JJ Irani Committee. The JJ Irani
Committee deliberated on whether transactions/contracts in which the
company or directors or their relatives are interested should be
regulated through a “Government Approval-based regime” as is the case
under the prevailing Act or through a “Shareholder Approval and
Disclosure-based regime”. The Committee looked into international
practices in this regard and felt that the latter approach would be
appropriate in the future Indian context. SEBI felt that whilst the
shareholder approval was a good way of allowing each company to decide
for themselves, a majority shareholder could easily pass a resolution in
favour of the resolution. At the recommendation of SEBI, the Companies
Bill was drafted to require a special resolution of the company in which
the related party would not be allowed to vote. Whilst this addressed
the issue of oppression of the minority by the majority, concerns were
raised of potential “hold ups” which we discuss in the following
paragraphs.

Oppression of Majority by Minority

In
late 2004, KarstadrQuelle, Germany’s largest department-store operator,
risked bankruptcy without an increase in capital. The crisis got out of
hand after a small group of just six shareholders constituting only
0.24% of the entire share capital took legal action to challenge the
shareholders’ resolution to increase share capital urgently required to
rescue the company. KarstadrQuelle was forced into lengthy negotiations
it could ill – afford before finally reaching a settlement with the
minority shareholders. Under the German law just one minority
shareholder could hold a company to ransom and even ruin a company. A
single shareholder with only one share could block shareholders’
resolutions and put major decisions at risk by delaying plans by months
or even years through filing lawsuits.

Over the years,
Germany witnessed considerable growth in professional blackmailers who
touted themselves as Robin Hoods of the investment world. They rarely
had any interest in the company other than holding one share, so that
they could participate in an AGM tourism, challenge shareholders’
resolutions and arm twisting the companies into a hush settlement. This
had become a lucrative profession for them, nuisance to the companies
and rarely benefitted the minority shareholders. In the 15 years prior
to 2004, the number of shareholders’ suits had increased tenfold in
Germany. Around half of the suits were initiated from the same club of
professional minority investor, who brought about a hundred actions each
year. The German government reacted to the phe-nomenon of extortive
shareholders suits and came out with a new legislation UMAG in 2005
expected to partly remedy the problem of shareholder suits.

India
should learn from this experience of Germany. In the Companies Bill a
special resolution is required of non interested shareholders to approve
RPT’s. Given that the attendance of minority shareholders at AGM is
very low, it is possible that a small group of rabble rousers can expose
companies to the same blackmailing experienced by the German companies.
However, given that RPT’s need a special resolution only when they are
not in the ordinary course of business and not at arm’s length, the
requirement of a special resolution by minority shareholders should not
be seen as a harsh step. Besides, companies can make use of postal
ballot, if they believe that a transaction which is not at arm’s length
is actually good for the company and all its shareholders!

The Role of the Government/Regulator

The
dispensation of the Central Government approval for RPT’s and replacing
it with shareholders approval in the Companies Bill is a step in the
right direction, particularly keeping in mind that India needs to reduce
discretionary powers of the Government, at a time when corruption is at
an all time high. But that does not mean that the Government does not
have any role in the administration of RPT’s. Government should function
as a watchdog and ensure that laws are meaningfully enforced. Thus, in
enforcing the requirements of the Companies Bill, the Government will
have to ensure that the company in question has done the following (a)
interpreted meaningfully what is an arm’s length transaction (b)
provided adequate and sufficient disclosure of the proposed RPT to the
shareholders (c) clearly identified the related parties and the
disinterested parties on the transaction, and (d) followed the right
practices and an effective voting system to seek a special resolution of
the disinterested parties.

Government should ensure that there
is an effective voting system. Shareholder meetings and proxy voting
practices in India like many parts of Asia lack efficiency and
accountability. Voting processes need to be modernised to reflect best
market practices and the growing global interest in active share
ownership. Some investors strongly recommend conducting voting on all
resolutions at AGMs and EGMs by poll rather than by a show of hands that
often occurs at present, and allowing proxies to speak at meetings,
irrespective of whether the company law is amended on this point.

Section
179 of the Companies Act states that “any member or members present in
person or by proxy” may call for a poll if they hold shares in the
company giving them not less than 10 per cent of total voting power.
However, in practice it is often far from straight forward since in
part, some custodian banks will not do so, i.e. request a poll on the
basis of proxies received. Under the Companies Bill important matters
are voted by postal ballots, allowing investors to have their shares
counted on issues of significance. However, at the time of writing this
article the bill was not yet enacted and the rules were not yet exposed;
therefore it was not clear what important matters government would
require postal ballot on.

The problem of enforcement is a more
general one in India. Currently there are more than 3 crore cases
pending in various courts in India. Decade long legal battles are
commonplace in India. In spite of having around 10,000 courts (not
counting tribunals and special courts) India has a serious shortfall of
judges. A dispute contested until all appeals are exhausted can take up
to 20 years for disposal. Automatic appeals, extensive litigation by
government, underdeveloped alternative mechanisms of dispute resolution
like arbitration, and the shortfall of judges all contribute to the
state of affairs in Indian courts. Most important, since the same courts
try both civil and criminal matters, and the latter gets priority,
economic disputes suffer even greater delays.

In order to
improve efficiency of enforcement actions, the MCA proposed to change
the CLB to a Tribunal staffed by commercial professionals such as
lawyers and accountants. However, due to certain provisions with regard
to eligibility conditions and qualification requirements for
Chairpersons/member of the Tribunal, the proposal was successfully
challenged before the Supreme Court in 2010. The directions given by the
Supreme Court have been taken into account in the proposed new Company
Bill. If it is passed as planned a Tribunal will be established.
Tribunals will speed up the justice system, but critics argue that the
quality of justice system could fall further.

Compliance with
Clause 49 has been enforced by both the Bombay (BSE) and National (NSE)
Stock Exchanges. The chosen method appears to be through suspensions
either of a short term nature or in some cases for a considerable
period. De-listing is rarely used as that may not be in the interest of
the minority shareholders. The bulk of the problem appears to be PSU’s
and smaller companies, with the top companies mostly compliant. The
issue for the PSU concerns independent director requirements since SEBI
had earlier ruled that government nominees on PSU boards are not
independent per Clause 49’s requirements.

SEBI has been more
effective in blocking IPOs if companies fail to meet the required
standards, including those relating to RPT’s and loans/guarantees to
group companies. In cases of violation of the Listing Agreement, SEBI
has the power to appoint adjudication officers to levy penalties.
However, until recently even serious offences were consented under
SEBI’s consent mechanism scheme. Only recently SEBI decided not to
consent serious offences such as insider trading or fraudulent and
unfair trade practices, and expose them to the regular justice system.
However, in the absence of any significant powers, such as
“wire-tapping”, SEBI has found it extremely difficult to prove insider
trading cases.

The Special Appellate Tribunal (SAT) is a
statutory body set up to hear appeal against orders passed by SEBI. The
post of presiding officer of the SAT has been lying vacant since
November 2011 due to non availability of a suitable candidate. This was
hampering the smooth functioning of SAT. However, the selection norms
for the presiding officer have been eased and this issue may be soon
resolved. Another interesting perception is that a large number of SEBI
decisions are over ruled by SAT. This perception also needs to be
addressed by SEBI.

Multiple regulators in India is a thorny
issue. The RBI, MCA, SEBI & IRDA have frequent spat with each other.
These turf battles provide regulatory arbitrage to the wrong doers,
besides weakening the legislation and its implementation. The Financial
Sector Legislative Reforms Commission (FSLRC) was constituted by the
Government of India, Ministry of Finance in March 2011, to look into the
legal and institutional structures of the financial sector in India.
The institutional framework governing the financial sector has been
built up over a century. There are over 60 Acts and multiples rules and
regulations that govern the financial sector, some of which are
outdated. The RBI Act and the Insurance Act are of 1934 and 1938 vintage
respectively. The main result of the work of FSLRC is a single unified
and internally consistent draft law that replaces a large part of the
existing Indian legal framework governing finance. This is work in
progress and even if accepted would take several years to implement.
Besides critics believe that a unified regulator in the financial sector
will not solve India’s problem. What may work in India small and
incremental steps, which cumulatively could have a significant impact.

Conclusions
RPT’s
that treat shareholders inequitably is no different from “sophisticated
stealing”. Some investors believe that more needs to be done about the
heart of the problem in India: the accountability of controlling
shareholders (i.e. promoters) to other shareholders. There is not just
one silver bullet that will serve to protect minority rights in the
presence of powerful insiders and potentially abusive RPTs.

India
has done a great deal to develop a sound corporate governance framework
both under the Companies Act and Clause 49 of the listing requirements.
The Companies Bill imposes far greater and onerous responsibility on
companies and independent directors to ensure that the abuse of RPT’s is
minimised. It is a significant step in the right direction and is a
significant improvement over the existing Act. However, there are still
some loose ends that need to be tightened. The definition of related
parties and relatives for one is a problem. The definition should be
sufficiently harmonised with respect to different bodies of law such as
accounting standards and income-tax law to avoid misunderstandings and
an excessive regulatory burden, thereby underpinning better
implementation and enforcement. Besides the Bill is not clear on which
related parties are not allowed to vote on a RPT resolution.

Under
the Companies Bill, the role of the board and its independent directors
is underpinned by the right of shareholders to have a say on certain
material RPT’s. In addition, it will be essential to improve the
efficacy of AGMs by ensuring the effective possibility to call for a
poll vote rather than a show of hands as is being done currently.
Providing minority shareholders right to approve RPT’s s might need to
be accompanied by safeguards to avoid potential hold-ups by a small
number of investors. At the same time appropriate regulatory
intervention is required to ensure that companies interpret the term
“arm’s length transaction” sensibly and that all transactions where
arm’s length price is questionable are brought to the AGM/EGM for
approval.

Finally, lack of meaningful enforcement,
multiple-regulators and an overburdened judicial system remain
significant concerns. While laws and regulations are in place, effective
means of redress is lacking. Steps need to be taken to strengthen law
enforcement by both the MCA/CLB/Tribunal and SEBI and especially to
remove civil cases from the overwhelmed court system. The Companies Bill
should not be seen as a panacea for all the current problems with
regards to minority rights and abusive RPT’s. To avoid circumvention,
continuous and close monitoring by the regulator is absolutely
necessary.

Corporate Restructuring – Position under the Companies Bill, 2012

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction
The Companies Act, 1956 (“the Act”) would soon be repealed and replaced with the Companies Bill, 2012 (“the Bill”)
since the Lok Sabha has already approved the Bill. Thus, the Act has
been asked to retire before it reaches a superannuation age of 60 years!
This is quite a welcome feature because Acts in India are infamous for
hanging around for over 100 years in some cases.

As with any new
Legislation, there is a great deal of fascination amongst the business
fraternity and professionals to see whether the Bill is a turbo-charged
version of the old Act or is it merely “Old Wine in a New Bottle”, does
it continue with the “Old Whine with New Throttle”? While there have
been several new concepts which are sought to be introduced by the Bill,
one area which sees a lot of upheaval is that of corporate
restructuring, i.e., mergers, takeovers, slump sales, shareholders’
agreements, etc. Corporate India has always desired a code which
facilitates corporate restructuring. While one can understand the
Regulator’s desire of protecting interest of all stakeholders, it should
not be at the cost of stifling the transaction itself. The words of
Justice D. Y. Chandrachud in the case of Ion Exchange (India) Ltd., 105
Comp. Cases 115 (Bom) in this context are very apt:

“The basic
assumptions which were the foundation of a closely regulated and
controlled economy have altered in the present day society where
corporate enterprise has to gear itself up to a free form of competition
and an open interface with market forces. The fortunes of corporate
enterprise are liable to fluctuate with recessionary cycles. Changes in
economic policy and economic changes affect the fortunes of business as
assumptions and conditions in which corporate enterprises function are
altered. Corporate enterprise must be armed with the ability to be
efficient and to meet the requirements of a rapidly evolving business
reality. Corporate restructuring is one of the means that can be
employed to meet the challenges and problems which confront business.
The law should be slow to retard or impede the discretion of corporate
enterprise to adapt itself to the needs of changing times and to meet
the demands of increasing competition

Let us examine whether the
Bill lives up to the expectations and whether it impedes or expedites
corporate restructuring? We look at some of the key features in this
respect.

Schemes of Arrangement

We may first consider
the provisions which would impact all Schemes of Arrangement, i.e.,
mergers, demergers, reconstruction, etc. Clause 230 of Chapter XV of the
Bill deals with these provisions. Some of the new features of this
Clause as compared to the provisions of the Act are as follows:

(a) Tribunal:
The National Company Law Tribunal (“Tribunal”) would have power to
sanction all Schemes. Thus, instead of the High Court the Tribunal would
be vested with these powers. An Appeal would lie against the order of
the Tribunal to the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (“NCLAT”)
and against the Order of the NCLAT to the Supreme Court. One important
feature of both the Tribunal and the NCLAT is that Chartered Accountants
can appear before them to plead Schemes of Arrangement. Currently, this
is the exclusive domain of Advocates.

 (b) Corporate Debt Restructuring:
Any scheme of corporate debt restructuring (CDR) which is a part of a
Scheme must be consented to by not less than 75% of the secured
creditors in value. There must be safeguards for the protection of other
secured and unsecured creditors. The auditor must report that the fund
requirements of the company after the CDR shall conform to the liquidity
test based upon the estimates provided to them by the Board of
Directors. Here the auditor would be well advised to remember the CA
Institute’s warning that he should not become a party to preparing
estimates. One important facet of the CDR is that the Scheme should
include, a valuation report in respect of the shares and the property
and all assets, tangible and intangible, movable and immovable, of the company of a Registered Valuer.

(c)
Valuation Report: Every Notice of a meeting for the Scheme of
Arrangement which is sent to creditors and members shall be accompanied
by a copy of the valuation report, if any, and explaining its effect on
creditors, key managerial personnel, promoters and non-promoter members,
and the debenture-holders and the effect of the Scheme on any material
interests of the directors of the company or the debenture trustees.
Currently, the valuation report is only available for inspection at the
company’s office. An overwhelming majority of the shareholders do not go
to the registered office to inspect the valuation report. Now the
valuation report would come home since it needs to be sent to the
members and creditors. The Bill is silent as to whether the valuation
workings also need to be sent to them? In this context the following
decisions would throw some light:

• Hindustan Lever Ltd., 83
Comp. Cases 30 (SC)/ Miheer Mafatlal vs. Mafatlal Industries, 87 Comp.
Cases 792 (SC): Valuation is a specialised subject best left to experts
and Courts would not interfere in the same.

• Asian Coffee Ltd., 103 Comp. Cases 17 (AP): Shareholders need not be given detailed calculations of share exchange ratios.

(d) Notice to Regulators:
Every notice shall also be sent to the Central Government, Income-tax
authorities, the Reserve Bank of India, the Securities and Exchange
Board, the RoC, stock exchanges, Official Liquidator, the Competition
Commission of India (CCI) and such other sectoral regulators or
authorities which are likely to be affected by the compromise or
arrangement (e.g., Telecom Regulatory Authority of India for telecom
companies).

Under the Bill, the authorities, to whom Notice has
been sent, can make representations, within 30 days or else it shall be
presumed that they have no representations to make on the proposals.
However, this period of 30 days should be read subject to the time
allowed under any other Statute for approving such Schemes. For
instance, the Competition Act, 2002 allows the CCI a time period of 210
days for passing an order. Therefore, it stands to reason that the
timeline of 30 days will not be applicable to the CCI.

(e) Objection Threshold:
An objection to the Scheme can now be made only by persons holding at
least 10% of the shareholding or having outstanding debt amounting to at
least 5%. This is a welcome move which would prevent frivolous
challenges which lead to undue delays.

(f) Approval: The
resolution for approving the Scheme requires 3/4th majority in value and
can be passed in person, by proxy or through postal ballot. Postal
Ballot has been made applicable to both listed as well as
unlisted/private companies, unlike s.192A of the Act where it applies
only to listed companies.

(g) Accounting Standards: The Scheme shall be sanctioned by the Tribunal only if there is a certificate by the Auditor that the accounting treatment in the Scheme is in conformity with the prescribed accounting standards. Currently, the Listing Agreement contains a similar provision in the case of Listed Companies. The decision in the case of Hindalco Industries Ltd., 94 SCL 1 (Bom) is pertinent in this respect. In this case, the company proposed to write-off the impairment losses and ammortisation loss against the balance standing in the Securities Premium Account by a Scheme of Arrangement. The Scheme was objected to on the grounds that this treatment was in violation of para 58 of AS-28 on “Impairment” since the loss was not routed through the P&L A/c. The High Court over-ruled this objection and held that section 211(3B) of the Act expressly permitted deviation from accounting standards subject to certain disclosures.

The current Accounting Standards are woefully inadequate to address all forms of corporate restructuring, for instance, there are no standards dealing with demergers, reconstruction, reduction of capital, etc. Hence, unless new Accounting Standards are introduced, this would remain an empty formality. In this context Accounting Standard Interpretation (ASI) 11 on AS-14 issued by the ICAI on 1-4-2004 is relevant since it prescribes the stand to be taken in case the accounting treatment specified under the Scheme deviates from the treatment specified from AS-14. Some instances of cases where accounting disputes have been the subject matter of objection to Schemes of Amalgamation/Arrangement, include the following, Gallops Realty, 150 Comp. Cases 596 (Guj); Cairns India Ltd, 101 SCL 435 (Bom); Mphasis Ltd., 102 SCL 411 (Kar); Sutlej Industries Limited, 135 Comp. Cases 394 (Raj),Paramount Centrispun, 150 Comp. Cases 790 (Guj), etc.

(h)    Buy-back: A Scheme in respect of any buy-back of securities shall be sanctioned only if the buy-back is in accordance with the provisions of the Bill. For instance, the decisions in the cases of SEBI vs. Sterlite Industries Ltd., (2004) 6 CLJ 34 (Bom); Gujarat Ambuja Exports Ltd (2004) 6 CLJ 117 (Guj) have held that Schemes of Arrangement need not be in compliance with the buyback provisions of the Act since they operate in different fields. The Court held that the s.77A is merely an enabling provision and the Court’s powers u/ss. 100-104 and 391-394 are not in any way affected. The conditions u/s.77A are applicable only to buyback under that section and the conditions applicable u/ss. 100-104 and 391 cannot be made applicable or imported into a buyback of shares u/s. 77A. There is no reason why a cancellation of shares and consequent reduction cannot be made u/s. 391 read with section 100 merely because a shareholder is given an option to cancel or retain his shares. This position would now be modified by the Bill.

(i)    Takeover: Any Scheme which includes a Takeover Offer in the case of listed companies, shall be as per the SEBI Regulations. In Larsen & Toubro Ltd, 121 Com. Cases 523 (Bom) a takeover of shares by Grasim avoided the provisions of the SEBI Takeover Code since it was done under a Scheme of Arrangement. Grasim acquired around a 30% equity stake in Ultra Tech Cement Company Ltd from the public shareholders under the Scheme of Arrangement, around 4.5% stake from L&T. Further, it also sold its holding in L&T to an Employee Trust of L&T. As a result of the Scheme, Grasim ended up owning a 51.1% stake in Ultra Tech without triggering the open offer provisions under the SEBI Takeover Regulations. The Bill aims to plug this method of acquisition of shares€.

(j)    Minority Squeeze-out:
Provisions have been enacted for minority squeeze-out by majority. Majority shareholders (holding 90% of the equity shares capital) who have acquired the majority stake through amalgamation, share exchange, conversion of securities, any other reason, etc., should notify the company of their intention to buy out the remaining shareholders. The purchase price would be ascertained on the basis of the valuation done by a registered valuer.

Merger Schemes

In addition to the above provisions, which are applicable to all Schemes of Arrangement, the following additional requirements which are applicable to a Scheme of amalgamation/ merger are provided in Cl. 232 of the Bill:

(a)    A notice for Merger Schemes must also include a supplementary accounting statement if the last annual accounts of any of the merging companies are more than 6 months old.

(b)    A transferee company should not, as result of the Scheme hold any shares in its own name or under a Trust for the benefit of the transferee company or its subsidiary company or associate company. Such treasury shares shall be cancelled or extinguished. In other words, the Bill prohibits creation of treasury stocks. This supersedes the decision in the case of Himachal Telematics Ltd, 86 Comp. Cases 325 (Del) which upheld the creation of treasury stock arising on a merger. Several mergers, such as, ICICI-ICICI Bank, Reliance Petroleum-Reliance Industries, Mahindra & Mahindra, etc., had followed this route of creating treasury stock. In fact, ICICI Bank sold its treasury stock on the floor of the stock exchange for a handsome amount.

(c)    In case of a merger of a listed company into an unlisted company the transferee company shall remain an unlisted company until it becomes a listed company. If the shareholders of the transferor company decide to opt out of the transferee company, provision shall be made for payment of the value of shares held by them as per a pre-determined price formula or after a valuation is made.

Thus, this provision negates the back-door/reverse merger route of SEBI under which a listed company can merge into an unlisted company and the unlisted company gets automatic listing. This provision is also available for demerger of a listed company into an unlisted company and listing of the shares of the resulting unlisted company. For instance, Cinemax India Ltd, a listed company demerged its theatre exhibition business into an unlisted company. Subsequently, the shares of the unlisted company got listed without an IPO.

The unlisted company gets the gains of listing without the pains of listing. It also bypasses the requirements of Section 72A of the Income-tax Act if the transferee company is a loss-making/sick company. Thus, the unabsorbed depreciation and carried forward losses of the loss-making company are available as a set-off to the healthy company without complying with the requirements of section 72A and Rule 9C since the transferee company is the loss making company. This route is currently available by virtue of Rule 19(2)(b) of Securities Contract (Regulation) Rules, 1957 read with the SEBI’s Circulars CIR/ CFD/DIL/5/2013 and the earlier SEBI/ CFD/SCRR/01/2009/03/09.

Under the Bill, the shareholders of the transferor company have to be provided with a mandatory exit option in the form of a cash payment. It would be interesting to see what happens if more than 25% of the shareholders of the transferor opt out? In such a situation the conditions of Section 2(1B) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 are not met since the section requires that at least 3/4th of the share-holders of the amalgamating company become share-holders of the amalgamated company. How would this condition now be met? As a consequence, the merger would cease to be a tax-neutral amalgamation under the Income-tax Act and as held by the Supreme Court in the case of Grace Collis, 248 ITR 323 (SC), an amalgamation involves a transfer of capital asset. You can join the dots to understand what happens next.

(d)    The Scheme should clearly indicate an Appointed Date from which it shall be effective and the scheme shall be deemed to be effective from such date and not at a date subsequent to the appointed date. Currently, there is no express requirement in the Act but the decision in the case of Marshall Sons & Co. (I) Ltd., 223 ITR 809 (SC) has held that every Scheme of merger must necessarily provide a date with effect from which the transfer will take place and such a date would either be the date specified in the Scheme or the date so specified/modified by the Court while sanctioning the Scheme. An Appointed Date is also relevant from an income-tax perspective. The decisions in the case of Ambalal Sarabhai Enterprises Ltd, 147 ITR 294 (Guj); Amerzinc Products, 105 SCL 682 (Guj), etc. are also relevant in this respect.

(e)    The fee paid by the transferor company on its authorised capital shall be available for set-off against any fees payable by the transferee company on its authorised capital enhanced subsequent to the merger. This express provision sets to rest the constant objection of the Regional Director on this issue. Several decisions have supported clubbing of the authorised capital – Hotline HOL Celdings, 121 Comp. Cases 165 (Del); Cavin Plastics, 129 Comp. Cases 915 (Mad); Areva T&D, 144 Comp. Cases 34 (Cal), etc.

(f)    Every company in relation to which the Tribunal makes an Order, shall, until the completion of the
Scheme, file a statement in such form and within such time as may be prescribed with the RoC every year duly certified by a CA/CS/CMA indicating whether or not the Scheme is being complied with in accordance with the Orders of the Tribunal.

Fast-track Mergers

Clause 233 provides a new concept of fast-track mergers:

(a)    A new concept of fast-track mergers has been introduced for mergers between small companies or between a holding company and its wholly owned subsidiary without going through the Tribunal Process.

(b)    A Small Company is defined to mean a ‘private company’ meeting either of the following requirements:

•    Paid up capital does not exceed the sum prescribed which may range from Rs. 50 lakh – Rs. 5 crores.

•    Turnover does not exceed the sum prescribed which may range from Rs. 20 lakh – Rs. 2 crore.

It may be noted that a merger between a holding and a 100% subsidiary could also opt for the fast-track route even though the companies are not small companies.

(c)    This route is optional and if the companies desire to adopt the conventional route i.e., the Tribunal-approved Route, then they may adopt the same.

Cross-Border Mergers

(a)    The Bill provides that a merger of a foreign company incorporated in the jurisdictions of such countries as may be notified from time to time by the Central government into an Indian company is permissible. For instance, Corus Group Plc (now Tata Steel Europe Ltd), UK merging into Tata Steel and Tata Steel issuing its Indian shares to the shareholders of Corus, wherever they may be located. Currently also, mergers of a foreign company into an Indian company is permissible. Any merger involving an Indian Company would be governed by the Companies Act, 1956. Sections 391 to 394 of the Act deal with Mergers of companies. Section 394 of the Act provides for facilitating amalgamation of companies. Section a.394 states that the section only applies to a Transferee Company which is a company within the meaning of the Act, i.e., an Indian Company. However, the Transferor Company is defined to include any Company, whether Indian or Foreign. Hence, the transferor company can be a foreign company. The decisions in the cases of Bombay Gas Co., 89 Comp. Cases 195 (Bom), Moschip Semiconductor Technology Ltd., 120 Comp. Cases 108 (AP), Adani Enterprises Ltd., 103 SCL 135 (Guj); Essar Oil Ltd, Company Petition No. 280 of 2008 (Guj), etc., clearly support this point.

However, Cl. 234 of the Bill now provides that only companies from specified jurisdictions would be permissible. This restriction is not there currently. Probably, the Government wants to limit the scope to those countries which either have a DTAA or a TIEA with India.

(b)    Cl. 234 of the Bill also provides for a merger of an Indian company into a foreign company which is currently not possible. S.394 states that the section only applies to a Transferee Company which is a company within the meaning of the Act, i.e., an Indian Company. However, the Transferor Company is defined to include any Company, whether Indian or Foreign. Thus, currently an Indian company cannot merge into a Foreign Company.

The consideration for the merger may be discharged by the foreign company in the form of cash or its Indian Depository Receipts. Thus, the foreign company cannot issue its shares to the Indian shareholders of the transferor company. For instance, if ACC were to merge into Holcim of Switzerland, Holcim cannot issue its shares to the Indian shareholders of ACC. It must issue IDRs or pay cash. Currently, Standard Chartered Bank Plc, UK, is the only foreign company to have issued IDRs in India. One possible reason for this embargo is that under the FEMA Regulations, Indian residents can acquire shares of a foreign company

only under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme, i.e., by paying consideration in cash. There is no provision for a stock swap in the case of an outbound in-vestment by resident individuals. This is one area which could be liberalised by permitting the consideration to be in the form of shares also.

The Bill provides that the prior approval of the RBI would be required for such a merger of an Indian company with a foreign company.

Registered Valuer

Clause 247 of the Bill introduces a new concept of a Registered Valuer. Where a valuation is required to be made in respect of any property, stocks, shares, debentures, securities or goodwill or any other assets or net worth of a company or its liabilities under the provision of this Act, it must be valued by a Registered Valuer. The qualifications and experience for such a person would be prescribed. It may be recalled that a few years ago, the Shardul Shroff Committee had recommended that valuations should be carried out by independent registered valuers instead of the current practice. Would a CA automatically be registered as a registered valuer or would he have to acquire some additional qualification for the same? What happens in case of a partnership firm or LLP of professionals – would all partners need to obtain qualifications? One wonders whether a CA would be the right person to value property, plant and machinery whereas whether a chartered engineer would be able to value shares and goodwill? Does a one-size fits all approach work or is not the current dual system a better approach?

Some of the valuation areas under the Bill which would require a Registered Valuer include:

•    Further issue of shares
•    Assets involved in Arrangement of Non Cash transactions involving directors
•    Shares, Property and Assets of the company under a CDR
•    Scheme of Arrangement
•    Equity Shares held by Minority Shareholders
•    Assets for submission of report by Liquidator.

Reduction of Capital

Clause 66 of the Bill deals with Reduction of Share Capital of a Company:

(a)    A reduction of share capital cannot be made if the Company is in arrears in the repayment of any deposits accepted by it or interest payable thereon by it.

(b)    Further, an application for the reduction shall not be sanctioned by the Tribunal unless the accounting treatment, proposed by the company for such reduction is in conformity with the prescribed Accounting Standards. This would require framing of Standards on reduction. (c) The Order confirming the reduction shall be published by the company in such manner as the Tribunal may direct. Under the current provision, the Court has discretionary power to order publishing of reasons of reduction and such other information as it thinks fit.

(d)    The current discretionary power of the Court to order the addition of words “and reduced” to the names of the company reducing their capital has been withdrawn. Further, The current power of the Court to dispense with the requirement of the consent of the creditors in case of reduction of capital by way of either diminution in any liability in respect of the unpaid share capital or repayment to any shareholder of any unpaid share capital has been withdrawn.

Slump Sale

Currently, under the Act a public company is required to obtain its members’ consent to sell, lease, etc. of the whole or substantially the whole undertaking of the company. Thus, an ordinary resolution of the members is required u/s. 293(1) for a slump sale. In case of a listed company, this consent is to be obtained by a Postal Ballot.

Under Clause 180 of the Bill this provision of Postal Ballot will now be applicable even to a private limited company. Further, the approval of the members is to be obtained by way of a special resolution instead

of an ordinary resolution. Thus, the regulatory arbitrage available in a slump sale over a demerger is sought to be plugged. This would make it more challenging for listed companies to hive-off their undertakings by way of slump sales.

Specific definition of the terms ‘undertaking’ and ‘substantially the whole undertaking’ have been provided under the Bill as follows:

(i)    “Undertaking” shall mean an undertaking in which the investment of the company exceeds 20% of its net worth as per the audited balance sheet of the preceding financial year or an undertaking which generates 20% of the total income of the company during the previous financial year.

(ii)    “Substantially the whole of the undertaking” in any financial year shall mean 20% or more of the value of the undertaking as per the audited balance sheet of the preceding financial year.

It may be noted that this definition of undertaking is only relevant for the purposes of the Bill. What constitutes an undertaking for determining whether a transaction is a slump sale u/s. 2(42C) of the Income-tax Act, would yet be determined by Explanation-1 to Section 2(19AA) of that Act, which provides as follows:

“For the purposes of this Cl. , “undertaking” shall include any part of an undertaking, or a unit or division of an undertaking or a business activity taken as a whole, but does not include individual assets or liabilities or any combination thereof not constituting a business activity.”

Thus, what may be an undertaking under the Bill may not satisfy the conditions laid down under the Income-tax Act. Distinctions between the two definitions are given in the Table:

Interesting questions which would now arise would include whether a sale of shares would constitute an undertaking and hence, would it require a special resolution? The view till now was that shares do not constitute an undertaking.

Inter-Company Loans and Investments
Clause 186 of the Bill is at par with the current Section  372A of the Act. However, en masse changes have been carried out in this very important provision. Some of the key features of Clause 186 are as follows:

(a) A Company cannot make investment through more than 2 layers of investment companies. The restriction is on 2 layers of investment companies and not operating companies. An Investment Company means a company whose principal business is acquisition of shares, debentures or other securities. This is one of the most important restrictions under the Bill. This prohibition does not apply in two situations:

A company can acquire any foreign company if such foreign company has investment subsidiaries beyond two layers as per the foreign laws. However, the RBI is known to frown upon such multi-layer structures for outbound investment.

•  A subsidiary company can have any investment subsidiary for the purposes of meeting the requirements under any Law.

This prohibition is even applicable to NBFCs and Core Investment Companies (CICs) registered with the RBI and to private companies. One would have expected private companies and CICs to be exempted from this restriction.

(b) The main provision of Clause 186 is the same as Section 372A, i.e., a company cannot make a loan/investment/guarantee exceeding 60% of its paid-up capital + free reserves + securities premium or 100% of its free reserves + securities premium, without the prior approval by way of a special resolution. However, the current embargo on a loan/guarantee to any body corporate has been modified to a loan to any person. Thus, loans to individuals/HUF/firm/AOP/Trust, etc., would also be covered.

An NBFC whose principal business is acquisition of shares and securities, shall be exempt from the provision of this clause in respect of subscription and acquisition of securities.

(d) The loan must be given at a minimum rate of interest equal to the prevailing yield of 1/3/5/ 10 years’ Government Security closest to the tenor of the loan. Presently, the minimum rate is the Bank Rate of the RBI, which currently is 8.50%. The 2011 draft of the Companies Bill also pegged the minimum rate at the Bank Rate but the 2012 version has changed it to its current form.

(c) The current exemptions given u/s. 372A of the Act have been done away with. Consequentially:

•    Private limited companies will have to comply with this section.

•    Loans by a holding company to its 100% subsidiary would have to comply with this section. Thus, interest free loans to a 100% subsidiary will not be possible even for a private company.

•    Acquisition by a holding company by way of subscription, purchase or otherwise the securities of its wholly owned subsidiary would have to comply with this section.

•    Any guarantee given or security provided by a holding company in respect of any loan made to its WOS would have to comply with this section.

(d) A company shall disclose to the members in the financial statement the full particulars of the loans given, investment made or guarantee given or security provided and the purpose for which the loan or guarantee or security is proposed to be utilised by the recipient of the loan or guarantee or security.

(e)    A company which is in default in the repayment of any deposits/interest thereon, shall not give any loan or give any guarantee or provide any security or make an acquisition till such default continues.

(f)    Restrictions have been put on SEBI intermediaries, such as, brokers, merchant bankers, underwriters, etc., from accepting inter-corporate deposits exceeding prescribed limits. One fails to see the logic for this provision when the SEBI Regulations do no prescribe any limits.

Shareholders’ Covenants

Currently, Restrictive Covenants forming part of Shareholders’ Agreement, such as, Tag Along, Drag Along, First Refusal, Russian Roulette, Texas Shoot-out, Dutch auction rights, etc., are the subject-matter of great dispute in the case of public companies.

The Supreme Court has held that they are valid against a company only if they are a part of the Articles of Association or else they remain a private contract between shareholders – V.B. Rangarajan vs. V. Gopalkrishnan, 73 Comp. Cases 201 (SC). A Single Judge of the Bombay High Court in the case of Western Maharashtra Development Corporation vs. Bajaj Auto Ltd., (2010) 154 Comp Cases 593 (Bom), had ruled that a Shareholders’ Agreement containing restrictive Clauses was invalid, since the Articles of a public company could not contain Clauses restricting the transfer of shares and it was contrary to Section 108 of the Act. Subsequently, a two-member Bench of the Bombay High Court, in the case of Messer Holdings Ltd vs. Shyam Ruia and Others (2010) 159 Comp Cases 29 (Bom) has overruled this decision of the Single Judge of the Bombay High Court.

The Bill provides that securities in a public company are freely trans-ferrable but a contract in respect of transfer of securities in a public company shall be enforceable. It is

submitted that this express provision sets at rest once and for all whether public companies can contain pre-emptive rights. This would be a big boost for Private Equity/FDI/Private Investment in Public Equity (PIPE) transactions since they usually come with pre-emptive rights.

Other Important Changes

Some other important changes in the sphere of restructuring include the following:

(a)    Infrastructure companies can issue redeemable preference shares having a tenure of more than 20 years provided they give the holders an option to ask for a redemption of a specified percentage every year. Real estate development has been defined as an infrastructure sector along with, air/road/water/rail transport, power generation, telecom, etc.

(b)    Prescribed class of companies which comply with accounting standards cannot utilise their securities premium account for paying premium on redemption of preference shares. They must use their profits alone. This is a very important restriction and it would be interesting to see the class which is prescribed. One fails to understand the logic behind this embargo.

(c)    Companies which are unable to redeem preference shares can, with the Tribunal’s approval, issue fresh preference shares in lieu of the same and that would constitute a deemed redemption of preference shares.

(d)    Prescribed class of companies which comply with accounting standards cannot utilise their securities premium account for buying back shares or for writing-off preliminary expenditure of the company. They must use their profits alone. Again, it would be interesting to see the class which is prescribed.

(e)    The time limit between two or more buy-back of securities, whether board approved or shareholder approved, has been made one year. The odd-lot buy-back provision has been dropped as a method of buy-back.

Conclusion

It would be interesting to see what the Rules provide since a bulk of the provisions would be prescribed in the Rules. Hence, the “Devil would lie in the Details (Rules)”. To sum up, there are some laudable amendments, some not so good and some quite serious ones. The Bill is a cocktail of surprises and shocks and corporate India would have to accept both. As Arnold Bennett, the English Author, once said:

“Any Change, even a Change for the Better, is always accompanied by Drawbacks and Discomforts”.

Understanding LBT

fiogf49gjkf0d
Octroi taxes have a respectable antiquity, being known in Roman times as vectigalia. It is in essence a tax levied on bringing commodities into a local area/ district. As of 2013, octroi is levied possibly only in Ethiopia and in Maharashtra.

In order to abolish this cadaverous practice, the Government of Maharashtra (GoM) decided to replace it with a tax supposed to be more robust and tax payer friendly. As most of us are aware, the GoM finally acted upon its long standing promise of doing away with Octroi and introduce an account based system of tax ‘The Local Body Tax (LBT)’. The tax being based on the philosophy of selfassessment, shall definitely reduce the hassles and inefficiencies caused due to stoppage of vehicles at Octroi check posts.

While most of us are must have become aware of the broad scheme of the Act by way of newspaper and media reports, we need to familiarise ourselves with the legal framework.

The basis of the levy is the Maharashtra Municipal Corporation Act, 1949 (‘Act’). Section 152P of the Act empowers the Municipalities to levy LBT on items imported into their territory. However, while there is no separate Act, there are a whole new set of rules which essentially govern the levy. All the important provisions are contained in the rules thereby making them more relevant than the Act.

However, the new tax has been welcomed with one of the largest mass movements by the business community in recent times, and the government has been forced to postpone the levy. The reason for the stiff opposition seems to be certain draconian provisions. However, before welcoming or opposing this Act, we need to objectively analyse the provisions of LBT.

Levy: The levy is on import of goods for the purpose of consumption, use or sale. Thus liability to pay LBT generally rests on the person who brings goods within the limits of a municipal corporation. However, when goods are purchased from within the city, it shall be the duty of the purchasing dealer to ensure that the goods are not imported goods. If the goods purchased are imported goods, he shall ensure by way of a declaration in the purchase invoice, that LBT on the same has been paid. In case of lapse of due diligence by the purchasing dealer, he shall become liable to LBT.

It is pertinent to note that, Rule 22 empowers the Commissioner to enquire and satisfy himself that the declaration furnished is true and correct. Thus having regard to this provision, it will not be wrong to extrapolate the verdict of Bombay High Court in the case of Mahalaxmi Cotton Ginning Pressing and Oil Industries ([2012] 051 VST 0001) wherein the Hon’ble High Court has upheld the constitutional validity of Section 48(5) of the MVAT Act, which provides that set-off of Input Tax credit (ITC) shall only be available if tax is actually paid by the supplier into the government treasury. Thus if during the course of assessment proceedings, the officer observes that the selling dealer has not “actually paid” the VAT in full or part, he shall be entitled to deny the claim of ITC made by the purchasing dealer. This is already causing undue hardship to the assessee under VAT.

Lacuna in the definition of LBT: LBT has been defined to mean a tax on the entry of goods into the limits of the city. However, it does not include octroi. This exclusion of octroi from the definition might result in double taxation. As mentioned above, LBT will have to be paid on any goods imported within the city. However, since LBT does not include octroi, those dealers who have imported goods within the city after paying octroi might be asked to pay LBT as well, as payment of octroi shall not tantamount to payment of LBT.

Coverage of one and all: Virtually anyone bringing in goods to the city is proposed to be brought under the ambit of LBT. The definitions of ‘business’ and ‘dealer’ have been kept wide enough to override any decision of the courts granting exclusion to people from VAT. This is because, ‘Business’ has been defined to also include profession and any kind of occasional transaction without regard to its frequency, volume or regularity. The definition of ‘dealer’ includes all kinds of persons including various agents handling goods/documents of title and auctioneers who receive the price for auctioned goods.

Be it small or big traders, professionals, brokers, factors, agents, societies, clubs, etc. or people carrying on temporary business; almost everyone will be covered if he makes purchases of a meagre Rs. 1,00,000/- in a year and brings into the city goods worth Rs. 5,000/-. Even one-time transactions like purchase of car by an individual to render professional services shall be liable to tax.

Registration, returns & maintenance of records
: While dealers carrying on regular business within the city are required to obtain make an application for registration within 30 days, dealers carrying on temporary business are required to make an application 15 days prior to commencing a business.

Returns are to be filed at half yearly intervals within 15 days from the end of the period. The first return shall be in Form E1 and shall be for the period of 6 months – April to September. The second return (in form EII) is an annual return i.e. for the full financial year. Thus there is an overlapping of return period. Further, there is also a provision for revision of returns; however the time limit is very short i.e. within a month from due date of filing of the original return.

Payment of tax is to be made on a monthly basis. The Rules also provide for a composition scheme for small dealers having turnover upto Rs. 5 lakh , builders and contractors. The composition scheme provides for a simple way of calculation of taxes irrespective of items imported, which is quite encouraging.

LBT requires issuance of bills in case of any sales amounting to a meagre Rs. 10/- or more and more so preservation of the same for a period of 5 years. Failing to issue an invoice might lead to penalty. However there is a duplicacy in the penalty provisions – Rule 48(1) provides a penalty upto double the tax amount, while Rule 48(7) provides for a penalty of double the invoice amount. Both the provisions provide penalty for not issuing invoice.

Further, the taxability of an item is determined in accordance with rates mentioned in the Schedules. Schedule-A lists the items and rates at which the same shall be taxed. The dealer will need to work out the liability to LBT based on different rates prescribed (ranging from 0% to 7%) and this may become an exercise in itself. Schedule-B lists out the items exempt from tax.

There are very few items which have made it to the coveted Schedule-B and even fruits, vegetables, etc are not covered in the exemption list. Persons dealing in these will have to register as well.

Sweeping powers:
Wide powers have been given to the Municipal officers to seize goods, attach any property (and not just bank and debtors as is the case in VAT), stop any vehicle in transit etc. The business community is afraid that these powers will become a cause of harassment. However, it may be mentioned that some of the powers can be exercised only by an officer of the rank of DMC and above.

Further, penalties for most offences are steep and discretionary which might also give an impetus to unsavoury favours sought by officers. For example, (i) Penalty for non-registration may extend upto 10 times of the amount of LBT payable during the period during which the dealer did not have registration; and (ii) Penalty for failing to disclose fully and truly all material facts, claiming an inaccurate deduction or failing to show appropriate liability of LBT in the return may go upto 5 times the amount of LBT payable.

Exemptions & Refunds: Goods sent for job work/ processing outside the city should be received without any change in appearance or condition; failing which LBT will have to be paid afresh on the entire value of goods and not just the value addition on account of processing. What fails to appeal to a rational mind is how processed goods will appear the same as original! The other condition which needs to be complied with is that the goods sent out should be brought back within 6 months.

In case of goods imported into the city for job work, the condition appears a little rational as the words used in the Act are the goods should not change ‘form’, which in my opinion is a little broader than the word ‘appearance’.

Further, LBT shall not be levied on goods exported outside the territory of India.

It is also relevant to note that, in case of goods imported but re-exported to another city, by way of sale or otherwise (i.e. branch transfer), 90% of the LBT paid on import shall be refunded.

Payment of disputed appeal before appeal: The law mandates assessee to deposit the entire amount of the disputed tax before filing an appeal. Considering that the appellate authority is a municipal officer and the despicable disposal rate that Indian judicial system has, in my humble opinion, stay should be granted atleast upto the stage of first appeal.

Appeal against an order passed by an officer below the rank of a Deputy Municipal Commissioner (DMC) shall lie with the DMC while that passed by an officer of the rank of DMC and above shall lie with the Municipal Commissioner. Further, there is no provision for second appeal and hence the only remedy will be approaching the High court.

Interest on delayed payments: The interest rates prescribed for delayed payment of LBT are phenomenally high. Interest rate ranges from 2% p.m. for delay upto 1 year to 3% p.m. (36% p.a.) for delay of more than a year. Interest rates need to be re-visited as no other law requires payment of such high interest rates.

No credit mechanism:
No mechanism for input credit of LBT paid has been prescribed in the Rules/ Act, which will lead to a cascading effect on LBT paid. This shall especially affect those dealers who do not directly procure from the manufacturer as more the number of intermediaries, lesser the chances to fix a competitive selling price.

While the law relating to LBT is indeed welcome being more sound in terms of ideology as compared to octroi, it is only apropos that some of the provisions be revisited and watered down so as to inspire confidence within the business community. While all and sundry were under the ambit of octori; the same cannot be the case in LBT in view of administrative difficulties of registration, returns, assessment, etc.

Taking a cue from the above, LBT can be perceived to be akin to VAT. Thus the simpler way for the State could be to collect it alongwith VAT under a separate challan/accounting code.

With the traders demanding abolition of the law, the government has responded by promising to revisit the Act. In principle, the levy is better than octroi – it is accounts based, will avoid delays when goods are in transit. However, the way the Rules have been drafted, it appears to put excessive compliance burden on the trading community. Having to deal with one more authority with potential harassment has made the businesses nervous. It shall not out of context here to remember Benjamin Franklin’s saying “The only things certain in life are death and taxes.” All that one can hope for is, that the law be made simple so that it can be widely and easily adopted!

Poitu Varein, Khuda Hafiz, Alvida, Aavjo, Adios, Mr. Auditor – An Auditor’s Anguish

fiogf49gjkf0d
The new Companies Act and the draft rules are heavily skewed against the auditor. The restriction on the number of audits an auditor can do in the existing Companies Act is 20 public companies. Though the restriction has been retained at 20, the limit under the new Act will also include private companies. No major country or professional body imposes such a restriction, and this is perhaps very unique to India. It is also unique within India, since similar restrictions do not exist in the legal, medical and many other professions. Imposing an unreasonable restriction on doing business perhaps may not be constitutionally valid. Restricting the number of audits would also have a negative effect on audit quality, since typically none of the audit firms will be able to invest in talents and technology, critical for a good audit.

Under the new Act rotation of auditors will be mandatory for all companies, other than a one man company and a small company. Conceded that rotation brings about independence of auditors, but it also increases audit cost, burden for companies and in the initial years of the incumbent auditor, increases the risk of non-detection of frauds and errors. Therefore in balance the rotation requirements should not be extended to companies other than listed companies, as public interest in non-listed companies is minimal.

An auditor cannot be appointed as auditor of a company if he or his relative holds investment in a company exceeding Rs. 1 lakh. Relatives have been defined in the rules and include a long list which includes brothers and sisters. In today’s world, it would be difficult to know in which companies the brother or sister has invested in; leave aside telling them not to invest in those companies. A disgruntled brother or sister of the auditor may actually invest in various companies, rendering the auditor jobless. Therefore. the term relative needs to be redefined to include only spouse and children and other people who are financially dependent on the auditor.

The rules also prohibit the auditor from having any business relationship with the company, even if those are at arm’s length. Thus, an auditor of a telecom operator cannot use the network facility of the operator, even if the pricing is the same as any other customer. Needless to say, any transaction carried out on arms length basis must be permitted, as otherwise, it will pose serious practical problems for not only the auditors but also the companies they audit.

The reporting requirements for the auditor have been made very onerous. He is supposed to be a super human who will not only detect and report to the Central Government all frauds that have been committed against a company but also frauds that are in the process of being committed. He is also required to second guess management’s business decision and propriety of transactions. All this will require him to step into management’s shoes, which is completely against the requirement of auditing standards. Besides, if the auditor is good at doing business, why have entrepreneurs; maybe, auditors should run businesses. Given the onerous nature of the auditing profession under the new Act, this may actually be a good idea!

Interestingly, the auditor is also required to report on foreseeable losses on derivative contracts. One can understand mark to market losses, but it is difficult to understand foreseeable losses. Never mind, an auditor is not only supposed to be a super human but also one with extra sensory powers. If only the auditor knew what foreseeable losses and profits are on derivative contracts, why would he choose to be an auditor, why not a derivative trader?

After all this, if the auditor is found to be lacking in his super human and extra sensory skills, there is a lot of stringent punishment waiting for him. There could be class action suit, long years of imprisonment and debarment of the audit firm for a period of 10 years. Even if the professional misconduct was attributed to a single partner, an entire firm comprising of several thousand people, could be in trouble.

Which parent would like his children to join a profession with so many imperilments? The provisions of the Act seem to be a knee jerk reaction to the Satyam fraud and in the long run will destroy the audit profession and audit quality and will be actually counter-intuitive to the very reason why these laws were framed. One can relate this experience to an attempt at VCR repair.

One day I tore into my VCR with the intention of freeing a jammed tape. I took the VCR apart, but failed to free the jammed tape. Then, when I tried to put the VCR back together, I failed again. The tape was still jammed, and now the VCR was in pieces. If I had counted the cost before looking for a screwdriver, I would have taken the VCR to a repair shop rather than destroying it. When will we learn that, “The Road to Hell is paved with Good Intentions!”

levitra

Be accountable to your motherland !

fiogf49gjkf0d
The tragedy in Uttarakhand is beyond words. Hundreds have died, thousands are still missing and according to UN report over 11000 may be dead. Alaknanda, Mandakini and Bhagirathi, the daughters of Himalayas, our very sacred rivers broke their banks, washed away houses, buildings, temples and thousands of human beings. Entire Kedarnath village, except the holy temple of Kedarnath was wiped away. Today the temple looks like a relic. Still some bodies must be rotting under the debris. A day or two before the tragedy weathermen had warned the state government of extremely heavy rains. Probably weather Gods were angry with us. Over three lakh pilgrims were on their way to Char-Dham Yatra, a usual occurrence in Uttarakhand in June. This gruesome tragedy could have been at least contained if some steps had been taken to stop pilgrims, warning them not to travel, huddling them to safety. The first question that comes to our mind is that who was accountable for this? Some body or some group has to be responsible. Here comes the question of accountability and in this country where values are not respected none is going to accept it. In our country systems exist on paper only and during emergency they collapse, or rarely work. In the last 65 years of our independence it appears we have learnt nothing. We may be launching satellites to the moon, but cannot save our own countrymen. On the one hand thousands of trapped pilgrims are waiting for food, are thirsty, beg for drinking water, have no blankets in chilling weather and on the other over 300 trucks laden with food, biscuits, water bottles and blankets are waiting for days together to reach various camps. A deep lethargy, indiscipline greed and irresponsibility have taken over us. Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru, on the eve of 15th August 1947 thundered in his famous address to the nation that “long time ago we made a tryst with destiny and now the time has come to redeem our pledge. At the stroke of the midnight hour when the world sleeps India will awaken to life and when the soul of the nation finds utterance”.

Can we not ask one question to ourselves? Where is that soul and where is that awakening? In that dance of death in Uttarakhand many pilgrims have been looted, robbed and corpses have been disfigured to steal a few grams of gold. Is this our tryst with our destiny? Compare this with Japan where atomic power plant was completely damaged by tsunami. It was a huge national disaster. Hundreds were washed away, Entire township collapsed like a pack of cards. But not a single incidence of looting or theft was reported. People formed orderly queues quietly to gather help. Each one of the Japanese was doing his best to be accountable in that disaster. Here some are questioned, few are held accountable, and nobody is punished. There is no accountability-neither to the nation nor to the conscience. During elections politicians woo voters, like the directors during a general meeting of shareholders. Once done, forgotten for a year. Do anything, nothing will happen, if you have same powerful friends at the right places.

What we lack is sensitivity, and national character. Even the so called educated during traffic jams will break traffic laws to rush ahead, causing more traffic jams. There is no discipline, no respect for order. For everything to run in order we require a long danda. Our politicians have not taught us patriotism they demand blind loyalty. Power is their sole aim. We have forgotten that this country is a huge organisation or company and every citizen is its valued member . None think that he is responsible/accountable to the motherland. If you expect your country to give you education, food, clothing, employment and all sort of facilities don’t we owe anything to it? We want our fundamental rights, privileges, legal help but what about our responsibilities? Mere authority without any accountability/ responsibility is the privilege of a harlot. We have degenerated ourselves to this dismal level.

After seeing a large number of relatives, grand sire Bhishma and friends, assembled at kurukshetra, Arjuna’s limbs became languid and body started trembling. The famed Gandiwa started slipping from Arjuna’s powerful hands. Dharmaraja had entered kurukshetra war because of the total commitment of Arjuna & Bheema. Arjuna wavered; Lord Krishna made him aware of his duty, his commitment and accountability. He chastised him with severe words. Don’t be an eunuch Arjuna, be steadfast. You scorcher of foes arise, give an excellent account of your power and forget your petty-heartedness. We require today leader like Lord Krishna and followers like Arjuna totally committed, never compromising on accountability/ responsibility. The last words of Socrates show us how when death was staring at his face – he fulfilled his responsibility. To his close friend, before drinking deadly poison, Socrates said, “Crito, we owe a cock to Asclepius. Do pay it. Don’t forget it” when as a nation we become as accountable as Socrates we shall rise to dizzy heights.

My mind goes back to the great founder of the Maratha Empire Chhatrapati Shivaji and his clear vision. Prataprao Gujar, his brave and loyal general allowed Bahlol Khan, a sworn enemy of Marathas to escape when he had surrendered totally and shown white flags. Prataprao in a moment of generosity exceeded his limits and allowed Bahlol Khan and his thirsty army to quench their extreme thirst and to escape. Shivaji Maharaj was not amused. He won’t have any of such nonsense. When he came to know of Prataprao’s blunder he thundered in his letter “On whose permission did you allow Bahol Khan to go? Didn’t you know that the same Khan had killed our army and devastated our country? You are accountable for this blunder. Go at once and catch Khan or don’t show me yourself’. Prataprao understood his grave mistake and attacked with his handful of brave soldiers and died. When twin towers fell in New York, the Mayor of New-York camped at that site and directed all operations. Here we come by helicopter, survey and retreat. That is the only duty we perform. It is better to be a good, effective and accountable citizen and fulfill one’s obligations than to have hollow name and power.

When we glance at our independence movement we see beacon lights in Dadabhai Naoroji, Gopal Krishna Gokhale, Bal Gangadar Tilak and Mahatma Gandhi etc. when the whole of India was dancing wildly in independence Celebration, Gandhiji went on fast unto death to restore peace in Bengal at Naokhali. He held himself accountable and responsible for brutal communal killing and went in the midst of violent killing mobs and restored order. Where are such leaders today and where are such loyal followers of Gandhiji? There are two types in this world, those who expect politician to produce responsible, alert, selfless and disciplined citizens and others who do practice these virtues themselves. Those who rely upon politicians, government are indulging in pipe-dream. Reform, accountability start with us let us remember.

In the word of Malcome Muggeridge a great thinker, never was any generation of men, more advantageously placed to attain a grand dream fulfilled but we with seeming deliberation took opposite course towards destruction instead of creativity and light. The persistent incompetence and unaccountability of leaders in all fields including Social, Political, and Financial, has brought us to this dismal state. Our finest spiritual heritage has sunk abysmally. Our own Karma is responsible for them.

If we decide on it we can certainly do it. If we punish vices severely and reward virtues generously that will be the first step towards achieving it.

Let us get committed. Let us be patriotic again and not self-centered.

There is a beautiful…………(Shloka) in Sanskrit. Let me quote it here.

“Those who sleep their luck also sleeps. Those who sit their luck sits. Those who stand their luck stand with them and those who walk their luck too walks with them.
Keep walking, keep making sincere efforts.

Beneficial Owner–The debate continues

fiogf49gjkf0d
The meaning of ‘beneficial owner’ has generated unending debate. The issue is not settled even after years of debate and discussion, OECD commentary changes2 and the growing volume of case law in various countries3 .

With this in mind, it is interesting to note the Bombay High Court’s recent dismissal of the Revenue’s appeal in the case of DIT vs. Universal International Music BV4 on the issue involving beneficial ownership of royalty payment. The question of law raised before the High Court was whether on the facts and circumstances of the case and in law, the Tribunal was correct in holding that the Dutch company (Universal International Music BV) is the ‘beneficial owner’ of the royalty received from the Indian Company (Universal Music India Private Ltd) and therefore entitled to be taxed at a rate of 10 % as per the Tax Treaty?

The facts of this case are not fully clear because as noted by the Tribunal in its Order, the taxpayer did not furnish all the information before the tax inspector. 5 However, it is clear that, during the year, the taxpayer-a company incorporated in the Netherlandsreceived a royalty from the Indian company(Universal Music India Private Ltd). The Universal Music Group is known as one of the largest music publishing groups in the world,with global group headquarters in USA. According to its business model, the group companies enter into contracts with singers, performers,etc. Such companies are known as repertoire companies.The repertoire companies license these rights to other group companies outside their home territories for its commercial exploitation.Accordingly, Universal Music India Pvt. Ltd. was granted rights of exploitation in India, with the result that the Indian Company paid royalties to the Dutch company on acquired licences of musical tracks.

As mentioned, the taxpayer did not file before the tax inspector copies of the agreement between the taxpayer and repertoire companies and did not furnish information of the persons from whom the taxpayer had acquired the musical rights.The Assessing Officer therefore held that the taxpayer was not the ‘beneficial owner’ of the royalty but was merely a collecting agent of the repertoire companies.The Assessing Officer deniedthe taxpayerthe benefit of the reduced rate of withholding tax available under Article 12 of the tax treaty and taxed the royalty at the maximum rate (30 %). The CIT(A) and the ITAT decided the appeal in favour of the taxpayer6.

The High Court decided the appeal in favour of the taxpayer on following basis:

1. The CIT(A) and the Tribunal arrived at the finding of fact on the basis of the certificate from revenue authorities in the Netherlands certifying that the taxpayer was a ‘beneficial owner’ of the royalty received in respect of musical tracks given to Universal Music India Pvt. Ltd.

2. CBDT Circular No.789 dated 13-04-20007, which states that the certificate from the revenue authorities is sufficient evidence of beneficial ownership.

3. The Revenue was not able show anything on record to contradict the finding of fact arrived at by the CIT(A) and the Tribunal that the taxpayer is the ‘beneficial owner’ of the royalty received on musical tracks given to Universal Music Private Limited.

Apparently, there was no one to argue the Revenue’s appeal before the High Court. Otherwise, arguments might have been placed that, firstly, in the absence of agreement, it could not be ascertained as to whether the Dutch company acted or did not act as an ‘agent’ or ‘nominee’ of other group companies or was a ‘conduit’ between one of the group companies and the Indian company. Therefore, on the given facts,the Tribunal could not have reached the legal finding which it did reach. Secondly, the certificate of beneficial ownership furnished by the taxpayer is the interpretation arrived at by the Netherlands authorities. Indian Courts may not necessarily agree with the interpretation of the Netherlands authorities. Thirdly, Circular 789 specifically deals with the India-Mauritius tax treaty. It cannot be applied to India-Netherlands tax treaty. Fourthly and most importantly, the Tax Residency Certificate (TRC), which is subject matter of Circular 789 relied upon by the Court, has nothing to do with the beneficial ownership.

The same view on the relationship of the TRC to beneficial ownership was expressed in a different context by the Indian Finance minister Mr. P. Chidambaram. On the proposed insertion of section 90A(5)8 he stated that “all that the Section 90A(4) intends to say is, if you produce a TRC that is a complete answer to your status as a resident. But whether you are the beneficial owner is a separate issue. The TRC certifies that you are a resident. It does not certify you are a beneficial owner.”9 His statement only supports the fact that the reliance placed by the High Court on the TRC to decide the beneficial owner issue is misplaced.

In context, one cannot avoid the feeling that the High Court and the Tribunal lost a valuable opportunity to provide guidance as to the meaning of ‘beneficial owner’. In other words, this judgment highlights the fact that this concept has not received the attention of the experts in India as much as it has received outside India.

This Article proposes to discuss the meaning of theexpression ‘beneficial owner’ in light of the revised draft guidelines on ‘beneficial owner’ released by the OECD last year10 and position of the Indian law on ‘beneficial owner’. However, it might be worthwhile first to discuss other related aspects of this concept.

I. Background

The term ‘beneficial owner’ is found in the Double Taxation Avoidance Agreements (DTAAs) in Articles 10, 11 and 12 on interest, dividend and royalty payments respectively. These tax treaty articles provide for withholding tax at the reduced rate, if the recipient is a ‘beneficial owner’ of the dividends, interest or royalties and is a resident of the state which is a party to the DTAA. It may be mentioned that the concept of ‘beneficial owner’ was introduced in the tax treaties as a countermeasure against treaty shopping11 to confine bargaining only to the contracting states which were intended to benefit from the treaty. 12

J David, B Oliver et al have noted that it was Article III of the 1945 United Kingdom-United States tax convention which referred to beneficial ownership, prior to the usage of the term by the OECD13. The OECD used it for the first time in the Model Convention in 1977. This term is neither defined in the OECD Model Convention nor in any of the Indian tax treaties. The term is not used by civil law countries but is used in many common law countries.14 In fact, Indian income tax law and other laws also use the term ‘beneficial owner’. Therefore, one would be tempted to apply the meaning of ‘beneficial owner’, as explained in the Indian domestic law, to the Indian tax treaties, when it is not defined in the tax treaty. However, it is now widely accepted that this term should be given international fiscal meaning and not domestic law meaning. There are several reasons for coming to this conclusion. These reasons are discussed in the subsequent paragraphs:

II. Meaning of ‘beneficial owner’-what is the context?

The expression ‘beneficial owner’ is not defined in the tax treaties. When a particular term is not defined in a tax treaty, Article 3(2)15 of both the OECD and UN Model treaties requires that the domestic law meaning may be adopted unless the context otherwise requires. Therefore, before applying the domestic law meaning, one has to conclude that the context does not otherwise require adopting a meaning other than the meaning given in the domestic law. The basic question-here is:what is the context for ‘beneficial owner’? The OECD commentary also states that the term “beneficial owner” is not used in a narrow technical sense, rather, it should be understood in its context and in light of the object and purposes of the Convention, including avoiding double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion and avoidance.16 This raises a further question, as to what extent OECD commentary is relevant for interpreting tax treaty? Another broader question is, as to how text treaties are to be interpreted?

Tax treaties are to be interpreted according to the Article 3117 and Article 3218 of the Vienna Convention of Tax Treaties, 1969. Article 31(1)requires that atreaty shall be interpreted in ‘good faith’ (pacta sunt servanda) in its context and in light of its object and purpose.The obvious object and purpose of the tax treaty is to avoid double taxation and to counter treaty shopping. To achieve these objectives, it is necessary that a meaning accepted by all, that is, international autonomous meaning, should be given. Further, the meaning derived from the OECD material, including OECD documents considered at the time of writing commentary, is the special meaning referred in the Ar-ticle 31(4)19. This meaning is also articulated in the OECD commentaries, which call for adoption of international meaningof this term. It may be appreciated that OECD material can also be used as supplementary means of interpretation of tax treaty.20 Thus, it can be concluded by following above approaches that an international fiscal meaning is to be used for interpreting the term ‘beneficial owner’. This position is affirmed again by the OECD in the revised discussion draft on ‘beneficial owner’, in which references to the domestic law mean-ing of beneficial owner, which were appearing in the first draft were deleted.21 It may be interesting to note that the Court of Appeal in the Indofood decision has also stated that, “the term ‘beneficial owner’ is to be given international fiscal meaning not derived from the domestic laws of the contracting states.”22

Further, on examination of the object and purpose of the tax treaty, it can be seen that the treaty does not use the general term ‘owner’ but uses the specific term ‘beneficial owner’. Therefore, the treaty intends to give the benefit of withholding tax at the reduced rate only to the person who can be loosely described as a ‘final’ owner of income. The concept of ‘final owner of income’ can be elaborated with the help of attributes of ownership of income. Income ownership has several attributes, such as the right to possess, use or manage income, the power to alienate and ability to consume waste or destroy, the risk of depreciation and hope of appreciation.23 It is possible to split these attributes among different persons by entering into a legal or contractual arrangement to avail benefit of the favourable treaty without losing ownership of income. Therefore, the ‘beneficial owner’ is the one which has more attributes of ownership of income than others. This explanation is described by Charl Du Toit as ‘beneficial owner is the person whose ownership attributes outweigh those of any other person’.24 Considering these aspects,the domestic law meaning of the ‘beneficial owner’ is not relevant in interpretation of this concept; instead, autonomous fiscal meaning is to be given.

As mentioned, the OECD revised draft implicitly accepts this position by deleting references to resorting to domestic law for its interpretation. However, it needs to clearly mention the adoption of international fiscal meaning in the Commentary.

III.    Meaning of ‘beneficial owner’

As mentioned, the term ‘beneficial owner’ historically under common law had the objective of distinguishing the concept of ‘legal ownership’ for trust law purposes, which referred to the formal attributes of trustee ownership, from beneficial ownership, which was held by the ‘true’ beneficiaries, who could enforce their rights against third parties.25

The OECD Commentary of 1977 defined ‘beneficial owner’ in a negative manner by denying treaty benefits to ‘agents’ and ‘nominees’. It stated in 2003 that normally a ‘conduit company’ will not be regarded as a ‘beneficial owner’. The Commentary did not decline tax treaty benefits to ‘conduit companies’ in all the cases. Because as Baker has pointed out, it is perfectly possible in certain cases that intermediary holding company can be regarded as a ‘beneficial owner’.

26    However, ‘beneficial owner’ was not defined in a positive manner and its meaning continued to remain uncertain.

Several Court decisions deciding this issue one way or the other only added to the uncertainty and did not conclusively resolve the issue. For example, in one of the most quoted decisions, Indofood,27 the issue before the Court was not related to tax28 . The tax issue was hypothetical and incidental29. The case was argued by lawyers and heard by judges, who both were not expert in tax matters30. The Court of Appeal in Indofood held that, as shown by the commentaries and observations, the concept of beneficial ownership is incompatible with that of the formal owner who does not have the full privilege to directly benefit from the income.31 This meaning is based on the Indonesian domestic Circular on Beneficial Owner.32 Although the decision states that international fiscal meaning should be adopted, it has decided the appeal based on elements of Indonesian domestic law.33

The Canadian Prevost34 decision is criticised as a narrow legalistic interpretation of beneficial ownership35. It did not consider substance of the arrangement. Whereas, in the case of Bank of Scotland36, the Court applied anti-abuse doctrine and found that the arrangement was entered into for the sole purpose of obtaining treaty benefits37. Strictly speaking, this decision does not consider the attributes of ‘beneficial owner’ for deciding the case. The more recent decision of Velcro38 follows the approach adopted by the Court in Prevost. There are several other decisions on ‘beneficial owner’; however, it is difficult to arrive at a common meaning of the term after considering all the judgments.

Experts and scholars are also not unanimous in their views on beneficial ownership. According to Vogel, a ‘beneficial owner’ is one who is free to decide (1) whether or not the capital or other assets should be used or made available for use of others or (2) on how the yields therefrom should be used or (3) both39. Danon is of the view that for deciding beneficial ownership, legal, economic and factual control over use of income should be decisive over the element of enjoyment of income and ownership attributes. He also believes thatthis issue should be examined on the basis of the substance-over-form approach40. For Charl du Toit, the beneficial owner is the person, whose ownership attributes outweighs those of any other person.41

Jurisdictions such as China have attempted to provide guidance on this vexed concept.42 A Chinese Circular43 essentially defines ‘beneficial owner’ as one who meets all the following four conditions:(1) a person has the right to own or dispose of the income and rights or property in the income; (2) a person who is usually engaged in a substantial business operation; (3) a person who is not an agent; and(4) a person who is not a conduit company.44

However, despite the opinions of experts and several court decisions, the meaning of beneficial owner has remained elusive.

IV. OECD meaning-revised discussion draft

The OECD released a revised discussion draft on October 19 2012. The OECD, after making additions and deletions to the first draft, arrived at the revised draft para 12.4 on meaning of ‘beneficial owner’ as below:

12.4 In these various examples (agent, nominee, conduit company acting as a fiduciary or administrator), the recipient of the dividend is not the “beneficial owner” because that recipient’s right to use and enjoy the dividend is constrained by a contractual or legal obligation to pass on the payment received to another person. Such an obligation will normally derive from relevant legal documents but may also be found to exist on the basis of facts and circumstances showing that, in substance, the recipient clearly does not have the right to use and enjoy the dividend unconstrained by a contractual or legal obligation to pass on the payment received to another person. This type of obligation must be related to the payment received; it would therefore not include contractual or legal obligations unrelated to the payment received even if those obligations could effectively result in the recipient using the payment received to satisfy those obligations. Examples of such unrelated obligations are those unrelated obligations that the recipient may have as a debtor or as a party to financial transactions or typical distribution obligations of pension schemes and of collective investment vehicles entitled to treaty benefits under the principles of paragraphs 6.8 to 6.34 of the Commentary on Article 1. Where the recipient of a dividend does have the right to use and enjoy the dividend unconstrained by a contractual or legal obligation to pass on the payment received to another person, the recipient is the “beneficial owner” of that dividend. It should also be noted that Article 10 refers to the beneficial owner of a dividend as opposed to the owner of the shares, which may be different in some cases.

The OECD in the revised draft has again given a negative definition of ‘beneficial owner’. However despite doing so, it has furnished an almost acceptable work. The revised draft states that the recipient of the dividend is not the “beneficial owner”, when the recipient’s right to use and enjoy the dividend is constrained by a contractual or legal obligation to pass on the received payment to another person. It has further clarified that the obligation can normally be ascertained from the legal documents and facts and circumstances, which show in substance that recipient does not have right to enjoy or use income unconstrained by obligation to pass on the payment.

Secondly, the obligation must relate to the payment received. Therefore, it would not include contractual or legal obligations unrelated to the payment received even if those obligations could effectively result in the recipient using the received payment to satisfy those obligations.

The OECD has placed the comments received on the discussion draft on its website. It might be interesting to peruse some of these comments. Avellum partners in their comments have stated that a fiduciary or administrator of income may be considered as a beneficial owner of such income, provided there is sound commercial reason for establishment of such entity. For example, entities established for public issuance of securities traded on recognised stock exchanges could be beneficial owners of income provided that operation of their establishment was required for access to the stock exchange for legal or regulatory considerations and not merely for tax economy purposes.46

Van Bladel has argued that to be a beneficial owner, the owner of an asset should also be its legal owner. Besides being a legal owner, it also should have sufficient degree of economic ownership. According to which,a legal owner will not be able to fully recover the value of its asset. In his opinion, this can be measured by the solvency rules of Basel II and Basel III, whereby, no beneficial ownership can be assumed if there is no solvency requirement. According to him, beneficial ownership can be assumed if there is a solvency requirement of 1.6 %, 8 % or 100 %. However, beneficial ownership will be debatable in the case of 0 % solvency.47

Regarding ‘facts and circumstances’ to be considered for ascertaining as to whether there is any contractual obligation or not, it is suggested that factors such as close dates of receipt and payments, similar amounts of receipt and payment, similar subject matter or same reference asset or currency,48 same counterparty of transactions, same or similar interest or rate of return, same duration of transactions, same amount or quantum of contracts etc should be considered.49 It is suggested further that the contractual obligation must exist before the receipt of payment and must be triggered only on receipt.50 Moreover, conduct and statements of the parties also should be taken in to account while considering ‘facts and circumstances’.51 As far as use of the word ‘substance’ is concerned, it is suggested that, it should be seen as ‘economic substance’ used in the anti-avoidance doctrine.52 It should also be examined as to whether recipient has gained risk and control over the payment.53

Maximum numbers of the comments are received on the use of word ‘related’ and ‘unrelated’. The commentators have found these words to be unclear and thus giving uncertainty to the proposed explanation of the concept. However, Vaan Raad in his comments has aptly explained these words by giving examples. He has stated that, normally a person (individual or company) receiving income also will have an obligation to make payments. For example, a salaried person may have contractual obligation to pay house rent. A bank receiving interest income on money lent by it is under contractual obligation to pay interest on money deposited with it. However, these obligations are independent of any particular receipt. This would be different if any particular receipt is earmarked by an obligation based on law or contract to be forwarded to another person.54

This can also be explained with the help of the concept of ‘diversion of income by overriding title’. The Indian Supreme Court explained this concept by holding that, Where by the obligation income is diverted before it reaches the assessee, it is deductible (being income diverted by overriding title) ; but where the income is required to be applied to discharge an obligation after such income reaches the assessee, the same consequence, in law does not follow.55 (Words in the bracket are added). If this concept is applied to the ‘beneficial owner’, then it can be said that the recipient is not a ‘beneficial owner’ whose income is diverted because of the overriding (either legal or contractual) title. The payment made in consequence to such overriding title would be considered as a ‘related’ payment, whereas the payments of application of income would be considered as ‘unrelated’ payment.

The concerns of all would be adequately addressed if the OECD incorporated an explanation on ‘related’ and ‘unrelated’ payments on the above lines in its final version.

If we were to revisit the case law discussed here in light of the proposed clarification in the revised discussion draft, it may be seen that the decision of Indofood will hold good. However, the decision in the case of Bank of Scotland could generate discussion. This is because, the UK company RBS had already made upfront payment to a US company on acquisition of usufruct of shares of French subsidiary. Therefore, there was no legal or contractual obligation on RBS to make payment to the US company from receipt of dividend. Secondly, as mentioned earlier, this decision is rendered by following the doctrine of anti-avoidance and not considering attributes of beneficial ownership. In this case, beneficial-ownership test was not applied independently of the ‘abuse of law’ concept, but rather as a consequence of ‘abuse of law’ analysis.56 Further, RBS cannot be considered as an ‘agent ‘or ‘nominee’ or ‘conduit company’ of the US parent company. Yet, it is clear from the facts that, RBS cannot be considered ‘beneficial owner’ of the dividend.

Similarly, in Prevost shareholders had decided by agreement to distribute 80 % of profit. Other important facts of Prevost are that, the holding company in the Netherlands had minimum substance, and the directors in holding company and in the Canadian company were the same. Secondly, the intermediary company had only two shareholders; namely, Henleys and Volvo. Therefore, in substance, there is no difference between the company and shareholders, when shareholders had agreed to act in a particular way. Although the company is a different legal entity, it acts only according to the wishes of the shareholders. In these circumstances, the company is bound to follow the shareholder’s agreement. However, the Canadian court has not seen the facts this way. Probably because according to it, as expressed in the decision of Velcro, piercing of the corporate veil should be done as a the last resort.57

In Velcro 90 % of royalties were to be paid to the parent company within 30 days. The Canadian Court decided after elaborately discussing as to how the intermediary company was in ‘possession’, ‘use’ ‘risk’ and ‘control’of the payments and how it cannot be regarded as ‘agent’ or‘nominee’ or ‘conduit company’. Legally speaking, it is difficult to disagree with both the decisions. These decisions are also compatible with the revised draft as recipients’ right to use or enjoy is not constrained by obligation related to receipt. Most of the scholars and experts across the world find these decisions acceptable by following the legal approach. However, the ‘substance’ of the matter is quite different in both the cases.

This discussion highlights the apparent shortcoming of the revised draft as it does not explicitly address substance-over-form aspect, which is necessary to address the situation involving some of the tax–avoidance arrangements involving ‘beneficial owner’. The OECD addresses this aspect in para 12.4by stating that “Such an obligation will normally derive from relevant legal documents but may also be found to exist on the basis of facts and circumstances showing that, in substance, the recipient clearly does not have the right to use and enjoy the dividend unconstrained by a contractual or legal obligation to pass on the payment received to another person”.

Draft para 12.5 permits application of other approaches to counter anti-avoidance by stating that, “whilst the concept of “beneficial owner” deals with some forms of tax avoidance (i.e. those involving the interposition of a recipient who is obliged to pass on the dividend to someone else), it does not deal with other cases of treaty shopping and must not, therefore, be considered as restricting in any way the application of other approaches to addressing such cases.” However, it might be good if the OECD elaborates on such aspect for clarity and certainty.

V. India’s Law

Beneficial ownership is not a new concept in Indian law. It is used in the Income tax Act, 196158 and is also used in several non-tax laws such as the Companies Act 1956, Depositories Act 1996, Indian Trusts Act 1982 and Transfer of Property Act 1882.59

It may be noted thatthe concept of ‘beneficial owner’ in treaties is used with reference to the ownership of income and not with respect to the ownership of the underlying asset.60 Ownership of the underlying asset is not relevant for determining whether a person is a beneficial owner of income or not. However, Indian income tax law uses this concept with relation to the beneficial ownership of asset. Therefore, the majority of the disputes relate to issues in which formal legal ownership was not vested with the person because legal title was not yet registered in the official records in its name. In these circumstances, Court had to decide the dispute as to whether such person could be held as a beneficial owner or not for attributing income u/s. 2(22)(e) or granting depreciation or for taxing capital gain u/s. 2(45A).

The factors on which a person can be considered as ‘beneficial owner’ of the asset are different than whether a person can be considered as‘beneficial owner’ of income. Therefore, Indian domestic law is of no help in understanding the domestic law meaning of ‘beneficial owner’ of income. This is notwithstanding the position that the domestic law is not relevant for ascertaining the treaty meaning of ‘beneficial owner’.

A striking consequence emerges that a ‘beneficial owner’ may not be taxable under Indian tax treaties. This is because, presently, Indian income tax law u/s. 9 attributes income (interest and royalty for the purpose of beneficial ownership) to the non-resident recipient. However, the ‘beneficial owner’ remains out of the legal purview for its taxability. This can be explained with an example. Let us assume that entity X, resident of country ‘A’, advances a loan to an Indian entity through a conduit company, which is a resident of Country ‘B’, to access the more favourable India-Country B tax treaty. However, domestic law taxes interest payable by Indian residents to a conduit company but does not tax interest payable by conduit company to entity X in country A. As domestic law does not tax the beneficial owner, Indian tax authorities may not be in a position to invoke the India-Country ‘A’ tax treaty,with the result that India may have to tax only a conduit company and not the ‘beneficial owner’ because it is not taxable under domestic law. However, this position would work favourably for the taxpayer till the Income-tax Act is amended.


VI. India’s Tax Treaties

Most Indian tax treaties use the concept of beneficial owner to grant the benefit of reduced withholding taxes.61 Only the India-Australia tax treaty uses the expression ‘beneficial entitlement’. It is clear from the term ‘beneficial entitlement’ that it is a somewhat different concept than ‘beneficial owner’. The term ‘beneficial entitlement’ is concerned with the‘right to use and enjoy’ income and not concerned with its ownership.

Indian judicial decisions on beneficial ownership under domestic Income Tax law mainly pertain to beneficial ownership of shares and pertain to the ownership of an asset for eligibility of depreciation.In International taxation, the decisions are with respect to beneficial ownership of shares for taxing capital gains.62 In fact, Brian Arnold has questioned the application of the ‘beneficial ownership’ concept in the Indian cases on international taxation, when such a provision does not exist in the Article 13 of the tax treaty on Capital Gains.63

With regard to the nature of the Indian judicial decisions on beneficial ownership, Universal international Music BV was probably the first case in India, in which the issue of beneficial ownership was involved as provided in the tax treaty. The Courts had an opportunity to provide guidance on this difficult issue. However, that was not to be.

This article first appeared in the June, 2013 issue of Tax Planning International Review, published by Bloomberg BNA.


1 Commissioner of Income Tax.Indian Revenue Service, India. Views expressed in the article are personal.

2 1977,2003 and 2010 version of the OECD commentary on Model Convention.

3 i) Royal Dutch Petroleum case, case no 28638 reported in BNB 1994/217, ii) Swiss case, Re vs. SA, case no JAAC65.86 of 28th February 2001, published with an unofficial translation in (2001) 4 ITLR 191, iii) Indofood International Finance Ltd vs. JP Morgan Chase Bank NA 2nd March 2006, (2006) 8 ITLR 653, iv) French Conseild’Etat in the Bank of Scotland case, Case No.283314, 29th December 2006, published with unofficial translation in (2006) 9 ITLR 683, v) Prevost vs. R (2008) 10 ITLR 736(Tax Court Canada) 7 vi) Real Madrid FC vs. OficinaNacional de Inspection ,18th July 2006, Westlaw Aranzadi JUR/2006/204307 vii) Velcro Canada vs. Her Majesty the Queen 2012 TCC 57Viii) Counseil d’ Etat, 13th October 1999, Case no 191191, SA Diebold Courtage.

4 ITA 1464 of 2011 dated 08.02.2013;(2013) 214 Taxman 19 (Bombay).

5 Para 5, Additional Director of Income Tax vs. Universal International Music BV (2011) 141 TTJ (Mumbai) 364.

6 Additional Director of Income Tax vs. Universal International Music BV (2011) 141 TTJ (Mumbai) 364.

7 Relevant part of the Circular 789 reads as,”Doubts have been raised regarding the taxation of dividends in the hands of investors from Mauritius. It is hereby clarified that wherever a Certificate of Residence is issued by the Mauritian Authorities, such Certificate will constitute sufficient evidence for accepting the status of residence as well as beneficial ownership for applying the DTAC accordingly.

3.    The test of residence mentioned above would also apply in respect of income from capital gains on sale of shares. Accordingly, FIIs, etc., which are resident in Mauritius would not be taxable in India on income from capital gains arising in India on sale of shares as per paragraph 4 of article 13.”

8 Proposed 90A(5) read as, “(5) The certificate of being a resident in a specified territory outside India referred to in s/s. (4), shall be necessary but not a sufficient condition for claiming any relief under the agreement referred to therein.” This was changed in the Finance Act 2013 as “(5) The assessee referred to in s/s. (4) shall also provide such other documents and information, as may be prescribed.” 9Reported in the ‘Hindu’,2nd March 2013.

10 “Clarification of the meaning of “Beneficial Owner” in the OECD model tax convention”, Discussion Draft, 29th April 2011, released by the OECD.

11 Para 14, Philip Baker, Annex to Progress Report of Subcommittee on Improper Use of Tax Treaties: Beneficial Ownership,http://www. un.org/esa/ffd/tax/fourth session/EC18_2008_CRP2_Add1.pdf.

12 Jinyan    Li, “Beneficial Ownership in Tax Treaties: Judicial

Interpretation and the case for clarity”, Tax polymath: a life in

international taxation: essays in honour of John F. Avery Jones. –

Amsterdam : IBFD, (2010 ) p. 187-210.

13 J David B Oliver, Jerome B Libin, Stef van Weeghel and Charl du Toit, ‘Beneficial Ownership’ Bulletin for International Taxation, vol 54 (2000)no 7, pp 310-325.

14 Id.

15    Article 3(2) – “As regards the application of the Convention at any time by a Contracting State, any term not defined therein shall, unless the context otherwise requires, have the meaning that it has at that time under the law of that State for the purposes of the taxes to which the Convention applies, any meaning under the applicable tax laws of that State prevailing over a meaning given to the term under other laws of that State.”

16    Para 12.1, Commentary on OECD MC, OECD

17Article 31of Vienna Convention of Tax Treaties,1969 General rule of interpretation

1.    A treaty shall be interpreted in good faith in accordance with the ordinary meaning to be given to the terms of the treaty in their context and in the light of its object and purpose.

2.    The context for the purpose of the interpretation of a treaty shall comprise, in addition to the text, including its preamble and annexes:

(a)    any agreement relating to the treaty which was made between all the parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty;
(b)    any instrument which was made by one or more parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty and accepted by the other parties as an instrument related to the treaty.

3.    There shall be taken into account, together with the context:
(a)    any subsequent agreement between the parties regarding the interpretation of the treaty or the application of its provisions;
(b)    any subsequent practice in the application of the treaty which establishes the agreement of the parties regarding its interpretation;

(c)    any relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations between the parties.

4.    A special meaning shall be given to a term if it is established that the parties so intended.

18 Article 32 Supplementary means of interpretation Recourse may be had to supplementary means of interpretation, including the preparatory work of the treaty and the circumstances of its conclusion, in order to confirm the meaning resulting from the application of article 31, or to determine the meaning when the interpretation according to article 31:

(a)    leaves the meaning ambiguous or obscure; or

(b)    leads to a result which is manifestly absurd or unreasonable.

19 Id, Note 13, p-318

20Frank Engelen, ‘Interpretation of Tax Treaties under International Law,’ IBFD, Amsterdam (2004) p- 439

21  Para 12.4, “Clarification of the meaning of “Beneficial Owner” in the OECD model tax convention”, Revised Discussion Draft, 19th October 2012, released by the OECD

22 Id, Para 46, Note 3

23 Id, Note 13,p-319

24 Charl du Toit, “The evolution of the term “Beneficial Ownership” in relation to international taxation over the past 45 years”, Bulletin for International Taxation, Vol 64 (2010) no 10, pp 500-509

25 Leonardo Freitas de Moraes e Castro, “Brazil’s Anti-treaty Shopping Measures: Current and Future Developments regarding Beneficial Ownership and Limitation on Benefits Clauses in Tax Treaties”, Bulletin for International Taxation, Vol 65(2011) No 12, pp 662-673, p 667

26 Id, Note 25. Such companies could be common collective finance vehicle

27 Id, Note 3, The Facts of the Indofood case: J P Morgan Chase, acting as a trustee for the investors, invested in bonds issued by the Indonesian company-Indofood-through a Mauritian company, with a back-to back loan arrangement. Indofood applied a withholding tax rate of 10 % in accordance with the Indonesia-Mauritius tax treaty as against the normal rate of 20 %. Subsequently, the Indonesian Government terminated the Indonesia- Mauritius tax treaty wef. 1st January 2005. With the result that due to the increase in the withholding tax rate and because of payment of interest at higher rate, the Indonesian company wanted to redeem bonds issued to the Mauritian company. However, the trustees (J P Morgan Chase) of the bondholders’ did not want the redemption of bonds. Trustees, according to one condition of the contract, wanted the Indonesian company to take ‘reasonable measures’ in terms of interposing the Netherlands company (New Co) between Indofood and the Bondholders to access another beneficial tax treaty, ie Indonesia-Netherlands Tax Treaty. The UK Court had to decide whether the interposing of the Netherlands company amounted to a ‘reasonable measure’ or not. The UK High Court held that, New Co would be the beneficial owner of interest whereas the Court of Appeal decided that New Co could not be beneficial owner of interest for the purposes of the Indonesia-Netherlands Tax Treaty.

28 Adolfo Martin Jimenez, “Beneficial Ownership: Current Trends”, World Tax Journal, vol 2(2010) no 1, pp 35- 63

29 Philip LaromaJezzi, “Concept of Beneficial ownership in Indofood and Prevost car decisions”, Bulletin for International Taxation, vol 64(May 2010) no 5, pp 253-257, p-256 30Id, p-254

31 Id, Note 3, para 46

32 Id Note 12

33 Id, Note 25

34 Id, Note 3, The facts of the Prevost case: Henly’s- a company resident in the UK and, Volvo, a company resident in Sweden, invested in Prevost Canada through a company formed by them in the the Netherlands, namely Prevost Netherlands. Prevost Canada was a 100 percent subsidiary of Prevost Netherlands. Shareholders of Prevost Netherlands by way of contract agreed that Prevost Netherlands would distribute 80 percent of its profit to shareholders. Other relevant facts were: the substance of Netherlands company was the minimum (no office, no employees) required to qualify as a resident of the Netherlands and directors of the Netherlands company were also the directors of the Canadian subsidiary. The Canadian tax court and the Canadian Federal Court of Appeal both decided that Prevost Netherlands was the beneficial owner of the dividend received form Prevost Canada. They held that Prevost Netherlands was the beneficial owner as there was no predetermined flow of funds passing through Prevost Netherlands and it was not bound by the agreement among its shareholders.

35Id, Note 28

36 No. 283314, 29th December 2006, Ministre de Economi, des Finances et de L Industrie vs. Societe Bank of Scotland (2006) 9 ITLR 1. The facts of the case: the US parent company sold to a UK company (Royal Bank of Scotland-RBS), usufruct of shares of its fully owned French subsidiary. According to the terms of the contract, consideration paid by RBS to acquire usufruct would be recovered by RBS in form of a pre-determined dividend paid by the French subsidiary. The US parent company guaranteed RBS compensation, in case of failure of the French subsidiary to pay the dividend. The US parent had also agreed to buy back shares of the French subsidiary if the dividend did not reach RBS in a pre-determined manner. French tax authorities did not consider RBS a beneficial owner. The Court of Appeals in Paris decided in favour of the taxpayer. However, Counseil de Etat ruled that RBS was not a beneficial owner. The Court held that this arrangement was done to hide the real transaction of the loan, which would be repaid in the form of dividends from the French Subsidiary. The Court observed that the main purpose of the arrangement was to access the France-UK tax treaty to obtain refund of tax credit on taxes paid on dividend income received by RBS.(Avoir Fiscal)

37 Id, Note 28

38 Id, Note 3.The facts of the case are:Velcro Canada- a company resident in Canada- paid a royalty to Velcro Holdings BV, a company resident of the Netherlands. The intellectual property for the use of which royalty was paid was owned by another group company- Velcro Industries BV – which was resident in the Netherlands Antilles. The Netherlands Antilles company (Velcro Industries BV), being owner of IPs assigned the same to the Netherlands holding company (Velcro Holding BV) for the consideration of an amount calculated as a percentage of net sales of the licensed products within 30 days of receiving royalty payments from the Canadian company. The percentage was ultimately determined to be equal to 90 % of the royalties received on approval from the Dutch authorities. Tax authorities held that the Netherlands holding company (Velcro Holding BV) was not a beneficial owner. However, the Court held that, it was a beneficial owner because royalty payments were intermingled with the holding company’s other accounts. The funds were not segregated and paid directly to the Netherlands Antilles company (Velcro Industries BV). The funds were exposed to creditors of the Netherlands holding company. After elaborate discussion, it held that, the holding company in the Netherlands had the “possession, use, risk and control” of the funds. In addition, the holding company (Velcro Holdings BV, Netherlands) was neither an agent nor a nominee nor could it be regarded as a conduit company. It did not have the power to legally bind the Netherlands Antilles Company(Velcro Industries) and was acting on its own behalf at all times. Applying Prévost, it was held that a conduit has absolutely no discretion with respect to funds received, which was not the case here.

39    P-562, Klaus Vogel, “Klaus Vogel on Double Taxation Conventions”, Third Ed, Kluwer Law International Ltd, London

40 rof Dr Robert Danon, “Clarification of the meaning of “Beneficial Owner” in the OECD Model Tax Convention- Comment on the April 2011 Discussion Draft”, Bulletin for International Taxation, vol 65 (August 2011) no 8, pp 437-442.

41Id Note 25,

42Egypt has issued Ministerial Decree 771 on 29th December 2009. It is more of procedural instruction providing documentation requirements for the recipient such as Tax Residency Certificate, loan or licence agreement, certificate declaring beneficial ownership etc to avail treaty benefit.

43Circular 601, 27th October 2009

44Dr Norman Cormac Sharkey, “China’s Tax Treaties and Beneficial Ownership: Innovative Control of Treaty Shopping or Inferior Law making Damaging to Law?:Bulletin for International Taxation, vol 65(2011) no 12, pp 655-661, p 656

45    Id, Note 10

46    Avellum Partners, comments at http://www.oecd.org/ctp/treaties/ BENOWNAvellum_Partners.pdf

47M L L Van Bladel, comments at http://www.oecd.org/ctp/treaties/ BENOWNMLL_vanBladel.pdf

48Confederation of British Industry, comments at http://www.oecd.org/ ctp/treaties/BENOWNCBI.pdf

49    Tax Policy Bulletin, ‘OECD releases revised discussion draft on beneficial ownership’ at http://www.pwc.com/en_GX/gx/tax/ newsletters/tax-policy-bulletin/assets/pwc-oecd-releases-revised-discussion-draft-beneficial-ownership.pdf

50Deloitte &Touche LLP, http://www.oecd.org/ctp/treaties/ BENOWNDeloitte&Touche_LLP.pdf

51 Id

52 Id

53Ernst and Young , London, http://www.oecd.org/ctp/treaties/ BENOWNErnst&Young_LLP.pdf

54KeesVaanRaad, http://www.ibdt.com.br/material/arquivos/Atas/ jfb_20111020093958.pdf

55CIT v SitaldasTirathdas (1961) 41 ITR 367 (SC)

56Bruno Gouthiere, “Beneficial Ownership and Tax Treaties: A French View, Bulletin for International Taxation,vol 65 (2011) no 4/5, pp 217-222, p-222

57Id, Note 3, para 52, The Court stated that, “it is only when there is ‘absolutely no discretion’ that the court take the draconian step of piercing the corporate veil.”

58Section 2(18), 2(22)(e), 2(32), Section 79, Section 40A(2), Section 45(2A), of the Income Tax act

59Transfer of Properties Act, 1882 use the expressions ‘beneficial interest’ and ‘beneficial enjoyment’, Indian Trusts Act 1982 also uses the concept of ‘beneficial interest’. Companies Act, 1956 and Depositories Act, 1996 has provisions on ‘beneficial owner’. Section 2(1)(a) of the Depositories Act defines beneficial owner as “‘Beneficial owner ’means a person whose name is recorded as such with the depositary.”

60Id, Note 40, p 439

61Out of all, India’s tax treaties with Greece, Libya, UAR(Egypt) and Zambia do not have provision on ‘beneficial owner’

62E Trade Mauritius Ltd(2010) 324 ITR 1(AAR), Aditya Birla Nuvo Limited vs. DDIT (2011) 200 Taxman 437, KSPG Netherlands Holding BV (2010) 322 ITR 696 (AAR),

63Brian Arnold, Tax Treaty News, Bulletin for International Taxation, Vol 65(2011) no 2 PP 650-654. He has stated that “the taxpayer would likely argue that the absence of any express beneficial owner requirement in article 13 was intentional and it would, therefore, be inappropriate for a court to read such a requirement into article 13. It might be possible for a court to deny the benefit of article 13 of the tax treaty in these circumstances by applying a domestic anti-avoidance rule or by interpreting article 13 in accordance with paragraphs 7 to 12 of the OECD Commentary on Article 1 of the OECD Model (2010) to prevent abuse of the tax treaty. Both approaches are, however, problematic”.

The Conundrum of Control in Corporate Law

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction
When you hear of the word
‘control’ what comes to your mind? It could be some sort of degree of
rigidness or a rule associated with a school/an office/a formal place or
even a remote control or the control key on your keyboard. It can have
multiple meanings but the most common one is to have the power to
influence another person’s actions or the course of events. The Black’s
Law Dictionary, 6th Edition defines control as the ‘power or authority
to manage, direct, superintend, restrict, regulate, govern, administer
or oversee’. In the case of State of Mysore vs. Allum Karibasappa,
AIR 1974 SC 1863, the Supreme Court held that the word “control”
suggests check, restraint or influence. Control is intended to regulate
and hold in check and restrain from action. Again in Shamrao Vithal Co-op. Bank Ltd vs. Kasargod Pandhuranga Mallya,
AIR 1972 SC 1248, the Court held that the word ‘control’ is synonymous
with superintendence, management, or authority, to direct restrict or
regulate. Control is exercised by a superior authority in exercise of
its supervisory power.

However, when we speak of control in the
field of corporate law in India, there are numerous meanings and there
is no uniformity. Often, this causes regulatory uncertainty and
ambiguity and leads to interpretation issues. More often than not, the
interpretation of the term ‘control’ has been the subject matter of
widespread debate. Recently, it has been in the limelight on account of
certain sensitive sectors in India, such as, telecom, aviation, defence,
etc. Let us examine the diverse meanings of this term under various
Regulations and the issues ensuing from the same.

Companies Act, 1956
The
Companies Act, 1956, (the “Act”) which currently is the mother statute
for corporate law in India, interestingly does not define this very
important term. However, section 4 of the Act which defines a holding
company and a subsidiary, states that the composition of a company’s
(i.e., a subsidiary) board of directors shall be deemed to be controlled
by another company (i.e., a holding company) if the holding company can
exercise power at its discretion, without the consent of any other
person, to appoint/remove all or a majority of the directors of the
subsidiary. If such a control exists then holding-subsidiary
relationship is deemed to exist. Thus, the ability to control the
composition of the board or the power to appoint or remove the majority
of the board renders one company as a subsidiary of another. The Delhi
High Court in Oriental insurance Investment Corp. Ltd, 51 Comp.
Cases 487 (Del) has held that this power may be enjoyed by virtue of
being a majority shareholder or from certain special rights which are
conferred by the Articles of Association of a company. The judgment in
the case of Velayudhan (M) vs. ROC, 50 Comp Cases 33 (Ker) is on similar
lines. It is the control of the second variety, i.e., control because
of special rights, which is often a matter of debate.

While the
Act is silent on a general definition of the term, the Rules issued
under the Act are one step better. The Unlisted Public Companies
(Preferential Allotment) Rules, 2003 issued u/s. 81(1A) of the Act
define the term to include the right to appoint majority of the
directors or to control the management or policy decisions exercisable
by a person or persons acting individually or in concert, directly or
indirectly, including by virtue of their shareholding or management
rights or shareholders agreements or voting agreements or in any other
manner. Thus, it is a very wide definition on the lines of the Takeover
Code (explained below). The definition is relevant under the Rules for
ascertaining who is a Promoter.

SEBI Takeover Regulations
This
is one Statute which has witnessed the maximum debate over “what
constitutes control”? The SEBI Takeover Regulations of 1997 as well as
those of 2011 both define this very important term. The definition of
the term in the 2011 Regulations includes:

(a) the right to appoint majority of the directors; or

(b)
to control the management or policy decisions exercisable by a person
or persons acting individually or in concert, directly or indirectly,
including by virtue of their shareholding/management rights/
shareholders’ agreements or voting agreements or in any other manner:

However,
a director or officer of a company shall not be considered to be in
control over such company, merely by virtue of holding such position.
Here the decision of the SAT in the case of Ashwin K. Doshi vs. SEBI, 40
SCL 545 (SCL) is relevant. The SAT held that just because a company is
professionally managed does not mean that nobody has control over the
company. Even competent professional managers are given policy decisions
by those in control. Hence, it is a question of fact.

The right to appoint directors must be one which empowers a person to appoint a majority of the board of directors. In Ram Prasad Somani vs. SEBI,
69 SCL 168 (SAT), it was held that appointment of 5 out of 14 directors
could not tantamount to gaining of control over a company since they
were in minority.

R. 4 goes on to state that irrespective of
shares/voting rights in a target company, an acquirer who acquires,
directly or indirectly, control over such target company, must make a
public announcement for an open offer for the shares of such target
company. This applies even if there is no acquisition of shares –
Swedish Match AB vs. SEBI, 42 SCL 627 (SAT).

Thus, the Takeover
Code imbibes the definition under the Companies Act, i.e., power to
appoint majority of the directors but also goes forth to include various
other facets. The right to control the management or policy decisions
of a company renders a person as being in control of that company. These
rights typically arise by virtue of Shareholders or Share Subscription
or Voting Agreements. Hence, under the Takeover Regulations it is not
necessary for a person to be a majority shareholder. He could even be a
minority shareholder but by virtue of certain Agreements he could be in
control. Such an issue typically arises in the case of private equity
investors or venture capitalists. Any PE/FDI Investment may carry a veto
right or an affirmative vote or special rights for the Investor. Thus,
without the consent of the investor, the company cannot carry out
certain substantial decisions, e.g., corporate reorganisation, starting a
new line of business, borrowing in excess of a limit, etc. The PE has
power to stall a decision of the company. However, in most cases, he
does not have power to carry out a decision on his own behest. Thus, if
he refuses the company cannot go ahead but if he proposes and the
company refuses then he cannot proceed on his own. A question often
asked is that, does the grant of such special rights make the investor a
person in control of the company? This is a question of fact. For
instance, the Securities Appellate Tribunal in the case of SEBI vs
Sandip Save, 41 SCL 47 (SAT) after examining various powers given to
IDBI under a lending agreement held that IDBI was not in control over
the company. This was also the question in the case of Subhkam Ventures (I) (P.) Ltd. vs. SEBI, 99 SCL 159 (SAT). Here, the SAT explained the situation with the help of very interesting metaphors as follows:

“The test really is whether the acquirer is in the driving seat. To extend the metaphor further, the question would be whether he controls the steering, accelerator, the gears and the brakes. If the answer to these questions is in the affirmative, then alone would he be in control of the company. In other words, the question to be asked in each case would be whether the acquirer is the driving force behind the company and whether he is the one providing motion to the organisation. If yes, he is in control but not otherwise. In short, control means effective control.”

On this basis and on an examination of the facts, the SAT held that the investor did not have control over the target company. SEBI contested it before the Supreme Court. There an interesting mutual consent agreement was arrived at between the parties. The Supreme Court’s Order in SEBI vs. Subhkam Ventures, Civil Appeal No. 3371 /2010 states that certain facts changed after the SAT Order. Accordingly, the Court, by consent, disposed of the appeal filed by SEBI by keeping the question of law open and it is also clarified that the order passed by the SAT will not be treated as a precedent. This leaves the all-important question yet open for interpretation. Some of the recent high-profile foreign takeovers/joint ventures have reportedly run into a roadblock with the SEBI on similar grounds. SEBI has questioned whether the grant of special investor protection rights to the foreign investor results into a sharing of management control with the Indian promoters?

SEBI has once again indicated its aversion to special rights, veto powers and other preemptive rights in favour of Private Equity Investors in listed companies. In Kamat Hotels Ltd, Clearwater Capital Partners (Cyprus) was given certain affirmative voting rights. SEBI has taken a stand that this tantamount to control under the Takeover Code. Clearwater has filed an appeal against SEBI’s decision to SAT.

The Takeover Code, 1997 contained R. 12 which provided for a change of control not triggering an open offer. Thus, in cases where a special resolution was passed for change of a control by way of a postal ballot resolution of the shareholders, then the same did not attract an open offer by the acquirer of the control. It applied to an offer triggered only by change of control and not one which was accompanied by acquisition of substantial shares. These were known as the White-wash Provisions. These provisions were resorted to when control was sought to be transferred without increasing shareholding above the threshold limits.

The 2011 Regulations have deleted these provisions. SEBI’s Takeover Regulations Advisory Committee (TRAC) in its Report stated that although whitewash provisions are in principle not undesirable, the time is not yet ripe to introduce them in India. Hence, it suggested that the same not be retained under the 2011 version of the Code. Accordingly, they were dropped. Further, earlier cessation of joint to sole control did not amount to a change of control. However, now the same would be treated as a change of control.

The Takeover Code also contains an express provision for an indirect acquisition of control. For instance, acquiring control over an unlisted company which in turn controls a listed company, thereby acquiring indirect control over the listed company.

FDI Policy

The Consolidated FDI Policy (CFDIP) states that an investment by an Indian company ultimately owned and controlled by resident Indian citizens would be treated as a domestic investment and in other cases as a downstream/indirect foreign investment. Hence, it becomes to understand what constitutes control under this Policy. A company is considered as controlled by resident Indian citizens, if ultimately the resident Indian citizens have the power to appoint a majority of its directors in that company. Thus, the FDI policy defines control in a very narrow manner and does not factor in the power to control policy decisions or management decisions by virtue of an shareholders’ agreement. However, the CFDIP provides that in the case of those sectors which require FIPB approval for any FDI, any shareholders’ agreement which has an effect on appointment of Directors, veto rights, affirmative votes, etc., would have to be filed with the FIPB at the time of seeking approval. It will then consider all such clauses and would decide whether the investor has ownership and control due to them. Thus, if any courier company (where FIPB approval is required) wants to get PE funding, it would also have to get the Shareholders’ Agreement approved by the FIPB. Such a provision does not apply in sectors under the Automatic Route.

The FIPB has asked for control provisions to be re-worked in the case of shareholders’ agreements in sensitive sectors, such as, defence. For instance, in the proposals of M/s EADS Deutschland GmbH, Germany & Larsen & Toubro Limited, Mumbai, M/s Telecom Investments India Private Limited, etc., certain control provisions in favour of the foreign investors were asked to be diluted.

Although this definition of control has been a part of the FDI Policy since 2009, the RBI has only recently notified this under the FEMA Regulations. Recently, the Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion, which drafts the CFDIP, is reported to have moved an amendment to widen the definition of control and to bring it in sync with the definition under the Takeover Regulations. The idea is to focus on de facto rather than de jure control.

Companies Bill, 2012

What the Companies Act omits, the Bill seeks to rectify. The current position of the Act being silent on the definition of control is sought to be corrected by cl. 2(27) of the Bill. It states that control shall include the right to appoint majority of the directors or to control the management or policy decisions exercisable by a person or persons acting individually or in concert, directly or indirectly, including by virtue of their shareholding or management rights or shareholders agreements or voting agreements or in any other manner. The proposed definition is almost in sync with the Takeover Code except for one small difference – while the Code starts with the word “includes”, the Bill starts with the words “shall include”. Although it may be argued that the difference is only semantic, it is submitted that the Code is wider in scope than the Bill because of the absence of “shall”.

Competition Act, 2002

The Explanation to s.5 of the Competition Act, 2002 defines the term control for the purposes of determining whether an acquisition or a merger would be a combination under the Act. Control is defined to include controlling the affairs or management by—

(a)    one or more enterprises, either jointly or singly, over another enterprise or group;

(b)    one or more groups, either jointly or singly, over another group or enterprise;

The Competition Commission of India (Procedure in regard to the Transaction of Business relating to Combinations) Regulations, 2011 provide that transfer of joint to sole control would not be an exempt trans-action and would require a prior clearance from the Competition Commission of India (CCI). The CCI has been quite explicit in its orders of what constitutes a control. By its Order dated 04-10-2012 in response to a Notice for clearance filed by Tata Capital Ltd and Century Tokyo Leasing Corporation, the CCI has held granting of special rights such as affirmative vote, right to appoint key managerial personnel, approval of business plans, etc., tantamount to transfer of sole to joint control and hence, trigger the Competition Act.

Again by its Order dated 9th August 2012 in response to a Notice for clearance filed by SPE Mauritius Holdings Ltd, the CCI has held that each of the persons in joint control have a right to veto / block the strategic commercial decisions of a company. Careful scrutiny of Agreements is required to distinguish mere investor protection rights from rights resulting in joint control. It held that positive consent for opening new offices or hiring / termination of key management personnel, employees drawing a salary > $30,000, etc., cannot be considered as mere minority investor protection rights. It is a case of joint control by two persons.

Accounting Standards

Control is also relevant under the Accounting Standards issued by the ICAI and notified by the NACAS under the Companies Act. Here there is a very absorbing angle to the tell. 4 different Accounting Standards define the term ‘control’ in 3 different ways. Let us briefly look at these:

Income-tax Act

How can any discussion be complete without the Income-tax Act having its say? Section 6 of the Act states that if any company is wholly controlled and managed from India then it would be treated as a resident of India. As would be excepted, such a crucial term has not been defined. Hence, one has to examine the facts of each case to arrive at a decision.

Principles laid down by some judicial decisions would help in this respect. To enumerate all would require an Article by itself. However, it is determined by the place where the Head and Seat and the Directing Powers of the Company are located, i.e., the place from where the Board functions– Narottam and Periera Ltd., 23 ITR 454 (Bom). What is relevant is the location of those affairs which produce income – V.Vr. Subbayya Chet-tiar, 19 ITR 168 (SC). It means de facto control and management – Nandlal Gandalal, 40 ITR 1 (SC). The fact that the entire shareholding of a foreign company is from India or that some of the Directors are from India would not be material as long as other facts prove it is not wholly controlled and managed from India – Radha Rani Holdings, 110 TTJ 920 (Del ITAT).

The decision in the case of Vodafone International Holdings B.V., 341 ITR 1 (SC) has also laid down a detailed exposition on what constitutes control. The Apex Court has held that a controlling interest is an incident of ownership of shares in a company and flows out of the shareholding. The control of a company resides in the voting power of its shareholders and shares represent an interest of a shareholder which is made up of various rights contained in the contract embedded in the Articles of Association. Thus, control and management is a facet of the holding of shares.

Section 92A(1) of the Act which deals with the Transfer Pricing provisions defines the term associated enterprise to mean an enterprise which participates in the control of another enterprise. Again, the crucial term has not been defined. Clauses (a), (b), (e), (f), (i), (j), (k) and (l) of section 92A(2) provide specific instances of control. In the context of the definition of control appearing in section 92A(2)(j), the “Guidance Note on Report under section 92E of the Income Tax Act, 1961” issued by the ICAI states that the word ‘control’ can be interpreted to mean that the individual along with his relatives has the power to make crucial decisions regarding the management and running of the two enterprises.

The decision of the AAR in the case of Z, In re., 345 ITR 11 (AAR) has analysed the difference between de facto versus de jure control based on the facts of the case.

Conclusion

To sum up – should we say Conclusion or Confusion? The multitude of Laws and Regulators taking different stands on the meaning of what constitutes control has created a very puzzled and perplexed scenario. Investors, both domestic and foreign, are wary as to whether they would be caught having triggered a change of control. One yearns for a stable and a clear policy on the definition of control. Moreover this policy should apply equally across laws. Different laws interpreting the same term in a different manner is not a healthy situation. Let us hope that our Law makers and Regulators realise this and strive to create a clear environment conducive to business decisions. They could probably take a cue from Michael J. Gelb, the noted personal development trainer:

“Confusion is the Welcome Mat at the Door of Creativity.”

Shareholders’ Agreements

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis

Shareholders’ Agreements are one of the definitive documents in case of an investment in a company. They are full of jargon which is often unintelligible to laymen and promoters signing without understanding them. This Article explains restrictive covenants, put options and veto rights found in Shareholders’ Agreements. It also analyses their validity under the Companies Act, 1956, the 2013 Act and the position for Listed Companies. Lastly, the Article examines the remedies for enforceability of such Agreements.

Introduction

Shareholders’ Agreements are one of the definitive documents which we witness in cases of an investment in a company by a Private Equity Fund, Foreign Direct Investor, etc. A Shareholders’ Agreement contains various restrictive covenants by theexisting promoters of the investee company, which usually are in the form of representations and warranties  as well as promises to do or abstain fromdoing certain acts. These promises are important for the investor to invest in the investee company  since they represent an assurance to him about hisexit route and other rights. One unique feature of Shareholders’ Agreements is that they are full of jargon which is often unintelligible to laymen.

Promoters, usually in a hurry to secure funds, end up signing on the dotted line of the Agreement without fully understanding the true repercussions of the Agreement. It is only later when these clauses materialise into reality that they wake up and smell the coffee but by then it is too late. Through this Article, let us understand better some of the important covenants which one come across in a Shareholders’ Agreement.

Restrictive Covenants

One or more restrictive covenants, such as, First Refusal, Tag Along, Drag Along, Russian Roulette, Texas Shoot-out, Dutch auction rights, etc., are usually found in Shareholders’ Agreement. These are briefly explained below:

(a) Right of First Refusal
This is the most common and easily understood covenant since it is found in the Articles of Association of all Private Companies. In case the Promoters desire to transfer any or all of their shares, the investor will have a Right of First Refusal, popularly called a RoFR, to purchase these shares. The pricing of the RoFR and the terms and conditions of the sale are the same as those that the promoter is offering to the prospective purchaser. In some cases, the promoter may also have a RoFR on the investor’s shares.

(b) Tag Along Rights

Tag along rights mean that if the promoters wish to sell their shares to anyone else, then the investor can tag along with them and offer its own shares. Example, a buyer has agreed to buy 50,000 shares from the promoter @ Rs. 100 per share. If the investor tags along with the promoter then either the buyer buys 50,000 from him also @ Rs. 100 or he buys 25,000 each  from the promoter and the investor. Thus, the investor gets an exit if the promoter gets one. These are also known as piggy back rights since the investor piggy backs on the promoter.

(c) Drag Along Rights

On the other hand, drag along rights mean that if the investor wishes to sell his shares to a third party and if that third party also requires that the promoters should sell their shares, then the investor can drag along the promoters. Example, a buyer has agreed to buy 50,000 shares from the investor @ Rs. 100 per share. If the buyer wishes to buy more share as a pre-condition, then the investor can drag along with him the promoter and in that case the promoter must also sell the same number of shares at the same terms as the investor. Thus, if the buyer wants to buy out the whole company and not just the investor’s stake, then the drag along clause would enable an investor to facilitate such a transaction.

(d) Russian Roulette

Not very popular in India, a Russian Roulette clause means that “you buy me out or I buy you out”. The investor specifies a price at which either the promoter sells to him or buys the investor out. This is often resorted to when there is a deadlock situation.

(e) Texas Shoot Out

A third party is appointed as a Referee. Both the investor and the promoter submit bids to the Referee. Whichever is the higher bid wins and the winner must buy out the loser at that price. This is an extreme deadlock resolution mechanism.

(f) Dutch auction

A modification of the Texas Shoot out, in a Dutch auction also bids are submitted to a Referee. Only in this case the bids are for the minimum selling price. The winner must buy out the loser at the price quoted by the loser.

(g) Pre-emptive Rights

The investor has pre-emptive rights to participate in any future issuance (other than the current round) of equity (and other instruments convertible into equity) by the company on terms and at a price determined by the company but not less favourable than those offered by the company to any other investor, to retain its fully diluted equity shareholding in the company. The investor has a 20% stake in a company which has a capital of 1 crore shares. The company decides to increase its share capital by a further issue of 20 lakh shares. The investor must be offered 4 lakh shares out of this further issue so that it can maintain its holding of 20% in the post-issue capital of the company.

(h) Put Option

The investor has a right /option but not an obligation to sell its shares to the promoter of the investee company in case the company does not give it an exit in the form of an IPO /an Offer for Sale/Buyback of the investor’s shares. Thus, the promoters are bound to buy out the investor at a predetermined  price or a pricing formula whichis specified upfront. This ensures an exit for the investor if all other methods fail.

The Supreme Court has recognised such rights in its decision in celebrated decision of Vodafone International Holdings, 341 ITR 1 (SC) and held as under:

“SHA, therefore, regulate the ownership and voting rights of shares in the company including ROFR, TARs, DARs, Preemption Rights, Call Options, Put Options, Subscription Option etc. in relation to any shares issued by the company, restriction of transfer of shares or granting securities interest over shares, provision for minority protection, lock-down or for the interest of the shareholders and the company. Provisions referred to above, which find place in a SHA, may regulate the rights between the parties which are purely contractual and those rights will have efficacy only in the course of ownership of shares by the parties.”

Validity of Restrictive Covenants under Companies Act, 1956

The Supreme Court has held that they are valid against a company only if they are a part of the Articles of Association or else they remain a private contract between shareholders – V.B. Rangarajan vs.  V. Gopalkrishnan, 73 Comp. Cases 201 (SC). While thishas been the cornerstone for the law on Shareholders’ Agreements, the Supreme Court in Vodafone (supra) has taken a contrary view. The Concurring Order of J. Radhakrishnan, states in relation to Rangarajan’s judgment as follows:

“This Court has taken the view that provisions of the Shareholders’ Agreement imposing restrictions even when consistent with Company legislation, are to be authorized only when they are incorporated in the Articles of Association, a view we do not subscribe.

Rangarajan’s decision was delivered by a Two-Member Supreme Court Bench, while Vodafone’s decision has been delivered by a Three-Member Bench, although the disagreement is expressed by the Concurring Judgment of one of its Members. It may be noted that the Vodafone decision has not expressly overruled Rangarajan’s decision.

Vodafone’s decision has further laid down that shareholders can enter into any Agreement in the best interest of the company, but the only thing is that the provisions shall not go contrary to the Articles of Association. The essential purpose of the Agreement is to make provisions for proper and effective internal management of the company. It can visualise the best interest of the company on diverse issues and can also find different ways not only for the best interest of the shareholders, but also for the company as a whole.

In the case of M.S. Madhusoodhanan vs. Kerala Kaumudi Pvt. Ltd., 117 Comp Cases 19 (SC) it was held that consensual agreements between shareholders relating to their shares do not impose restriction on transferability of shares and they can be enforced like any other agreement. Even if the company is a party to the Shareholders’ Agreement, the provisions relating to management of the affairs of a company cannot be given effect to unless the same are incorporated in its Articles of Association – IL &

FS Trust Co. Ltd vs. Birla Perucchini Ltd., 47 SCL 426 (Bom). Again, in Rolta India Ltd vs. Venire Industries Ltd., 100 Comp. Cases 19 (Bom), it was held that the shareholders cannot infringe upon the fiduciary rights and duties of directors. Any agreement by which the shareholders agreed not to increase the number of directors above a certain limit was not valid as long as the restriction was enshrined in the Articles of Association. The shareholders cannot dictate terms to directors except by amending the Articles. In Reliance Natural Resources Ltd. vs. Reliance Industries Ltd. [2010] 7 SCC 1, it was held that a Family Arrangement MOU executed by the key personnel of a listed company was held not to be binding on the company since the contents of the MOU were not made public. It was held that the MOU did not fall under the corporate domain – it was not approved by the shareholders. Therefore, technically, the MOU was not legally binding.

A Single Judge of the Bombay High Court, in the case of Western Maharashtra Development Corporation vs. Bajaj Auto Ltd., 154 Comp Cases 593 (Bom), had ruled that a Shareholders’ Agreement of a public company containing restrictive covenants was invalid since the Articles of a public company could not contain covenants restricting the trans-fer of shares and it was contrary to Section.108 of the Companies Act, 1956. Subsequently, a Division Bench of the Bombay High Court, in the case of Messer Holdings Ltd vs. Shyam Ruia, 159 Comp Cases 29 (Bom) has overruled this decision of the Single Judge of the Bombay High Court. The Bombay Court here was concerned with the validity of a Right of First Refusal Clause. The Court held that the intent of section 111A of the Companies Act, 1956 dealing with free transferability of shares does not in any manner hamper the right of its shareholders to enter into private treaties so long as it is in accordance with the Companies Act, 1956 and the company’s Articles of Association. Had the Companies Act, 1956 wanted to prevent such private contracts it would have expressly done so.

Interestingly, a recent decision of the Delhi Court in the case of World Phone India vs. WPI Group Inc, 119 SCL 196 (Del) has held that even a provision in the Shareholders’ Agreement which is not contrary to the Articles of Association or the Companies Act, 1956 cannot be enforced against the company if the company is not a party to such an Agreement. While it was settled law that in case of a conflict the Articles would prevail but this decision lays down that even if the Articles are silent on an issue and not in conflict, the provisions of the Shareholders’ Agreement cannot be enforced against the company.

Thus, the issue of Articles vs. Shareholders’ Agreement has yet not reached a finality.

Position under Companies Act, 2013

The Companies Act, 2013 now provides that securities in a public company are freely transferrable but a contract or an arrangement in respect of transfer of securities in a public company shall be enforceable as a contract. This express provision sets at rest once and for all whether public companies can contain pre-emptive rights. This is a big boost for Private Equity/FDI/Private Investment in Public Equity (PIPE) transactions since they almost always come with pre-emptive rights.

Position in the case of Listed Companies

It may be specifically noted that the Bombay High Court judgment in Messer Holdings (supra) was in the case of a listed company. Recently, the SEBI, taking a cue from the Companies Act, 2013, has issued a Notification under the Securities Contract (Regulation) Act, 1956, expressly permitting “contracts for pre-emption including right of first refusal, or tag-along or drag along rights contained in shareholders agreements or articles of association of companies”. Thus, these restrictive covenants can now expressly find their way even in Shareholders’ Agreements of Listed Companies, without the prior approval of the SEBI. It may be noted that even today the Articles of Association of several Listed Companies contain such pre-emptive rights.

The Notification further provides that even agreements for put and call options on listed securities are permitted subject to the following conditions:

(i)    the title and ownership of the underlying securities is held continuously by the seller for a minimum period of 1 year from the date of entering into the contract;

(ii)    the price or consideration payable for the sale or purchase of the underlying securities pursuant to exercise of any option contained therein, is in compliance with all the laws for the time being in force as applicable;

(iii)    the contract is settled by way of actual delivery of the underlying securities; and

(iv)    the contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and Rules or Regulations made thereunder.

SEBI had in the cases of Cairn India Ltd., Vedanta Resources Plc. and Vulcan Rubber Ltd., held that an option arrangement in the case of shares of a listed company is not valid. This change in position is a welcome move.

Veto Rights/Affirmative Vote

Almost all investors want Veto Rights, i.e., certain specific fundamental issues, on which the company would not take a decision without the affirmative vote of the Investor. Thus, the Investor acquires a veto right on these issues. Some of the issues which may carry a veto include, alteration of the rights and privileges of the investor’s shares; change in the capital structure of the company; related party transactions with promoters in excess of certain limits; corporate reorganisation of the company; borrowing in excess of certain limits; change in the scope of the business; capital expenditure in excess of certain limit; commencement of any major litigation by the company; changes in key management personnel, etc.

By virtue of a veto, the investor has power to stall a decision of the company. However, in most cases, he does not have power to carry out a decision on his own behest. Thus, if he refuses the company cannot go ahead but if he proposes and the com-pany refuses then he cannot proceed on his own. A question often asked is that does the grant of such special rights make the investor a person in control of the company? This is a question of fact.

In the case of Subhkam Ventures (I) (P.) Ltd. vs. SEBI, 99 SCL 159 (SAT), the SAT held that the question to be asked in each case is whether the acquirer is the driving force behind the company and whether he is the one providing motion to the organization. If yes, he is in control but not otherwise. In short, control means effective control. In this case, the SAT held that the investor who had veto rights did not control the company. The SEBI contested it before the Supreme Court, where an interesting mutual consent agreement was arrived upon. The Supreme Court’s Order in SEBI vs. Subhkam Ventures, Civil Appeal No. 3371 /2010 states that certain facts changed after the SAT Order. Accordingly, the Court, by mutual consent, disposed of the appeal filed by SEBI by keeping the question of law open and it is also clarified that the order passed by the SAT will not be treated as a precedent. This leaves the all-important question yet open for interpretation. Some of the recent high-profile foreign takeovers/joint ventures have reportedly run into a roadblock with the SEBI on similar grounds. SEBI has questioned whether the grant of special investor protection rights to the foreign investor results into a sharing of management control with the Indian promoters?

Enforceability of Shareholders’ Agreement

A breach of a Shareholders’ Agreement would give rise to a suit for specific performance by the aggrieved party under the Specific Relief Act. However, in several cases, the Agreement itself provides that Arbitration would be the sole dispute resolution mechanism. It may further provide for Indian or Foreign Arbitration, e.g., in Singapore, London, Paris, etc.

In the case of Vodafone (supra), the Supreme Court held that the manner in which Shareholders’ Agreements are to be enforced in the case of breach is given in the general law between the company and the shareholders. A breach of such an Agreement which does not breach the Articles of Association is a valid corporate action but the aggrieved can get remedies under the general law of the land for breach of the Agreement and not under the Companies Act.

In the case of Chatterjee Petrochem (I) P Ltd vs. Haldia Petrochemicals Ltd., 110 SCL 107 (SC), an interesting issue arose. Certain disputes arose be-tween two sets of shareholders who were party to a Shareholders Agreement. The aggrieved party moved a petition for oppression u/s. 397 of the Companies Act, 1956. The Supreme Court held that in that case the breach of the Shareholders’ Agreement was a breach between two members of the company and not by the company itself. Hence, no occasion arises for filing a plea for oppression u/s. 397.

Conclusion

Shareholder Agreements have always attracted a lot of controversy and the spate of conflicting judgments have fueled the fire further. Parties to a Shareholders’ Agreement would be well advised to understand the implications of what they are getting into before signing such Agreements. Do Not Act in Haste and Repent in Leisure!!

Provisions For Management, Administration and Dividend Declaration Under the Companies Act, 2013.

fiogf49gjkf0d
The Companies Act, 2013 has been passed by the Parliament. It has received the assent of the President on 29th August, 2013. After the Act is notified it will replace the existing Companies Act, 1956. By a notification dated 12-09-2013, 98 out of 470 sections of the Act have been brought into force from 12.9.2013. The provisions relating to Management and Administration of companies and other relevant provisions are contained in the following sections of the New Act. Draft Rules relating these provisions have been issued by the Government for
Public Comments.

(i) Chapter VII – Section 88 to 122 – Management and Administration.
(ii) Chapter VIII – Section 123 to 127 – Declaration of Dividend
(iii) Chapter VI – Section 77 to 87 – Registration of charges.

Most of these provisions are similar to the provisions in the existing Act. Some of the important provisions which require attention during the course of management, administration and Declaration of Dividends by Companies are discussed in this Article.

1 Register of Members:

1.1  The provisions relating to maintenance of Register of Members. Debenture holders and any other securities in the company in section 88 of the New Act are similar to the provisions in sections 150 to 152 and 152A of the existing Act. Draft Rules 7.1 to 7.6 provide for the procedure and also prescribes Form in which the Register is to be maintained.

1.2  Sections 89 and 90 of the New Act which correspond to existing section 187C and 187D provide for declaration to be made by a person who does not hold beneficial interest in the shares registered in the company in his name. Similarly, the beneficial owner has also to make this declaration. This declaration is to be made in the prescribed form and submitted to the company within the prescribed time limit. Particulars of changes in beneficial interest are also to be filed with the company within 30 days of change. The company has to register particulars of such beneficial interest and file a return in the prescribed form with the ROC within 30 days of receipt of such declaration. Draft Rule 7.7 prescribes Forms for this purpose and also provides for procedure for this purpose.

1.3  The Central Government is given power to investigate about the beneficial ownership of shares in the company by appointing one or more competent persons under new section 90.

1.4  The above Register of members, debentureholders etc. can be closed for an aggregate period of 45 days in each year, but not exceeding 35 days at a time, u/s. 91 which corresponds to existing section 154. If the above Register is closed for more than the above period, the company and every defaulting officer will be liable to pay penalty of Rs. 5,000/- per day of default subject to maximum of Rs.1 lakh. It may be noted that Section 91 has come into force from 12-09-2013. Draft Rule 7.8 provides for procedure for this purpose.

1.5  If the company fails to maintain the register u/s. 88, the company and every defaulting officer shall be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 50,000/- which may extend to Rs. 3 lakh. In the case of continuing default fine upto Rs. 10,00/- per day can also be charged.

1.6  If a person required to make declaration of beneficial interest u/s. 89, without reasonable cause, fails to make the declaration, he will be punished with fine upto Rs. 50,000/- . In case of continuing default fine upto Rs. 1,000/- per day can also be charged. Similarly, if the company makes default in filing return giving particulars of these declarations with ROC as required u/s. 89(6), it shall be liable to pay minimum fine of Rs. 500/- which may extend to Rs. 1,000/-. In the case of continuing default, further fine upto Rs. 1,000/- per day for the period of delay can be levied.

2. Annual return:

2.1 New Section 92 which corresponds to existing sections 159, 161 and 162 provides for filing the Annual Return with ROC within 60 days of holding Annual General Meeting. If such AGM is not held the Annual Return should be filed with ROC within 60 days of the last date when AGM was due to be held. In such a case the company will have to file a statement specifying reasons for not holding the AGM in time.

2.2 Broadly stated the Annual Return is to be prepared in the prescribed form containing the following particulars as on the last day of the financial year.

(i) Its Registered Office, principal place of business, particulars of its holding, subsidiary and associate companies.

(ii) Its shares, debentures and other securities and shareholding pattern.

(iii) Its indebtedness.

(iv) Its members and debenture-holders along with changes therein since the close of previous financial year

(v) Its promoters, directors, key managerial personnel (KMP) along with the charges therein since the close of the previous financial year.

(vi) Meetings of Members or a class thereof, Board and its various committees with attendance details.

(vii) Remuneration of Directors and KMP.

(viii) Penalty and punishment imposed on the company, its directors or officers with details of compounding of offenses and appeals made against such penalty or punishment.

(ix) Matters relating to certification of compliances, disclosures as may be prescribed.

(x) Details in respect of Shares held by FIIs giving their names, addresses etc. and percentage of shareholding as may be prescribed.

(xi) Such other matters as may be prescribed.

The annual return is to be signed by a Director and company secretary/company secretary in practice. In the case of one person company and small company, it is to be signed by the company secretary or, if there no secretary, by the director.

In the case of a listed company or such specified companies, as may be prescribed, the Annual Return is required to be certified by a company secretary in practice in the prescribed form.

2.3 An extract of the Annual Return in the prescribed form should form part of the Board Report.

Draft Rules 7.9, 7.10, and 7.12 provide for Forms of Annual Return etc and procedure to be followed for filing the Annual Return with ROC.

2.4  If the company does not file the Annual Return within 60 days as stated above or within the extended time as provided in section 403 with additional fees, the company shall be punishable with the minimum fine of Rs. 50,000/- which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh. Similarly, every defaulting officer will be punishable with imprisonment upto 6 months or with a minimum fine of Rs. 50,000/- which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh or with both. Similar fine can be levied on the company secretary in practice if his certificate is not in conformity with the requirements of the section.

2.5  Section 93 is a new section which provides that every listed company should file a return in the prescribed form with ROC with respect to changes in the number of shares held by promotors and top 10 shareholders within 15 days of such charge. Draft Rule 7.11 prescribes Form No.7.10 for this purpose.

2.6  New sections 94 and 95 which correspond to existing sections 163 and 164 provide for place at which Registers, Returns and other documents required to be maintained by the company shall be kept. These registers, documents etc.will be open for inspection by shareholders, debenture holders etc. Draft Rules 7.13 and 7.14 provide for detailed procedure for this purpose. It is provided that the copies of Annual Returns should be preserved for 8 years and Register of Debenture Holders, Foreign register of Members etc. should be preserved for 15 years.

3. Procedure for General Meetings:

3.1 New sections 96 to 122 deal with procedure to be followed for holding Annual General Meeting, Extra ordinary general meeting and other related matters. These sections are similar to the existing sections 166 to 197. The provisions made in the new sections being similar to existing provisions, some of the important provisions are stated in the following paragraphs.

3.2    Annual General Meeting (Section 96)

(i)    One person company is not required to hold AGM.

(ii)    All other companies have to hold AGM once every year within the same time limit as provided in existing sections 166 and 210. The only difference is that the first AGM which at present can be held within 18 months of date of incorporation will now required to be held within 9 months of the closing of the first financial year.

(iii)    Under existing section 166 AGM can not be held on a ‘Public Holiday’. Now u/s. 96 AGM can be held on a “Public Holiday”. However, it cannot be held on a “National Holiday” as may be declared by the Central Government.

Further, under the new provision it is specifically provided that AGM can be held during business hours i.e. between 9.00 AM and 6.00 PM. The Central Government can grant exemption from this requirement, subject to such conditions which it may impose.

(iv)    If there is a default in holding ay AGM, the Tribunal can, on an application by any member, direct the company to hold such a meeting subject to such conditions as the Tribunal may specify under new section 97.

(v)    Similarly, the Tribunal, on its own or on an application by a Director or member, direct the company to hold any general meeting (other than AGM) subject to such conditions which it may specify under new section 98.

(vi)    If there is default in holding any general meeting, in accordance with the above direction of the Tribunal the company and every defaulting officer of the company will be punishable with fine upto Rs1 lac. In case of continuing default a further fine upto Rs.5000/- per day during which default continues can be levied under new section 99.

3.3    Extraordinary General Meetings:

The procedure for calling an Extraordinary General Meeting in new section 100 is the same as in the existing section 169. This procedure is laid down in Draft Rule 7.15. This section has come into force from 12-09-2013.

3.4    Notices for General Meetings:

(i)    New section 101 provides for notice to be given in writing or through electronic mode 21 clear days before the meeting in the same manner as provided in existing sections 171 and 172. However, a general meeting can be called by giving shorter notice if consent is given by at least 95% of members entitled to vote at such meeting.

(ii)    Explanatory statement is to be annexed with every notice concerning each item of special business to be transacted at the General Meeting. New section 102 which corresponds to existing section 173 provides for this requirement. It explains the material facts in respect of which the explanation as under is to be provided:

(a)    Nature of concern or interest, financial or otherwise in respect of each items of every director, manager, KMP, and their relatives.

(b)    Any other information and facts that may enable members to understand the meaning, scope and implications of the items of business and to take decision thereon.

(iii)    It is further provided in section 102 that if any item of specified business relates or affects any other company, the notice must disclose the extent of interest of every promoter, director, Manager or KMP of the company, if it is more than 2% of the paid up share capital of that company. This section has come into force on 12-09-2013.

(iv)    Where, as a result of the non-disclosure or insufficient disclosure in the statement to be furnished as above by the promoter, director, manager or KMP, any benefit accrues to any of these persons, he shall hold the same in trust for the company and compensate the company to the extent of the benefit received by him.

(v)    In the event of any contravention of this section, the defaulting promoter, director, manager, KMP or relatives of any of them shall be punishable with fine upto Rs.50000/-or 5 times the amount of the benefit received by such person, whichever is more.

(vi)    The procedure for giving Notice of the General Meeting is given in Draft Rule 7.16.

3.5    Quorum for the General Meeting:

Under the existing section 174 quorum required for the General Meeting of members of public companies is 5 members personally present at the meeting, unless the articles stipulate a larger number. New section 103 provides for a quorum based on number of members of the company as under, unless the articles provide for larger numbers.

(i)    5 Members personally present if the number of members on the date of meeting is less than 1,000.

(ii)    15 Members, if the number of members is between 1,000 and 5,000.

(iii)    30 Members, if the number of Members are more than 5,000.

For private companies, the quorum of 2 members continue, as at present. Section 103 has come into force on 12-09-2013.

3.6    Procedure for conducting General Meeting:

(i)    New sections 104 to 116, deal with the procedure for election of chairman, proxies, voting at general meeting etc. These provisions are similar to existing provision in sections 175 to 185 and 187 to 192A. Only section 108 is new. It provides that the Central Government may prescribe class of companies in which members will be allowed to exercise their voting rights by electronic means. It may be noted that Sections 104 to 107, 111 to 114 and 116 have come into force from 12-09-2013.

(ii)    At present, section 190 does not provide for any requirement that members who give special notice should hold some minimum voting power in the company. New section 115, now provides that such special notice for consideration of a resolution as required under the Act or Articles can be given by such number of members holding not less than one percentage of total voting power or holding shares on which such aggregate sum not exceeding Rs. 5 lakh, as may be prescribed, has been paid up. (Refer Draft Rule 7.21).

(iii)    It may be noted that new section 110 provides for passing resolutions by “Postal Ballot”. This provision is similar to existing section 192A. The company can use this procedure in respect of such items of business as the Central Government may by notification provide. (Refer Draft Rule 7.20 (16).

(iv)    Form of Proxy to be given u/s. 105 (Form No.7.11) is prescribed under Draft Rule 7.17. Procedure for voting through electronic means is given in Draft Rule 7.18. Similarly procedure for Poll process is provided in Draft Rule 7.18 and procedure for Postal Ballot is provided in Draft Rule 7.20.

3.7    Resolutions and Agreements to be filed with ROC:

New section 117, which corresponds to existing section 192, provides for filing of Resolutions and Agreements specified in section 117(3) with ROC within 30 days. In the event of contravention of the provision of this section the company shall be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 5 lakh which may extend to Rs. 25 lakh. Similarly, every defaulting officer shall be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 1 lakh which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh. Form No. 7.14 is prescribed by Draft Rule 7.22.

3.8    Minutes of Meetings:

(i)    New section 118 corresponds to existing sections 193 to 195 and 197. It provides for maintenance of minutes of proceedings of General Meetings, Board meetings and other meetings. It is specifically provided in this new section that while recording these minutes, the company shall observe the “Secretarial Standards” in this respect, issued ICSI as approved by the Central Government.

(ii)    In the event of non-compliance with the requirement of this section, the company will be liable to penalty of Rs. 25,000/- and every defaulting officer shall be liable to pay penalty of Rs. 5,000/-. If any person is found guilty of tempering with the minutes, he shall be punishable with imprisonment upto 2 years and with minimum fine of Rs. 25,000/- which may extend to Rs. 1 lakh.

(iii)    New section 119 which corresponds existing to section 196 provides for inspection of the minute books of general meetings of the company. If such inspection is refused, monetary penalty similar to the one stated in (ii) above can be levied on the company and the defaulting officer.

(iv)    Detailed procedure for this purpose is provided in Draft Rules 7.23 and 7.24.

3.9    Some New Provisions:

Sections 120 to 122 are new. They provide as under.

(i)    Maintenance and Inspection of Document in Electronic Form Section 120 provides that any document, record, register, minutes etc. which are required to be kept by a company and allowed to be inspected or copied by any person can be kept, inspected or copies given in electronic form in the prescribed manner. This is prescribed in Draft Rule 7.25.

(ii)    Report on AGM

Under Section 121 a listed company is required to prepare in the prescribed manner a report on each AGM stating that such meeting was convened, held and conducted as required under the companies Act. This report is to be filed with ROC within 30 days of conclusion of AGM. Draft Rule 7.26 gives the contents of this Report. In the event of contravention of this provision, the company will be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 1 lakh which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh. Similarly, every defaulting officer will be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 25,000/- which may extend to Rs. 1 lakh.

(iii)    One person company

Section 122 provides that sections 98 and 100 to 111 shall not apply to one person company (OPC) . If a company is required to transact any business by ordinary or special resolution u/s. 114, it shall be sufficient in the case of OPC if the said resolution is recorded in the minute book which shall be signed by the Director.

4.  Registration of Charges:

4.1 New Sections 77 to 87 deal with the procedure relating to Registration of charges. These provisions are similar to provisions of sections 125 to 127, 130, 134, 135, 137, 138 and 141 to 143 of the existing Act. For this purpose, section 2(16) defines the word ‘charge’ to mean “An interest or lien created on the property or assets of a company or any of its undertakings or both as Security and includes a Mortgage. Section 2(16) has come into force from 12- 09-2013. Broadly stated, the new provisions are as under.

(i)    U/s. 77 every charge on the property or as-sets (whether tangible or intangible) created by a company (whether public or private) shall be registered with ROC within 30 days of creation of such charge. For this purpose, the prescribed form will have to be filed with the fees. In the event of any delay, ROC can permit the registration of such charge within 300 days on payment of additional fees.

(ii)    The existing section 125(4) requires a company to register only 9 type of charges. Under the new provision every charge created by it on property, assets or undertaking is to be registered u/s. 77.

(ii)    ROC has to give a Certificate of such registration in the prescribed form.

(iv)    If the company fails to register a charge, the person in whose favour charge is created can apply to ROC in the prescribed manner, as provided in section 78.

(v)    ROC has to keep a Register of charges in the prescribed form. This Register will be open to inspection to any person on payment of fees.

(vi)    Any modification of charge is also required to be registered with ROC.

(vii)    On satisfaction of any charge, it is also to be registered with ROC within 30 days. In the event of delay, ROC can permit such registration within 300 days on payment of additional fees.

(viii)    The company has also to maintain a Register of charges in the prescribed manner. This register shall be open to inspection by any member or creditor or by any other person subject to such reasonable restrictions as the company may by its AOA, impose.

(ix)    If the company does not register such creation, modification or satisfaction of charge the company or any other person can apply to the Central Government u/s. 87. The Government can order such registration of charge or its modification, satisfaction etc. on such terms and conditions as it may consider appropriate.

(x)    Draft Rules 6.1 to 6.10 prescribes Forms to be filed with ROC and other procedure to be followed and documents to be maintained for this purpose.

4.2    A new provision is made in section 83. It authorizes the ROC to make entries in the Register of charges if any evidence is produced before him about creation of a charge or modification/satisfaction of charge on any property/assets by a company. ROC has to intimate the concerned parties about making such entry within 30 days.

4.3 If there is any contravention of the provisions, section 86 provides for the following penalties.

(i)    The company shall be punishable with a minimum fine of Rs. 1 lakh which may extend to Rs. 10 lakh.

(ii)    Every defaulting officer shall be punishable with imprisonment upto 6 months or with minimum fine of Rs. 25,000/- which may extend to Rs. 1 lakh or with both.

The above penalty can be levied even if the company has complied with the above provisions but filed the particulars of charges, modification or satisfaction etc. of the charges within the extended time as stated above. This section has come into force on 12-09-2013.

5.    Declaration and Payment of Dividend:


Declaration of Dividend:

5.1 New Sections 123 to 127 provide for declaration and payment of Dividends by a Company. These Sections are similar to existing sections 205 to 207. Broadly stated these provisions are as under:-

(i)    The dividend can be declared and paid only out of the following profits;

(a)    Profits of the financial year, after providing depreciation as stated in Section 123(2) read with Schedule II.

(b)    Accumulated profits of the earlier years, after providing for depreciation u/s 123(2) read with Schedule II.

(c)    Out of money provided by Central or State Government for payment of dividend in pursuance of a guarantee given by the Government.

(ii)    Existing section 205(2A) provides that a dividend can be declared for any financial year only after transferring such percentage of profit not exceeding 10%, as may be prescribed. In the new section 123, it is provided that such dividend may be declared or paid after transferring such percentage of its profits for the financial year to reserves as the Company may consider appropriate. Thus a Company can declare or pay dividend in any year even without making such transfer to reserves.

(iii)    In the event of inadequacy or absence of profits in any financial year, the company can declare dividend out of its “Free Reserves” in accordance with the prescribed Rules.(Refer Draft Rule 8.1)

(iv)    Board of Directors can declare “Interim Dividend” out of surplus available in the Profit & Loss Account and out of profits of the Financial Year upto the date of declaration of such dividend. If the Company has made a loss upto the end of the quarter, preceding the date of declaration of interim dividend, the Board cannot declare interim dividend at a rate higher than the average dividend declared by the Company during the preceding 3 Financial Years.

(v)    The amount of dividend, including interim dividend, has to be deposited in a Separate Scheduled Bank Account within 5 days from the date of declaration.

(vi)    It will be possible for the Company to utilise the profits and reserves for issue of Bonus
Shares or for payment of Unpaid amount on partly paid shares.

(vii)    It may be noted that a Company cannot declare or pay dividend if it has made de-fault in repayment of Deposits or Interest as provided in sections 73 and 74 till such time when the default continues.

(viii)    Draft Rules 8.1 and 8.2 provides for certain conditions to be complied with before declaring dividend.


5.2  Unclaimed Dividend Account:

(i)    If any dividend is not claimed or paid within 30 days from the date of declaration, it has to be transferred, within 7 days, to a “Unpaid Dividend Account” to be opened in a Scheduled Bank.

(ii)    If any amount of unpaid dividend is not claimed or paid within 90 days, the company has to put the list of such unpaid dividend on the website of the company or other approved website in the prescribed manner. Draft Rule 8.3 provides for procedure for this purpose.

(iii)    In the event of delay in transferring the amount to such special account, the company will have to pay 12% P.A. interest on the unclaimed dividend amount.

(iv)    If the unclaimed dividend is not claimed by any shareholder for 7 years, the company will have to transfer the said amount to “Investor Education and Protection Fund” as provided in section 125. Procedure for this is provided in Draft Rule 8.4.

(v)    Section 124(6) makes a departure from the existing provisions of section 205C and provides that even the shares on which dividend is not claimed for 7 years will have to be transferred to the above Fund. For this purpose, a statement in the prescribed form is to be filed with the Administrator of the Fund. The shareholder whose shares are so transferred to the above Fund will have to make a claim for return of such shares with the Administrator of the Fund in the prescribed manner. Draft Rule 8.5 gives detailed procedure for this purpose.

5.3    Investor Education and Protection Fund:

New Section 125, corresponding to existing section 205C provides for establishment of Investor Education and Protection Fund. Central Government is authorised to establish this Fund and prescribe Rules for its administration as provided in section 125. Besides the unclaimed Dividend outstanding for 7 years and shares relating to such dividend, the company has also to transfer the following amounts which have remained unclaimed for 7 years.

(a)    Application Money received by the Company for allotment of shares or securities and due for refund.

(b)    Matured Deposits due with Interest.

(c)    Matured Debentures due with interest.

(d)    Sale proceeds of Fractional Shares arising out of issue of Bonus Shares, Merger and Amalgamation.

(e)    Redemption amount of Preference Shares remaining unpaid or unclaimed.

Detailed provisions are made in section 125 for administration of “Investment Education and Protection Fund”, investment of funds, return of the funds to claimants and utilisation of surplus funds. Central Government has to prescribe Rules for this purpose. It is also provided that the existing balance in Investor Education and Protection fund created u/s. 205C of the existing Act shall also be transferred to the new fund to be established under new section 125. Further, amounts transferred to the existing fund u/s. 205C (2) (a) to (d) of the existing Act can be refunded to the concerned person according to the Rules to be prescribed under new section 125. Detailed provision is given in Draft Rules 8.6 and 8.7.

5.4    Penalties for Defaults:

(i)    If a Company contravenes provisions relating to unclaimed Dividends as stated in section 124, it will be punishable with a minimum fine of Rs. 5 lakh which may extend to Rs. 25 lakh. Similarly every defaulting officer will be punishable with a minimum fine of Rs. 1 lakh which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh.

(ii)    If a Company has declared dividend but the same has not been paid or the warrant for the dividend has not been posted within 30 days from the date of declaration, the following penalties can be levied.

(a)    Every director who is knowingly a party to the default will be punishable with imprisonment upto 2 years and with minimum fine of Rs. 1, 000/- per day during which such default continues.

(b)    The Company will have to pay interest @ 18% p.a. on the dividend amount for the period of delay.

Proviso to section 127 states that under cer-tain circumstances the above penalty under (ii)will not be leviable.

(iii)    It may be noted that the above minimum fine is leviable at fixed amount without reference to the amount of dividend in respect of which the default has occurred. To the extent the above penalty provisions are harsh.

(iv)    Section 127 has come into force from 12-09-2013.

6.    To Sum Up

6.1. The above provisions for Management and Administration of companies in the New Act are more or less on the same lines as the existing provisions of the Companies Act, 1956. These provisions are mostly procedural. The company management will have to comply with the new procedure in the day to day working. Some of the procedures have been streamlined in order to improve Corporate Governance and also to safeguard the interest of the stakeholders.

6.2 The provisions relating to declaration and payment of dividend have also been streamlined under the new Act. In order to protect the interest Fixed Depositors it is now provided that no dividend on equity shares can be declared during the period when default relating to repayment of Fixed Deposit or Interest due continues. However, the minimum fine to be levied for default relating to payment of dividend is fixed without reference to the amount of dividend involved. To this extent the provision is also harsh.

6.3 Taking an overall view of the provisions relating to management and administration of companies under the new Act, including provisions relating to declaration and payment of dividends, acceptance of public deposits and registration of charges it can be stated that these will streamline and simplify the day to day procedural requirements. The officers in charge of the management and administration of companies will have to be vigilant in complying with the new provisions to avoid any defaults. If the new provisions are complied with in the spirit in which they are enacted, the quality of Corporate Governance will improve to a great extent in the coming years.

Greedonomics

fiogf49gjkf0d
It is said that there is no end to Greed. The Free Dictionary defines “Greed’ as an excessive or rapacious desire, especially for wealth or possessions”.

Though, I am not an Economist but a sceptical man, I see the current economic growth driven by first spending to create demand and then instigating people to spend. This instigation, is from various mediums, such as advertising, social status, etc. This gradually becomes a habit, which will lead to the need for money. To earn money, a person will do various types of jobs and then spend the money earned on his habits. People slowly get into the trap of spending and increasing demand, which then leads to inflation.

“Our economy is based on spending billions to persuade people that happiness is buying things, and then insisting that the only way to have a viable economy is to make things for people to buy so they’ll have jobs and get enough money to buy things.” ? Philip Elliot Slater

Management Gurus and Economists may explain this phenomenon as growth. For economies, money is the root for growth, more the money circulation more is the growth. But what is the limit of growth or is there any ideal growth rate?

As a thought, if people in economies that are growing at less than 1% can live a good life, then why should we increase at 8% or even higher!! It is like we all are in a race to grow fast. But wait, is it growth or are we going towards depletion of resource at a fast pace. If the existing resources would say last for next 100 years, why do we want to deplete them in 50 years?

“Worldwide, compared to all other fossil fuels, coal is the most abundant and is widely distributed across the continents. The estimate for the world’s total recoverable reserves of coal as of January 1, 2009 was 948 billion short tons. The resulting ratio of coal reserves to consumption is approximately 129 years, meaning that at current rates of consumption, current coal reserves could last that long.” – US Energy Information Administration (www.eia.gov)

There is a law of Diminishing Marginal Utility (DMU). The law of DMU states that other things being equal, the marginal utility derived from successive units of a given item goes on decreasing. Hence, the more we have of a thing; the less we want of it, because every successive unit gives less and less satisfaction. However, there is an exception to this law for a particular thing i.e. money.

For example, when a person is hungry, the first bite of food will give the most satisfaction, then the second. Thus, the hunger is satisfied by the last bite. However, it is reverse in case of money, with every increase in earnings, the greed to have more, increases.

This concept of DMU is used in business, to increase the sale of products by fixing a lower price. Since consumers tend to buy more to equate their utility (i.e. value for money) with price, the manufacturer can expect a rise in sale and thus, increase its margin by increase in volume. Indian mythology carries many examples around Greed and Deed. Lord Krishna said, “Karma kar, phal ki chinta mat kar” meaning “perform your duty with generosity without expecting any outcome from it. However, in reality, the way the businesses are run, is purely based on profit i.e. outcome. Kenneth Allard, a former army colonel and an adjunct professor in the National Security Studies Program at Georgetown University, holding a PhD from the Fletcher School of Law and Diplomacy and an MPA from Harvard University, has written a book named “Business is War”. He was dean of students of the National War College from 1993 to 1994.

He writes “A 21st-century business strategy for succeeding in a tough global economy. To succeed in today’s turbulent business environment operating in a ‘business as usual’ mode will no longer work. Conflict and competition can come from anywhere. In tough economic times, survival is a matter of waging war, and people are looking for proven strategies to solve all types of problems..”

Thus, it can be seen that the modern philosophy of business is changing. I would quote Mahatma Gandhi which sounds paradoxical to the latest business strategies, “Earth provides enough to satisfy every man’s needs, but not every man’s greed.”

How businesses are affected by Greed:
Take an example of Satyam Computers, who in their greed to grow over its competitors and derive higher valuations, constantly showed better results and increase in earnings per share. The fact was that, there were no real customers, the invoices raised were not realised in real and the money in fixed deposits was no more than paper. There is an increasing tendency of businesses competing with each other in the race to have higher valuations, which in turn depends on higher earnings. The thing to bear in mind is that “greed is good.” That is, it’s good for a business, but perhaps not for the society in which the business survives. Unrestrained greed in the business can lead to cruelty and malpractices. A business dominated by greed will often ignore the harm their actions can cause to others. Child labour, sweat shops, unsafe working conditions and destruction of livelihoods are all consequences of businesses whose personal greed overcame their social consciences.

Greed and Society
From a macro point of view, a society that bans individual greed may suffer. It is greed that makes people want to do things, since they will be rewarded for their efforts. It is a carrot and stick approach that can yield better results. Remove the reward and it may lead to reduction in incentive to work.

“The former Soviet Union provides an example of this: the collective farms provided no individual incentive to strive, and thus produced an insufficient supply of food. The individually owned and run truck farms, however, with the possibility of selling the produce and keeping the proceeds, grew a far greater harvest per acre than the collective farms. The “greed” of American farmers has allowed them to grow food for the world, since the more they produce the more money they make.”

Nonetheless, however you regard it, unrestrained greed is detrimental to the society; unrestrained disapproval of greed is detrimental to the society. People attempt to find a balance between personal and social necessity.

“If it weren’t for greed, intolerance, hate, passion and murder, you would have no works of art, no great buildings, no medical science, no Mozart, no Van Gough, no Muppets and no Louis Armstrong.” ? Jasper Forde, The Big Over Easy

To conclude, the strange fact as understood is that, once a person generates earnings, earnings originate greed. Then slowly, the earnings that gave birth to greed, gets to the back seat and greed governs the level of earnings. Thus, there is no limit to the desire to grow earnings, because, there is no end to Greed. Here, I remember a quote from the twenty-first verse in the Sixteenth Chapter of the Bhagavad-Gita, where Lord Krishna says:

“tri-vidham narakasyedam dvaram nasanam atmanah kamah krodhas tatha lobhas tasmad etat trayam tyajet” “Give up kama, krodha, lobha i.e. lust, anger, and greed. If you become influenced or affected by them, then you will open your door to hell.”

In this Contemporary World, it is very difficult to completely give up Greed, so this New Year, let us resolve one thing, Let us Rationalise our Greed…

levitra

Chartered Accountants can practice in LLP Format

fiogf49gjkf0d
Limited Liability Partnership Concept

The Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008 (LLP Act) was passed by the Parliament in December, 2008. Some sections of this Act came into force on 31-3- 2009. Some of the other sections have come into force on 31-5-2009. The LLP Rules, 2009, have come into force on 1-4-2009. Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) is a new form of statutory organisation which is gaining its importance and opening new opportunities for practising Chartered Accountants. Section 3 of the LLP Act provides that LLP formed under the Act is a body corporate and is a legal entity separate from its partners. It is also provided that LLP shall have perpetual succession and any changes in its partners will not affect the existence, rights or liabilities of the LLP. In other words, the concept of LLP is akin to a partnership firm with the liabilities of the partners being limited to the amount of capital contributed by the partners. It is a better alternative to a private limited company. The status of the LLP under the Income-tax Act is that of a ‘Firm’. After the amendment of the Chartered Accountants Act, w.e.f. 1-2-2012, the status of LLP formed by Chartered Accountants in practice is also that of a ‘Firm”. Government Notification dated 23-5-2011 provides that for the purposes of section 226(3)(a) of the Companies Act, LLP formed by Chartered Accountants in practice will not be considered as a corporate body. In this article the features of the LLP Act with special reference to eligibility of Chartered Accountants to use LLP format for their audit and tax practice are discussed.

Formation of LLP

Any two or more persons can form an LLP for the purpose of carrying on any business, profession or occupation. Even the LLP can also be a partner in another LLP. It is necessary that at least one of the partners in LLP should be a resident in India. Every LLP should have two designated partners who are individuals, one of whom should be a resident in India. The restriction of 20 partners which is applicable to a partnership firm does not apply to LLP. In other words, LLP with any number of partners can be formed for carrying on any business or profession. It may be noted that u/s.10 (23) of the Income-tax Act the definition of ‘Firm’ includes LLP and all the provisions relating to a partnership firm apply to LLP.

The partners of LLP will have to select a name and apply to the Registrar of Companies (ROC) in Form No. 1 with prescribed fees for approval of such name. The ROC will approve the name only if it is not the same or similar to the name of a limited company, an LLP or a firm. After getting the approval for a name, the partners will have to file the following Forms with ROC with the prescribed fees and follow the following procedure for incorporation of LLP.

(i) Form No. 2 — Form of incorporation document to be signed by all partners who have to join LLP as partners.

(ii) Form No. 3 — Form for filing LLP Agreement. For this purpose LLP agreement will have to be executed.

(iii) Form No. 4 — Notice of appointment and cessation of partners, designated partners, consent of partners/designated partners or any changes in their particulars to be filed by LLP with ROC.

(iv) Form No. 6 — Particulars of names and addresses of partners or changes therein to be intimated by partners to LLP.

(v) Form No. 7 — Application for allotment of Designated Partner Identification Number (DPIN).

(vi) Form No. 9 — Consent to act as designated partner to be filed by such partner with LLP.

(vii) When the above forms are submitted to ROC, he will give certificate of incorporation in Form No. 16. The LLP will be deemed to have been incorporated on that day. It can start its business or profession from that date.

Relationship of partners

Upon registration of LLP, the partners will have to enter into a partnership agreement in writing. This agreement will determine the mutual rights and duties of the partners and their rights and duties in relation to the LLP. Persons who have signed the incorporation document as partners along with other partners, if any, can execute this partnership agreement. The information of this partnership agreement is required to be filed with ROC with Form No. 3. Whenever there are changes in the terms and conditions of the partnership, LLP has to file the details of the change in Form No. 3 with ROC and pay the prescribed fees for the same. If the partnership agreement is executed before registration of LLP, the partners will have to ratify this agreement after incorporation of LLP and file the details in Form No. 3 with ROC.

If the partners do not execute the partnership agreement, the relationship between the partners will be governed by the First Schedule to the LLP Act. This schedule provides that mutual rights and duties of partners of LLP shall be determined as stated in this schedule in the absence of a written agreement. Even if there is a written agreement, but there is no specific mention about any of the specified matters, such matters will be governed by the provisions of First Schedule to the LLP Act.

Any person may join the LLP as a partner if all partners agree to admit him as a partner. Similarly, a partner will cease to be a partner on his death, retirement or on winding up of the LLP in which he is a partner. For this purpose, the partners will have to execute a fresh partnership agreement recording the terms and conditions of the partnership with revised constitution. Intimation about admission of new partners or retirement of a partner will have to be given to the ROC in Form No. 3 and Form No. 4 within 30 days.

The rights of a partner to share profits or losses of LLP are transferable either in whole or in part. Such transfer will not mean that the partner has ceased to be a partner or that the LLP is wound up. Such a transfer will not entitle the transferee or assignee to participate in the management or conduct of the activities of the LLP. Similarly, the transferee will not get right to any information relating to the transactions of LLP.

The partnership agreement may provide for payment of interest on amount contributed by partner in LLP or remuneration payable to the partners. Further, the agreement will have to provide the share of each partner in profits or losses of LLP. The partnership agreement should also provide for the voting rights of each partner. The conditions relating to payment of interest, remuneration or share in profits or losses can be changed by amendments in the partnership agreement. It may be noted that under the Income-tax Act interest and remuneration paid to the partners is allowable as deduction from business or professional income of LLP if it does not exceed the limits provided in section 40(b). The provisions of section 40(b) of the Income-tax Act are applicable to an LLP since its status under the Income-tax Act is that of a ‘Firm’.

 Limited liability of partners

A partner of LLP is not personally liable, directly or indirectly, for any debts or obligations of LLP. However, a partner will be personally liable for any liability arising from his own wrongful act or omission. If such liability arises due to wrongful act or omission of any partner, the other partners will not be personally liable for the same. Each partner of LLP will have to contribute such amount for the business of LLP as may be determined by the partnership agreement. The liability of each partner will be limited to the extent of the amount as specified in the partnership agreement.

Designated partners

As stated earlier, at least two partners (individuals) have to be appointed as designated partners. It is also necessary that at least one of the designated partner is a resident of India. Appointment of such partners will be governed by the partnership agreement. In the event of any vacancy due to death, retirement, or otherwise, LLP has to appoint another partner as a designated partner within 30 days. Particulars of designated partners or changes therein have to be filed with ROC in Form No. 4. If LLP does not appoint at least two designated partners or if the number of designated partners fall below two, all partners shall be considered as designated partners. It may be noted that the designated partner has to give consent in writing to the LLP in the prescribed Form No. 9 of his appointment. LLP has to file this consent letter with ROC in Form No. 4 within 30 days of his appointment.

The following will be the obligations of designated partners.

(i)    They are responsible, on behalf of LLP, for compliance with the provisions of the LLP Act and Rules, including filing of any document, return, statement, etc. as required by the Act and the Rules.

(ii)    They are liable for all penalties imposed on the LLP for any contravention of LLP Act and the Rules.

(iii)    Every designated partner will have to sign the annual financial statements and annual solvency statement.

(iv)    Each designated partner will have to obtain a ‘Designated Partner Identification Number’ (DPIN). For this purpose, the application is to be made in Form No. 7.


Accounts and audit

LLP has to maintain such books of accounts as prescribed in Rule 24 of the LLP Rules. These books should be retained for 8 years. Such books may be maintained either on cash basis or accrual basis of accounting. It may be noted that the accounting year of each LLP will have to end on 31st March. LLP cannot choose accounting year ending on any other date. LLP has to prepare a statement of accounts and a solvency statement on or before 30th September each year. These statements have to be signed by the designated partners of LLP. The accounts of LLP have to be audited by a Chartered Accountant in accordance with Rule 24 of the LLP Rules. Under this Rule, such audit is compulsory if the turnover of LLP exceeds Rs.40 lac or contribution of partners in LLP exceeds Rs.25 lac. Rule 24 provides for procedure for appointment, removal, resignation, remuneration, disqualification, change of auditors, etc. There is no specific form of Audit Report which is required to be given. ICAI will have to issue guidance in this respect. The particulars of statement of accounts and solvency statement have to be filed with ROC in Form No. 8 on or before 30th October each year with the prescribed fees. LLP has to file an annual return with ROC on or before 30th May each year in Form No. 11 with the prescribed fees.

Conversion of partnership firm into LLP

Section 55 of the LLP Act provides that an existing Partnership Firm (Firm) can be converted into LLP by following the procedure laid down in the Second Schedule. Briefly stated, this procedure is as under.

(i)    A firm may apply to convert into an LLP if and only if the partners of the LLP to which the firm is to be converted, comprise all the partners of the firm and no one else.

(ii)    The firm will have to comply with the provisions of the Second Schedule to the Act.

(iii)    The firm will have to follow the procedure for getting the name of LLP approved and procedure for incorporation of LLP as stated above.

(iv)    Further, the firm has to apply for conversion into LLP to ROC in Form No. 17 with prescribed fees. The firm has to attach documents listed in that Form.

(v)    The ROC will then give certificate of conversion into LLP in Form No. 19.

(vi)    Thereafter, the LLP will have to inform the Registrar of Firms about conversion of firm into LLP in Form No. 14. The Registrar of Firms will then remove the name of the firm from his records. Thus, the firm will be deemed to have dissolved.

Effect of conversion of firm into LLP

If an existing partnership firm is converted into a LLP and registered as such, as stated above, u/s.55 of the LLP Act, the effect of such registration shall be as under. This is provided in Second Schedule.

(i)    On and from the date of registration specified in the certificate of registration —

(a)    all tangible and intangible properties vested in the firm all assets, interests, rights, privileges, liabilities, obligations, relating to the firm and the whole of the undertaking of the firm shall be transferred and shall vest in LLP without further assurance, act or deed, and

(b)    the firm shall be deemed to be dissolved and removed from the records of the Registrar of Firms.

(ii)    If any of the above properties is registered with any authority, LLP shall, as soon as practicable, after the date of registration, take all necessary steps as required by the relevant authority to notify the authority of the conversion and of the particulars of LLP in such medium and form as the authority may specify. If any stamp duty is payable under the relevant law, the same will have to be paid.

(iii)    All proceedings by or against the firm which are pending in any court, tribunal or any authority on the date of registration shall be continued, completed and enforced by or against LLP.

(iv)    Any conviction, ruling, order or judgment of any court, tribunal or other authority in favour of or against the firm shall be enforced by or against LLP.

(v)    All deeds, contracts, schemes, bonds, agreements, applications, instruments and arrangements subsisting, immediately before the date of registration of LLP, relating to the firm or to which the firm is a party, shall continue in force on or after that date as if they relate to LLP and shall be enforceable by or against LLP as if LLP was named therein or was a party thereto instead of the firm.

From the above discussion, it will be noticed that a partnership firm, with unlimited liability of partners, can now be converted into limited liability partnership (LLP) by following the above procedure. Such partnership firm after such conversion will not be required to comply with the provisions of the Partnership Act.

Taxation of LLP

The Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009, provides for taxation of LLP. In the definition of the term ‘Firm’ and ‘Partnership’ in section 2(23) of the Income-tax Act, it is stated that the term ‘Firm’ or ‘Partnership’ will include any LLP w.e.f. 1-4-2009. Further, the definition of a ‘Partner’ will include a partner of LLP. Therefore, all the provisions for taxation of ‘Firm’ will apply to LLP. The tax will be payable by the LLP at 30% plus Education Cess. No surcharge will be payable by LLP from A.Y. 2010-11. In view of this provision, no Minimum Alternate Tax (MAT) will be payable by LLP. Similarly, no dividend distribution tax will be payable by LLP. As discussed above, the remuneration paid to working partners and interest to partners, subject to the limits prescribed in section 40(b), will be allowed in computing taxable income of LLP.

The return of income of LLP will have to be signed by a designated partner of LLP. If for some reason he is not able to sign the return, any partner can sign. New section 167 C is added to provide that each partner of LLP is jointly and severally liable to pay tax due from LLP if it cannot be recovered from LLP. If such partner proves that the non-recovery cannot be attributed to any gross neglect, misfeasance or breach of duty on his part in relation to the affairs of LLP, he will not be liable to discharge this liability. Similar provision exists in section 188A which applies to partners of a ‘Firm’. It may be noted that to this extent liability of partners LLP is unlimited.

Position under Chartered Accountants Act

The C.A. Act, 1949, has been amended by the Chartered Accountants (Amendment) Act, 2011 in December, 2011. This Amendment has come into force from 1-2-2012.

The following provisions are made by the Amendment Act.

(a) ‘Firm’ is defined in section 2(1)(ca) as under.

“(ca)    ‘Firm’ shall have the meaning assigned to it in section 4 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, and includes —

(i)    The Limited Liability Partnership as de-fined in clause (n) of s.s (1) of section 2 of the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008.

(ii)    The sole proprietorship registered with the Institute”

(b)    ‘Partner’ is defined in section 2(1)(eb) as under.

“(eb)    ‘Partner’ shall have the meaning assigned to it in section 4 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, or in clause (q) of s.s (1) of section 2 of the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008, as the case may be.”

(c)    ‘Partnership’ is defined in section 2(1)(ec) as under.

“(ec)    ‘Partnership’ means —

A.    a partnership as defined in section 4 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, or

B.    a limited liability partnership which has no company as its partner.”

(d)    Further, the Explanation to section 2(2) is amended to clarify that “a firm of such chartered accountants” shall include a firm or LLP consisting of one or more chartered accountants and members of any other professional body having prescribed qualifications.

Hitherto, the terms ‘Firm’, ‘Partnership’ or ‘Partner’ were not defined. The Amendment Act of 2011 now defines these terms. Therefore, LLP in which partners are Chartered Accountants holding CoP and members of other recognised professions, as may be prescribed, are also partners will be entitled to practice as Chartered Accountants if LLP is registered by ICAI. Such LLP can undertake any audit or attest function.

Conversion of a CA Firm into Limited Liability Partnership (LLP)

ICAI has issued detailed guidelines for conversion of CA Firm into LLP on 4-11-2011. These guidelines are published on pages 939-941 of CA Journal for December, 2011. Some of the salient features of these guidelines are as under.

(i)    All existing CA firms who want to convert themselves into LLPs are required to follow the provisions of Chapter-X of the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008 read with Second Schedule to the said Act containing provisions for conversion from existing firms into LLP.

(ii)    In terms of Rule 18(2)(xvi) of the LLP Rules, 2009, if the proposed name of LLP includes the words ‘Chartered Accountant’ or ‘Chartered Accountants’, as part of the proposed name, the same shall be referred to ICAI by the Registrar of LLP and it shall be allowed by the Registrar only if the Secretary, ICAI approves it.

(iii)    If the proposed name of LLP of CA firm resembles with any other non-CA entity as per the naming Guidelines under the LLP Act and its Rules, then the proposed name of LLP of CA firm which includes the word ‘Chartered Accountant’ or ‘Chartered Accountants’, in the name of the LLP itself, the Registrar of LLP may allow the same name, subject to compliance with Rule 18(2)(xvi) of LLP Rules as referred above.

(iv)    For the purpose of registration of LLP with ICAI under Regulation 190 of the Chartered Accountants Regulations, 1988, the partners of the firm shall apply in ICAI Form No. ‘117’ and the ICAI Form No. ‘18’ along with copy of name registration received from the Registrar of LLP and submit the same with the concerned regional office of the ICAI. These Forms shall contain all details of the offices and other particulars as called for together with the signatures of all partners or authorised partner of the proposed LLP.

(v)    The names of the CA firms registered with the ICAI shall remain reserved for the partners as one of the options for LLP names subject to the provisions of the LLP Act, Rules and Regulations framed thereunder.

(vi)    There are provisions relating to seniority of firms.

(vii)    These guidelines will apply to conversion of proprietary firm into LLP.

(viii)    There are similar provisions for formation of new LLP by Chartered Accountants in practice.

Position for statutory audit under the Companies Act

In July, 2011 issue of CA Journal, the President has, in his letter to the members, specifically stated that LLP will not be treated as Body Corporate for the limited purpose of appointment of statutory auditors. Following is the extract from the President’s letter which clarifies that the Ministry of Corporate Affairs have clarified by Circular No. 30A of 2011, dated 26-5-2011 that LLP of Chartered Accountants will not be treated as Body Corporate and MCA has taken the view that LLP can be appointed as a statutory auditors of the company.

“Important Clarifications

LLP will not be treated as Body Corporate for Limited Purpose of Appointment as Statutory Auditors:

Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) has now become a new form of statutory organisation which is gaining its importance and opening up new opportunities for the practising Chartered Accountants. The practising Chartered Accountants can now take the advantage in forming/realigning their firms as Limited Liability Partnership. As per section 3(1) of the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008, since a limited liability partnership is a body corporate, it is precluded from appointment as Statutory Auditors of the company u/s.226(3)(a) of the Companies Act, 1956 which provides by way of disqualification for appointment of auditor of a company that a body corporate cannot be appointed as an Auditor. To remove this lacuna, on a representation made by us, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs has clarified vide its Circular No. 30/2011, dated 26-5-2011 that Limited Liability Partnership of Chartered Accountants will not be treated as body corporate and has taken the LLP out of the purview of the definition of Body Corporate u/s.2(7)(c) of the Companies Act, 1956 and therefore, LLP can be appointed as Statutory Auditors of the company.”

It may be noted that in the Companies Bill, 2011, which is pending before the Parliament, section 139 dealing with appointment of auditors provides that any individual Chartered Accountant holding CoP or any firm of Chartered Accountants can be appointed as auditors of a company. Explanation to section 139(4) clarifies that a firm of Chartered Ac-countants shall include LLP practising the profession of Chartered Accountants. In view of the above, it is now evident that with effect from 1-2-2012, when the C.A. (Amendment) Act, 2011, has come into force, Chartered Ac-countants can join as partners and practice in LLP format. Such LLP will be eligible to be appointed as statu-tory auditors of a company under the Companies Act. Similarly, such LLP can also undertake tax audit assignment u/s.44AB of the Income-tax Act. Such LLP can also undertake any attest function under other laws as the definition of ‘Firm of Chartered Accountants’ in the C.A. Act now includes ‘Limited Liability Partnership’ registered with the Institute.

Taxation on conversion of a C.A. firm in LLP

As stated earlier, the C.A. Act has been amended with effect from 1-2-2012 to permit Chartered Accountants to practise in LLP format. ICAI has issued guidelines on 4-11-2011 for conversion of C.A. Firms into LLPs. ICAI is making all efforts to encourage those in business or profession to adopt LLP form of organisation. However, the Income-tax Act does not contain any specific provision granting exemption from tax on conversion of a Firm into LLP.

Since ‘Partnership Firm’ and ‘LLP’ are separate entities, on conversion of C.A. Firm into CA LLP the tax authorities are likely to treat such conversion as transfer of assets of the Firm to LLP. The tax authorities may treat this as transfer, as the firm will stand dissolved u/s.55 read with Second Schedule of the LLP Act, as discussed above. They may invoke the provisions of section 45(4) dealing with transfer of firm’s assets on dis-solution of the firm and levy capital gains tax on the difference between the market value of the assets of the firm on the date of such conversion and the cost of the assets of the firm.

It may be noted that section 47(xiii) and 47(xiv) of the Income-tax Act provides for exemption from capital gains tax on conversion of a firm or a proprietary concern into a limited company, subject to certain conditions. Further, the Finance Act, 2010, has inserted section 47(xiiib) to provide for exemption from capital gains tax on conversion of an unquoted limited company into LLP, subject to certain conditions. No such exemption is provided in the Income-tax Act when a firm is converted into LLP.

Explanatory Memorandum attached to the Finance (No. 2) Bill, 2009, stated that since a partnership firm and LLP is being treated as equivalent, the conversion from partnership to LLP will have no tax implication, if the rights and obligations of the partners remain the same after conversion, and if there is no transfer of any asset or liability after conversion. If there is a violation of these conditions, the provisions of section 45 will apply and capital gains tax will be payable. This is a very vague statement and does not specify any conditions in clear terms. There is no specific provision made in the Income-tax Act for granting exemption when conversion of a partnership firm is made into LLP and all assets and liabilities of the firm are transferred to LLP.

It may be noted that the Standing Committee on Finance, while considering Clause 47 of the Direct Taxes Code, Bill, 2010 in para 4.14 of their report has recommended that the Ministry should modify this Clause so that conversion of a partnership firm into LLP does not attract any tax liability.

If the LLP format is to be made popular for Chartered Accountants and others, it is necessary that ICAI and various chambers, representing the business community, should strongly represent to the Government to amend section 47 of the Income-tax Act. This can be achieved by inserting a new clause similar to section 47(xiii), granting exemption from capital gains tax, to any firm, which is converted into LLP under the provisions of section 55 read with the Second Schedule of the LLP Act.

NEW BANKING LICENSES-THE WAY FORWARD

1. Objective and Evolution of Global Banking

The word “bank” was borrowed from Middle French “banque”, from Old Italian “banca”, from Old High German “banc” which means “bench, counter”. Benches were used as desks or exchange counters during the Renaissance by Florentine bankers , who used to make their transactions atop desks covered by green tablecloths. Today, Industrial and Commercial Bank of China Limited (ICBC) the world’s largest bank , has about $2.43 trillion of deposits, which is almost higher than the nominal GDP of India, Italy, Russia, France and the UK.

Section 5 (c) of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 defines a bank as “a banking company which transacts the business of banking in India”. Further, section 5 (b) of the Act defines banking as “accepting, for the purpose of lending or investment, or deposits of money from the public, repayable on demand or otherwise, and withdrawal by cheque, draft, order or otherwise.”

Typically, the provision of deposit and loan products normally distinguishes banks from other types of financial firms. The core activity of banks is to act as intermediaries between depositors and borrowers. However, several banks have successfully leveraged this relationship with depositors and borrowers (channel) to provide all sort of financial services ranging from core services (ATM, Cards, project finance) to ancillary services (Bancassurance, Investment banking, Wealth Management, etc.) to complex & structured solutions (Mortgage Backed Securities, Collateralised Debt Obligation, etc.). For example, other income (non-funded revenues) of Axis Bank was at ~20% of total revenues in FY13.

Conversely, non-financial entities having eminent distribution networks have migrated to the role of providing banking services. For example, Japan Post Bank which is owned by Japan Post Holdings Co., has the largest public deposit in Japan ($1.81 trillion) garnered through a nationwide network of post offices. However, the bank primarily invests its money in government bonds and acts merely as a savings bank. In India, the Department of Posts has applied for a banking license and perhaps is pursuing a similar model.

Banks can create new money when they make a loan. New loans throughout the banking system generate new deposits elsewhere in the system. The money supply is usually increased by the act of lending, and reduced when loans are repaid faster than new ones are generated. In the United Kingdom between 1997 and 2007, there was a big increase in the money supply, largely caused by much more bank lending, which served to push up property prices and increase private debt. The amount of money in the economy in the UK went from £750 billion to £1700 billion between 1997 and 2007, much of the increase caused by bank lending. In fact in many European countries, bank assets dwarf the size of the local economy and are far in excess of other regions in the world as per Table 1.

Excessive or risky lending can cause borrowers to default, the banks then become more cautious, so there is less lending and therefore less money so that the economy can go from boom to bust as happened in the UK and many other Western economies after 2007. Consequently, European banks’ profits have plummeted from 46% to 1.58% in the Top 1000 bank profits list whereas Asia’s banks have increased their profits from 19% to 56%.

2.    Evolution of Banking in India and need for new banking licenses

While global banking has seen regional disproportional growth due to country specific economic and regulatory requirements, India has its own model for financial development and its regulations. To a great extent, the conservative approach adopted by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has helped insulate the domestic banks from global crisis; on the other hand, none of the Indian banks have become global in size.

India has 168 Scheduled Commercial Banks (SCBs) and 82 cooperative banks. Of the 168 SCBs, 82 are Regional Rural Banks and 26 are Public Sector Banks. Thus, only 60 banks are private of which, 40 are foreign banks. According to RBI’s quarterly statistics on deposits and credit of scheduled commercial banks in March 2012, PSBs accounted for approximately 75% per cent of the aggregate deposits. This lopsided structure, where all the eggs are in the same basket, increases the risks to the economy and erodes financial stability while adding a lot of stress on the public banks to increase financial Inclusion. Further, Indian banks will have to bring in additional capital of Rs. 5 lakh crore to meet Basel III norms. The government on its part has to infuse Rs. 90,000 crore into the PSBs to maintain majority shareholding under Basel III.

RBI has as a strategy, since the economic liberalisation in 1991, has followed the cycle of permitting new bank licenses once every decade—in 1993, 2003 and 2013. This permits RBI to regulate the growth and stability of the banking system as well as the new entrants.

The key economic environment under which new banking licenses will be awarded in 2013 could be summarised as below:

•    Overall economic growth

We are in a situation where economic growth has collapsed, industrial output has stagnated for two years, jobs are being shed, consumer inflation is close to 10%, the current account deficit (CAD) in the balance of payments is nearly 5% of GDP at last count, investment is fleeing abroad, external debt maturing in the current fiscal year exceeds $170 billion and the rupee is touching new lows against the dollar each week. While the RBI and the Government are intervening with short-term measures, longer term initiatives are imperative.

As per the discussion paper on the entry of new banks into the private sector (Discussion Paper): “It is generally accepted that greater financial system depth, stability and soundness contribute to economic growth. But beyond that for growth to be truly inclusive requires broadening and deepening the reach of banking. A wider distribution and access of financial services helps both consumers and producers raise their welfare and productivity.”

There are three fundamental reasons for this cor-relation: (1) the banking system creates a more stable employment environment and provides more business opportunity, (2) it helps enlarging the per capita GDP as it brings the unaccounted sector into its fold and (3) it brings additional capital to the banking system, which has a snowball effect.

•    Financial Inclusion

As per the census of India about 59% of households had access to banking services in 2011 and the all-India average population per bank branch was 12,500 in 2012. The majority of India’s 6,50,000 villages do not have even one bank branch, and just 3.5 of every 10 Indians have access to formal banking services in the country, according to a 2011 World Bank survey. Only 37,471 branches were operational in rural India, as of March 2012, while the total banking outlets in villages (including branches, business correspondents and other modes) number just 1,81,753.

While the existing banks also function as per the same mandate (one rural branch out of every four branches), the entry of new players, with a specific and deeper financial inclusion as a license condition, should augment the overall rural presence.

•    Efficiency and Competition

While the overall efficiency of banks in India is increasing, there exists a lot of scope to improve the efficiency of the public sector banks. Net impaired assets (net NPAs + restructured assets) have increased rapidly in FY12 and FY13. Net impaired assets to net worth ratios are now at alarming levels, particularly for PSU banks. Barring BOB and SBI, for all other PSU banks, net impaired assets are almost equal to or even more than 1Q14 net worth. However, for private sector banks, stress levels are very much under control and manageable. Net impaired assets as a percentage of net worth is ~10% for private sector banks (except for Axis Bank at 14% and ICICI Bank at 12%).

Even for private banks, bringing in fresh competition from well-managed business houses, having proven track record in both profitability and setting up pan-India networks (e.g. telecom), will improve the competition and bring in innovation into the system which will only benefit the consumer. Currently, since there are only 3-4 private banks which have pan-India presence, entry of larger business houses will provide competition and much required depth to the financial system in India.

3.    New banking license guidelines

RBI granted licenses to 10 private players between 1993 and 2003. The players were ICICI Bank, HDFC Bank, UTI Bank (now Axis), Global Trust Bank (GTB), IDBI Bank, Times Bank, Centurion Bank, Bank of Punjab, IndusInd Bank, and businessman CR Bhansali, who was accorded an in-principle approval but the bank never materialised. Of the 10, four were promoted by financial institutions and the remaining six by individual banking professionals. As it turned out, all those promoted by individuals either failed or merged with other banks, (viz., GTB with Oriental Bank of Commerce and Times Bank, Bank of Punjab and Centurion Bank with HDFC Bank).

The central bank become more cautious, and be-tween 2004 and 2010 granted licenses only to Kotak Mahindra Bank and Yes Bank.

The failures/mergers were essentially due to (1) weak corporate governance/frauds (CR Bhansali and GTB) and (2) lack of promoter interest or deep pockets (Times Bank, Bank of Punjab and Centurion Bank). RBI also noted that the experience of the Local Area Banks have also not been encouraging due to small size and concentration risk. Similar is the situation with RRBs.

The discussion paper thus notes: “The experience of the Reserve Bank over these 17 years has been that, only those banks that had adequate experience in broad financial sector, financial resources, trust-worthy people, strong and competent managerial support could withstand the rigorous demands of promoting and managing a bank.”

Further, Indian regulators have also learnt that during the 2008 crisis, it was the strength of the Indian JV partner which helped sustain the business, for example, an entity like Tata AIG. Further, RBI also learnt that only domestic banks (unlike foreign banks) have been able to penetrate the country and support financial inclusion.

In light of the macroeconomic situation and experiences both domestically and internationally (Lehman Brothers collapse, etc), RBI has come out with guidelines for issuance of new banking licenses. The table below attempts to summarise the key conditions of the guidelines and rationale for the same:

While the objective tests have been laid down as above, RBI has retained subjectivity in the allotment of banking license to give itself flexibility in decision making. It is expected that the RBI may consider the following and perhaps more, while evaluating each of the applications:

•    Industrial and business houses having a long history of building and nurturing new businesses in highly regulated sectors such as Telecom, Power,

Automobiles, Defence, infrastructure projects like Airports, Highways, Dams, Ports probably may be considered favourably as industrial and business houses with presence across various sectors would face a higher reputational risk compared to a pure individual promoter or financial services player.

•    Background of promoter, directors and top executives. No objection certificate of the promoter’s credentials, integrity and background will probably be taken from banks, other regulatory agencies and also from investigating agencies.

•    Corporate governance standards in the corporate entity, extent of financial activities carried out by the industrial/business house, comfort with the corporate structure within the group, whether ownership is diversified and separate from management and the source of promoters’ equity.

4.    Applicants and way forward

Unlike an NBFC License, a banking license is controlled with an occasional window which opens briefly, once in a decade. Essentially, some sort of excitement is expected over the number of applicants. In 1993, 13 applications were received out of which 10 were awarded the license. In 2003, 100+ applications were received out which license was awarded only to two. When the current guidelines of 2013 were announced, media reports expected over 100 applications to be received by RBI before the cut-off date of 1st July, 2013. To everyone’s surprise, only 26 applicants were received. Expected big names like Mahindra & Mahindra Financial Services Ltd opted not to apply citing that the new rules may be too hard for businesses to implement.

Of course, each applicant would have done his cost benefit analysis before applying. The apparent benefits, amongst others, would be

(1)    Scalability and stability of business,

(2)    Better cost of capital due to access to public deposits,

(3)    Distribution network so as to improve the fee based income (eg- Bancassurance), and

(4)    Return on investments. Table 2 indicates the share price performance of new banks commenced since 1993.

The key challenges for setting up the bank would, amongst others, be

(1)    Stringent regulations, not just for the bank, but for all financial regulated entities in the Applicant group and

(2)    Cost on account of priority sector lending, branch expansion and financial inclusion.

The bigger issue arises from the fact that the conditions are expected to be complied with from day one of the commencement of the bank business. RBI has emphasised that it will not deviate from the guidelines while allotting licenses and thus, will not grant any exemptions.

The list of applicants along with a possible classification, and RBI’s potential key consideration for that bucket is tabled below.

RBI is now expected to set up a committee to screen and shortlist the applicants who will be called for interviews and discussion on the business plan. The in-principle approvals for the licenses are expected to be issued anywhere before the election next year and most probably between January to March 2014. It also needs to be seen if Mr Raghuram Rajan, the new RBI Governor (and former IMF chief economist) who was not in favour of the government giving banking licenses to industrial houses, has a decisive role to play in the grant of the banking licenses. His opinion has been that existing peers, like NBFCs and MFIs, should be given preference over corporates owing to their experience in this business. According to Mr Rajan, “If corporates are given license, the regulator needs to ensure there is no inter-company lending, proper risk management processes are followed and there is enough transparency.”5

Of the number of applicants, RBI will now be required to address several critical questions, including:

•    How many banking licenses should be issued, assuming the industry is likely to consolidate?

•    Will players with pan-India focus be given preference over regional players? Or whether both the categories of applicant will be considered?

•    Whether large industrial houses with experience in setting up pan-India networks like telecom, automobiles, etc., will get preference?

* The authors are senior officials of a well-known financial company. The views expressed in the article are their personal views.

1Medici Bank

2The Bankers Top 1000 World Banks Ranking – July 2013

5http://articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2011-04-02/ news/29374475_1_banking-licence-corporate-houses-raghuram-rajan

E-filing of tax returns goes to the next level

fiogf49gjkf0d
Readers would be aware of the e-filing requirements with reference to income-tax returns. These were brought onto the statute long back and, by now, most of us are well versed in the process of e-filing of the ITR forms. We also have the e-filing requirements under Company Law whereby we have been filing documents electronically with the MCA. For the past few years, ever since the e-filing of returns was made mandatory, we have had a situation where the audited accounts, the tax audit report, the MAT certificate etc., have not been submitted to the tax department unless specifically called for during a scrutiny. This, in my opinion, has inadvertently led to a bit of leniency being shown by many of our members in terms of timely closure of documentation and filing.

Background:
Section 139 requires certain categories of persons to file tax returns in India. Section 139(1) states that the returns need to be in prescribed form. Rule 12 lays down the prescribed forms. Proviso to Rule 12(3) as amended vide Notification No. 37/2011/F. No. 149/68/2011-SO(TPL) dated 01-07-2011 makes it mandatory for some of these categories of return filers to e-file their returns mandatorily. For others, there is an option to e-file the returns (section 139(1B)) but only if they are assessable in specified cities. Section 139(1B) empowers the Government to formulate a scheme for e-filing. In pursuance of this power, the “Furnishing of Return of Income on Internet Scheme 2004” was notified on 30-9-2004. Then, this scheme was superseded by the “Electronic Furnishing of Return of Income Scheme 2007” vide notification No. SO 1281 (E) d. 27-70-2007.

As per Rule 12 (2), ITR-1, 2, 3, 4, 4S, 5 & 6 are not required to be accompanied by any documents. For A.Y. 2009-10, vide Circular No. 3/2009 d. 21-05-2009, the TP reports were to be filed physically before the due date. Thereafter, we have not had any such similar circulars but the practice of filing the TP reports on or before the due date for filing the returns has continued.

Recent notifications:

Now, on 1st May, 2013, the CBDT issued a Notification (No. 34/2013/F. No. 142/5/2013-TPL) which made amendments to Rule 12 whereby, the following proviso has been inserted in sub Rule (2) w.e.f. 1st April, 2013:

“Provided that where an assessee is required to furnish a report of audit under sections 44AB, 92E or 115JB of the Act, he shall furnish the same electronically.”

It is on account of this amendment that now, tax payers who are subject to a tax audit or a transfer pricing audit or who have to pay MAT, are now required to file the respective reports electronically.

Subsequent to the abovementioned notification, another notification has been issued on 11th June, 2013 (Notification No. 42/2013/ F.No.142/5/2013-TPL) which amended the proviso to Rule 12(2) which was inserted by the earlier notification dated 1st May. Now, the amended proviso reads as under:

“Provided that where an assessee is required to furnish a report of audit specified under sub-clauses (iv), (v), (vi) or (via) of clause (23C) of section 10, section 10A, clause (b) of sub-section (1) of section 12A, section 44AB, section 80-IA, section 80-IB, section 80-IC, section 80-ID, section 80JJAA, section 80LA, section 92E or section 115JB of the Act, he shall furnish the same electronically.”

As a result of the above amendment, now, many more reports are required to be filed electronically.

Another interesting amendment that was made vide the notification dated 11th June is the insertion of second proviso to sub rule (3) of Rule 12. The newly inserted proviso reads as under:

“Provided further that a person who is required to furnish any report of audit referred to in proviso to sub-rule (2) electronically, other than a person to whom clause (aaa) or clause (ab) of the first proviso is applicable, shall furnish the return, in Form as applicable to him, in the manner specified in clause (ii) or clause (iii).”

The cumulative impact of all the amendments is that any taxpayer who is subject to any audit will have to file the audit report electronically and, in addition, also have to file its tax return electronically.

The new e-filing regime:
Before we look at the details of the new e-filing regime, a quick look at the changes in type of tax return forms that can be filed for A.Y. 2013-14:

 Form No.

 Change applicable from A.Y. 2013-14

 ITR-1 (Sahaj) 

 Cannot be used by an individual having:
i. A loss under IFOS
ii. A claim for foreign tax credit/relief under section 90/90A/91
iii. Exempt income exceeding Rs. 5,000

 ITR-4S (Sugam)

Cannot be used by an individual/HUF having:
i. A claim for foreign tax credit/relief under section 90/90A/91
ii. Exempt income exceeding Rs. 5,000

Similarly, the amended position regarding how the tax returns can be filed with effect from A.Y. 2013-14:

Registration of Chartered Accountant on e-filing portal:

Significantly, the onus of uploading the tax audit report, transfer pricing report, MAT certificate, trust audit report etc., has been cast on the concerned Chartered Accountant who signs such a report/certificate. As a result, the process of e-filing of such reports would begin with the concerned CA having to register himself/herself on the e-filing portal. It may be noted that many CAs would already be registered with the said portal and would have been filing their personal tax returns electronically. However, even such CAs would still need to register themselves once again on the portal. For this, one would need to visit www. incometaxindiaefiling.gov.in and register on the site under the sub-category of “Chartered Accountants” under the main category of “Tax Professional”.

While registering, the CA will have to provide his ICAI Membership Number and date of enrolment with the ICAI. We need to be careful with this data since I am informed by a Regional Council Member of ICAI that this data is cross-verified by the portal with the ICAI records. While this information is not verified by me, if it is true, then even a small mistake may lead to problems in registration. Once the CA is registered successfully, he/she would get a notification by email and on a mobile (so, both these fields are mandatory and we will have to provide a valid email ID and a valid mobile number while registering). The activation link received through email has to be activated and then the registration would be completed. The CA would then get a new login name which is based on this ICAI Membership Number as opposed to the PAN-based login ID that we are generally accustomed to.

Once the CA registers on the site, his client will then need to register the CA as the signatory to the respective report/certificate. So, for example, in case of a taxpayer XYZ Pvt. Ltd., the tax audit report will be signed by CA Mr. A, the transfer pricing report will be signed by CA Ms. B and the MAT certificate will be signed by CA Mr. C, then the said company will have to log onto the e-filing portal and register each of these CAs for the respective report/ certificate. When this is done, the concerned CA will get a mail informing that a particular taxpayer has registered the CA as its signatory. The message contains the following line:

Dear AMEET NAVINCHANDRA PATEL,

User AAXXXXXX1B has added you as the CA for FORM3CA, FORM3CB for 2013-14.

Filing of tax returns only after uploading other reports:

It may be noted that it is no longer possible for a taxpayer to file the ITR form unless the various applicable audit reports (tax audit, transfer pricing, trust, MAT) are uploaded electronically. In the ITR form, the date of uploading of each such document has to be mentioned.

Actual uploading of tax audit reports:

Once the CA has registered himself/herself and the client has also registered the CA as the tax auditor, the uploading of the tax audit report (TAR) can be done. This has to be done by the concerned CA. It may be noted that in case of partnership firms who are appointed as the tax auditors, it is the individual partner who has to register himself/herself and not the firm. Also, the same partner will also need a Digital Signa-ture Certificate (DSC) to be able to upload the TAR.

For uploading the TAR, a CA would need to download the utility provided by the tax department on their portal. Once the utility is downloaded onto a local computer, the CA can start feeding in the data. This is offline preparation of the form. The CA also has the option of going online and preparing the form and submitting it immediately thereafter. However, considering the various issues that have already been faced by the CAs who have tried to use the utility, and also considering that this is the first year of e-filing of the TAR, one would need to be very courageous to attempt an online preparation and submission.

A very important feature of the utility provided by the tax department on their site is that it is NOT MS Excel based. This is one of the biggest drawbacks of the said utility. The utility is not user friendly and requires every bit of data to be manually entered by the CA. Also, it does not allow a user to “cut-paste” from any other file. So, if you thought that you could keep an Excel sheet open and then cut from there and paste the data into the utility, you have a shock in store for you. Many CA firms use private software for preparing the computation of income and also the ITR forms. Such firms will need to decide whether they would like to use the utility provided by the Government for uploading the TAR or whether their private software vendors will provide the utility. This article refers to the utility provided by the Government. For running this utility, you will require your computer to have Java Runtime Environment Version 7 Update 6 or above (32 bit) installed in it.

Once the data is entered into the utility, the entire file needs to be validated (on similar lines as the validation required for ITR forms). Upon successful validation, the CA needs to generate a .XML file. The .XML file then has to be uploaded onto the portal with the help of a DSC (which can be either in the form of a .pfx file or a USB token). Once this is done by the CA, the ball then moves to the court of the concerned taxpayer who will get a notification that his CA has uploaded the TAR for his (taxpayer’s) approval. The taxpayer will then have to review the TAR and “Approve” or “Reject” the same. If for any reason, the assessee rejects the TAR, then the concerned CA would need to resolve the difference that the assessee has and then once again generate a fresh .XML file and upload it. The assessee would then again need to log in and “Approve” the same. Once the assessee approves the TAR with the help of a DSC, the same gets officially filed with the Income-tax department and an e-acknowledgement gets generated. This closes the e-filing procedure as far as the TAR is concerned.

Uploading of financials:

Quietly, along with the e-filing of the TAR, the Government has also simultaneously made it mandatory for the tax auditor to also upload the scanned copies of the audited accounts. Fortunately, the tax auditor does not need to feed in the balance sheet and P&L items all over again but merely scan the accounts and upload the same. This has to be done at the time of uploading the TAR. The scanned documents can be either in .TIFF format or in .PDF format. The overall size of the files cannot exceed 20MB. It appears that this limit stands increased to 50MB as per the General Instructions in the utility. However, the main screen where the said accounts are to be uploaded continues to show the size restriction as 20MB.

Actual uploading of other reports:

The same procedure as is adopted for uploading the TAR has to be followed for other forms as well. Thus, whether it is the Transfer Pricing Report in Form 3CEB or the MAT certificate in Form 29B or the audit reports of trusts, the same procedure of uploading data by the CA, validating the file, generating .XML file, uploading the said .XML file with the help of a DSC and then approving of the same by the assessee with the help of his DSC has to be followed. Upon successful “approval” of each report by the assessee, a separate e-acknowledgement gets generated.

Issues currently being faced:

There are a number of hardships that CAs are facing in the context of e-filing of the various audit reports. Some of the important ones (on which the BCAS has already made a representation) are:

1.    After the notification, the forms and the utility files were hosted on the e-filing website in the month of July, 2013 and have undergone several changes. After each change, an assessee, who has partly filled in a report but has not uploaded it, is required to re-feed the entire data, verify and then upload in the latest version, for the report to be furnished on the website. As a result, all the work-in-progress is wasted.

2.    It is not clear as to whether the financial statements to be attached have to be a scanned copy of the manually signed statements or even a PDF file digitally signed will be treated as sufficient compliance. Also, it is unclear as to where the notes to account, the auditor’s report, director’s report and the schedules are to be uploaded. In the portal, there are only the following fields for uploading the accounts:

a)    Balance Sheet

b)    Profit & Loss Account

3.    In respect of several clauses of the Form 3CD, it is normal practice for CAs to give appropriate comments. But in the e-filing utility, there is no space provided for such comments/notes/ remarks/disclaimers etc. In such a situation, would it be legally valid for the assessee/tax auditor to keep the appropriate comments/remarks/explanation in the hard copy and in the utility, mention either “Yes”/”No”/”0” etc. as the case may be? Here the real question is whether an assessee can have two sets of 3CD—one that is uploaded electronically and another one that is signed physically? My personal view is that this would not be correct. However, considering the problem at hand, one needs a written clarification from the Government. The other option that a tax auditor may consider is of putting all comments/remarks/ disclaimers etc. in the 3CA/3CB. However, there seems to be an overall limit on the number of characters that one can feed into the 3CA/3CB. So, in many cases, this option may not work. Also, whether doing such a thing results in the report being perceived to be a qualified report is also a question that needs pondering over.

4.    In the clause relating to depreciation on fixed assets, there is no column to give details of additional depreciation. Further, it appears that date-wise details of all the minor items of additions to fixed assets are also required to be given. This data could run into a few thousand entries for many businesses, and would take substantial time to re-enter.

5.    In the clause relating to quantitative details, often, such data is not available. In such cases, the tax auditor simply reports “Information Not Available”. Now, in the e-filing utility, it is not possible to give such a comment. What does one do in such a situation? In the same clause, in case of manufacturing assessees, if the yield is more than 100%, the utility does not accept the figure. On a lighter vein, does it indicate that the Government does not expect taxpayers to be extra-efficient?

6.    In the clause relating to ratios, in case of service industry or professionals, normally the tax auditor states that “since the activity of the assessee is neither trading nor manufacturing, such ratios are not applicable.” In the e-filing utility, there is no space for such a comment. In this situation, can a tax auditor simply skip this clause?

7.    If one sees the Income-tax Rules, in Form 3CD, Annexure II is still a part thereof despite the fact that from A.Y. 2010-11, the provisions of FBT are made ineffective. The e-filing utility does not provide this Annexure II. It is not clear as to what the exact position is. Can an e-filing utility override the statutory forms prescribed?

8.    In the clause relating to payments covered u/s. 40(A)(2)(b), it appears that every payment so made is required to be reported. Hitherto, the tax auditor used to report only the total amount for each type of transaction with a particular party. Now, it seems that the date-wise transaction details are to be given. This will cause a lot of hardship to the tax auditor while filling in the data.

9.    In the clause relating to loans taken or repaid, one has to give the PAN of the party reported. It appears that the utility matches this PAN with the Government’s PAN records and if the name and PAN do not match exactly then the file does not get validated. If this is true, then this is likely to cause tremendous slowdown in the preparation of the reports.

Thus, as can be seen from the above paragraphs, filing of returns and tax audit and other reports for A.Y. 2013-14 is going to be a very cumbersome and difficult process and unless the tax department comes up with solutions to the numerous problems very soon, we are very clearly headed for an extremely stressful month of September and then later, November. One hopes that the CBDT will read the representations sent by professional bodies like BCAS and act expeditiously.

Audit & Auditors under the Companies Bill, 2012

The Companies Bill 2012 (the Bill) was tabled in
the Parliament on 18th December, 2012. The Bill has been undergoing
reviews prior to that and may shortly become an Act. Clauses 139 to 148
under the Chapter X of the Bill deal with “Audit and Auditors”. It would
not be out of place to mention here that the new provisions regarding
Auditing and Auditors will materially change our professional
responsibilities. This article attempts to discuss the criticalities and
the key issues relating to the Chapter in the Bill that deals with our
profession.

Appointment of Auditors [Clause 139]

Key
Provisions The Bill provides that a company will appoint an individual
or a firm as an auditor at its first AGM. Such auditor shall hold the
office till the conclusion of its sixth AGM and thereafter till the
conclusion of every sixth Annual General Meeting. Though the appointment
is for five years, ratification of such appointment is necessary at
every AGM. [Clause 139(1)]

In case of listed companies and
certain other classes of companies to be prescribed compulsory rotation
of audit is provided for a) In case of Individual auditor, after one
term of five years; and b) In case of a firm, after two terms of five
years [Clause 139(2)].

The auditor, after completion of his
term/s, will not be eligible for reappointment for a period of five
years. Also, a firm, which has common partners with the outgoing audit
firm on the date of appointment, cannot be appointed as the auditor of
the company. [Clause 139(2)]

Every company will need to comply
with these requirements within three years from the date when these
provisions come into force. [Clause 139(2)]

Members of the
company may also decide that a) Audit Partner and audit team shall be
rotated after certain interval or b) Audit shall be carried out by joint
auditors. [Clause 139(3)]

RBI and IRDA have powers to regulate
the banking/ insurance companies respectively under the relevant Acts.
Being regulators, these institutions have issued guidelines for
appointment and rotation of auditors. The rotation and the joint audit
requirements enacted by IRDA and RBI, being stricter and by virtue of
special powers given to them in this regard, will prevail over the
provisions of the Bill. In such a case, the appointment criteria will
continue to be as per their respective norms.

An audit firm
(including an LLP) eligible to be appointed should have majority
partners practicing in India qualified for appointment. However, only a
qualified chartered accountant partner will be eligible to sign the
audit report. [Clause 141(2)] Eligibility of an LLP for being appointed
as an auditor is now a part of the Bill. [Clause 139(4)] Under the
Companies Act, 1956 (the Act) a notification was issued to the effect
that an LLP will not be considered as a body corporate for the purpose
of Section 226(3)(a) of the Act. However, doubts were expressed whether
that was sufficient for an LLP to be appointed as an auditor of a
company.

A company may remove the auditor before the expiry of
five year term by passing a special resolution and obtaining prior
approval of the Central Government. [Clause 140(1)]

An auditor
may resign. However, he has to file a statement with ROC and also with
the CAG in case of a company where the appointment of the auditor has
been made by CAG, giving facts and reasons for the resignation [Clause
140(2)].

Comments
Prior to the Bill, the Government
had published the Voluntary Corporate Governance Guidelines in December
2009. According to these Guidelines, rotation of audit firm after five
years was suggested and it provided for compulsory rotation of audit
partner after three years. This entire thought process was aimed towards
providing strict norms of corporate governance and enhancing investor
confidence. However, compulsory rotation of audit partner and
appointment of joint auditors have been left to the discretion of the
members of the company in the Bill. Also, the Bill mandates two terms of
5 years where auditor is a firm as against one term under the above
Guidelines. To that extent, there is dilution from the original
corporate governance norms.

A study of regulatory framework with
regard to appointment of auditors prevailing in various countries shows
that there exists a joint audit system in different forms in many
countries. Joint audit is common in countries like Denmark, Germany,
Switzerland and France. In France, joint audit became a legal
requirement in 1966. All publicly listed companies in France and Denmark
that prepare consolidated (group) financial statements are required to
be audited jointly by two independent auditors and a single audit report
is to be issued. Some mandatory provisions in the Bill in this regard
would have only given boost to the investor sentiments.

Further,
in case of listed companies which have long term audit relationships,
it would be a challenge to cope with a sudden rotation. The new auditor
will have no time for understanding the intricacies of business of the
company. This, in fact, enhances the need for joint audit system prior
to rotating out the existing audit firm and would have provided
continuity and at the same time helped more quality audit firms to
emerge in the country. Nevertheless, the corporate world and auditing
community can come together to take advantage of voluntary provision of
joint audit to overcome these challenges.

As regards the
appointment/reappointment clause in the Bill, existing companies are
required to comply with the regulation within three years. However, the
wording of the clause providing for transition is not clear. Presently,
an auditor is appointed annually. After the enactment of the Bill, the
appointment will take place for 5 years. Hence, the audit firm may be
considered as eligible for appointment for two terms after the
provisions become applicable, since the audit firm will not have
completed the `term’ under clause 139(2)(b) of the Bill though the firm
may have been the auditor of the company for 10 years or more. However,
if we were to go by the spirit and the intent of the Bill, it seems that
the fact that companies are given transition period for three years,
indicates that the firm will not be eligible to be reappointed after
three years post the enactment of the Bill if it has already been the
auditor for 10 years or more.

A question remains whether an
audit firm, which has been the auditor of a company for more than 5
years when the provisions come into force, can be appointed as the
auditor of the company for 5 years at all after? Such appointment will
result in the firm being auditor of the company for more than 10 years
after the transition period. It may be noted that there is no provision
in the Bill to appoint auditor for a period shorter than 5 years. Can
the audit firm, in such a case, issue eligibility certificate under the
Bill?

Considering this, one is not clear how these provisions are going to be implemented in the initial years.

Eligibility, Qualification & Disqualifications of the Auditors [Clause 141]

Key Provisions

A person will not be eligible for appointment as auditor if he, his
relative, or his partner holds any security of or interest in or is
indebted to the company, its subsidiary, holding or associate company or
subsidiary of such holding company.

A person or an audit firm
will be disqualified for appointment if he/it has direct or indirect
business relationships with all types of entities mentioned above.

A
person whose relative is a director or key managerial person by
whatever designation in the company is not eligible for appointment.

A person who is auditor in more than 20 companies will also not be eligible for being appointed as the auditor.

A
person who is convicted by a court of an offence involving fraud is not
eligible for the appointment as auditor for 10 years from the date of
such conviction.

Comments

It is significant to note
that the term used in this clause is “Person”. This term is not defined
in the Bill. In only case of “Business relationship” the term “firm” is
also used. However, in clause 139 the Bill uses the terms “Individual
auditor” and “firm”. Going by the spirit, in my opinion, term “person”
in the context means each individual partner of the firm.

Considering
this, going by the wording of the provisions, it is not clear whether
to attract disqualification to the firm should itself hold any security
or interest etc. in the company? Also, if a partner or his relative is
holding security, whether the firm will be disqualified? Clarification
may be needed on this. Also, where one partner is individually holding
appointment as auditor in more than 20 companies, whether his firm will
be disqualified? Going by the spirit of the clause, this does not seem
to be the case, though the drafting is susceptible to such
interpretation.

Keeping track of whether any relative is holding
any security above rupees one thousand (or the prescribed amount) or is
indebted to the auditee company is going to be extremely difficult. In
case of strained relationship with any of the relatives, a member will
find himself on helpless ground if any of the relatives decides to make
him ineligible for appointment or complains after the signing of audit
report that he was ineligible.

Surprisingly, a person or a
partner whose relative has a business relationship with the auditee
company or its subsidiary, associate etc. is not disqualified. Also, the
clause does not refer to `partner of the firm’ but only to the firm.
Does it mean a partner of a firm can have business relationship with the
company in his individual capacity without the firm attracting
disqualification?

The existing limit of undertaking audit of 20
companies per partner though continues under the Bill, this limit will
now apply while appointing auditors of private companies as well. Under
the Act, this limit is not applicable to private companies. The Bill has
also done away with the sub-limit 10 companies where the paid up share
capital of the company is Rs. 25 lakh or more. It is not clear from the
text of the Bill whether signing of consolidated financial statement in
addition to the stand alone financial statements of the company would be
construed as a separate audit assignment to be covered under the limit
of 20 companies.

The intent of the legislation seems good.
However the drafting of the Clause 141 is highly vulnerable to varied
interpretation (or misuse) . Overall, this clause will require great
amount of deliberations especially from the point of view of severity of
the punishments for violating any of the provisions.

Powers, Duties, Auditing Standards and Reporting Formalities [Clause 143,145,146]

Key Provisions

The
Bill provides that the auditor of a holding company will have right of
access to the records of all its subsidiaries so far as it relates to
consolidation of financial statements.

The Bill also requires the
auditor to report whether he has any reasons to believe that an offence
involving fraud is being or has been committed by any of its officers
or employees. The auditor will have the responsibility to report the
matter to Central Government within the time and manner as may be
prescribed.

At present, the auditor is required to report any
observation with any adverse effect on the functioning of the company in
bold/italics in the audit report. The Bill mandates that such
observation/comments should read at the AGM and can be inspected by any
member.

Currently auditor is required to comment on the internal
control matters and whether such system is commensurate with the size of
the company and nature of its business in respect of purchase of
inventory, fixed assets and for the sale of goods and services. The Bill
requires auditor to comment whether adequate internal financial control
is in place and whether it is operating effectively.

The Bill specifically provides that it is the duty of the auditor to comply with the auditing Standards. [Clause 143(9)].

The
Bill provides for mandatory attendance of auditor’s authorised
representative who is qualified to be appointed as an auditor at the AGM
of the company.

Comments

The right of access to
the auditor to the records of all subsidiaries of the auditee company
for the purposes of consolidation may create certain issues among the
auditors in case the auditor of the subsidiary is different from the
auditor of the holding company.

Requirement of adherence to
auditing standards under the Bill (which was hitherto requirement of
ICAI alone) coupled with the penalties attached for non compliance has
substantially increased the auditors’ responsibility. The cost of audit
will increase and small audits may become unaffordable to both the
company and the auditor.

The scope of audit is materially
broadened with the reporting responsibility on the existence of a fraud.
As per SA240 that deals with the “Auditor’s responsibility relating to
frauds in an audit of financial statements”, the primary responsibility
of prevention and detection of fraud rests with management together with
those charged with governance of the entity. Fraud detections require
an attitude which is inherently different from the at-titude required
for the purpose of an audit. Further, in India in case of audit of
banks, the regulator has prescribed the fraud reporting responsibilities
on the statutory auditor. However, the regulator has given clear
directions with regard to the materiality and corresponding reporting
responsibility to various authorities. The Bill does not state any
materiality limits for the fraud reporting. All these indicate that
auditor has to inform all frauds detected/suspected during course of
audit to the Central Government.

Reporting on effectiveness of
internal control is highly subjective. Any comment thereon in the report
may impact the entity significantly. This will increase the
professional responsibility as well as the liability of the audit firm
very significantly.

Further in respect of reporting on fraud, in
the absence specific guidelines, there is a possibility of difference of
opinion whether any offence involving fraud has taken place. For
example, any strategic investment made by the company that is managed by
relatives of the top management or the Board, or divestment of
investment below market value but much above the cost of acquisition to a
company that is substantially influenced by the relatives of top
management or the board members may be construed to be a fraud. Such
interpretational issues may have to be dealt with very carefully
considering the penalties involved in non compliance of reporting
requirement.

Prohibition of undertaking certain services [Clause 144]

Key Provisions

The
Bill provides stringent norms for independence of the auditors. Under
the Bill, an audit firm will not be able to provide certain services
directly or indirectly to a company where it is appointed as the auditor
or to its holding company or subsidiary

companies. (Clause 144) The prohibited services are as under: –

1.    Accounting and book keeping services

2.    Internal Audit

3.    Management services

4.    Design and implementation of any financial sys-tems

5.    Actuarial services

6.    Rendering of outsourced financial services

7.    Investment banking or advisory services

It
is important to note that the restrictions of undertaking the above
mentioned prohibited services apply not only to the firm undertaking the
audit but to all other connected entities of the firm namely:

i)  All its partners;

i)    Its parent, subsidiary or associate entity; and

ii)   
Any other entity in which the firm or any of its partners has (or can
exercise) significant influence or control or whose name, trade-mark,
brand is used by the firm of any of its partners.

The auditor
will have to comply with the above restrictions before the end of the
first financial year after the enactment of the Bill.

Comments

The
Bill uses term “Management Services” for one of the prohibited
services. Under ICAI standard, the term “Management Consultancy
Services” is used for indicating prohibited service. The term
“Management Consultancy Services” used by ICAI at present specifically
excludes Tax services. In my opinion, though there is minor difference
in the terminology used in the Bill and by ICAI, an auditor will be able
to render services related to Direct Taxes and Indirect Taxes.

Punishment for contraventions [Clause 147]


Key Provisions
If
there are any contraventions of any of the provisions relating to audit
and auditor by the company then the company and every officer in
default will be punishable with a minimum fine of Rs. 10,000 and maximum
of Rs. 5 lakh and/or imprisonment extending up to 1 year. [Clause
147(1)]

In a case the auditor contravenes provisions of clauses
139 or 143 to 145 of the Bill, the auditor may become liable to a
minimum fine of Rs. 25,000, which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh. However, if
it is proved that the contraventions have taken place knowingly or
wilfully with the intent to deceive the company, its shareholders, its
creditors, or tax authorities, the auditor will be punishable with
imprisonment for a term up to one year and minimum fine of Rs. 1 lakh
which may go up to Rs. 25 lakh. [Clause 147(2)]

In the event the
auditor is convicted of intentionally deceiving the company,
shareholder, creditors or tax authorities he will be liable to refund
the remuneration received by him to the company and incur liability to
pay damages to all such persons/ authorities for loss arising out of
incorrect or misleading statements made in his audit report. [Clause
147(3)]

Further, if proved that partner or partners of the audit
firm have acted in a fraudulent manner or abetted or colluded in fraud
then the liability for such act will be that of the firm and the
concerned partners jointly and severally. [Clause 147(s) and Explanation
to Clause 140(5)]

Members or depositors or any class of them are
entitled to claim damages, compensation or demand any suitable action
from/or against audit firm for any improper or misleading statement made
in the audit report. [Clause 245(1)(g)(ii)]

Comments

The
Bill rests a heavy responsibility on the audit profession and the
provisions are open to abuse. Eventually, even if the auditor is able to
prove that his actions were not fraudulent or that he had sufficient
evidence to support his comment in the report he has submitted, the
audit firm carries the risk of damage to reputation on account of
accusations. It is necessary to provide sufficient defense measure for
the auditing community at large.

National Financial Reporting Authority [Clause 132]

The
discussion in regard to audit and auditors cannot be complete without
mentioning the immergence of the new authority National Financial
Reporting Authority (NFRA). The existing advisory committee under the
Act known as NACAS will be replaced by NFRA with much wider powers. It
will a) Make recommendation on formulation and laying down accounting
and auditing standards; b) Monitor and enforce the compliance of
accounting and auditing standards; c) Oversee the quality of service of
the professions associated with ensuring compliances with standards and
suggest measures required for improvement in the quality of service; and
d) Perform such other functions as may be prescribed.

NFRA has
been also entrusted with wide powers such as to investigate suo moto or
on reference made by the Central Government into matters of professional
or other misconduct committed by a chartered accountant or a firm of
chartered accountants. Once NFRA commences investigation, ICAI or any
other body cannot initiate or continue proceedings in such matters. NFRA
will have the same powers as vested in a civil court under Code of
Civil Procedures.

For proven misconduct, NFRA will have power to
levy penalty amounting to not less than Rs. 1 lakh but which may extend
to five times the fees received in a case of an individual and not less
than Rs. 10 lakh but which may extend to ten times in case of a firm.

NFRA
will also have the authority to debar a firm or a member from engaging
in practice as a member of ICAI for a minimum period of six months or
such higher period not exceeding 10 years as may be decided by NFRA.

Comments

NFRA
is authorised to act as a regulator for members registered under the CA
Act. This means it may also take action against the company officials
if they are chartered accountants. With constitution of NFRA, powers of
ICAI in regulating members’ conduct will be diminished.

Excessive Powers to Make Rules

In
spite of having in the Bill stringent regulations relating to the audit
and auditors, the Bill has given powers to the Central Government to
prescribe rules at as many as 19 places in Chapter X alone (in the
entire Bill at 346 places). A summary of provisions where powers to
prescribe rules have been given is as under:

Procedure for selection of auditors [Clause 139(1)]

Eligibility conditions for appointment as auditor [Clause 139(1)]

Classes of companies that require rotation of auditor [Clause 139(2)]

Approval from Central Government for removal of auditor [Clause 140(1)]

Statement by the auditor to be filed with ROC in case of resignation [Clause 140(2)]

The value of security that my be held in auditee company [Clause 141(3)(d)(i)]

Amount up to which auditor may be indebted to auditee company [Clause 141(3)(d)(ii)]

Amount of guarantee that may be given to the company in respect of any third person [Clause 141(3)(d)(iii)]

Nature of business relationship with the company [Clause 141(3)(e)]

Information to be included in the “financial Statements” [Clause 143(2)]

Matters that an audit report should include [Clause 143(3)(j)]

Duties and powers of auditors in respect of branches outside India [Clause 143(8)]

Time limit and manner of reporting of fraud to the Central Government [Clause 143(12)]

Prohibited services by an auditor [Clause 145]

Class of companies that need to maintain Cost re-cords [Clause 148(1)]

Items of cost that should be included in books of account [Clause 148(1)]

Net worth or turnover of the companies that require Cost audit [Clause 148(2)]

Manner of calculating remuneration of a Cost Audi-tor [Clause 148(3)]

Conclusion

It
is necessary for all of us to take serious cognizance of all these
provisions in the Bill. We need to understand the entire direction in
which the legislation is moving and be ready to build necessary
professional expertise as well as safeguards in the interest of the
profession.

Companies Act, 2013 – Accounts and Audit Provisions

The existing Companies Act was enacted in 1956 with the object to consolidate the law relating to corporate sector and to regulate its activities. This Act is in force for the last over 56 years and has been amended several times. In view of changes in national and international economic environment and growth of our economy, the Government has decided to replace the Companies Act, 1956, by a new legislation. Originally Companies Bill, 2009 was introduced in the Lok Sabha in August, 2009 and was referred to Parliamentary Standing Committee. The Government received several suggestions from various stakeholders. After due consideration of various recommendations, a fresh Companies Bill, 2011 was introduced in the Lok Sabha and again referred to the Parliamentary Standing Committee. Lok Sabha has passed this Bill as Companies Bill, 2012 on 18th December, 2012. Now the Rajya Sabha has also passed the Bill in August, 2013. The President has given his assent on 29th august, 2013. Thus the Companies Act, 2013, has now been enacted and will come into force from the date to be notified by the Government. It may be noted that out of 470 Sections, 98 Sections have come into force with effect from 12-09-2013 by a notification issued by the Government. Sections 128 to 133 and 138 to 148 of this Act deal with Accounts, Audit and Auditors. These provisions will have far reaching implications for the Audit Profession. In this article some important provisions contained in the Companies Act, 2013 are discussed.

1.    Maintenance of Accounts

1.1 New section 128 of the Companies act, 2013 (New Act) provides for books of accounts to be maintained by the company. This section is similar to the existing section 209 of the Companies Act, 1956. The new section provides that every company shall prepare and keep at its registered office and at its branches such books of account and other relevant papers as may be prescribed. The company can maintain such books and records in the electronic mode. It is clarified in the section that the books of account should be kept on accrual basis and according to the double entry system. The section also provides that the company shall retain the books of accounts with the relevant vouchers and relevant other financial records for a period of 8 financial years. Recently, the government has issued some Draft rules framed under the New Act for public comments. Draft rules 9.1 and 9.2 deal with procedure for maintenance of accounts by Companies.

1.2 It may be noted that for the first time new section 2(41) defines the term “Financial Year” to mean the period ending on 31st March of every year. Therefore, every company will now be required to maintain accounts from 1st April to 31st March which is the accounting year to be adopted for Income tax purpose. There is only one exception to this rule in the case of a holding company or subsidiary company incorporated outside India which is required to maintain its accounts for a financial year which is different from April to March. In such a case, different financial year can be adopted by getting approval of the National Company Law Tribunal (Tribunal). Further, if any existing company is adopting different financial year it will have to fall in line with the new provision within a period of two years from the date on which the new Companies Act comes into force.

2. Financial Statements

2.1 New Section 129 provides for preparation of financial statements.

The term ‘Financial Statement’ is defined in the new section 2(40) to include balance sheet, profit and loss account/income and expenditure account, cash flow statement, statement of changes in equity and any explanatory note annexed to the above. Section 2(40) has come into force from 12-09-2013. New section 129 corresponds to existing section 210. It provides that the financial statements shall give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company and shall comply with the accounting standards notified under new section 133. It is also provided that the financial statements shall be prepared in the form provided in new schedule III.

2.2 It may be noted that in the new schedule III the provisions for preparation of balance sheet and statement of profit and loss have been given which are on the same lines as in the existing schedule VI. Further, in the new Schedule III detailed instructions have been given for preparation of consolidated financial statements as consolidation of accounts of subsidiary companies is now made mandatory in section 129.

2.3 It may be noted that for the first time a provision has been made in the new section 129(3) that if a company has one or more subsidiaries it will have to prepare a consolidated financial statement of the company and of all the subsidiaries in the form provided in the new schedule III. The company has also to attach along with its financial statement, a separate statement containing the salient features of the financials of the subsidiary companies in such form as may be prescribed by the rules. It is also provided that if the company has interest in any associate company or a joint venture the accounts of that associate company as well as joint venture shall be consolidated. For this purpose “associate company” has been defined in new section 2(6) to mean a company in which the reporting company has significant influence i.e. it has control of atleast 20% of the total share capital of the company or has control on the business decisions under an agreement. The Central Government has power to exempt any class of companies from complying with any of the requirements of this section and the rules made under the section.

2.4 New section 136 provides for right of members to get copies ofaudited financial statements, auditors’ report, Board Report etc. at least 21 days before the date of AGM. In the case of a listed company it will be sufficient if a statement containing the salient features of such documents in the prescribed form is sent to the members at least 21 days before the AGM. Further, new section 137 provides for filing of the financial statement etc. with ROC. These provisions are similar to existing sections 219 and 220.

2.5 Draft Rules 9.3 and 9.4 provide for procedure to be followed and the Forms for compliance with Section 129.

3.    Reopening of Accounts

3.1 New sections 130 and 131 provide for the manner in which a company can reopen or recast its books of account or financial statements. This is a new provision made in the company legislation for the first time. At present, the Government has taken the view that the accounts once adopted by the members of the company at the AGM cannot be reopened or recast.

3.2    New section 130 provides that if it is found that (i) the accounts for a particular year were prepared in a fraudulent manner or (ii) the affairs of the company were mismanaged during the relevant period casting a doubt on the reliability of financial statements, an application will have to be made by the Central Government, the Income tax Authorities, the SEBI, any other statutory regulatory body or authority or any concerned party to a competent Court or Tribunal. On receipt of the order of the Court/Tribunal the company will have to reopen its accounts or recast its financial statements in conformity with the order. The accounts so revised or recast shall be considered as final.

3.3 New section 131 provides for voluntary revision of financial statements or Director’s Report. Under this section, if it appears to the directors that (i) financial statement or (ii) report of the Board of Directors for a particular financial year does not comply with the provisions of the new sections 129 or 134, they can revise the financial statement or director’s report in respect of any of the three preceding financial years. For this purpose the directors have make an application to the Tribunal in the prescribed manner and obtain its order. Before giving such an order the Tribunal has to give notice of hearing to the Central Government and the Income tax Authorities. It is also provided that such revised financial statement or report of directors shall not be prepared more than once in any financial years. Further, detailed reasons for such revision will have to be disclosed by the directors in their report to the members in the relevant financial year in which revision is made.

3.4 The Central Government has been authorised to make Rules about the procedure for such voluntary revision of financial statements and director’s report. These Rules will also provide for reporting requirements applicable to the auditors of the company. Draft rules 9.5 to 9.8 provide for the procedure to be followed by the Company for this purpose.

4.    Accounting and Auditing Standards

4.1 New Sections 132, 133 and 143(10) provide for issue of Accounting and Auditing Standards. Existing Sections 210A and 211(3A) to (3C) deal with notification of Accounting Standards on the advice of National Advisory Committee on Accounting Standards (NACS). It may be noted that NACAS is now replaced by a new authority called National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA) with very wide powers.

4.2 New Section 132 provides for constitution of NFRA, its functions and powers. Briefly stated these provisions are as under.

(i)    The Central Government will constitute NFRA consisting of a chair person, who shall be a person of eminence and having expertise in accounting, auditing, finance or law and such other full-time or part-time members, not exceeding 15, as may be prescribed.

(ii)    Terms and conditions and the manner of appointment of chairperson and members of NFRA and other related matters shall also be prescribed.

4.3 New Section 133 provides that the Central Government will prescribe the Standards of Accounting or any addendum to such standards as recommended by the Institute of Chartered Accountant of India (ICAI) in consultation with and after examination of recommendations made by NFRA. These Accounting Standards will be binding on the companies as well as their auditors. New section 143(10) provides that the Central Government will prescribe standards of Auditing or any addendum to such standards in a similar manner. It is also provided that until such auditing standards are notified by the Government, the existing Auditing Standards issued by ICAI will be binding on the auditors. It may be noted that new Section 133 has come into force from 12-09-2013. However, Section 132 providing for constitution of NFRA has not yet come into force. In such an event it is difficult to understand how powers u/s. 133 will be exercised by the government under this Section. Further, it is not clear as to what is the position of NACAs at present. Draft Rule 9.9 provides that the existing accounting standards made under the Companies Act, 1956, shall continue till the new standards are framed.

5.    The functions of NFRA:

5.1 New Section 132 provides for functions of NFRA as under:-

(a)    to recommend to the Central Government about formation of Accounting Standards and Auditing Standards for adoption by Companies and their auditors.

(b)    to monitor and enforce the compliance with the accounting and auditing standards in such manner as is prescribed in the Rules.

(c)    to oversee the quality of service of the profession associated with ensuring compliance with such standards.

(d)    to suggest measures required for improvement in the quality of service by the professionals (i.e. chartered accountants, Cost accountants and company secretary) and such other related mat-ters as may be prescribed.

(e)    to perform such other functions relating to the above matters as may be prescribed by the Rules.

5.2 The powers which NFRA can exercise are as under.

(a)    Power to investigate, either on its own or on a reference made by the Central Government, in cases of such bodies corporate or persons, as may be prescribed, into the matters of performance or other misconduct committed by a Chartered Accountant or a Firm of Chartered Accountants. Once NFRA initiates this investigation, ICAI will have no authority to initiate or continue any proceedings in such matters.

(b)    NFRA shall have the same powers as vested in a civil Court under Code of Civil Procedure, 1908. In other words it can issue summons, enforce attendance, inspect books and other records, examine witness etc.

(c)    If any professional or other misconduct is proved, NFRA can impose penalty as under.

•    In the case of an Individual CA. minimum penalty of Rs. 1 lakh which may extend to 5 times of the fees received by the Individual.

•    In the case of a C.A. Firm, minimum penalty of Rs. 10 lakh which may extend to 10 times the fees received by the Firm.

•    NFRA can debar any Chartered Accountant or a CA Firm from practice for a minimum period of six months or for such higher period not exceeding 10 years.

5.3 Any person/firm aggrieved by any order of NFRA can file appeal before the Appellate Authority. The Central Government has been empowered to appoint such Appellate Authority consisting of the chairperson and not more than two other members. The qualifications of those constituting the Appellate Authority and all other related matters will be prescribed by the Rules.

5.4 The above provisions in new section 132 will over ride any provisions contained in any other statute. This will mean that the council of ICAI will not be able to exercise its powers relating to disciplinary action against auditors of companies. Even powers to formulate auditing standards, ensure quality of audit etc. are now vested in NFRA. To this extent the autonomy conferred on ICAI under the C.A. Act, 1949, is partially taken away.

6.    Rotation of Auditors

6.1 ICAI had successfully objected to the introduction of the system of Rotation of Auditors for the last six decades. Several commissions and Parliamentary Committees had agreed that rotation of auditors is not in the interest of the Accounting Profession and the corporate sector. In spite of this, provision for rotation of auditors has now been introduced by enactment of new section 139 in the New Act.

6.2 Appointment of Auditors:

The provisions of new section 139 dealing with appointment of auditors can be briefly stated as under.

(i)    After incorporation of a company, the first auditors (Individual or Firm of CA) should be appointed by the Board of Directors within 30 days. If the Board does not make such appointment, an extraordinary general meeting of members will have to be called within 90 days for appointment of auditors. The first auditors shall hold office upto the conclusion of first AGM.

(ii)    At the first AGM, the auditors will have to be appointed for a period of 5 years i.e. from conclusion of the AGM to the conclusion of the sixth AGM. This appointment will have to be ratified by the members every year at each AGM during this period of 5 years.

(iii)    Before appointment, the auditors will have to give their consent in writing along with a certificate in accordance with the prescribed conditions. The auditor has also to give a certificate that the criteria for his appointment given in new section 141 is satisfied.

(iv)    After such appointment, the company will have to file a notice with ROC within 15 days and also inform the auditors.

(v)    Draft Rules 10.1 and 10.2 provide for the procedure for selection of Auditors and conditions of their appointment.

6.3 Procedure for Rotation of Auditors:

(i)    The system of Rotation of Auditors has been introduced in the case of Auditors of listed companies and other class of companies (specified companies) as may be prescribed by rules. This is provided in new section 139(2) as under.

(a)    If the auditor is an Individual, he cannot be auditor of such a company for more than 5 consecutive years.

(b)    If a firm/LLP is auditor, it cannot be auditor of such a company for more than two terms of 5 consecutive years (i.e. 10 years)

(c)    In the case of an Individual who has been auditor for one term of 5 years, he cannot be reappointed by the company for the next 5 years. In the case of a firm/LLP who has been auditors of such a company for 10 years cannot be reappointed by the company for the next 5 years. It may be noted that any firm/LLP which has one or more partners who are also partners in the outgoing audit firm/LLP cannot be appointed as auditors during this 5 year period.

(d)    After the Companies Act, 2013, comes in force, every existing listed or specified company will have to comply with the above provisions relating to Rotation of Auditors within 3 years from such commencement. From the wording of second proviso to Section 139(2) it is not clear whether, for the purpose of Rotation, the period prior to the New Act coming into force should be counted for calculating the period of 10 years. Draft Rule 10.4(4)(i) states that for the purpose of Rotation the period for which the Auditor has been holding office as Auditor prior to the commencement of the New Act shall be taken into account in calculating the period of 5 or 10 consecutive years.

(e)    Thus, if an Auditor (Individual) was Auditor of any specified Company for 5 consecutive years or a Firm has been Auditors of such a Company for 10 consecutive years prior to the New Act coming into force, such Auditors will be subject to the new provisions for Rotation. As stated in Para 9.2 below, the provisions relating to Rotation will also apply to Branch Auditors.

(f)    The Central Government can make Rules to prescribe the manner in which companies shall rotate their auditors. It may be noted that Draft Rule 10.1 to 10.4 provide for procedure for Rotation of Auditors.

(g)    It may be noted that Draft Rule 10.3 provides that theabove provisions for Appointment and Rotation of Auditors will apply, besides listed Companies, to all public and private companies, other than one-person Company or small Companies.

(ii)    New section 139(3) provides that the members of any company can resolve at any AGM that the audit firm/LLP appointed by it shall rotate the audit partner and his team at such internals as specified in their resolution.

(iii) It may be noted that section 139 specifically provides that the term ‘Firm’ shall include a Limited Liability Partnership (LLP). Section 141 also states that a body corporate will not include a LLP. In other words, any company can appoint LLP wherein majority of the partners are practicing chartered accountants, as auditors of the company.

(iv)    In the case of Government companies, the C & AG has been given power to appoint auditors within the specified time limit. Provisions have also been made for filling up casual vacancy in the office of the auditors in Government companies as well as private sector companies. There are also provisions to deal with contingencies where retiring auditors are not be reappointed. It is also provided that in the cases of private sector companies where Audit Committees are constituted, the appointment of auditors can only be made by the Board/

AGM after consideration of the recommendation of the audit committee. These procedures are on similar lines as provided in the existing Companies Act with minor modifications

6.3 Since the C.A. Act permits Chartered Accountants to form LLP for professional practice and the new Companies Act permits such LLP to render service as auditors of companies, it is necessary to suggest to the Government for amendment of section 47 of the Income tax Act. At present, section 47 (xiiib) provides for exemption from capital gains tax when a company is converted into LLP, subject to certain conditions. There is no similar exemption given on conversion of firm into LLP. Unless this exemption is given by amending section 47 of the Income tax Act, it will be difficult for existing C.A. firms to convert into LLP for rendering audit service. Let us hope that council of ICAI will make suitable representation to the Central Government for amendment of Income tax Act.

7.    Removal of Auditors

7.1 New Section 140 provides for Removal, Resignation etc. of Auditors. The procedure given in this section is more or less similar to the existing procedure in section 225 with the following difference.

(i)    Under new section 140 an auditor can be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only after obtaining the previous approval of the Central Government and after passing a Special Resolution by the Members. For this purpose the company will have to comply with the prescribed rules.

(ii)    If an auditor resigns from his office, he is required to file, within 30 days, a statement in the prescribed form with the company and ROC.

In the case of a Government company, this form is also required to be filed with C& AG.
In this statement the auditor has give reasons and other facts relevant for his resignation. For failure to comply with this requirement, the auditor is punishable with a minimum fine of Rs. 50,000/- which may extend upto Rs. 5 lakh.

(iii)    If the auditor is found to have, directly or indirectly, acted in a fraudulent manner or abetted or colluded in any fraud by the company or any of its officers, the Tribunal can, on its own or on an application by the company, Central Government or any concerned person, direct the company to change the auditors. In the case of such an application by the Central Govern-ment for change of Auditors, the Tribunal can, within 15 days, pass an order that the auditor shall not function as such and the Central Government will be able to appoint another auditor. The auditor who is removed by the Tribunal cannot be appointed as an auditor of that company for 5 years. Further, under the new section 447 the auditor who is guilty of fraud will be punishable with imprisonment for a minimum term of six months which may extent to 10 years and shall also be liable to pay a minimum fine of an amount involved in the fraud which may extend to 3 times the said amount. If the fraud involves public interest the minimum period of imprisonment will be 3 years.

7.2 Draft Rules 10.5 and 10.6 provide for procedure for removal and resignation of an Auditor.

8.    Eligibility and Qualification of Auditors

8.1 New section 141 deals with eligibility, qualifications and disqualifications of Auditors. This section is similar to the existing section 226 with the following modifications.

(i)    A firm of Chartered Accountants can be appointed as auditors of a company only if ma-jority of its partners are partners practicing in India.

(ii)    As stated earlier, a LLP can be appointed as auditors of a company. However, in such a case only those partners of LLP who are chartered accountants in practice can be authorised to act and sign on behalf of the LLP.

(iii)    It is provided that no Individual or Firm of chartered accountants can be appointed as auditors of a company if the Individual, his partner or partner of the firm or any relative of such persons hold any shares in the company, its holding or subsidiary or associate company. However, a relative of such persons can hold shares of the F.V of Rs. 1,000/- or such higher amount prescribed by the rules. Draft Rule 10.7(2) increases this limit from Rs. 1,000/- to Rs.1 Lakh. Similarly, the limit for indebtedness to the Company, its subsidiary etc. is also fixed

(iv)    A person whose relative is a director or is in employment of the company as a director or key managerial personnel cannot be appointed as auditor.

(v)    A person who is associated with any entity which is engaged in consulting and specialized services as specified in the new section 144 cannot be appointed as auditor.

8.2 Draft Rule 10.7 provides for circumstances under which an Auditor will be disqualified.

9. Powers and Duties of Auditors

9.1 New section 143 provides for powers and duties of Auditors. This section is similar to existing section 227. In the Auditor’s Report on the financial statements, apart from the existing reporting requirements, the auditor has to state (i) the observations or comments on the financial transactions or matters which have any adverse effect on the functioning of the company and (ii) whether the company has adequate internal financial controls system in place and the operating effectiveness of such controls. The Central Government is also authorized to expand the requirements of reporting by the Auditor. Draft Rule 10.8 states that the Audit Report shall now state the views of the Auditors in respect of (a) whether the Company has disclosed the effect of any pending litigations on its financial position in its financial statement, (b) whether the company has made provision for foreseeable losses on long term contracts, including derivative contracts and (c) whether there has been delay in depositing money into the Investor Education and Protection Fund by the Company.

9.2 New section 143(8) provides for appointment of Branch Auditors.

This section is similar to the existing section 228. At present if the statutory auditor is not to conduct the audit of the branch members can appoint branch auditors at AGM or authorise the Board of Directors to make such appointment. New section provides that the Branch Auditors will have to be appointed by the members in AGM as provided in new section 139. From this provision it is evident that the Branch Auditors will have to be appointed for a consecutive period of 5 years. Similarly, it appears that the Branch Auditors will be subject to the system of Rotation of Auditors u/s. 139(2) in the audit of a listed company or a specified company as stated to above.

9.3 As stated earlier, the auditors will have to comply with the Auditing Standards while conducting Audit of any company as provided in new section 143(10).

9.4 It is also provided in section 143 that if an auditor, during the course of audit, has reason to believe that an offence involving fraud is being committed by the officers/employees against the company, the auditor will have to report to the Central Government in the prescribed manner. If the auditor fails to comply with this reporting requirement, without reasonable cause, he shall be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 1 lakh which may extend to Rs. 25 lakh. Draft Rule 10.10 provides for procedure for reporting such frauds by the auditors. From this it is evident that under this Section only Matrial Fraud is to be reported. It is also clarified in Rule 10.10(2) that for this purpose materiality shall mean (a) Frauds that happening frequently or (b) Frauds where the amount involved or likely to be involved are not less than 5% of the net profit or 2% of turnover of the preceding financial year of the Company.

9.6 It may be noted that a Chartered Accountant having at least 10 years experience in Company matters can now be appointed as a Company Liquidator as provided in new Section 275. Under this Section, it is provided that when a Company is being wound up by the Tribunal, it can appoint a professional i.e. Chartered Accountant, Advocate, Company Secretary, Cost Accountant or such professional whose name is on the Panel maintained by the Central Government in the prescribed manner as a liquidator. Such liquidator has to perform duties of Liquidator as provided in the Act.

10. Auditor not to render non-audit services

10.1 New section 144 provides that Auditor of a company shall render only such other services to the company as may be approved by the Board of Directors or the Audit Committee. However, it is specifically provided that the auditor shall not render, directly or indirectly, other services such as (a) accounting and book keeping services, (b) internal audit, (c) design and implementation of any financial information system (d) actuarial services, (e) investment advisory services, (f) investment banking services, (g) rendering of outsourced financial services, (h) management services and (i) any other kind of services as may be prescribed.

10.2 It may be noted that this is a new provision and there is no restriction of this type in the existing Companies Act. Therefore, if any auditor is rendering any such non-audit service to the company before the new Act comes into force, he will have to comply with this provision of new section 144 before the end of the financial year after the new Act comes into force.

10.3 It is also provided in this section that the prohibited non-audit services cannot be rendered by the following associates of the auditor.

(i)    If the auditor is an Individual :- The Individual himself, his relative any person connected or associated with him, or any entity in which the Individual has significant influence or control or whose name or trade mark/brand is used by the Individual.

(ii)    If the auditor is a firm or LLP:- Such firm/LLP either itself or through its partner or through its parent, subsidiary or associate or through any entity in which the firm/LLP or its partner has significant influence or control or whose name, trade mark or brand is used by the firm/LLP or any of its partners.

10.4 From the above it appears that under this section the auditor can render non-audit service such as tax audit, direct or indirect tax advice, company law advice, tax or company law representation before appropriate authorities, FEMA matters and other related services.

11.    Cost Auditors:

New Section 148 provides for appointment of Cost Auditors by Board of Directors of Companies engaged in the business of manufacture of such goods as may be notified by the Government. The procedure for appointment and reporting by the Cost Auditor is similar to the existing procedure. Draft Rule 10.11 provides for procedure for fixing remuneration of Cost Auditor.

12.    Penalty Provisions

New section 147 provides for punishment for contra-vention of the provisions of new sections 139 to 146. These penalty provisions are as under.

(i)    If a company contravenes any of the provisions of new sections 139 to 146 it shall be liable to pay minimum fine of Rs. 25,000/- which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh. Further, every officer who is in default shall be punishable with imprisonment upto one year and minimum fine of Rs. 10,000/- which may extend to Rs. one lac or with both.

(ii)    If an auditor of a company contravenes any of the provisions of sections 139 and 143 to 145, the auditor shall be punishable with minimum fine of Rs. 25,000/- which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh. If it is found that the auditor has contravened those provisions knowingly or willfully with the intention to deceive the company, its share holders, creditors or tax authorities, he shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term upto one year and with a minimum fine of Rs. one lakh which may extend upto Rs. 25 lakh.

(iii)    If any auditor is convicted of an offence as stated in (ii) above, he shall be liable to (a) refund the remuneration received by him to the company and (b) pay for damages to the company, statutory bodies/authorities or to any other persons for loss arising out of incorrect or misleading statements of particulars made in his audit report.

(iv)    In the case of audit of a company which is conducted by an audit firm, if it is proved that any partner or partners of the audit firm have acted in a fraudulent manner or abetted or colluded in any fraud by the company, its
Directors or officers, the civil or criminal liability, as provided in this Act or any other law, for such act shall be joint and several of the firm and each of its partners.

(v)    New section 148 provides for audit of cost records in specified companies. This section is more or less similar to existing section 233B with some modifications. It may be noted that the above penalty provisions contained in new section 147 are applicable to the company as well as the Cost Auditor in the same manner as stated above.

13.    To Sum Up

13.1 The above provisions relating to accounts and audit contained in the Companies Act, 2013 will have far reaching impact on the companies and auditors. It appears that these provisions are being made with a view to curb the present day tendency on the part of some companies to manipulate accounts with a view to benefit those in management or with a view to reduce tax. Some of these provisions are very harsh and they are likely to affect the development of the corporate sector and the profession of Chartered Accountants.

13.2 The New Act will curtail the autonomy of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India to issue Accounting Standards and Auditing Standards. These standards will now be notified by the Government in consultation with NFRA. This is a new national authority to be appointed by the Government with very wide powers. This National Authority will be able to take disciplinary action against erring auditors and award punishment to them. Therefore, the autonomy of ICAI to take disciplinary action against its members will be curtailed to this extent. It appears that the Central Government is now loosing the confidence reposed in the Council of ICAI for the last over 6 decades and started transferring this important function of regulating the C.A. profession to other Government controlled Agencies. It is surprising that the Council of ICAI has not taken general membership into confidence and no public protest has been made when such legislation was being made by the Parliament.

13.3 Considering the responsibilities being placed on the auditors it appears that small and medium size audit firms will find it difficult to continue in audit practice. No such audit firm will be able to undertake such responsibilities with threat of litigation in the event of unintended and genuine mistakes. The provisions relating to restrictions on number of years one can continue to remain auditor of a company and restriction on rendering other services will also impact the ability of such small and medium size firms to continue in audit practice. Let us hope that the provisions for removal of auditors, awarding punishment and other harsh provisions will be implemented by the Government and other authorities in a reasonable, sympathetic and fair manner.

Core Investment Companies: A Tight Leash ?

Article

Introduction :


One of the perennial questions plaguing holding companies has
been whether or not they are Non-Banking Financial Companies (‘NBFCs’) under the
Reserve Bank of India, Act, 1934 (‘the Act’) and hence, should they get
registered with the RBI? Most of India’s top corporate houses, such as the Tata,
Birla, Bajaj, GMR, UB, etc., have holding company structures that are
quintessentially family-owned parent companies which have equity stakes in all
group companies. An example of a listed holding company is Pilani Investment &
Industries Corp. Ltd. which owns stakes in most of the


B. K. Birla and Aditya Birla group companies.

Earlier, the RBI on a case-by-case basis exempted a holding
company from being registered as an NBFC if a company invested in equity shares
as a holding company of the investee companies. The exemption was granted
provided the investor company complied with the following four conditions :




  • Not less than 90% of its
    assets are in the form of investment in equity shares for the purpose of
    holding stake in the investee companies.




  • It is not trading in
    those shares except for block sale (to dilute or divest holding).


  • It is not carrying on any
    other financial activities.


  • It is not
    holding/accepting public deposits.


    Thus, if a company was a Holding Company owning investments in the shares of its group companies, as a promoter, which investments are equal to or more than 90% of its total assets, and it satisfied the other conditions mentioned above, then it was granted an exemption from registration as an NBFC with the RBI u/s.45-IA of the RBI Act.

    To address some of these issues, last year, the RBI introduced a new concept of Core Investment Companies (‘CICs’) by virtue of its Guidelines issued vide DNBS (PD) CC

    No. 197/03.10.001/201-011 dated 12th August 2010. According to these Guidelines all CICs were required to be registered with the RBI. The Guidelines mentioned that investment companies which were predominantly holding shares in group companies and not for trading purposes deserved a differential treatment as compared to other NBFCs.

    Recently, the RBI came out with the Core Investment Companies (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2011 (Directions), issued vide Notification No. DNBS. (PD) 219/CGM(US)-2011, dated 5th January, 2011. These Directions lay down the regulatory framework for CICs and have also modified the Guidelines introduced earlier on. Let us examine this very vital development in the NBFC sphere and the implications which it would have on corporate India !

Definition of a CIC :

The Directions define a CIC as follows :


  • It is a
    non-banking financial company carrying on the business of acquisition of
    shares and securities. Thus, in the first place it must be a non-banking
    financial company. Would merely owning shares as investments in group
    companies make a company an NBFC? Section 45-I(c) of the RBI Act provides that
    in order to become an NBFC, the company must carry on the business of
    acquisition of securities
    . It is submitted that a company which is a mere
    holding company should not be classified as an NBFC and one would have to
    apply the tests laid down under the RBI Act to determine whether or not a
    company is an NBFC. However, it should be borne in mind that this a litigious
    issue since the RBI regards any investment in shares of other companies, even
    for the purposes of holding stake as a business of acquisition of shares in
    terms of section 45-I(c) of the RBI Act;

  • As on the date of its
    last audited balance sheet, it holds more than or equal to 90% of its net
    assets in the form of investment in equity shares, preference shares, bonds,
    debentures, debt or loans in group companies (as defined below). Net assets
    for this purpose means the total of all assets appearing on the assets side of
    the balance sheet as reduced by the cash and bank balances, investment in
    money market instruments and money market mutual funds, advance tax paid and
    deferred taxes paid. All direct investments in group companies, as appearing
    in the CICs balance sheet will be taken into account for this purpose.
    Investments made by subsidiaries in step-down subsidiaries or other entities
    will not be taken into account for computing 90% of net assets. The RBI has
    clarified that the 10% of net assets  which can be held outside the group
    would include real estate or other fixed assets which are required for
    effective functioning of a company, but should not include other financial
    investments/loans in non-group companies. It would however include investments
    in other group entities that are not companies e.g., trusts etc. Only
    investments in companies registered u/s. 3 of the Companies Act, 1956 would be
    regarded as investments in group companies for the purpose of calculating 90%
    investment in group companies. Thus, investments in LLPs, partnerships, AOPs,
    would be excluded.


  • As on the date of its
    last audited balance sheet, its investments in the equity shares (including
    instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not
    exceeding 10 years from the date of issue) in group companies constitutes 60%
    or more of its net assets as mentioned above;


  • It does not trade in its
    investments in shares, bonds, debentures, debt or loans in group companies
    except through block sale for the purpose of dilution or disinvestment. Thus,
    it should not be carrying on any trading in its investments. The RBI has
    clarified that the term used is block sale and not block deal which has been
    defined by SEBI. Thus, a block sale would be a long-term or strategic  sale
    made for purposes of disinvestment or investment and not for short-term
    trading. Unlike a block deal, there is no minimum number/value defined for the
    purpose;

    It does not carry on any other financial activity referred to under the Act, such as financing, borrowing or lending, acceptance of public deposits, hire purchase, leasing, etc.

    It can carry on the following activities:

    a) investment in bank deposits, money market instruments, including money market mutual funds government securities, and bonds or debentures issued by group companies.

    b) granting of loans to group companies, and

    c) issuing guarantees on behalf of group companies.

Group companies:
For the above definition, two or more companies are treated as group companies if they are related to each other through any one or more of the following relationships:

  •     they are Subsidiary and Parent as defined in Accounting Standard 21;


  •     they are Joint Venture partners as defined in Accounting Standard 27;


  •     they are Associates as defined in Accounting Standard 23;


  •     if they are listed companies, they are Pro-moter-Promotee as defined in the SEBI (Sub-stantial Acquisition of Shares and Takeover) Regulations, 1997;


  •     they are Related Parties as defined in Accounting Standard 18;


  •     they share a common Brand Name. What is meant by common brand name has not been defined, for instance, if two or more companies have the same first name but since they have different lines of businesses they have different brands/logos, would it be considered that they share a common brand name? E.g., Apex Finance Ltd. and Apex Chemicals Ltd. are two companies within a group. Would they be considered as sharing a common brand name?;


  •     one company has made an investment of 20% or more in the equity shares of another company.


The definition of group companies was not given in the earlier Guidelines and hence, was the subject matter of great debate. Now the Directions have defined this term. This is a very wide definition encompassing several relationships within its ambit.

Registration of CICs:
Depending upon whether or not the CIC is a Systemically Important Non-Deposit (‘SIND’) taking company it needs to register with the RBI. A systemically important non-deposit taking core investment company means a Core Investment Company which fulfils all the following three conditions:

  •     it has total assets of Rs.100 crore or more either individually or in aggregate along with other Core Investment Companies in the group. The RBI has clarified that if a single group has four to five prospective CICs with an aggregate asset size of more than Rs.100 crore, then all the companies in the group that are CICs would be regarded as CICs-ND-SI and would be required to obtain a Certificate of Registration from the RBI.


  •     it raises or holds public funds. Public funds have been defined to include funds raised either directly or indirectly through public deposits, commercial papers, debentures, inter-corporate deposits and bank finance, but excludes funds raised by issue of instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding 10 years from the date of issue. The RBI has clarified that if in a single group there are various prospective CICs with an aggregate asset size of more than Rs.100 crore and only one of the companies has raised/holds public funds, then only the specific entity which has raised/holds public funds would be regarded as CIC-ND-SI, and thus would be required to seek registration as CIC-ND-SI with the Bank. For example : HoldCo is the parent group CIC holding 100% equity capital of A, B and C, all of which are also CICs. In such a case only C has to be registered as a CIC, provided C is not being funded by any of the other CICs either directly or indirectly;


  •     it does not accept public deposits.


This definition of SIND is different from the definition contained in the Non-Banking Financial (Non-Deposit Accepting or Holding) Companies Prudential Norms (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2007. According to those Directions, a SIND is one which individually has total assets in excess of Rs.100 crores and which is not accepting public deposits. There is no additional criteria of holding these assets in excess of Rs.100 crores in aggregate along with other CICs in the Group. Further, there is no condition of raising or holding public funds under those Directions. Thus, one has to consider the definition of a SIND differently under differ-ent Directions. The additional criteria added by these Directions is a departure from the earlier Guidelines issued on CICs.

Every Systemically Important Core Investment Company (‘CIC-ND-SI’) shall latest by 5th July 2011, apply to the Reserve Bank of India for grant of Certificate of Registration, irrespective of any contrary guidelines issued in the past by the Reserve Bank of India. The application form for CICs- ND- SI is available on the RBI’s website and is to be submitted to the Regional Office of the Department of Non-Banking Supervision (DNBS) in whose jurisdiction the Company is registered along with necessary supporting documents mentioned in the application form.

According to the RBI, a holding company not meeting the criteria for a CIC would require to register as an NBFC. However, if such company wishes to register as CIC-ND-SI/be exempted as CIC, then it would have to apply to RBI with an action plan achievable within the specific period to reorganise its business as CIC. If it is not able to do so, it would need to comply with NBFC requirements and prudential norms.

A CIC-ND-SI which applies for grant of Certificate of Registration to the Reserve Bank of India by the above period shall be entitled to continue to carry on its existing businesses as a Core Invest-ment Company, till the RBI disposes its application. This is a beneficial provision.

Every company which becomes a CIC shall apply to the Reserve Bank of India for grant of Certificate of Registration within a period of three months from the date of becoming a CIC-ND-SI.

    CIC which is a CIC-ND-SI is not required to maintain net owned funds of Rs.2 crore, subject to the condition that it meets with the capital requirements and leverage ratio as specified in the said directions. NBFCs already registered with the RBI as Category ‘B’ Companies whose asset size is below Rs.100 crore, and fulfil the crite-ria for exemption as a CIC, can seek voluntary deregistration (as such companies are not otherwise required to get registered with the Bank under the new norms). Audited balance sheet and auditors’ certificate are required to be submitted for the purpose.

The CIC registration requirements can be sum-marised in as given Table 1.

The Directions require a company to own 90% of its total assets in group companies, whereas according to the RBI any activity of owning shares in compa-nies is a non-banking business. Hence, the question which arises is that how can a company shore up its assets to include group company shares without first obtaining registration with the RBI as an NBFC ? It is a perennial chicken-and-egg problem ! According to the RBI, such a company would have to apply for a Certificate of Registration to the RBI, giving a business plan within a prescribed time period of one year in which it would achieve CIC-ND-SI status. In case the company is unable to do so, then the exemptions would not apply and the company would be regarded as an NBFC and it would have to comply with NBFC capital adequacy and exposure norms.
 

Capital Adequacy Norms:

The Adjusted Net Worth of a CIC-ND-SI shall always be greater than or equal to 30% of its aggregate risk weighted assets on balance sheet and risk adjusted value of off-balance sheet items as on the date of the last audited balance sheet as at the end of the financial year.

The adjusted net worth is computed as given in Table 2.

Thus, CICs would now have to factor in losses made in the quoted investments.

The method for computing the on-balance sheet items and the off-balance sheet items are laid down in the Directions.

The outside liabilities of a CIC-ND-SI must not ex-ceed 2.5 times its Adjusted Net Worth as on the date of the last audited balance sheet as at the end of the financial year. Thus, such companies would now have to limit their borrowings and access to outside funds and in order to increase their borrowings by CICs, the promoters would have to increase the proportion of owned funds. Outside liabilities have been defined to mean the total liabilities appearing in the balance sheet excluding ‘paid up capital’ and ‘reserves and surplus’, instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding ten years from the date of issue, but including all forms of debt and obligations having the characteristics of debt, whether created by issue of hybrid instruments or otherwise, and value of guarantees issued, whether appearing on the balance sheet or not. Current liabilities, deferred tax liability, advance tax due and provision for income tax will also form part of outside liabilities.

Every CIC-ND-SI must submit an annual certificate from its statutory auditors regarding compliance with the requirements of these directions within a period of one month from the date of finalisation of the balance sheet.

Applicability of other provisions:

The Non-Banking Financial (Non-Deposit Accepting or Holding) Companies Prudential Norms (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2007 will not apply to an NBFC which is a CIC but which is not a CIC-ND-SI.

The provisions of Paragraphs 15, 16 and 18 of the Non-Banking Financial (Non-Deposit Accepting or Holding) Companies Prudential Norms (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2007 will not apply to a CIC-ND-SI. However, it must submit the Annual Auditors Certificate and meet with the capital requirements and leverage ratio, as specified above. These paragraphs relate to the Capital Adequacy Norms and the Limits on Investments/Loans by a SIND. Thus, the other parts of these Directions would apply to a CIC-ND-SI. These relate to accounting norms, provisioning requirements, constitution of an audit committee, disclosure requirements, etc.

A CIC which is not a CIC-ND-SI is not required to get registered with the RBI or maintain net owned funds of Rs.2 crores.

CIC-ND-SI would require a clearance from the RBI in case it wants to invest abroad in terms of Regulation 7 of the FEMA (Transfer or Issue of Any Foreign Security) Regulations, 2004.

Epilogue:

While the intent behind the Directions is good, in the sense that it seeks to free up investment companies from the onerous regime associated with pure NBFCs, the general presumption that ‘all investment companies are NBFCs requires a rethink. Further, the RBI has imposed several stiff norms on CICs. The RBI may have opened up a few Pandora’s boxes and plugged a few leaks by creating a few new ones. One hopes that the RBI would address these leaks soon by taking a cue from Aristotle :

‘Even when laws have been written down, they ought not always to remain unaltered!’


Succession Issues In Family-Run Companies — How to Deal With Them

Introduction and scope
Succession to leadership is common to any organisation, a professionally-run or a family-run company, and other organisations. Succession issues are more pronounced in a  family-owned and family-run company  because the promoter holding 100% or a majority stake may want his son or daughter to succeed him as a birth-right or his children may think that they have a birth-right to succeed him.

In the past, we have witnessed succession issues even amongst kings. For example, we have seen diametrically opposite succession issues in our epics Ramayana and Mahabharata.

Majority of the private sector listed companies in India are family-owned and family-run companies.

According to an  empirical  study conducted in 2008, in India, there were 224 billion $ listed companies accounting for 81% of the total market cap of all the companies listed on the Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE). Further, the promoters’ stake in those billion-dollar companies was 67% of the total market cap of those companies. Moreover, only about six companies (ICICI Bank, L&T, HDFC, IDFC, ITC and IFCI) have no identifiable individual promoter or promoter group.

(Source: Building Billion $ Indian Companies by Market Cap, by Dr. Pravin P. Shah, Growth Publishers, 2008)
 
Worldwide, majority of the businesses in number as well as in value are family-run and family-managed. Hence, the succession issues are a global phenomenon.

In India, we have witnessed that wealth does not pass in the family beyond the third or fourth generation or business does not remain with the family beyond the third or fourth generation. One of the main reasons for this is that the succession issues are not properly managed.

To illustrate various issues and challenges involved in succession management, various  real-life examples are given at appropriate places. The purpose is not to criticise any particular person, group or family, but to learn from the way they handled succession issues and/or their mistakes.

In this article, masculine pronouns are used for brevity and refer to both males and females. Hence, ‘he’ also means ‘she’ and vice versa.

Can succession be managed?
The basic question is can you manage succession, just as you manage a project or a business?

Yes, it is possible to manage succession, just as managing a project or a business. The basic principles are the same. In  Kautilya’s Arthashastra, Rajguru Chanakya explains how the succession in the kingdom from generation to generation should be handled.

Let us discuss some of the important ingredients of effective succession management in family-run companies and how to achieve them.

Step-1: Awareness and recognition
The present leader should recognise the reality and be aware of various events which are likely to happen, such as the following:

  •     Some day, he will have to retire and somebody will have to succeed him.

  •     He should recognise that succession can be managed and if he approaches the issues systematically, he can implement succession more effectively and smoothly.

  •     Succession management requires long-term planning and execution: there are no quick-fix solutions. For example, it has been reported that Captain Nair, Chairman of the Leela Group of Hotels has decided a succession plan to avoid any family feud in the future. According to his plan, his elder son, who looks after finance and day-to-day operations will get the hotel business while his sibling will spearhead the group’s new ventures.

  •     A leader should also be aware that sudden emergency may arise because of his untimely death or severe disability.

  •    In Succession management, things may not happen as planned. However, if the succession is systematically managed, then the outcome would be much better than if it is handled haphazardly.

Step-2: Define vision–mission–goals for succession management

It is essential for the present leader to define his vision, mission and then set the goals. For example, his mission statement could be: “Have a smooth and effective succession consistent with the family values and harmony”.

Step-3: Understand pre-requisites for effective succession management

Following are the major pre-requisites for effective succession management:

  •    The leaders should take care of all the members of the family.

  •     He should have a proper mindset and provide appropriate opportunity and wealth to every member of the family.

  •    There must be fairness in his handling of succession management.

Step-4: Understand what influences succession decisions

A leader should learn the factors which may influence the effective and smooth succession management and decisions. Some of them are summarised below:

  •    Emotional vs. Rational Thinking: e.g., my children should succeed me whether they have merits or not.

  •     The family often thinks that a well-established family business can be run successfully by anyone in the family.

  •    The family members may have an incorrect perception/view about the capabilities of the next generation, even though it may not be in tune with the reality. For example, the parents may think that their child is very capable of being a successor to the present leader.

Culture, personal value systems and family tradition: For example, elder son always succeeds the father.

  •     Ego Trip: The outside perception by relatives, friends, and executives in the organisation, etc. For example, if an elder son is not given a responsible position in the organisation and the younger one is given a responsible position or a better title, then it may be a subject-matter of gossip, evaluation, criti-cism.

  •     The thinking regarding females: Whether females can work in the family companies and can females succeed to a family business?

A problem would arise if the female members do not agree to the thinking that they cannot work in the family companies or they cannot succeed to the family businesses.

Step-5: Identify succession challenges/issues

In India, we are witnessing the succession issues in more and more family-run companies, such as Birla, Tata, Bajaj and Reliance, and even in a professionally-run company like ICICI.

For example, in the Birla group, Mr. G. D. Birla was succeeded by his grandson Mr. Aditya Birla, bypassing his father.

In the Bajaj family, because the brothers, sons and cousins are contenders, there are succession disputes among them.

In the Tata group, presently the successor-Chairman is being selected, who may or may not be from the Tata family.

The present leader should identify the challenges that he is likely to face in effective succession management. For this purpose, he should proceed systematically. He should list out the family members, their present ages, and the likely major future events and their timings, e.g., children’s education and training, their entry in the family business, his retirement and the succession. Based on this, he should prepare a list of likely succession challenges he will face in years to come.

One of the major problems in a family-run company is to decide about the succession criteria. For example, whether the succession should be based on merits or on seniority.

Hence, every family should define the family values and the personal values system it wants to follow in this respect. This requires tough decisions on the part of the family, particularly, in a family-run listed company.

If there is only one potential successor, the question may be about his present capability, his potential to be a leader, his age, his will-ingness, etc.

Sometimes, a potential successor is capable of succeeding, but he may not be interested in the family business and he may want to set up his own business or profession. The present business may not measure up to his ambitions and aspirations. Post liberalisation and globalisation of the Indian economy, a vast number of opportunities have opened up for starting new businesses.

Further, a potential successor may not be interested in being in any business; he may want to be a doctor or a professor or a social activist.

Let us suppose that the father wants to retire in one or two years, and therefore, the succession question has arisen.

Let us further suppose that he has one son who is actively involved in the management of some of the companies in the group. He is capable of succeeding the father, but he is not ready to take over the full rein of the group because he is not willing to devote full time and attention required for managing the business.

If an outside person is brought in as a CEO, then the question of working relations between the son and the outside CEO would arise.

In several wealthy families, it is witnessed that some children do not have a fire in their belly or they just want to enjoy life with the family wealth.

The potential successor may have the technical competence, but he may not have leadership quality or skills which may also be very important for a particular business.

In a knowledge-based business, the potential successor may not have the required knowledge as well as skills and he may not be willing to acquire the same. That would really pose a challenge because a person cannot manage or control a function which he cannot himself do.

The problem is more complex in a knowledge-based service company (e.g., financial services, IT software, etc.) than in a manufacturing company.

In some cases, where the present leader is relatively young or is not likely to, or willing to, give up his rein in a timely manner, then also there may be a conflict with the potential successor even if there is a single successor. He may not be willing to wait for a longer time required for succession.

In such cases, one solution may be that the existing leader gradually delegates more and more responsibilities to the potential successor, so that the potential successor is able to do worthwhile work commensurate with his abilities.

If the potential successor does not have the capability as well as potential, but the promoter insists that his family member should be a successor, then it may adversely affect the functioning of the company.

If the son (or daughter) of the promoter has no capability at present, but has the potential to succeed, and if he takes over the reins today, then he may become diffident or he may not be able to properly manage the company.

If in a family, there is more than one contender for succession, then also there may be a problem. E.g., brothers, uncle and nephew, cousins, son and nephew may be contenders in which case the conflict may arise (e.g., Bajaj family). Further, if an elder brother is less capable than a younger brother, the problem of selecting the successor may be a vexed issue.

If a successor is very much younger to the top one or two senior executives, there may be an issue of whether the younger promoter would be able to lead very senior executives.

The management style of the present leader and the potential successor may be diametrically opposite. Therefore, he may not be interested in working under him or following his footsteps. This may create a potential conflict between them.

Several families have decided that the equity shares held in the listed company will pass on only to the male members, and the female members will get the wealth in monetary terms. This raises several vexed issues. For example, how to monetize the shares in the family-controlled listed company to give the monetary value to the female members in the family? When should this be done? What if at the time of inheritance, the other male members in the family do not have adequate liquidity to buy the shares from the female members who will inherit the same?

Succession issues are there even in a professional firm of chartered accountants and lawyers. However, in a partnership concern the issues involved are different from those in a limited company because in a partnership concern there may not be hierarchy of positions.

Step – 6 : Develop appropriate solutions to challenges

One should develop appropriate solution(s) for each issue. It may not be possible to develop a solution immediately. But one should periodically think of the solutions, may be with the help of others.

If there are two possible contenders, then both may be given a title of joint managing director and then a division of functional responsibilities be made between them according to their capabilities.

Real-life examples: Some real-life examples will illustrate the point.

Real-life example-1

Facts

Some 20 years ago, a promoter of an unlisted software company recognised that he has 2 sons studying in a college and one day they may enter his business. At that time, succession issues may arise, and therefore, he wanted to plan in advance. For that purpose, he decided to start another business in the same line which would gradually become of equal value.

He also wanted that during his active life, he should have the final say in respect of both the businesses. Once his sons become capable, he would gradually give the responsibilities to them. He wanted that the succession should be very smooth and tax-efficient.

Issues

  •     The first issue involved in this case was of the ownership, present ownership and passing of the ownership to the next generation.

  •    The second issue involved was of the present management control and gradual passing of the control to the next generation. The control in legal sense arises from the ownership of the equity shares and if the ownership is to be passed on to the next generation during the lifetime of the present leader, then the tax issues may arise because at that time gift tax was in force.

Solution

An appropriate solution which would meet his requirements from a taxation angle as well from a business angle was developed by his chartered accountant. This demonstrates the role a chartered accountant can play in the succession planning.

Outcome

Today, his both the sons are involved in managing two different businesses which have synergies, but each one is running the business independently. This has avoided the potential conflict between the father and his two sons which could have arisen if there was a single business.

Similarly,  it  is  also  reported  that  the  RPG Group has divided its companies between the two brothers.

Real-life example-2

Compare this with the case of Dhirubhai Ambani Group where RIL is the company and there are two contenders to succession, Mukesh and Anil. Everyone is well aware about the legal battle which was fought between the two brothers regarding the succession and division of the RIL businesses, their assets and related issues.

Should succession be to the same business?

  •     The first objective should be the preservation of the wealth in the family and the second objective should, if possible, be the preservation of the same business in the family.

  •     If the next generation is not interested in the same business, the succession need not be to the same business. In such a case, the existing leader should provide support in developing the business of the choice of the potential successor, and at appropriate time sell the existing business.

  •     An interesting case of succession is of two sons of Dr. Parvinder Singh who inherited Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited and later on sold it to Daiichi of Japan. With that money, they have started new businesses in the field of financial services (Fortis Financial and Religare Financial Services) and healthcare (Fortis Hospitals).

Is it possible to separate ownership and management: In India, it is very uncommon. But in developed countries, it is very common.

Step-7: Have code of family governance

In a family-run company, the succession management, governance of the company and governance of the family go hand in hand. Hence, every wealthy family should have a code of family governance or family code of conduct and preferably, it should be in writing. Examples of corporate houses which have adopted such a code, include, GMR, Lanco, etc.

The family code of conduct should cover division of assets/businesses amongst the family members, rules for business decisions, succession criteria, training and grooming of the family members to a defined carrier path, inheritance, separation from the family, misconduct, etc.

The code should also cover all other major aspects, such as code of conduct in public, various decision-making rules, remuneration policy for family members, the personal lifestyle related issues, such as residence, type and number of cars each member could have, club membership, etc.

Every family member should be required to read and understand them. There should be a characteristic approach. Those who follow the family code of conduct should be appropriately rewarded and those who do not follow it should be appropriately punished.

Step-8: Is it possible to develop entrepreneurs/ leaders?

It is often debated whether it is possible to develop entrepreneurs or leaders, or are they born and not made? The answer is Yes and No.

It is not possible to develop or train a person to be an entrepreneur or a leader to deal with every aspect. However, there are a number of areas where he could be given proper and appropriate education and training to make him a better entrepreneur and leader.

Secondly, it is not a question whether it is doable or not because in a family-run company if a successor has to be from the family, then it is essential that he is given proper education in this respect, so that his chances as a successful leader are improved.

Step-9: Build capability of potential successors: train and groom

It is very important to groom the potential successor for taking over the rein when the existing leader would retire. This requires proper education and training of the potential successor. The potential successor should not assume that because he is from the promoter family, he has a birth-right to succeed or that he can manage the family-run business.

For effective succession management, efforts must be made on building the capability of every potential successor. The capability-building exercise should begin from home and right from the childhood.

Every child in the family must be given basic education and appropriate higher education. Nowadays, recognising the need for this aspect, many management colleges have Family-Business Management courses.

Besides the formal college education, the potential successor should be properly trained and groomed in being a next generation leader.

The training and grooming should be not only at the Board level. He should be given a thorough training in all the key result areas of the business, though eventually he may select one or more of those areas for him to play a major role in years to come.

Step-10: Determine suitability of potential successors: match-making

A potential successor would have certain skill sets and knowledge base. He would also have his likes/dislikes and his ambitions/inspirations.

Moreover, his present strengths and weaknesses should be identified.

Similarly, every business has Key Result Areas or Critical Success Factors for being successful in that business. Hence, it is necessary to compare the Key Result Areas of the family business and compare them with the knowledge and skill sets and the likes and dislikes of a potential successor.

Thereafter, identify the gap and determine whether it is possible and if yes, how to bridge the gap.

In one company, we suggested that the group should set up a separate unlisted company for those members in the family whose background and skill sets were not appropriate for the listed company’s business. These family members are allowed to run the business of that company independently, so that they do not adversely affect the business or activities of the listed company. This recommendation has worked very well with that group.

Step-11: Involve independent directors/mentors/ consultants

The leader should keep in mind that many times an outsider can play a better role as a mentor for the next generation than he himself can. The mentor(s) may be an independent director, close relative, family friend or a consultant.

The mentor(s) should be carefully selected. He should act in an impartial, unbiased and objective manner. He may act as the situation demands, e.g., as a guide, a mediator, provide assistance in objective analysis of the issues, alternatives and their consequences, an arbitrator, etc.

In a listed company, independent directors should ensure that there is a proper succession planning and execution, particularly, where the present leader is approaching retirement or is not keeping good health.

If in case of a listed company, there are several contenders from the family for succession, then ideally the Board or its committee should make the final selection of the successor.

Step-12: Periodical review and revision

Succession management is not a one-time exercise; it is a life-long journey. The decisions taken in the past may require a change or the actions taken in the past may not work out, and therefore, changes may be required in the past succession planning.

Further, if there is an untimely death of the leader, or if he develops some health problem, then a change in the succession timing may required. For example, Mr. Ashok Birla died in an accident at a relatively young age, and therefore, his son Yash Birla had to succeed him at a much younger age.

An annual review of the performance of the key family members should be conducted which will also make the potential successor(s) aware about his (their) progress. For this purpose, the group should establish the evaluation process and the specific criteria.

Step-13: Decide entry and exit timing

One of the important aspects of effective succession is to determine the timing of retirement of the present leader and succession of the successor.

The succession timing should be well planned: it should not be too abrupt so as to leave a vacuum during the transition phase or too late to de-motivate the potential successor.

The potential successor should enter the family-run business as soon as possible. The leader should gradually delegate more and more responsibilities so that the appropriate opportunities are provided to the next generation for taking up the baton.

The present promoter-in-charge may continue as a mentor (e.g., as a non-executive chairman) for a few years until the successor is fully ready to take over the reins of the company. For example, Mr. Narayan Murthy at Infosys did so for a few years. Thus, the practice of having separate persons as CEO and chairman may be followed.

What role can chartered accountants play?

For most family-run companies, particularly small and medium enterprises, chartered accountants are the first point of contact for any issue. At minimum, a chartered accountant can play the following roles:

  •     He can draw the attention of the present promoter-leader about the need for succession management.

  •     He can list out for him the tough decisions required for succession management and assist him in reaching those decisions wherever he could.

  •    He could also suggest the relevant business consultant or the relevant business management courses, which could help the leader and the successor.

  •     Any effective success management may involve restructuring of the ownership or the businesses. In this area, a chartered accountant can play a significant role in working out the most tax-efficient and legally effective methods.

Epilogue

A good and effective succession management is achieved through a judicious combination of various factors, such as planning, structure, discipline, mindset, culture, determination, training, implementation, and the like.

Succession management involves ethical and moral issues rather than legal issues. Hence, the approach to this aspect would vary from family to family depending upon its concepts, views and value systems.

Proper succession management, like many other projects, requires thinking and, as Henry Ford put it, “Thinking is the hardest thing there is and that is why very few engage in it”.